Twido Programming Guide

Twido programmable
controllers
Programming Guide
06/2006 Version 1.0
2
Table of Contents
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Part I Description of Twido Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 1 Introduction to TwidoSuite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Introduction to TwidoSuite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Introduction to Twido Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Chapter 2 Twido Language Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Language Object Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Bit Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Word Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Floating point and double word objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Addressing Bit Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Addressing Word Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Addressing floating objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Addressing double word objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Addressing Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Network Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Function Block Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Structured Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Indexed objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Symbolizing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Chapter 3 User Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
User Memory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Backup and Restore without Backup Cartridge or Extended Memory . . . . . . . . 57
Backup and Restore with a 32K Backup Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using the 64K Extended Memory Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3
Chapter 4 Event task management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Overview of event tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Description of different event sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Event management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Part II Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Chapter 5 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Presentation of the different types of communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
TwidoSuite to Controller communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Communication between TwidoSuite and a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Remote Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
ASCII Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Modbus Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Standard Modbus Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Transparent Ready Implementation Class (Twido Serial A05, Ethernet A15) . . 143
Chapter 6 Built-In Analog Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Analog potentiometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Analog Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Chapter 7 Managing Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Analog Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Addressing Analog Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Configuring Analog Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Analog Module Status Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Example of Using Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Chapter 8 Installing the AS-Interface V2 bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Presentation of the AS-Interface V2 bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
General functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Software set up principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Description of the configuration screen for the AS-Interface bus. . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Configuration of the AS-Interface bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Description of the AS-Interface Window in Online Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Modification of Slave Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Updating the AS-Interface bus configuration in online mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Automatic addressing of an AS-Interface V2 slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
How to insert a slave device into an existing AS-Interface V2 configuration . . . 189
Automatic replacement of a faulty AS-Interface V2 slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Addressing I/Os associated with slave devices connected to the AS-Interface V2 bus . 191
Programming and diagnostics for the AS-Interface V2 bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
AS-Interface V2 bus interface module operating mode: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
4
Chapter 9 Installing and Configuring the CANopen Fieldbus . . . . . . . . 199
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
9.1 CANopen Fieldbus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
CANopen Knowledge Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
About CANopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
CANOpen Boot-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Process Data Object (PDO) Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Access to Data by Explicit Exchanges (SDO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
"Node Guarding" and "Life Guarding" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Internal Bus Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
9.2 Implementing the CANopen Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Hardware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Configuration Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Declaration of CANopen Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Network CANopen Slave Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
CANopen Objects Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
CANopen Objects Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
CANopen Objects Symbolization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Addressing PDOs of the CANopen master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Programming and diagnostics for the CANopen fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Chapter 10 Configuring the TwidoPort Ethernet Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
10.1 Normal Configuration and Connection of TwidoPort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Normal Configuration with TwidoSuite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
BootP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
10.2 TwidoPort’s Telnet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Introducing Telnet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Telnet Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
IP/Ethernet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Serial Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Configuring the Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Security Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Ethernet Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Serial Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Saving the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Restoring Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Upgrading the TwidoPort Firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Forget Your Password and/or IP Configuration?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
5
10.3 Communication Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Ethernet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Modbus/TCP Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Locally Supported Modbus Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Chapter 11 Operator Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Controller Identification and State Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
System Objects and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Serial Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Time of Day Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Real-Time Correction Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Part III Description of Twido Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Chapter 12 Ladder Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Introduction to Ladder Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Programming Principles for Ladder Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Ladder Diagram Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Ladder Language Graphic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Special Ladder Instructions OPEN and SHORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Programming Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Ladder/List Reversibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Guidelines for Ladder/List Reversibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Program Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Chapter 13 Instruction List Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Overview of List Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Operation of List Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
List Language Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Using Parentheses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Stack Instructions (MPS, MRD, MPP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Chapter 14 Grafcet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Description of Grafcet Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Description of Grafcet Program Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Actions Associated with Grafcet Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
6
Part IV Description of Instructions and Functions . . . . . . . . . 335
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Chapter 15 Basic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
15.1 Boolean Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Boolean Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Understanding the Format for Describing Boolean Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Load Instructions (LD, LDN, LDR, LDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Assignment instructions (ST, STN, R, S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Logical AND Instructions (AND, ANDN, ANDR, ANDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Logical OR Instructions (OR, ORN, ORR, ORF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Exclusive OR, instructions (XOR, XORN, XORR, XORF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
NOT Instruction (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
15.2 Basic Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Basic Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Standard function blocks programming principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Timer Function Block (%TMi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
TOF Type of Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
TON Type of Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
TP Type of Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Programming and Configuring Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Up/Down Counter Function Block (%Ci) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Programming and Configuring Counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Shift Bit Register Function Block (%SBRi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Step Counter Function Block (%SCi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
15.3 Numerical Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Introduction to Numerical Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Assignment Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Comparison Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Arithmetic Instructions on Integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Conversion Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Single/double word conversion instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
15.4 Program Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
END Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
NOP Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Jump Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Subroutine Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
7
Chapter 16 Advanced Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
16.1 Advanced Function Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Bit and Word Objects Associated with Advanced Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . 406
Programming Principles for Advanced Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
LIFO/FIFO Register Function Block (%Ri). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
LIFO Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
FIFO,operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Programming and Configuring Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Pulse Width Modulation Function Block (%PWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Pulse Generator Output Function Block (%PLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Drum Controller Function Block (%DR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Drum Controller Function Block %DRi Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Programming and Configuring Drum Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Fast Counter Function Block (%FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Very Fast Counter Function Block (%VFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Transmitting/Receiving Messages - the Exchange Instruction (EXCH). . . . . . . 443
Exchange Control Function Block (%MSGx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
16.2 Clock Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Clock Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Schedule Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Time/Date Stamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
16.3 Twido PID Quick Start Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Purpose of Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Step 1 - Configuration of Analog Channels Used for Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Step 2 - Prerequisites for PID Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Step3 – Configuring the PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Step 4 - Initialization of Control Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Step 5 - Control Set-Up AT + PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Step 6 - Debugging Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
16.4 PID Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Principal of the Regulation Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Development Methodology of a Regulation Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Compatibilities and Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Detailed characteristics of the PID function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
How to access the PID configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
PID Screen Elements of PID function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
General tab of PID function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
8
Input tab of the PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
PID tab of PID function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
AT tab of PID function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Output tab of the PID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
How to access PID debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Animation tab of PID function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Trace screen of PID function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
PID States and Errors Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
PID Tuning With Auto-Tuning (AT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
PID parameter adjustment method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Role and influence of PID parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Appendix 1: PID Theory Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Appendix 2: First-Order With Time Delay Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
16.5 Floating point instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Arithmetic instructions on floating point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Trigonometric Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Conversion instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Integer Conversion Instructions <-> Floating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
16.6 Instructions on Object Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Table summing functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Table comparison functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Table search functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Table search functions for maxi and mini values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Number of occurrences of a value in a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Table rotate shift function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Table sort function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Floating point table interpolation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Mean function of the values of a floating point table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Chapter 17 System Bits and System Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
System Bits (%S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
System Words (%SW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
9
10
Safety Information
§
Important Information
NOTICE Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the
device before trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following special messages
may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential
hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates

that an electrical hazard exists, which will result in personal injury if the
instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid
possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result
in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result
in injury or equipment damage.
35011386 06/2006 11
Safety Information
PLEASE NOTE Electrical equipment should be serviced only by qualified personnel. No responsi-
bility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use
of this material. This document is not intended as an instruction manual for untrained
persons. Assembly and installation instructions are provided in the Twido Hardware
Reference Manuals.
(c) 2006 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Additional Safety Those responsible for the application, implementation or use of this product must
Information ensure that the necessary design considerations have been incorporated into each
application, completely adhering to applicable laws, performance and safety
requirements, regulations, codes and standards.
12 35011386 06/2006
Safety Information
General
Warnings and
Cautions
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, BURN OR EXPLOSION
Turn off all power before starting installation, removal, wiring, maintenance or
inspection of the smart relay system.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
z Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Div 2 compliance.
z Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area
is known to be non-hazardous.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
z Turn power off before installing, removing, wiring, or maintaining.
z This product is not intended for use in safety critical machine functions. Where
personnel and or equipment hazards exist, use appropriate safety interlocks.
z Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the modules.
z This controller is designed for use within an enclosure.
z Install the modules in the operating environment conditions described.
z Use the sensor power supply only for supplying power to sensors connected to
the module.
z For power line and output circuits, use a fuse designed to Type T standards per
IEC60127. The fuse must meet the circuit voltage and current requirements.
Recommended: Littelfuse® 218 Series, 5x20mm time lag (slow blow) fuses.
equipment damage.
35011386 06/2006 13
Safety Information
Safe Battery The TWDLCA•40DRF compact bases use an optional external lithium battery for
Disposal longer duration of data backup. (Note: The lithium battery is not supplied with the
compact bases; you must purchase it separately.)
WARNING
EXPLOSION AND TOXIC HAZARD
z Do not incinerate a lithium battery for it may explode and release toxic
substances.
z Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium battery.
z Dead batteries shall be disposed of properly, for improper disposal of unused
batteries can cause harm, as well as environmental damage.
z In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries with household or business trash
collection may be prohibited. In any case, it is your responsibility to always
conform to local regulations in your area, as regard to battery disposal.
equipment damage.
Reverse Polarity Reverse-Polarity at Transistor Output is Not Allowed

Warning The TWDLCA•40DRF compact bases transistor outputs cannot withstand any
reverse polarity.
DANGER
RISK OF REVERSE-POLARITY DAMAGE AT TRANSISTOR OUTPUTS
z Make sure to conform to the polarity markings on the transistor output terminals.
z Use of a reverse polarity can permanently damage or destroy the output
circuits.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury.
14 35011386 06/2006
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope This is the Software Reference manual for Twido programmable controllers and
consists of the following major parts:
z Description of the Twido programming software and an introduction to the
fundamentals needed to program Twido controllers.
z Description of communications, managing analog I/O, installing the AS-Interface bus
interface module, the CANopen fieldbus master module and other special functions.
z Description of the software languages used to create Twido programs.
z Description of instructions and functions of Twido controllers.
Validity Note The information in this manual is applicable only for Twido programmable controllers.
The data and illustrations found in this book are not binding. We reserve the right to
modify our products in line with our policy of continuous product development. The
information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commitment by Schneider Electric.
35011386 06/2006 15
About the Book
Related
Documents
Title of Documentation Reference Number
The Twido Programmable Controllers Hardware Guide for Compact and Modular Bases 3501138700
The Twido Programmable Controllers Hardware Guide for Discrete I/O Modules 3501138800
The Twido Programmable Controllers Hardware Guide for Analog I/O Modules 3501138900
The Twido Programmable Controllers Hardware Guide for Communication Modules 3501139000
The TwidoSuite Programming Software Online Help –
The Twido Windows Executive Loader Wizard Online Help –
The Twido Programming Software - Getting Started 3501138500
Product Related Schneider Electric assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this
Warnings document. If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have
found errors in this publication, please notify us.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying, without express written permission of
Schneider Electric.
Copyright © Schneider Electric 2006. All rights reserved.
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when
installing and using this product. For reasons of safety and to ensure compliance with
documented system data, only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components.
When controllers are used for applications with technical safety requirements,
please follow the relevant instructions.
Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware
products may result in injury, harm, or improper operating results.
Failure to observe this product related warning can result in injury or equipment damage.
User Comments We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at
techpub@schneider-electric.com
16 35011386 06/2006
Description of Twido Software
I
At a Glance
Subject of this This part provides an introduction to the software languages and the basic
Part information required to create control programs for Twido programmable controllers.
What's in this This part contains the following chapters:

Part?
Chapter Chapter Name Page
1 Introduction to TwidoSuite 19
2 Twido Language Objects 25
3 User Memory 53
4 Event task management 65
35011386 06/2006 17
Twido Software
18 35011386 06/2006
Introduction to TwidoSuite
1
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter provides a brief introduction to TwidoSuite, the programming and
Chapter configuration software for Twido controllers, and to the List, Ladder, and Grafcet
programming languages.
What's in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
Introduction to TwidoSuite 20
Introduction to Twido Languages 21
35011386 06/2006 19
TwidoSuite Languages
Introduction to TwidoSuite
Introduction TwidoSuite is a full-featured, graphical development environment for creating,

configuring, and maintaining automation applications for Telemecanique Twido
programmable controllers. TwidoSuite allows you to create programs with different
types of languages (See Twido Languages, p. 21), and then transfer the application
to run on a controller.
TwidoSuite TwidoSuite is a 32-bit Windows-based program for a personal computer (PC)

running Microsoft Windows 2000/XP Professional operating systems.
The main software features of TwidoSuite:
z Project-oriented, intuitive user-interface
z Menu-free software design. All tasks and functions of a selected project step
show at all times.
z Programming and configuration support
z Communication with controller
z Task-level, first-hand help providing relevant links to the online help
Note: The Controller-PC link uses the TCP/IP protocol. It is essential for this
protocol to be installed on the PC.
Minimum The minimum configuration for using TwidoSuite is:

configuration z PC-compatible computer with
z processor Pentium 466 MHz or higher recommended,
z 128 MB of RAM or higher recommended,
z 100 MB of hard disk space.
z Operating system : Windows 2000 or Windows XP:

z Avoid patch 834707-SP1 (corrected by patch 890175) and patch 896358
which cause display problems with Online Help.
z Service Pack 2 or higher recommended. Available for download from
www.microsoft.com web site.
20 35011386 06/2006
Introduction to Twido Languages
Introduction A programmable controller reads inputs, writes to outputs, and solves logic based
on a control program. Creating a control program for a Twido controller consists of
writing a series of instructions in one of the Twido programming languages.
Twido The following languages can be used to create Twido control programs:
Languages z Instruction List Language:
An Instruction List program is a series of logical expressions written as a
sequence of Boolean instructions.
z Ladder Diagrams:
A Ladder diagram is a graphical means of displaying a logical expression.
z Grafcet Language:
Grafcet language is made up of a series of steps and transitions. Twido supports
the use of Grafcet list instructions, but not graphical Grafcet.
You can use a personal computer (PC) to create and edit Twido control programs
using these programming languages.
A List/Ladder reversibility feature allows you to conveniently reverse a program from
Ladder to List and from List to Ladder.
Instruction List A program written in Instruction List language consists of a series of instructions
Language executed sequentially by the controller. The following is an example of a List program.
0 BLK %C8
1 LDF %I0.1
2 R
3 LD %I0.2
4 AND %M0
5 CU
6 OUT_BLK
7 LD D
8 AND %M1
9 ST %Q0.4
10 END_BLK
35011386 06/2006 21
Ladder Diagrams Ladder diagrams are similar to relay logic diagrams that represent relay control
circuits. Graphic elements such as coils, contacts, and blocks represent instructions.
The following is an example of a Ladder diagram.
%I0.1 %C8
N R E
%M1 %Q0.4
S ADJ Y D
%I0.2 %M0 %C8.P 777
CU F
CD
22 35011386 06/2006
Grafcet The Grafcet analytical method divides any sequential control system into a series of steps,
Language with which actions, transitions, and conditions are associated. The following illustration
shows examples of Grafcet instructions in List and Ladder programs respectively.
0 -*- 3
1 LD %M10
2 # 4
3 # 5
4 -*- 4
5 LD %I0.7
6 # 6
7 -*- 5
8 LD %M15
9 # 7
10 ...
--*-- 3
%M10 4
#
--*-- 4
%I0.7 6
--*-- 5
%M15 7
35011386 06/2006 23
24 35011386 06/2006
Twido Language Objects
2
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter provides details about the language objects used for programming
Chapter Twido controllers.

Chapter?
Topic Page
Language Object Validation 26
Bit Objects 27
Word Objects 29
Floating point and double word objects 32
Addressing Bit Objects 37
Addressing Word Objects 38
Addressing floating objects 39
Addressing double word objects 40
Addressing Inputs/Outputs 41
Network Addressing 43
Function Block Objects 44
Structured Objects 46
Indexed objects 49
Symbolizing Objects 51
35011386 06/2006 25
Language Object Validation
Introduction Word and bit objects are valid if memory space has been allocated in the controller. To
do this, they must be used in the application before they are downloaded to the controller.
Example The range of valid objects is from zero to the maximum reference for that object type.
For example, if your application's maximum references for memory words is %MW9,
then %MW0 through %MW9 are allocated space. %MW10 in this example is not
valid and can not be accessed either internally or externally.
26 35011386 06/2006
Bit Objects
Introduction Bit objects are bit-type software variables that can be used as operands and tested
by Boolean instructions. The following is a list of bit objects:
z I/O bits
z Internal bits (memory bits)
z System bits
z Step bits
z Bits extracted from words
List of Operand The following table lists and describes all of the main bit objects that are used as
Bits operands in Boolean instructions.
Type Description Address or Maximum number Write access
value (1)
Immediate 0 or 1 (False or True) 0 or 1 - -
values
Inputs These bits are the "logical images" of the %Ix.y.z (2) Note (4) No
Outputs electrical states of the I/O. They are stored %Qx.y.z (2) Yes
in data memory and updated during each
scan of the program logic.
AS-Interface These bits are the "logical images" of the Note (5)
Inputs electrical states of the I/O. They are stored %IAx.y.z No
Outputs in data memory and updated during each %QAx.y.z Yes
scan of the program logic.
Internal Internal bits are internal memory areas %Mi 128 TWDLC•A10DRF, Yes
(Memory) used to store intermediary values while a TWDLC•A16DRF
program is running. 256 All other controllers
Note: Unused I/O bits can not be used as
internal bits.
System System bits %S0 to %S127 monitor the %Si 128 According to i
correct operation of the controller and the
correct running of the application program.
Function The function block bits correspond to the %TMi.Q, Note (4) No (3)
blocks outputs of the function blocks. %Ci.P, and
These outputs may be either directly so on.
connected or used as an object.
Reversible Function blocks programmed using E, D, F, Q, Note (4) No
function reversible programming instructions BLK, TH0, TH1
blocks OUT_BLK, and END_BLK.
35011386 06/2006 27
Type Description Address or Maximum number Write access

value (1)
Word extracts One of the 16 bits in some words can be Variable Variable Variable
extracted as operand bits.
Grafcet steps Bits %X1 to %Xi are associated with %Xi 62 TWDLC•A10DRF, Yes
Grafcet steps. Step bit Xi is set to 1 when TWDLC•A16 DRF
the corresponding step is active, and set to 96 TWDLC•A24DRF,
0 when the step is deactivated. TWDLCA•40DRF and
Modular controllers
Legends:
1. Written by the program or by using the Animation Tables Editor.
2. See I/O Addressing.
3. Except for %SBRi.j and %SCi.j, these bits can be read and written.
4. Number is determined by controller model.
5. Where, x = address of the expansion module (0..7); y = AS-Interface address
(0A..31B); z = channel number (0..3). (See Addressing I/Os associated with slave
devices connected to the AS-Interface V2 bus, p. 191.)
28 35011386 06/2006
Word Objects
Introduction Word objects that are addressed in the form of 16-bit words that are stored in data
memory and can contain an integer value between -32768 and 32767 (except for
the fast counter function block which is between 0 and 65535).
Examples of word objects:
z Immediate values
z Internal words (%MWi) (memory words)
z Constant words (%KWi)
z I/O exchange words (%IWi, %QWi%)
z AS-Interface analog I/O words (IWAi, %QWAi)
z System words (%SWi)
z Function blocks (configuration and/or runtime data)
Word Formats The contents of the words or values are stored in user memory in 16-bit binary code
(two's complement) using the following convention:
Bit position
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Bit state
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
Bit value
64
32
16
|+
8
4
2
1
In signed binary notation, bit 15 is allocated by convention to the sign of the coded value:
z Bit 15 is set to 0: the content of the word is a positive value.
z Bit 15 is set to 1: the content of the word is a negative value (negative values are
expressed in two's complement logic).
Words and immediate values can be entered or retrieved in the following format:
z Decimal
Min.: -32768, Max.: 32767 (1579, for example)
z Hexadecimal
Min.: 16#0000, Max.: 16#FFFF (for example, 16#A536)
Alternate syntax: #A536
35011386 06/2006 29
Descriptions of The following table describes the word objects.

Word Objects
Words Description Address or Maximum Write access
value number (1)
Immediate These are integer values that are in the same format as - No
values the 16-bit words, which enables values to be assigned
to these words.
Base 10 -32768 to
32767
Base 16 16#0000 to
16#FFFF
Internal Used as "working" words to store values during %MWi 3000 Yes
(Memory) operation in data memory.
Constants Store constants or alphanumeric messages. Their %KWi 256 Yes,
content can only be written or modified by using only by using
TwidoSuite during configuration. TwidoSuite
System These 16-bit words have several functions: %SWi 128 According to i
z Provide access to data coming directly from the
controller by reading %SWi words.)
z Perform operations on the application (for example,
adjusting schedule blocks).
Function These words correspond to current parameters or %TM2.P, Yes
blocks values of function blocks. %Ci.P, etc.
Network Assigned to controllers connected as Remote Links.
exchange These words are used for communication between
words controllers:
Network Input %INWi.j 4 per No
remote link
Network Output %QNWi.j 4 per Yes
remote link
Analog I/O Assigned to analog inputs and outputs of AS-Interface
words slave modules.
Analog Inputs %IWAx.y.z Note (3) No
Analog Outputs %QWAx.y.z Note (3) Yes
30 35011386 06/2006
Words Description Address or Maximum Write access

value number (1)
Extracted It is possible to extract one of the 16 bits from the
bits following words:
Internal %MWi:Xk 1500 Yes
System %SWi:Xk 128 Depends on i
Constants %KWi:Xk 64 No
Input %IWi.j:Xk Note (2) No
Output %QWi.j:Xk Note (2) Yes
AS-Interface Slave Input %IWAx.y.z:Xk Note (2) No
AS-Interface Slave Output %QWAx.y.z:Xk Note (2) Yes
Network Input %INWi.j:Xk Note (2) No
Network Output %QNWi.j:Xk Note (2) Yes
Note:
1. Written by the program or by using the Animation Tables Editor.
2. Number is determined by the configuration.
3. Where, x = address of the expansion module (0..7); y = AS-Interface address
(0A..31B); z = channel number (0..3). (See Addressing I/Os associated with
slave devices connected to the AS-Interface V2 bus, p. 191.)
35011386 06/2006 31
Floating point and double word objects
Introduction TwidoSuite allows you to perform operations on floating point and double integer
word objects.
A floating point is a mathematical argument which has a decimal in its expression
(examples: 3.4E+38, 2.3 or 1.0).
A double integer word consists of 4 bytes stored in data memory and containing a
value between -2147483648 and +2147483647.
32 35011386 06/2006
Floating Point The floating format used is the standard IEEE STD 734-1985 (equivalent IEC 559).
Format and The length of the words is 32 bits, which corresponds to the single decimal point
Value floating numbers.
Table showing the format of a floating point value:
Bit 31 Bits {30...23} Bits {22...0}
S Exponent Fractional part
The value as expressed in the above format is determined by the following equation:
S ( Exposant – 127 )
32-bit Floating Value = ( – 1 ) * 2 * 1.Fractional part
Floating values can be represented with or without an exponent; but they must
always have a decimal point (floating point).
Floating values range from -3.402824e+38 and -1.175494e-38 to 1.175494e-38 and
3.402824e+38 (grayed out values on the diagram). They also have the value 0, written 0.0
-1.#INF -1.#DN 1.#DN 1.#INF
-3.402824e+38 -1.175494e-38 0 +1.175494e-38 +3.402824e+38

When a calculation result is:
z Less than -3.402824e+38, the symbol -1.#INF (for -infinite) is displayed,
z Greater than +3.402824e+38, the symbol 1.#INF (for +infinite) is displayed,
z Between -1.175494e-38 and 1.175494e-38, it is rounded off to 0.0. A value within
these limits cannot be entered as a floating value.
z Indefinite (for example the square root of a negative number) the symbol 1.#NAN
or -1.#NAN is displayed.
Representation precision is 2-24. To display floating point numbers, it is
unnecessary to display more than 6 digits after the decimal point.
Note:
z the value "1285" is interpreted as a whole value; in order for it to be recognized
as a floating point value, it must be written thus: "1285.0"
35011386 06/2006 33
Limit range of The following table describes the limit range of arithmetic functions on floating point
Arithmetic objects
Functions on
Arithmetic Funtion Limit range and invalid operations
Floating Point
Type Syntax #QNAN (Invalid) #INF (Infinite)
Square root of an SQRT(x) x<0 x > 1.7E38
operand
Power of an integer EXPT(y, x) x<0 y.ln(x) > 88
by a real (where:
EXPT(%MF,%MW) x^y = %MW^%MF)
Base 10 logarithm LOG(x) x <= 0 x > 2.4E38
Natural logarithm LN(x) x <= 0 x > 1.65E38
Natural exponential EXP(x) x<0 x > 88.0
Hardware Floating point and double word operations are not supported by all Twido
compatibility controllers.
The following table shows hardware compatibility:
Twido controller Double words Floating points
supported supported
TWDLMDA40DUK Yes Yes
TWDLMDA40DTK Yes Yes
TWDLMDA20DUK Yes No
TWDLMDA20DTK Yes No
TWDLMDA20DRT Yes Yes
TWDLCA•40DRF Yes Yes
TWDLC•A24DRF Yes No
TWDLC•A16DRF Yes No
TWDLC•A10DRF No No
34 35011386 06/2006
Validity Check When the result is not within the valid range, the system bit %S18 is set to 1.
The status word %SW17 bits indicate the cause of an error in a floating operation:
Different bits of the word %SW17:
%SW17:X0 Invalid operation, result is not a number (1.#NAN or -1.#NAN)
%SW17:X1 Reserved
%SW17:X2 Divided by 0, result is infinite (-1.#INF or 1.#INF)
%SW17:X3 Result greater in absolute value than +3.402824e+38, result is infinite
(-1.#INF or 1.#INF)
%SW17:X4 to X15 Reserved
This word is reset to 0 by the system on cold start, and also by the program for re-
usage purposes.
Description of The following table describes floating point and double word objects:
Floating Point
and Double Word
Objects
Type of object Description Address Maximum Write access Indexed
number form
Immediate values Integers (double word) or decimal - [-] No -
(floating point) numbers with identical
format to 32 bit objects.
Internal floating point Objects used to store values during %MFi 1500 Yes (ODM/T) %MFi[index]
Internal double word operation in data memory. %MDi 1500 Yes (ODM/T) %MDi[index]
Floating constant Used to store constants. %KFi 128 Yes, (T) %KFi[index]
value
Double constant %KDi 128 Yes, (T) %KDi[index]
Note: 1. ODM: Write access using the Operator Display Module (see Operator Display
Operation , p. 271)
2. T: Write access using TwidoSuite
35011386 06/2006 35
Possibility of Single, double length and floating words are stored in the data space in one memory
Overlap between zone. Thus, the floating word %MFi and the double word %MDi correspond to the
Objects single length words %MWi and %MWi+1 (the word %MWi containing the least
significant bits and the word %MWi+1 the most significant bits of the word %MFi).
The following table shows how floating and double internal words overlap:
Floating and Double Odd address Internal words
%MF0 / %MD0 %MW0
%MF1 / %MD1 %MW1
%MF2 / %MD2 %MW2
%MF3 / %MD3 %MW3
%MF4 / %MD4 %MW4
... %MW5
... ...
%MFi / %MDi %MWi
%MFi+1 / %MDi+1 %MWi+1
The following table shows how floating and double constants overlap:
Floating and Double Odd address Internal words
%KF0 / %KD0 %KW0
%KF1 / %KD1 %KW1
%KF2 / %KD2 %KW2
%KF3 / %KD3 %KW3
%KF4 / %KD4 %KW4
... %KW5
... ...
%kFi / %kDi %KWi
%KFi+1 / %KDi+1 %KWi+1
Example:
%MF0 corresponds to %MW0 and %MW1. %KF543 corresponds to %KW543 and
%KW544.
36 35011386 06/2006
Addressing Bit Objects
Syntax Use the following format to address internal, system, and step bit objects:
% M, S, or X i
Symbol Object type Number
Description The following table describes the elements in the addressing format.
Group Item Description
Symbol % The percent symbol always precedes a software variable.
Type of M Internal bits store intermediary values while a program is
object running.
S System bits provide status and control information for the
controller.
X Step bits provide status of step activities.
Number i The maximum number value depends on the number of objects
configured.
Examples of bit object addressing:

z %M25 = internal bit number 25
z %S20 = system bit number 20
z %X6 = step bit number 6
Bit Objects TwidoSuite is used to extract one of the 16 bits from words. The address of the word
Extracted from is then completed by the bit row extracted according to the following syntax:
Words WORD :X k
Word address Position k = 0 - 15 bit

rank in the word address.
Examples:
z %MW5:X6 = bit number 6 of internal word %MW5
z %QW5.1:X10 = bit number 10 of output word %QW5.1
35011386 06/2006 37
Addressing Word Objects
Introduction Addressing word objects, except for input/output addressing (see Addressing
Inputs/Outputs, p. 41) and function blocks (see Function Block Objects, p. 44),
follows the format described below.
Syntax Use the following format to address internal, constant and system words:
% M, K or S W i
Symbol Object type Format Number
Symbol % The percent symbol always precedes an internal address.
Type of object M Internal words store intermediary values while a program is running.
K Constant words store constant values or alphanumeric messages.
Their content can only be written or modified by using TwidoSuite.
S System words provide status and control information for the
controller.
Syntax W 16-bit word.
configured.
Examples of word object addressing:

z %MW15 = internal word number 15
z %KW26 = constant word number 26
z %SW30 = system word number 30
38 35011386 06/2006
Addressing floating objects
Introduction Addressing floating objects, except for input/output addressing (see Addressing
Inputs/Outputs, p. 41) and function blocks (see Function Block Objects, p. 44),
follows the format described below.
Syntax Use the following format to address internal and constant floating objects:
% M or K F i
Symbol Type of object Syntax Number
Type of object M Internal floating objects store intermediary values while a program is
running.
K Floating constants are used to store constant values. Their content
can only be written or modified by using TwidoSuite.
Syntax F 32 bit object.
configured.
Examples of floating object addresses:

z %MF15 = internal floating object number 15
z %KF26 = constant floating object number 26
35011386 06/2006 39
Addressing double word objects
Introduction Addressing double word objects, except for input/output addressing (see
Addressing Inputs/Outputs, p. 41) and function blocks (see Function Block Objects,
p. 44), follows the format described below.
Syntax Use the following format to address internal and constant double words:
% M or K D i
Symbol Type of object Syntax Number
Type of object M Internal double words are used to store intermediary values while a
program is running.
K Constant double words store constant values or alphanumeric
messages. Their content can only be written or modified by using
TwidoSuite.
Syntax D 32 bit double word.
configured.
Examples of double word object addressing:

z %MD15 = internal double word number 15
z %KD26 = constant double word number 26
40 35011386 06/2006
Addressing Inputs/Outputs
Introduction Each input/output (I/O) point in a Twido configuration has a unique address: For
example, the address "%I0.0.4" is assigned to input 4 of a controller.
I/O addresses can be assigned for the following hardware:
z Controller configured as Remote Link Master
z Controller configured as Remote I/O
z Expansion I/O modules
The TWDNOI10M3 AS-Interface bus interface module and the TWDNCO1M
CANopen fieldbus module each uses its own special address system for addressing
the I/Os of slave devices connected to its bus:
z For TWDNOI10M3, see Addressing I/Os associated with slave devices
connected to the AS-Interface V2 bus, p. 191.
z For TWDNCO1M, see Addressing PDOs of the CANopen master, p. 233.
Multiple In a program, you can have multiple references to a single output or coil. Only the
References to an result of the last one solved is updated on the hardware outputs. For example,
Output or Coil %Q0.0.0 can be used more than once in a program, and there will not be a warning
for multiple occurrences. So it is important to confirm only the equation that will give
the required status of the output.
CAUTION
UNINTENDED OPERATION
No duplicate output checking or warnings are provided. Review the use of the
outputs or coils before making changes to them in your application.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.
35011386 06/2006 41
Format Use the following format to address inputs/outputs.

% I, Q x . y . z
Symbol Object type Controller point I/O type point Channel number
position
Use the following format to address inputs/output exchange words.

% I, Q W x . y
Symbol Object type Format Controller point I/O Type
position
Description The table below describes the I/O addressing format.

Group Item Value Description
Symbol % - The percent symbol always precedes an internal address.
Object type I - Input. The "logical image" of the electrical state of a controller
or expansion I/O module input.
Q - Output. The "logical image" of the electrical state of a controller
or expansion I/O module output.
Controller x 0 Master controller (Remote Link master).
position 1-7 Remote controller (Remote Link slave).
I/O Type y 0 Base I/O (local I/O on controller).
1-7 Expansion I/O modules.
Channel z 0 - 31 I/O channel number on controller or expansion I/O module.
Number Number of available I/O points depends on controller model or
type of expansion I/O module.
Examples The table below shows some examples of I/O addressing.

I/O object Description
%I0.0.5 Input point number 5 on the base controller (local I/O).
%Q0.3.4 Output point number 4 on the expansion I/O module at address 3 for the
controller base (expansion I/O).
%I0.0.3 Input point number 3 on base controller.
%I3.0.1 Input point number 1 on remote I/O controller at address 3 of the remote link.
%I0.3.2 Input point number 2 on the expansion I/O module at address 3 for the controller base.
42 35011386 06/2006
Network Addressing
Introduction Application data is exchanged between peer controllers and the master controller on
a Twido Remote Link network by using the network words %INW and %QNW. See
Communications , p. 73 for more details.
Format Use the following format for network addressing.

% IN,QN W x . j
Symbol Object type Format Controller point Word
position
Description of The table below describes the network addressing format.

Format
Group Element Value Description
Symbol % - The percent symbol always precedes an internal address.
Object type IN - Network input word. Data transfer from master to peer.
QN - Network output word. Data transfer from peer to master.
Format W - A16-bit word.
Controller x 0 Master controller (Remote Link master).
position 1-7 Remote controller (Remote Link slave).
Word j 0-3 Each peer controller uses from one to four words to
exchange data with the master controller.
Examples The table below shows some examples of networking addressing.

Network object Description
%INW3.1 Network word number 1 of remote controller number 3.
%QNW0.3 Network word number 3 of the base controller.
35011386 06/2006 43
Function Block Objects
Introduction Function blocks provide bit objects and specific words that can be accessed by the program.
Example of a The following illustration shows a counter function block.

Function Block
%Ci
R E
S D
ADJ Y
%Ci.P 9999
CU
CD F
Up/down counter block
Bit Objects Bit objects correspond to the block outputs. These bits can be accessed by Boolean
test instructions using either of the following methods:
z Directly (for example, LD E) if they are wired to the block in reversible
programming (see Standard function blocks programming principles, p. 358).
z By specifying the block type (for example, LD %Ci.E).
Inputs can be accessed in the form of instructions.
Word Objects Word objects correspond to specified parameters and values as follows:
z Block configuration parameters: some parameters are accessible by the program
(for example, pre-selection parameters), and some are inaccessible by the
program (for example, time base).
z Current values: for example, %Ci.V, the current count value.
44 35011386 06/2006
Double word Double word objects increase the computational capability of your Twido controller
Objects while executing system functions, such as fast counters (%FC), very fast counters
(%VFC) and pulse generators (%PLS).
Addressing of 32-bit double word objects used with function blocks simply consists
in appending the original syntax of the standard word objects with the "D" character.
The following example, shows how to address the current value of a fast counter in
standard format and in double word format:
z %FCi.V is current value of the fast counter in standard format.
z %FCi.VD is the current value of the fast counter in double word format.
Note: Double word objects are not supported by all Twido controllers. Refer to
Hardware compatibility, p. 34 to find out if your Twido controller can accommodate
double words.
Objects See the following appropriate sections for a list of objects that are accessible by the
Accessible by program.
the Program z For Basic Function Blocks, see Basic Function Blocks, p. 356.
z For Advanced Function Blocks, see Bit and Word Objects Associated with
Advanced Function Blocks, p. 406.
35011386 06/2006 45
Structured Objects
Introduction Structured objects are combinations of adjacent objects. Twido supports the
following types of structured objects:
z Bit Strings
z Tables of words
z Tables of double words
z Tables of floating words
Bit Strings Bit strings are a series of adjacent object bits of the same type and of a defined
length (L).
Example:Bit string %M8:6
%M8 %M9 %M10 %M11 %M12 %M13
Note: %M8:6 is acceptable (8 is a multiple of 8), while %M10:16 is unacceptable

(10 is not a multiple of 8).
Bit strings can be used with the Assignment instruction (see Assignment
Instructions, p. 380).
46 35011386 06/2006
Available Types Available types of bits for bit strings:

of Bits
Type Address Maximum size Write access
Discrete input bits %I0.0:L or %I1.0:L (1) 0<L<17 No
Discrete output bits %Q0.0:L or %Q1.0:L (1) 0<L<17 Yes
System bits %Si:L 0<L<17 and i+L≤ 128 Depending on i
with i multiple of 8
Grafcet Step bits %Xi:L 0<L<17 and i+L≤ 95 Yes (by program)
with i multiple of 8 (2)
Internal bits %Mi:L 0<L<17 and i+L≤ 256 Yes
with i multiple of 8 (3)
Key:
1. Only I/O bits 0 to 16 can be read in bit string. For controllers with 24 inputs and
32 I/O modules, bits over 16 cannot be read in bit string.
2. Maximum of i+L for TWWDLCAA10DRF and TWDLCAA16DRF is 62
3. Maximum of i+L for TWWDLCAA10DRF and TWDLCAA16DRF is 128
Tables of words Word tables are a series of adjacent words of the same type and of a defined length
(L).
Example:Word table %KW10:7
%KW10 16 bits
%KW16
Word tables can be used with the Assignment instruction (see Assignment
Available Types Available types of words for word tables:

of Words
Internal words %MWi:L 0<L<256 and i+L< 3000 Yes
Constant words %KWi:L 0<L<256 and i+L< 256 No
System Words %SWi:L 0<L and i+L<128 Depending on i
35011386 06/2006 47
Tables of double Double word tables are a series of adjacent words of the same type and of a defined
words length (L).
Example:Double word table %KD10:7
%KD11 %KD13 %KD15 %KD17 %KD19 %KD21
16 Bit
%KD10 %KD12 %KD14 %KD16 %KD18 %KD20 %KD22

Double word tables can be used with the Assignment instruction (see Assignment
Available Types Available types of words for double word tables:

of Double Words
Internal words %MDi:L 0<L<256 and i+L< 3000 Yes
Constant words %KDi:L 0<L and i+L< 256 No
Tables of floating Floating word tables are a series of adjacent words of the same type and of a defined
words length (L).
Example: Floating point table %KF10:7
%KF11 %KF13 %KF15 %KF17 %KF19 %KF21
16 Bit
%KF10 %KF12 %KF14 %KF16 %KF18 %KF20 %KF22
Floating point tables can be used with the Assignment instruction (see Advanced
instructions).
Types of Floating Available types of words for floating word tables:

Words Available
Internal words %MFi:L 0<L<256 and i+L< 3000 Yes
Constant words %KFi:L 0<L and i+L<256 No
48 35011386 06/2006
Indexed objects
Introduction An indexed word is a single or double word or floating point with an indexed object
address. There are two types of object addressing:
z Direct addressing
z Indexed addressing
Direct A direct address of an object is set and defined when a program is written.
Addressing Example: %M26 is an internal bit with the direct address 26.
Indexed An indexed address of an object provides a method of modifying the address of an

Addressing object by adding an index to the direct address of an object. The content of the index
is added to the object’s direct address. The index is defined by an internal word
%MWi. The number of "index words" is unlimited.
Example: %MW108[%MW2] is a word with an address consisting of the direct
address 108 plus the contents of word %MW2.
If word %MW2 has a value of 12, writing to %MW108[%MW2] is equivalent to writing
to %MW120 (108 plus 12).
Objects The following are the available types of objects for indexed addressing.
Available for
Indexed
Addressing Internal words %MWi[MWj] 0≤ i+%MWj<3000 Yes
Constant words %KWi[%MWj] 0≤ i+%MWj<256 No
Internal double words %MDi[MWj] 0≤ i+%MWj<2999 Yes
Double constant words %KDi[%MWj] 0≤ i+%MWj<255 No
Internal floating points %MFi[MWj] 0≤ i+%MWj<2999 Yes
Constant floating points %KFi[%MWj] 0≤ i+%MWj<255 No
Indexed objects can be used with the assignment instructions (see Assignment
Instructions, p. 380 for single and double words) and in comparison instructions (see
Comparison Instructions, p. 384 for single and double words). This type of addressing
enables series of objects of the same type (such as internal words and constants) to be
scanned in succession, by modifying the content of the index object via the program.
35011386 06/2006 49
Index Overflow An overflow of the index occurs when the address of an indexed object exceeds the
system bit %S20 limits of the memory zone containing the same type of object. In summary:
z The object address plus the content of the index is less than 0.
z The object address plus the content of the index is greater than the largest word
directly referenced in the application. The maximum number is 2999 (for words
%MWi) or 255 (for words %KWi).
In the event of an index overflow, the system sets system bit %S20 to 1 and the
object is assigned an index value of 0.
Note: The user is responsible for monitoring any overflow. Bit %S20 must be read by
the user program for possible processing. The user must confirm that it is reset to 0.
%S20 (initial status = 0):
z On index overflow: set to 1 by the system.
z Acknowledgment of overflow: set to 0 by the user, after modifying the index.
50 35011386 06/2006
Symbolizing Objects
Introduction You can use Symbols to address TwidoSuite language objects by name or
customized mnemonics. Using symbols allows for quick examination and analysis
of program logic, and greatly simplifies the development and testing of an
application.
Example For example, WASH_END is a symbol that could be used to identify a timer function
block that represents the end of a wash cycle. Recalling the purpose of this name should
be easier than trying to remember the role of a program address such as %TM3.
Guidelines for The following are guidelines for defining symbols:

Defining z A maximum of 32 characters.
Symbols z Letters (A-Z), numbers (0 -9), or underscores (_).
z First character must be an alphabetical or accented character. You can not use
the percentile sign (%).
z Do not use spaces or special characters.
z Not case-sensitive. For example, Pump1 and PUMP1 are the same symbol and
can only be used once in an application.
Editing Symbols Symbols are defined and associated with language objects in the Symbol Editor.
Symbols and their comments are stored with the application on the PC hard drive,
but are not stored on the controller. Therefore, they can not be transferred with the
application to the controller.
35011386 06/2006 51
52 35011386 06/2006
User Memory
3
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter describes the structure and usage of Twido user memory.
Chapter

Chapter?
Topic Page
User Memory Structure 54
Backup and Restore without Backup Cartridge or Extended Memory 57
Backup and Restore with a 32K Backup Cartridge 59
Using the 64K Extended Memory Cartridge 62
35011386 06/2006 53
User Memory
User Memory Structure
Introduction The controller memory accessible to your application is divided into two distinct sets:
z Bit values
z Word values (16-bit signed values) and double word values (32-bit signed values)
Bit Memory The bit memory is located in the controller's built-in RAM. It contains the map of 128
bit objects.
Word Memory The word memory (16 bits) supports:

z Dynamic words: runtime memory (stored in RAM only).
z Memory words (%MW) and double words (%MD): dynamic system data and
system data.
z Program: descriptors and executable code for tasks.
z Configuration data: constant words, initial values, and input/output
configuration.
Memory Storage The following are the different types of memory storage for Twido controllers.
Types z Random Access Memory.
Internal volatile memory: Contains dynamic words, memory words, program and
configuration data.
z EEPROM
An integrated 32KB EEPROM that provides internal program and data backup.
Protects program from corruption due to battery failure or a power outage lasting
longer than 30 days. Contains program and configuration data. Holds a maximum
of 512 memory words. Program is not backed up here If a 64K extended memory
cartridge is being used and Twido has been configured to accept the 64K
extended memory cartridge.
z 32K backup cartridge
An optional external cartridge used to save a program and transfer that program
to other Twido controllers. Can be used to update the program in controller RAM.
Contains program and constants, but no memory words.
z 64K extended memory cartridge
An optional external cartridge that stores a program up to 64K. Must remain
plugged into the controller as long as that program is being used.
54 35011386 06/2006
User Memory
Saving Memory Your controller’s program and memory words can be saved in the following:
z RAM (for up to 30 days with good battery)
z EEPROM (maximum of 32 KB)
Transferring the program from the EEPROM memory to the RAM memory is done
automatically when the program is lost in RAM (or if there is no battery).
Manual transfer can also be performed using TwidoSuite.
35011386 06/2006 55
User Memory
Memory The following tables describe the types of memory configurations possible with
Configurations Twido compact and modulare controllers.
Compact Controllers
Memory Type 10DRF 16DRF 24DRF 40DRF 40DRF**
(32k) (64k)
Internal RAM 10KB 10KB 10KB 10KB 10KB
Mem 1*
External RAM 16KB 32KB 32KB 64KB
Mem 2*
Internal EEPROM 8KB 16KB 32KB 32KB 32KB***
External EEPROM 32KB 32KB 32KB 32KB 64KB
Maximum program size 8KB 16KB 32KB 32KB 64KB
Maximum external backup 8KB 16KB 32KB 32KB 64KB
Modular Controllers
Memory Type 20DUK 20DRT 20DRT
20DTK 40DUK 40DUK
40DTK (32k) 40DTK** (64k)
Internal RAM 10KB 10KB 10KB
Mem 1*
External RAM 32KB 32KB 64KB
Mem 2*
Internal EEPROM 32KB 32KB 32KB***
External EEPROM 32KB 32KB 64KB
Maximum program size 32KB 32KB 64KB
Maximum external backup 32KB 32KB 64KB
(*) Mem 1 and Mem 2 in memory usage.

(**) in this case the 64KB cartridge must be installed on the Twido and declared in
the configuration, if it has not already been declared,
(***) reserved for backup of the first 512 %MW words or the first 256 %MD double words.
56 35011386 06/2006
User Memory
Backup and Restore without Backup Cartridge or Extended Memory
Introduction The following information details backup and restore memory functions in modular
and compact controllers without a backup cartridge or extended memory plugged in.
At a Glance Twido programs, memory words and configuration data can be backed up using the
controllers internal EEPROM. Because saving a program to the internal EEPROM
clears any previously backed up memory words, the program must be backed up
first, then the configured memory words. Dynamic data can be stored in memory
words then backed up to the EEPROM. If there is no program saved to the internal
EEPROM you cannot save memory words to it.
Memory Here is a diagram of a controller’s memory structure. The arrows show what can be
Structure backed up to the EEPROM from RAM:
Dynamic words
%MWs
RAM
Program
Configuration data
%MWs
EEPROM
Program
Configuration data
Program Backup Here are the steps for backing up your program into EEPROM.
Step Action
1 The following must be true:
There is a valid program in RAM.
2 From the TwidoSuite window bring down the menu under ‘Controller’, scroll down to
‘Backup’ and click on it.
35011386 06/2006 57
User Memory
Program Restore During power up there is one way the program will be restored to RAM from the
EEPROM (assuming there is no cartridge or extended memory in place):
z The RAM program is not valid
To restore a program manually from EEPROM do the following:

z From the TwidoSuite window bring down the menu under ‘Controller’, scroll down
to ‘Restore’ and click on it.
Data (%MWs) Here are the steps for backing up data (memory words) into the EEPROM:
Backup
Step Action
1 For this to work the following must be true:
A valid program in RAM (%SW96:X6=1).
The same valid program already backed up into the EEPROM.
Memory words configured in the program.
2 Set %SW97 to the length of the memory words to be saved.
Note: Length cannot exceed the configured memory word length, and it must be
greater than 0 but not greater than 512.
3 Set %SW96:X0 to 1.
Data (%MWs) Restore %MWs manually by setting system bit %S95 to 1.

Restore For this to work the following must be true:
z A valid backup application is present in the EEPROM
z The application in RAM matches the backup application in EEPROM
z The backup memory words are valid
58 35011386 06/2006
User Memory
Backup and Restore with a 32K Backup Cartridge
Introduction The following information details backup and restore memory functions in modular
and compact controllers using a 32K backup cartridge.
At a Glance The backup cartridge is used to save a program and transfer that program to other
Twido controllers. It should be removed from a controller and set aside once the
program has been installed or saved. Only program and configuration data can be
saved to the cartridge (%MWs cannot be saved to the 32K backup cartridge).
Dynamic data can be stored in memory words then backed up to the EEPROM.
When program installation is complete any %MWs that were backed up to the
internal EEPROM prior to installation will be lost.
35011386 06/2006 59
User Memory
Memory Here is a diagram of a controller’s memory structure with the backup cartridge
Structure attached. The arrows show what can be backed up to the EEPROM and cartridge
from RAM:
Dynamic words
%MWs
RAM
Program
Configuration data
%MWs
EEPROM
Program
Configuration data
Backup Program
cartridge
Configuration data
Program Backup Here are the steps for backing up your program into the backup cartridge:
Step Action
1 Power down the controller.
2 Plug in the backup cartridge.
3 Powerup the controller.
4 From the TwidoSuite window bring down the menu under ‘Controller’, scroll down to
‘Backup’ and click on it.
6 Remove backup cartridge from controller.
60 35011386 06/2006
User Memory
Program Restore To load a program saved on a backup cartridge into a controller do the following:
Step Action
2 Plug in the backup cartridge.
(If Auto Start is configured you must power cycle again to get to run mode.)
5 Remove backup cartridge from controller.
Backup
Step Action
A valid program in RAM.
The same valid program already backed up into the EEPROM.
Memory words configured in the program.
Note Length cannot exceed the configured memory word length, and it must be

z A valid backup application is present in the EEPROM
z The application in RAM matches the backup application in EEPROM
35011386 06/2006 61
User Memory
Using the 64K Extended Memory Cartridge
Introduction The following information details using the memory functions in modular controllers
using a 64K extended memory cartridge.
At a Glance The 64K extended memory cartridge is used to extend the program memory
capability of your Twido controller from 32K to 64K. It must remain plugged into the
controller as long as the extended program is being used. If the cartridge is removed
the controller will enter the stopped state. Memory words are still backed up into the
EEPROM in the controller. Dynamic data can be stored in memory words then
backed up to the EEPROM. The 64K extended memory cartridge has the same
power up behavior as the 32K backup cartridge.
62 35011386 06/2006
User Memory
Memory Here is a diagram of a controller’s memory structure using an extended memory

Structure cartridge. The arrows show what is backed up into the EEPROM and the 64K
extended memory cartridge from RAM:
Dynamic words
%MWs
RAM
Program (1st)
Configuration data
EEPROM
%MWs
Extended
memory Program (2nd)
cartridge
Configure Before you begin writing your extended program, you must install the 64K extended
Software and memory cartridge into your controller. The following four steps show you how:
Install Extended
Step Action
Memory
1 Under the Hardware option menu on you TwidoSuite window enter
‘TWDXCPMFK64’.
3 Plug in the 64K extended memory cartridge.
35011386 06/2006 63
User Memory
Save your Once your 64K extended memory cartridge has been installed and your program
program. written:
z From the TwidoSuite window bring down the menu under ‘Controller’, scroll down
to ‘Backup’ and click on it.
Backup
Step Action
A valid program is present
Memory words are configured in the program.
Note: Length cannot exceed the configured memory word length, and it must be

z A valid program is present
64 35011386 06/2006
Event task management
4
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter describes event tasks and how they are executed in the controller.
Chapter
Note: Event tasks are not managed by the Twido Brick 10 controller
(TWDLCAA10DRF).

Chapter?
Topic Page
Overview of event tasks 66
Description of different event sources 67
Event management 69
35011386 06/2006 65
Overview of event tasks
Introduction The previous chapter presented periodic and cyclic tasks in which objects are
updated at the start and end of the task. Event sources may cause a certain task to
be stopped while higher priority (event) tasks are executed to allow objects to be
updated more quickly.
An event task:
z is a part of a program executed when a given condition is met (event source),
z has a higher priority than the main program,
z guarantees a rapid response time enabling the overall response time of the
system to be reduced.
Description of an An event is composed of:

Event z an event source which can be defined as a software or hardware interrupt
condition to interrupt the main program (See Description of different event
sources, p. 67),
z a section which is an independent programmed entity related to an event,
z an event queue which can be used to store a list of events until they are executed,
z a priority level which specifies the order of event execution.
66 35011386 06/2006
Description of different event sources
Overview of An event source needs to be managed by the software to make the sure the main
Different Event program is properly interrupted by the event, and to call the programming section linked
Sources to the event. The application scan time has no effect on the execution of the events.
The following 9 event sources are allowed:
z 4 conditions linked to the VFC function block thresholds (2 events per %VFC instance),
z 4 conditions linked to the physical inputs of a controller base,
z 1 periodic condition.
An event source can only be attached to a single event, and must be immediately
detected by TwidoSuite. Once it is detected, the software executes the
programming section attached to the event: each event is attached to a subroutine
labeled SRi: defined on configuration of the event sources.
Physical Input Inputs %I0.2, %I0.3, %I0.4 and %I0.5 can be used as event sources, provided they
Events of a are not locked and that the events are allowed during configuration.
Controller Base Event processing can be activated by inputs 2 to 5 of a controller base (position 0),
on a rising or falling edge.
For further details on configuring this event, refer to the section entitled "Hardware
Configuration -> Input Configuration" in the "TwidoSuite Operation Guide" on-line help.
Output Event of a Outputs TH0 and TH1 of the %VFC function block are event sources. Outputs TH0
%VFC Function and TH1 are respectively set:
Block z to 1 when the value is greater than threshold S0 and threshold S1,
z to 0 when the value is less than threshold S0 and threshold S1.
A rising or falling edge of these outputs can activate an event process.
For further details on configuring this event, refer to the section entitled "Software
Configuration -> Very Fast Counters" in the "TwidoSuite Operation Guide" on-line help.
35011386 06/2006 67
Periodic event This event periodically executes a single programming section. This task has higher
priority than the main task (master).
However, this event source has lower priority than the other event sources.
The period of this task is set on configuration, from 5 to 255 ms. Only one periodic
event can be used.
For further details on configuring this event, refer to the section entitled "Configuring
Program Parameters -> Scan Mode" in the "TwidoSuite Operation Guide" on-line help.
68 35011386 06/2006
Event management
Events queue Events have 2 possible priorities: High and Low. But only one type of event (thus only
and priority one event source) can have High priority. The other events therefore have Low priority,
and their order of execution depends on the order in which they are detected.
To manage the execution order of the event tasks, there are two event queues:
z in one, up to 16 High priority events can be stored (from the same event source),
z in the other, up to 16 Low priority events can be stored (from other event sources).
These queues are managed on a FIFO basis: the first event to be stored is the first
to be executed. But they can only hold 16 events, and all additional events are lost.
The Low priority queue is only executed once the High priority queue is empty.
Event Queue Each time an interrupt appears (linked to an event source), the following sequence
Management is launched:
Step Description
1 Interrupt management:
z recognition of the physical interrupt,
z event stored in the suitable event queue,
z verification that no event of the same priority is pending (if so the event stays
pending in the queue).
2 Save context.
3 Execution of the programming section (subroutine labeled SRi:) linked to the event.
4 Updating of output
5 Restore context
Before the context is re-established, all the events in the queue must be executed.
35011386 06/2006 69
Event check System bits and words are used to check the events (See System Bits and System
Words, p. 563):
z %S31: used to execute or delay an event,
z %S38: used to decide whether or not to place events in the events queue,
z %S39: used to find out if events are lost,
z %SW48: shows how many events have been executed since the last cold start
(counts all events except periodic events.)
The value of bit %S39 and word %SW48 is reset to zero and that of %S31 and %S38
is set to its initial state 1 on a cold restart or after an application is loaded, but
remains unchanged after a warm restart. In all cases, the events queue is reset.
70 35011386 06/2006
Special Functions
II
At a Glance
Subject of this This part describes communications, built-in analog functions, managing analog I/O modules,
Part installing the AS-Interface V2 bus and the CANopen fieldbus for Twido controllers.

Part?
5 Communications 73
6 Built-In Analog Functions 145
7 Managing Analog Modules 149
8 Installing the AS-Interface V2 bus 163
9 Installing and Configuring the CANopen Fieldbus 199
10 Configuring the TwidoPort Ethernet Gateway 241
11 Operator Display Operation 271
35011386 06/2006 71
Special Functions
72 35011386 06/2006
Communications
5
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter provides an overview of configuring, programming, and managing
Chapter communications available with Twido controllers.

Chapter?
Topic Page
Presentation of the different types of communication 74
TwidoSuite to Controller communications 76
Communication between TwidoSuite and a Modem 82
Remote Link Communications 94
ASCII Communications 106
Modbus Communications 118
Standard Modbus Requests 137
Transparent Ready Implementation Class (Twido Serial A05, Ethernet A15) 143
35011386 06/2006 73
Communications
Presentation of the different types of communication
At a Glance Twido provides one or two serial communications ports used for communications to
remote I/O controllers, peer controllers, or general devices. Either port, if available,
can be used for any of the services, with the exception of communicating with
TwidoSuite, which can only be performed using the first port. Three different base
protocols are supported on each Twido controller: Remote Link, ASCII, or Modbus
(modbus master or modbus slave).
Moreover, the TWDLCAE40DRF compact controller provides one RJ-45 Ethernet
communications port. It supports the Modbus TCP/IP client/server protocol for peer-
to-peer communications between controllers over the Ethernet network.
Remote Link The remote link is a high-speed master/slave bus designed to communicate a small
amount of data between the master controller and up to seven remote (slave)
controllers. Application or I/O data is transferred, depending on the configuration of
the remote controllers. A mixture of remote controller types is possible, where some
can be remote I/O and some can be peers.
ASCII The ASCII protocol is a simple half-duplex character mode protocol used to transmit
and/or receive a character string to/from a simple device (printer or terminal). This
protocol is supported only via the "EXCH" instruction.
Modbus The Modbus protocol is a master/slave protocol that allows for one, and only one,
master to request responses from slaves, or to act based on the request. The master
can address individual slaves, or can initiate a broadcast message to all slaves.
Slaves return a message (response) to queries that are addressed to them
individually. Responses are not returned to broadcast queries from the master.
Modbus master - The modbus master mode allows the Twido controller to send a
modbus query to a slave and await its reply. The modbus master mode is supported
only via the "EXCH" instruction. Both Modbus ASCII and RTU are supported in
modbus master mode.
Modbus Slave - The modbus slave mode allows the Twido controller to respond to
modbus queries from a modbus master, and is the default communications mode if
no other type of communication is configured. The Twido controller supports the
standard modbus data and control functions and service extensions for object
access. Both Modbus ASCII and RTU are supported in modbus slave mode.
Note: 32 devices (without repeaters) can be installed on an RS-485 network (1

master and up to 31 slaves), the addresses of which can be between 1 and 247.
74 35011386 06/2006
Communications
Modbus TCP/IP
Note: Modbus TCP/IP is solely supported by TWDLCAE40DRF series of compact
controllers with built-in Ethernet network interface.
The following information describes the Modbus Application Protocol (MBAP).

The Modbus Application Protocol (MBAP) is a layer-7 protocol providing peer-to-
peer communication between programmable logic controllers (PLCs) and other
nodes on a LAN.
The current Twido controller TWDLCAE40DRF implementation transports Modbus
Application Protocol over TCP/IP on the Ethernet network. Modbus protocol
transactions are typical request-response message pairs. A PLC can be both client
and server depending on whether it is querying or answering messages.
35011386 06/2006 75
Communications
TwidoSuite to Controller communications
At a Glance Each Twido controller has on its Port 1 a built-in EIA RS-485 terminal port. This has
its own internal power supply. Port 1 must be used to communicate with the
TwidoSuite programming software.
No optional cartridge or communication module can be used for this port. A modem,
however, can use this port.
There are several ways to connect the PC to the Twido controller RS-485 Port 1:
z By TSXPCX cable,
z By telephone line: Modem connection.
Moreover, the TWDLCAE40DRF compact controller has a built-in RJ-45 Ethernet

network connection port that can be used to communicate with the Ethernet-capable
PC running the TwidoSuite programming software.
There are two ways for the Ethernet-capable PC to communicate with the
TWDLCAE40DRF Twido controller RJ-45 port:
z By direct cable connection via a UTP Cat5 RJ45 Ethernet crossover cable (not
recommended),
z By connection to the Ethernet network via a SFTP Cat5 RJ45 Ethernet cable
available from the Schneider Electric catalog (cable reference: 490NTW000••).
CAUTION
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
TwidoSuite may not sense the disconnection when physically moving the
TSXPCX1031, TSX PCX 3030 or Ethernet communication cable from a first
controller and quickly inserting it in a second controller. To avoid this condition, use
TwidoSuite to disconnect before moving the cable.
76 35011386 06/2006
Communications
TSXPCX Cable The EIA RS-232C or USB port on your personal computer is connected to the
Connection controller's Port 1 using the TSXPCX1031 or TSX PCX 3030 multi-function
communication cable. This cable converts signals between EIA RS-232 and EIA
RS-485 for the TSX PCX 1031 and between USB and EIA RS-485 for the TSX PCX
3030. This cable is equipped with a 4-position rotary switch to select different modes
of operation. The switch designates the four positions as "0-3", and the appropriate
setting for TwidoSuite to Twido controller is location 2.
This connection is illustrated in the diagram below.
Port 1 PC Serial Port
RS485 TSX PCX 1031 EIA RS-232
2
1 3
0
TSX PCX 3030 Port USB PC
Note: For this cable, the DPT signal on pin 5 is not tied to 0V. This indicates to the
controller that the current connection is a TwidoSuite connection. The signal is
pulled up internally, informing the firmware executive that this is a TwidoSuite
connection.
35011386 06/2006 77
Communications
Pin outs of Male The following figure shows the pin outs of a male 8-pin miniDIN connector and of a
and Female terminal:
Connectors Mini DIN Terminal block
TWD NAC232D, TWD NAC485D TWD NAC485T
TWD NOZ485D, TWD NOZ232D TWD NOZ485T
A B SG
Pin outs Base RS485 RS485 option RS232-C Pin outs RS485
1 D1 (A+) D1 (A+) RTS A D1 (A+)
2 D0 (B-) D0 (B-) DTR B D0 (B-)
3 NC NC TXD SG 0V
4 /DE NC RXD
5 /DPT NC DSR
6 NC NC GND
7 0V 0V GND
8 5V 5V 5V
Note: Maximum total consumption for 5V mode (pin 8):
Note: There is no relation between the Twido RS485 A and B terminals and
the D(A) and D(B) terminals on other equipment such as ATV drives, XBT,
Premium, etc.
The following figure shows the pin outs of a SubD female 9-pin connector for the
TSX PCX 1031.
Pin outs RS232

1 6 1 DCD
2 RX
3 TX
4 DTR
5 SG
9 6 NC
5 7 RTS
8 CTS
9 NC
78 35011386 06/2006
Communications
Telephone Line A modem (See Communication between TwidoSuite and a Modem, p. 82)
Connection connection enables programming of and communication with the controller using a
telephone line.
The modem associated with the controller is a receiving modem connected to port
1 of the controller. The modem associated with the PC can be internal, or external
and connected to a COM serial port.
This connection is illustrated in the diagram below.
PC Serial Port
Port 1
EIA RS-232
RS485
External
Modem
modem
Telephone line
TSXPCX1031 position 2, SUB-D female

with Tx/Rx inversion connector
Note: Only one modem can be connected to port 1 of the controller.
Note: Caution. Remember to install the software provided with the modem, as
TwidoSuite only takes into account the installed modems.
35011386 06/2006 79
Communications
Ethernet
Network
Note: Although direct cable connection (using a Ethernet crossover cable) is
Connection
supported between the Twido TWDLCAE40DRF and the PC running the
TwidoSuite programming software, we do not recommend it. Therefore, you should
always favor a connection via a network Ethernet hub/switch.
The following figure shows a PC-to-Twido connection via a network Ethernet hub/switch:
Twido TWDLCAE40DRF
RJ-45 Ethernet Port PC Ethernet Network Port
Ethernet Hub/ RJ-45
Switch
SFTP Cat5 RJ45 Ethernet cable

RJ-45 male
RJ-45 male connector
connector
Note: The PC running the TwidoSuite application must be Ethernet-capable.
The Twido TWDLCAE40DRF features a RJ-45 connector to connect to the 100

BASE-TX network Ethernet with auto negotiation. It can accomodate both 100Mbps
and 10 Mbps network speeds.
The following figure shows the RJ-45 connector of the Twido controller:
The eight pins of the RJ-45 connector are arranged vertically and numbered in order from
bottom to top. The pinout for the RJ-45 connector is described in the table below:
Pinout Function Polarity
8 NC
7 NC
6 RxD (-)
5 NC
4 NC
3 RxD (+)
2 TxD (-)
1 TxD (+)
80 35011386 06/2006
Communications
Note:
z The same connector and pinout is used for both 10Base-T and 100Base-TX.
z When connecting the Twido controller to a 100Base-TX network, you should
use at least a category 5 Ethernet cable.
35011386 06/2006 81
Communications
Communication between TwidoSuite and a Modem
General A PC executing TwidoSuite can be connected to a Twido controller for transferring

applications, animating objects and executing operator mode commands. It is also
possible to connect a Twido controller to other devices, such as another Twido
controller, for establishing communication with the application process.
Twido
TD
RDRTSDTR
DCD
PWR
WESTERMO
TD-33
V24/RS-232-C
TEL.LINE
POWER
Installing the All modems the user wishes to use with TwidoSuite must be installed running
Modem Windows from your PC.
To install your modems running Windows, follow the Windows documentation.
This installation is independent from TwidoSuite.
82 35011386 06/2006
Communications
Establishing The default communication connection between TwidoSuite and the Twido
Connection controller is made by a serial communication port, using the TSX PCX 1031 cable
and a crossed adapter (see Appendix 1, p. 91).
If a modem is used to connect the PC, this must be indicated in the TwidoSuite software.
To select a connection using TwidoSuite, click Preferences.

Result:
The following dialog box appears:
Preferences Apply Restore
Default project directory Directory: C:\Program File\Schneider Electric\TwidoSuite\My project
Default projects _None

_Schneider default
_Customized C:\Program File\Schneider Electric\TwidoSuite\My project
Default program editor Ladder

List
Autosave project Yes every 15 minutes
No
Default background color
Clear Dark
Default project image Default image
Personalized image C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\My documents\
Default functional levels of applications Automatic Automatic management
The very highest
The very lowest
Manual Manual management
Level 1.0
Level 2.0
Level 2.5
Level 3.0
Connection management
Name Connection type IP / Phone Punit / Address Baud rate Parity Stop bits Timeout Break timeout
COM1 Serial COM1 Punit 5000 20
My connection 1 Serial 192.168.1.1 Direct 5000 20
Modem connection Ethernet xxxxxxxxxx 19200 None 1 5000 20
Add Modify Delete
This screen allows you to create, modify or delete a connection.

To use an existing connection, select it from the connection table in Program →
Debug → Connect task.
If you have to add, modify or delete a connection, use the "Connection
Management" table that displays the list of connections and their properties.
In this case, 2 serial ports are displayed (Com1 and Com2), as well as a modem
connection showing a TOSHIBA V.90 model configured to compose the number:
xxxxxxxxxx (modem number).
35011386 06/2006 83
Communications
Note: Compose the number in adjacent number format.
You can change the name of each connection for application maintenance purposes
(COM1 or COM2 cannot be changed).
This is how you define and select the connection you wish to use for connecting your
PC to a modem.
However, this is just part of the process for making an overall connection between
the computer and the Twido controller.
The next step involves the Twido controller. The remote Twido must be connected
to a modem.
All modems need to be initialized to establish a connection. The Twido controller
containing at least version V2.0 firmware is capable, on power-up, of sending an
adapted string to the modem, if the modem is configured in the application.
84 35011386 06/2006
Communications
Configuring the The procedure for configuring a modem in a Twido controller is as follows.
Modem To add a modem to an open application, follow the procedure described in (See
Positioning a Modem, TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help)
Once the modem is configured on port 1, the properties must be defined. In the
Describe step, double-click the Modem thumbnail .

Result: The Modem Feature (See Modem Configuration, TwidoSuite Programming
Software, Online Help) dialog box appears. The Modem properties dialog box lets
you either select a known modem, create a new modem, or modify a modem
configuration.
Illustration of the Modem Feature dialog box:
Configuration
Modem
Types: My Modem
Hayes reset command: ATEOQ1&B1&DO&HO&IO&

R1&SOSO
New Reset Default Apply
The selected configuration corresponds to the one read in the controller: the Hayes
initialization command, then read, is displayed in Hayes standard format.
Note: The modem is completely managed by the Twido controller through port 1.
This means you can connect a modem to communication port 2, but in this case all
of the modem’s operating modes and its initialization sequence must be performed
manually, and cannot be performed in the same way as with communication port 1.
You can select a previously-defined modem, or create a new one by clicking "New".
35011386 06/2006 85
Communications
Illustration of the Add/Modify Modem dialog box:

Configuration
Add/Modify Modem
Types: My Modem
Hayes reset command: ATEQ1 xxxxxxxxx
New Reset Default Apply
Then give the new profile a name and complete the Hayes initialization commands
as described in the modem documentation.
In the figure above, "xxxxxx" represents the initialization sequence you must enter
to prepare the modem for suitable communication, i.e. the baud rate, parity, stop bit,
and receive mode.
To complete the sequence, please refer to your modem documentation.
The maximum string length is: 127 characters.
When your application is complete, or at least when communication port 1 is fully
described, transfer the application using a "point to point connection".
The Twido controller is now ready to be connected to a PC executing TwidoSuite via modems.
86 35011386 06/2006
Communications
Connection Once TwidoSuite and the Twido controller are ready, establish connection as follows:
Sequence
Step Action
1 Power-up the Twido controller and modem.
2 Start your computer and run TwidoSuite.
3
Select Preferences, and select a modem connection from the "Connection
Management" table, (for example, "My modem" or the name you have given to your
modem connection – see "creation of a connection").
4 Connect TwidoSuite
Note: If you want to use your modem connection all the time, click "file",
"preferences", and select "my modem" (or the name you have given it). TwidoSuite
will now memorize this preference.
Operating Modes The Twido controller sends the initialization string to the connected, powered-up
modem. When a modem is configured in the Twido application, the controller first
sends an "AT&F" command to establish whether the modem is connected. If the
controller receives an answer, the initialization string is sent to the modem.
35011386 06/2006 87
Communications
Internal, External If you are communicating with a Twido controller within your company premises, you
and International can use just the line extension needed to dial, such as: 8445
Calls Connection management
Name Connection type IP / Phone Punit / Address Baud Rate Parity Stop bits Timeout Break Timeout
USB Serial USB Punit 5000 20
sdfsdfsdf Ethernet 192.168.1.1 244 5000 20
My connection 1 Ethernet 192.168.1.1 Direct 5000 20
Modem connection MODEM: TOSHIBA 8445 19200 None 1 5000 20
Add Modify Delete
Apply Restore
If you are using an internal switchboard to dial telephone numbers outside your
company and you have to first press "0" or "9" before the number, use this syntax:
0,xxxxxxxxxx or 9,xxxxxxxxxx
Modem connection MODEM: TOSHIBA 0,xxxxxxxxxx 19200 None 1 5000 20
Add Modify Delete
Apply Restore
For international calls, the syntax is: +1xxxxxxxxxx, for example. And if you are using
a switchboard: 0,+ 1xxxxxxxxxx
Modem connection MODEM: TOSHIBA 0,+1xxxxxxxxxx 19200 None 1 5000 20
Add Modify Delete
Apply Restore
88 35011386 06/2006
Communications
Frequently When your communication has been established for a few minutes, you can
Asked Questions experience some communication errors. In this case, you must adjust the
communication parameters.
TwidoSuite uses a modbus driver to communicate via serial ports or internal
modems. When communication starts, the modbus driver is visible in the toolbar.
Double-click on the modbus driver icon to open the window. You now have access
to the modbus driver parameters, and the "runtime" tab gives you information on the
frames exchanged with the remote controller.
If the "Number of timeouts" increases or is other than 0, change the value using
"Connection management" table, accessible using TwidoSuite by clicking
Preferences. Click on the "timeout" field, then click the modification button and
enter a new, higher value. The default value is "5000", in milliseconds.
Try again with a new connection. Adjust the value until your connection stabilizes.
MODBUS Driver - MODBUS01
Configuration Runtime Debug About
Communication
Mode RTU
Connections 1
Frames Sent 17
Bytes Sent 158
Frames Received 17
Bytes Received 404
Number of Timeouts 0
Checksum Errors 0
Reset
Hide
35011386 06/2006 89
Communications
Examples z Example 1: TwidoSuite connected to a TWD LMDA 20DRT (Windows 98 SE).

z PC: Toshiba Portege 3490CT running Windows 98,
z Modem (internal on PC): Toshiba internal V.90 modem,
z Twido Controller: TWD LMDA 20DRT version 2.0,
z Modem (connected to Twido): Type Westermo TD-33 / V.90, reference SR1
MOD01, available from the new Twido catalog (September 03) (see Appendix
2, p. 92),
(North American customers only: The modem type that is available in your
area is TD-33/V.90 US),
z Cable: TSX PCX 1031, connected to Twido communication port 1, and an
adaptor: 9 pin male / 9 pin male, in order to cross Rx and Tx during connection
between the Westermo modem and the Twido controller (see Appendix 1,
p. 91). You can also use the TSX PCX 1130 cable (RS485/232 conversion and
Rx/Tx crossing).
Toshiba Portege
3490CT Cable:
Modem integrated TSX PCX 1031
Crossed
adaptor
TDRD
RTS
DTR
DCD
PWR
WESTERMO
TD-33
Westermo TD-33
SR1 MOD01
V24/RS-232-C
TEL.LINE
POWER
The first test involves using 2 analog telephone lines internal to the company, and
not using the entire number – just the extension (hence only 4 digits for the internal
Toshiba V.90 modem telephone number).
For this test, the connection parameters (TwidoSuite "preferences" then
"Connection management") were established with their default value, with a timeout
of 5000 and break timeout of 20.
z Example 2: TwidoSuite connected to TWD LMDA 20DRT (windows XP Pro)
z PC: Compaq Pentium 4, 2.4GHz,
z Modem: Lucent Win modem, PCI bus,
z Twido Controller: TWD LMDA 20DRT version 2.0,
z Modem (connected to Twido): Type WESTERMO TD-33 / V.90, reference
SR1 MOD01, available from the new Twido catalog (September 03) (see
Appendix 2, p. 92),
(North American customers only: The modem type that is available in your
area is TD-33/V.90 US),
90 35011386 06/2006
Communications
z Cable: TSX PCX 1031, connected to Twido communication port 1, and an

adaptor: 9 pin male / 9 pin male, in order to cross Rx and Tx during connection
between the Westermo modem and the Twido controller (see Appendix 1,
p. 91). You can also use the TSX PCX 1130 cable (RS485/232 conversion and
Rx/Tx crossing).
Compaq 2.4 GHz

Lucent with modem Cable:
TSX PCX 1031
Crossed
adaptor
TD
RDRTSDTR
DCD
PWR
WESTERMO
TD-33
Westermo TD-33
SR1 MOD01
V24/RS-232-C
TEL.LINE
POWER
The first test involves using two analog telephone lines internal to the company, and
not using the entire number – just the extension (hence only 4 digits for the internal
Toshiba V.90 modem telephone number).
For this test, the connection parameters (TwidoSuite "preferences" then
"Connection management") were established with their default value, with a timeout
of 5000 and break timeout of 20.
Appendix 1 Crossed adaptor for cable TSX PCX 1031 and Westermo TD-33 modem:
5
1
9
6
6
9
1
35011386 06/2006 91
Communications
Appendix 2 Modem Westermo TD-33, Schneider reference number SR1 MOD01(1). This
modem manages four DIP switches, which must all be set to OFF:
Factory Settings
ON
Use stored configuration (speed & format etc.)
Disable DTR Hotcall, Auto Baud
1 2 3 4
Note:
1. Certain products may not be compatible and/or available in all areas. Please
contact your local Schneider representative for availability.
92 35011386 06/2006
Communications
Appendix 3 Wavecom WMOD2B modem, Schneider reference number SR1 MOD02(1) double
band (900/1800Hz):
Note:
Appendix 4 Reference numbers of the products used in this document:

z Twido product: TWD LMDA 20DRT,
z TwidoSuite software: TWD SPU 1002 V10M,
z TSX PCX 1031 cable,
z TSX PCX 1130 cable,
z RTU modem: Westermo TD-33 / V90 SR1 MOD01(1),
z GSM modem: Wavecom WMOD2B SR1 MOD02(1).
Note:
35011386 06/2006 93
Communications
Remote Link Communications
Introduction The remote link is a high-speed master/slave bus designed to communicate a small
amount of data between the master controller and up to seven remote (slave)
controllers. Application or I/O data is transferred, depending on the configuration of
the remote controllers. A mixture of remote controller types is possible, where some
can be remote I/O and some can be peers.
Note: The master controller contains information regarding the address of a remote I/
O. It does not know which specific controller is at the address. Therefore, the master
cannot validate that all the remote inputs and outputs used in the user application
actually exist. Take care that these remote inputs or outputs actually exist.
Note: The remote I/O bus and the protocol used is proprietary and no third party
devices are allowed on the network.
CAUTION
UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
z Be sure that there is only one master controller on a remote link and that each
slave has a unique address. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to
corrupted data or unexpected and ambiguous results.
z Be sure that all slaves have unique addresses. No two slaves should have the
same address. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to corrupted data or
unexpected and ambiguous results.
Note: The remote link requires an EIA RS-485 connection and can only run on one
communications port at a time.
94 35011386 06/2006
Communications
Hardware A remote link must use a minimum 3-wire EIA RS-485 port. It can be configured to
Configuration use either the first or an optional second port if present.
Note: Only one communication port at time can be configured as a remote link.
The table below lists the devices that can be used:

Remote Port Specifications
TWDLC•A10/16/24DRF, 1 Base controller equipped with a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a miniDIN connector.
TWDLCA•40DRF,
TWDLMDA20/40DUK,
TWDLMDA20/40DTK,
TWDLMDA20DRT
TWDNOZ485D 2 Communication module equipped with a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a miniDIN
connector.
Note: This module is only available for the Modular controllers. When the module
is attached, the controller cannot have an Operator Display expansion module.
TWDNOZ485T 2 Communication module equipped with a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a terminal.
TWDNAC485D 2 Communication adapter equipped with a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a miniDIN
connector.
Note: This adapter is only available for the Compact 16, 24 and 40 I/O controllers
and the Operator Display expansion module.
TWDNAC485T 2 Communication adapter equipped with a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a terminal.
TWDXCPODM 2 Operator Display expansion module equipped with a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a
miniDIN connector or a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a terminal.
is attached, the controller cannot have a Communication expansion module.
Note: You can only check the presence and configuration (RS232 or RS485) of
port 2 at power-up or reset by the firmware executive program.
35011386 06/2006 95
Communications
Cable
Connection to Note: The DPT signal on pin 5 must be tied to 0V on pin 7 in order to signify the
Each Device use of remote link communications. When this signal is not tied to ground, the
Twido controller as either the master or slave will default to a mode of attempting
to establish communications with TwidoSuite.
Note: The DPT to 0V connection is only necessary if you are connected to a base
controller on Port 1.
The cable connections made to each remote device are shown below.
Mini-DIN connection
Twido Remote Remote

controller peripheral ... peripheral
D1(A+) D0(B-) 0V DPT D1(A+) D0(B-) 0V DPT D1(A+) D0(B-) 0V DPT
1 2 7 5
Terminal block connection
Master Remote Remote

controller controller controller
A(+) B(-) 0V A(+) B(-) 0V A(+) B(-) 0V
A B SG
96 35011386 06/2006
Communications
Software There must be only one master controller defined on the remote link. In addition, each
Configuration remote controller must maintain a unique slave address. Multiple masters or slaves using
identical addresses can either corrupt transmissions or create ambiguity.
CAUTION
Be sure that there is only one master controller on a remote link and that each
slave has a unique address. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to
Master The master controller is configured using TwidoSuite to manage a remote link
Controller network of up to seven remote controllers. These seven remote controllers can be
Configuration configured either as remote I/Os or as peer controllers. The address of the master
configured using TwidoSuite corresponds to address 0.
To configure a controller as a Master Controller, use TwidoSuite to configure port 1
or port 2 as remote links and select the address 0 (Master).
Then, from the "Add remote controller" window, you can specify the slave controllers
either as remote I/O, or as peer controllers, as well as their addresses.
Remote A remote controller is configured using TwidoSuite, by setting port 1 or 2 as a remote

Controller link or by assigning the port an address from 1 to 7.
Configuration The table below summarizes the differences and constraints of each of these types
of remote controller configurations:
Type Application Program Data Access
Remote I/O No %I and %Q
Not even a simple "END" statement Only the local I/O of the controller is accessible
RUN mode is coupled to the Master's. (and not its I/O extension).
Peer controller Yes %INW and %QNW
Run mode is independent of the Master's. A maximum of 4 input words and 4 output words
can be transmitted to and from each peer.
35011386 06/2006 97
Communications
Remote The update cycle of the remote link is not synchronized with the master controller's
Controller Scan scan. The communications with the remote controllers is interrupt driven and
Synchronization happens as a background task in parallel with the running of the master controller's
scan. At the end of the scan cycle, the most up to date values are read into the
application data to be used for the next program execution. This processing is the
same for remote I/O and peer controllers.
Any controller can check for general link activity using system bit %S111. But to
achieve synchronization, a master or peer will have to use system bit %S110. This
bit is set to 1 when a complete update cycle has taken place. The application
program is responsible for resetting this to 0.
The master can enable or disable the remote link using system bit %S112.
Controllers can check on the proper configuration and correct operation of the
remote link using %S113. The DPT signal on Port 1 (used to determine if TwidoSuite
is connected) is sensed and reported on %S100.
All these are summarized in the following table:
System Bit Status Indication
%S100 0 master/slave: DPT not active (TwidoSuite cable NOT connected)
1 master/slave: DPT active (TwidoSuite cable connected)
%S110 0 master/slave: set to 0 by the application
1 master: all remote link exchanges completed (remote I/O only)
slave: exchange with master completed
%S111 0 master: single remote link exchange completed
slave: single remote link exchange detected
1 master: single remote link exchange in progress
slave: single remote link exchange detected
%S112 0 master: remote link disabled
1 master: remote link enabled
%S113 0 master/slave: remote link configuration/operation OK
1 master: remote link configuration/operation error
slave: remote link operation error
Master If a master controller restarts, one of the following events happens:

Controller z A cold start (%S0 = 1) forces a re-initialization of the communications.
Restart z A warm start (%S1 = 1) forces a re-initialization of the communications.
z In Stop mode, the master continues communicating with the slaves.
98 35011386 06/2006
Communications
Slave Controller If a slave controller restarts, one of the following events happens:
Restart z A cold start (%S0 = 1) forces a re-initialization of the communications.
z A warm start (%S1 = 1) forces a re-initialization of the communications.
z In Stop mode, the slave continues communicating with the master. If the master
indicates a Stop state:
z The remote I/Os apply a Stop state.
z A peer controller continues in its current state.
Master When the master controller enters Stop mode, all slave devices continue
Controller Stop communicating with the master. When the master indicates a Stop is requested,
then a remote I/O controller will Stop, but peer controllers will continue in their
current Run or Stop state.
Remote I/O Data The remote controller configured to be a remote I/O does not have or execute its
Access own application program. The remote controller's base discrete inputs and outputs
are a simple extension of the master controller's. The application must only use the
full three digit addressing mechanism provided.
Note: The module number is always zero for remote I/O.
Illustration
Remote Controller Address
Modular Number
Channel Number
%Q2.0.2
%I7.0.4
To communicate with remote I/O, the master controller uses the standard input and
output notation of %I and %Q. To access the third output bit of the remote I/O
configured at address 2, instruction %Q2.0.2 is used. Similarly, to read the fifth input
bit of the remote I/O configured at location 7, instruction %I7.0.4 is used.
Note: The master is restricted to accessing only the discrete I/O that is part of the
remote’s local I/O. No analog or expansion I/O can be transferred, unless you use
peer communications.
35011386 06/2006 99
Communications
Illustration
Remote link
Master controller Remote I/O Remote I/O

Address 0 Address 2 Address 4
%I2.0.0 %I0.0.0
... ...
%I2.0.23 %I0.0.23
%Q2.0.0 %Q0.0.0
... ...
%Q2.0.15 %Q0.0.15
%I4.0.0 %I0.0.0
... ...
%I4.0.23 %I0.0.23
%Q4.0.0 %Q0.0.0
... ...
%Q4.0.15 %Q0.0.15
100 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Peer Controller To communicate with peer controllers, the master uses network words %INW and
Data Access %QNW to exchange data. Each peer on the network is accessed by its remote
address "j" using words %INWj.k and %QNWj.k. Each peer controller on the network
uses %INW0.0 to %INW0.3 and %QNW0.0 to %QNW0.3 to access data on the
master. Network words are updated automatically when the controllers are in Run
or Stop mode.
The example below illustrates the exchange of a master with two configured peer
controllers.
Remote link
Master controller Peer controller Peer controller

Address 0 Address 1 Address 3
%INW1.0 %QNW0.0
... ...
%INW1.3 %QNW0.3
%QNW1.0 %INW0.0
... ...
%QNW1.3 %IWN0.3
%QNW0.0
%INW3.0 ...
... %QNW0.3
%INW3.3
%INW0.0
%QNW3.0
...
...
%INW0.3
%QNW3.3
There is no peer-to-peer messaging within the remote link. The master application
program can be used to manage the network words, in order to transfer information
between the remote controllers, in effect using the master as a bridge.
35011386 06/2006 101

Communications
Status In addition to the system bits explained earlier, the master maintains the presence
Information and configuration status of remote controllers. This action is performed in system
words %SW111 and %SW113. Either the remote or the master can acquire the
value of the last error that occurred while communicating on the remote link in
system word %SW112.
System Words Use

%SW111 Remote link status: two bits for each remote controller (master only)
x0-6 0-Remote controller 1-7 not present
1-Remote controller 1-7 present
x8-14 0-Remote I/O detected at Remote controller 1-7
1-Peer controller detected at Remote controller 1-7
%SW112 Remote Link configuration/operation error code
0 - operations are successful
1 - timeout detected (slave)
2 - checksum error detected (slave)
3 - configuration mismatch (slave)
%SW113 Remote link configuration: two bits for each remote controller (master only)
x0-6 0-Remote controller 1-7 not configured
1-Remote controller 1-7 configured
x8-14 0-Remote I/O configured as remote controller 1-7
1-Peer controller configured as remote controller 1-7
102 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Remote Link To configure a Remote Link, you must:

Example 1. Configure the hardware.
2. Wire the controllers.
3. Connect the communications cable between the PC to the controllers.
4. Configure the software.
5. Write an application.
The diagrams below illustrate the use of the remote link with remote I/O and a peer
controller.
Step 1: Configure the Hardware:
I0.0
I0.1
Master controller Remote I/O Peer controller
Q0.0
Q0.1
The hardware configuration is three base controllers of any type. Port 1 is used for
two communication modes. One mode is to configure and transfer the application
program with TwidoSuite. The second mode is for the Remote Link network. If
available, an optional Port 2 on any of the controllers can be used, but a controller
only supports a single Remote Link.
Note: In this example, the two first inputs on the Remote I/O are hard wired to the
first two outputs.
Step 2: Wire the controllers

Mini-DIN connection
Master Remote controller Peer controller

controller Address 1 ... Address 2
A(+) B(-) GND DPT A(+) B(-) GND DPT A(+) B(-) GND DPT
1 2 7 5
Master Remote controller Peer controller

controller Address 1 ... Address 2
A(+) B(-) 0V A(+) B(-) 0V A(+) B(-) 0V
A B SG
35011386 06/2006 103

Communications
Connect the A(+) and B(-) signal wires together. And at each controller, the DPT
signal is tied to ground. Although tying the signal to the ground is not required for
use with a remote link on Port 2 (optional cartridge or communication module), it is
good practice.
Step 3: Connect the Communications Cable between the PC and Controllers:
Master Peer PC Serial Port
controller Remote I/O controller TSX PCX 1031 EIA RS-232
2
1 3
0
TSX PCX 3030 USB Port
The TSXPCX1031 or TSX PCX 3030 multi-function programming cable is used to

communicate with each of the three base controllers. Be sure that the cable is on
switch position 2. In order to program each of the controllers, a point-to-point
communication with each controller will need to be to established. To establish this
communication: connect to Port 1 of the first controller, transfer the configuration
and application data, and set the controller to the run state. Repeat this procedure
for each controller.
Note: The cable needs to be moved after each controller configuration and
application transfer.
Step 4: Configure the Software:

Each of the three controllers uses TwidoSuite to create a configuration, and if
appropriate, the application program.
For the master controller, edit the controller communication setup to set the protocol
to "Remote Link" and the Address to "0 (Master)".
Controller comm. settings
Type: Remote link
Address: 0 (Master)
Configure the remote controller on the master by adding a "Remote I/O" at address
"1" and a "Peer PLC" at address "2".
Add Remote Controllers
Controller Usage: Remote I/O

Remote Address: 1
Controller Usage: Peer controller

Remote Address: 2
104 35011386 06/2006

Communications
For the controller configured as a remote I/O, verify that the controller
communication setup is set to "Remote Link" and the address is set to "1".
Type: Remote link
Address: 1
For the controller configured as peer, verify that the controller communication setup
is set to "Remote Link" and the address is set to "2".
Type: Remote link
Address: 2
Step 5: Write the applications:

For the Master controller, write the following application program:
LD 1
[%MW0 := %MW0 +1]

[%QNW2.0 := %MW0]
[%MW1 := %INW2.0]
LD %I0.0
ST %Q1.00.0
LD %I1.0.0
ST %Q0.0
LD %I0.1
ST %Q1.0.1
LD %I1.0.1
ST %Q0.1
For the controller configured as a remote I/O, do not write any application program.
For the controller configured as peer, write the following application:
LD 1
[%QNW0.0 := %INW0.0]
In this example, the master application increments an internal memory word and
communicates this to the peer controller using a single network word. The peer
controller takes the word received from the master and echoes it back. In the master,
a different memory word receives and stores this transmission.
For communication with the remote I/O controller, the master sends its local inputs
to the remote I/O's outputs. With the external I/O hard wiring of the remote I/O, the
signals are returned and retrieved by the master.
35011386 06/2006 105

Communications
ASCII Communications
Introduction ASCII protocol provides Twido controllers a simple half-duplex character mode protocol
to transmit and/or receive data with a simple device. This protocol is supported using the
EXCHx instruction and controlled using the %MSGx function block.
Three types of communications are possible with the ASCII Protocol:
z Transmission Only
z Transmission/Reception
z Reception Only
The maximum size of frames transmitted and/or received using the EXCHx
instruction is 256 bytes.
106 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Hardware An ASCII link (see system bits %S103 and %S104 (See System Bits (%S), p. 564))
Configuration can be established on either the EIA RS-232 or EIA RS-485 port and can run on as
many as two communications ports at a time.
TWDLC•A10/16/24DRF, 1 Base controller equipped with a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a miniDIN connector.
TWDLCA•40DRF,
TWDLMDA20/40DTK,
TWDLMDA20DRT
connector.
connector.
connector.
connector.
TWDNAC485T 2 Communication adapter equipped with a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a terminal.
miniDIN connector, a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a miniDIN connector and a 3-wire
EIA RS-485 port with a terminal.
Note: You can only check the presence and configuration (RS232 or RS485) of
port 2 at power-up or reset by the firmware executive program.
35011386 06/2006 107

Communications
Nominal Cabling Nominal cable connections are illustrated below for both the EIA RS-232 and the
EIA RS-485 types.
Note: If port 1 is used on the Twido controller, the DPT signal on pin 5 must be tied
to 0V on pin 7. This signifies to the Twido controller that the communications
through port 1 is ASCII and is not the protocol used to communicate with the
TwidoSuite software.
Cable connections to each device are illustrated below.

Mini-DIN connection
RS-232 EIA cable
Twido Remote
controller peripheral
TXD RXD GND TXD RXD GND
3 4 7
RS-485 EIA cable
Twido (Master) Remote Remote

D1(A+) D0(B-) GND DPT D1(A+) D0(B-) GND D1(A+) D0(B-) GND
1 2 7 5
Master Remote Remote

controller peripheral peripheral
A(+) B(-) 0V A(+) B(-) 0V A(+) B(-) 0V
A B SG
Software To configure the controller to use a serial connection to send and receive characters
Configuration using the ASCII protocol, you must:
Step Description
1 Configure the serial port for ASCII using TwidoSuite.
2 Create in your application a transmission/reception table that will be used by the
EXCHx instruction.
108 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Configuring the A Twido controller can use its primary port 1 or an optionally configured port 2 to use
Port the ASCII protocol. To configure a serial port for ASCII:
Step Action
1 Define any additional communication adapters or modules configured to the base.
2 Declare the ASCII network in the Describe step of TwidoSuite (see (See How to
Create a Network (Modbus Example), TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online
Help) and (See How to Create a Network (Modbus Example), TwidoSuite
Programming Software, Online Help) for ASCII).
3 Select Port 1 (or Port 2 if installed) to configure in the Describe window (see (See
Configuring an Object, TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help)).
4 To configure the ASCII element, use any of the two methods:
z Click the Configure icon from the toolbar then select the ASCII element in the
describe graphic,
z Double click the ASCII element in the describe graphic.
5 To bring up the Feature dialog box (See Configuring an Object, TwidoSuite

Programming Software, Online Help) associated to the ASCII link hardware
parameters, use any of the two methods:
z Click the Configure icon from the toolbar then select the ASCII link in the describe
graphic,
z Double click the ASCII link in the describe graphic.
6 Configure the Feature dialog box that appears, as explained in the subsequent
steps:.
Configuration
Network
Type: Name: ASCII1
ASCII
Parameters
Baudrate: 19200 Stop Bits: 1
Data Bits: 8 (RTU) Response Timeout: 10 x 100 ms
Parity: Even Inter-frame Delay: 2 ms
Cancel Advanced... OK
7 Set the communication parameters.

8 Click Advanced button to set the advanced parameters.
35011386 06/2006 109

Communications
Configuring the The maximum size of the transmitted and/or received frames is 256 bytes. The word
Transmission/ table associated with the EXCHx instruction is composed of the transmission and
Reception table reception control tables.
for ASCII mode
Most significant byte Least significant byte
Control table Command Length (transmission/reception)
Reserved (0) Reserved (0)
Transmission table Transmitted Byte 1 Transmitted Byte 2
...
...
Transmitted Byte n
Transmitted Byte n+1
Reception table Received Byte 1 Received Byte 2
...
...
Received Byte p
Received Byte p+1
Control table The Length byte contains the length of the transmission table in bytes (250 max.),
which is overwritten by the number of characters received at the end of the
reception, if reception is requested.
The Command byte must contain one of the following:
z 0: Transmission only
z 1: Send/receive
z 2: Reception Only
110 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Transmission/ When in Transmit Only mode, the Control and Transmission tables are filled in prior to
reception tables executing the EXCHx instruction, and can be of type %KW or %MW. No space is
required for the reception of characters in Transmission only mode. Once all bytes are
transmitted, %MSGx.D is set to 1, and a new EXCHx instruction can be executed.
When in Transmit/Receive mode, the Control and Transmission tables are filled in
prior to executing the EXCHx instruction, and must be of type %MW. Space for up
to 256 reception bytes is required at the end of the Transmission table. Once all
bytes are transmitted, the Twido controller switches to reception mode and waits to
receive any bytes.
When in Reception only mode, the Control table is filled in prior to executing the
EXCHx instruction, and must be of type %MW. Space for up to 256 reception bytes
is required at the end of the Control table. Twido controller immediately enters the
reception mode and waits to receive any bytes.
Reception ends when end of frame bytes used have been received, or the
Reception table is full. In this case, an error (receive table overflowed) appears in
the word %SW63 and %SW64. If a non-zero timeout is configured, reception ends
when the timeout is completed. If a zero timeout value is selected, there is no
reception timeout. Therefore to stop reception, %MSGx.R input must be activated.
Message The language offers two services for the communication:

Exchange z EXCHx instruction: to transmit/receive messages
z %MSGx Function Block: to control the message exchanges.
Twido controller uses the protocol configured for that port when processing an
EXCHx instruction.
Note: Each communications port can be configured for different protocols or the
same. The EXCHx instruction or %MSGx function block for each communications
port is accessed by appending the port number (1 or 2).
35011386 06/2006 111

Communications
EXCHx The EXCHx instruction allows the Twido controller to send and/or receive
Instruction information to/from ASCII devices. The user defines a table of words (%MWi:L or
%KWi:L) containing control information and the data to be sent and/or received (up
to 256 bytes in transmission and/or reception). The format for the word table is
described earlier.
A message exchange is performed using the EXCHx instruction:
Syntax: [EXCHx %MWi:L]
where: x = port number (1 or 2)
L = number of words in the control words and transmission and
reception tables
The Twido controller must finish the exchange from the first EXCHx instruction
before a second can be launched. The %MSGx function block must be used when
sending several messages.
The processing of the EXCHx list instruction occurs immediately, with any
transmissions started under interrupt control (reception of data is also under
interrupt control), which is considered background processing.
112 35011386 06/2006

Communications
%MSGx Function The use of the %MSGx function block is optional; it can be used to manage data
Block exchanges. The %MSGx function block has three purposes:
z Communications error checking
The error checking verifies that the parameter L (length of the Word table)
programmed with the EXCHx instruction is large enough to contain the length of
the message to be sent. This is compared with the length programmed in the
least significant byte of the first word of the word table.
z Coordination of multiple messages
To ensure the coordination when sending multiple messages, the %MSGx
function block provides the information required to determine when transmission
of a previous message is complete.
z Transmission of priority messages
The %MSGx function block allows current message transmissions to be stopped
in order to allow the immediate sending of an urgent message.
The %MSGx function block has one input and two outputs associated with it:
Input/Output Definition Description
R Reset input Set to 1: re-initializes communication or resets block
(%MSGx.E = 0 and %MSGx.D = 1).
%MSGx.D Communication 0: Request in progress.
complete 1: communication done if end of transmission, end
character received, error, or reset of block.
%MSGx.E Error 0: message length OK and link OK.
1: if bad command, table incorrectly configured, incorrect
character received (speed, parity, and so on.), or
reception table full.
Limitations It is important to note the following limitations:

z Port 2 availability and type (see %SW7) is checked only at power-up or reset
z Any message processing on Port 1 is aborted when the TwidoSuite is connected
z EXCHx or %MSG can not be processed on a port configured as Remote Link
z EXCHx aborts active Modbus Slave processing
z Processing of EXCHx instructions is not re-tried in the event of an error
z Reset input (R) can be used to abort EXCHx instruction reception processing
z EXCHx instructions can be configured with a time out to abort reception
z Multiple messages are controlled via %MSGx.D
35011386 06/2006 113

Communications
Error and If an error occurs when using the EXCHx instruction, bits %MSGx.D and %MSGx.E
Operating Mode are set to 1 and system word %SW63 contains the error code for Port 1, and
Conditions %SW64 contains the error code for Port 2.
System Words Use
%SW63 EXCH1 error code:
0 - operation was successful
1 – number of bytes to be transmitted is too great (> 250)
2 - transmission table too small
3 - word table too small
4 - receive table overflowed
5 - time-out elapsed
6 - transmission error
7 - bad command within table
8 - selected port not configured/available
9 - reception error
10 - cannot use %KW if receiving
11 - transmission offset larger than transmission table
12 - reception offset larger than reception table
13 - controller stopped EXCH processing
%SW64 EXCH2 error code: See %SW63.
Consequence of If a controller restarts, one of the following events happens:

Restart on the z A warm start (%S1 = 1) forces a re-initialization of the communications.
Communication z In Stop, the controller stops all ASCII communications.
114 35011386 06/2006

Communications
ASCII Link To configure an ASCII Link, you must:

Example 1. Configure the hardware.
2. Connect the ASCII communications cable.
3. Configure the port.
5. Initialize the Animation Table Editor.
The diagram below illustrates the use of the ASCII communications with a Terminal
Emulator on a PC.
RS-232 EIA Port 2 Serial COM 2

Twido
controller
The hardware configuration is two serial connections from the PC to a Twido

controller with an optional EIA RS-232 Port 2. On a Modular controller, the optional
Port 2 is a TWDNOZ232D or a TWDNAC232D in the TWDXCPODM. On the
Compact controller, the optional Port 2 is a TWDNAC232D.
To configure the controller, connect the TSXPCX1031 cable (not shown) to Port 1
of the Twido controller. Next, connect the cable to the COM 1 port of the PC. Be sure
that the switch is in position 2. Finally, connect the COM 2 port of the PC to the
optional EIA RS-232 Port 2 on the Twido controller. The wiring schematic is provided
in the next step.
Step 2: ASCII Communications Cable (EIA RS-232) Wiring Schematic:
Twido Personal
controller computer
TXD RXD GND TXD RXD GND
3 4 7 3 2 5
The minimum number of wires used in an ASCII communications cable is 3. Cross

the transmit and receive signals.
Note: On the PC side of the cable, additional connections (such as Data Terminal
Ready and Data Set Ready) may be needed to satisfy the handshaking. No
additional connections are required to satisfy the Twido controller.
35011386 06/2006 115

Communications
Step 3: Port Configuration:

Hardware -> Add Option Terminal Emulator on a PC
TWDNOZ232D
Port: COM2
Serial Port 2
Baud Rate: 19200
Data: 8 Bit
Protocol ASCII
Parity: None
Address Stop: 1 Bit
Baud Rate 19200 Flow control: None
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bit 1
Response Timeout (x100ms) 100
Time between frames (ms)
Start character
1st end character 65
2nd end character
Stop on silence (ms)
Stop on the number of received bytes
Use a simple Terminal Emulator application on the PC to configure the COM2 port
and to ensure that there is no flow control.
Use TwidoSuite to configure the controller’s port. First, the hardware option is
configured. In this example, the TWDNOZ232D is added to the Modular base controller.
Second, the Controller Communication Setup is initialized with all of the same
parameter settings as the Terminal Emulator on the PC. In this example, capital
letter "A" is chosen for "1st end character", in order to terminate character reception.
A 10 second timeout is chosen for "Response Timeout" parameter. Only one of
these two parameters will be invoked, depending on whichever happens first.
Step 4: Write the application:

LD 1
[%MW10 := 16#0104 ]
[%MW11 := 16#0000 ]
[%MW12 := 16#4F4B ]
[%MW13 := 16#0A0D ]
LD 1
AND %MSG2.D
[EXCH2 %MW10:8]
LD %MSG2.E
ST %Q0.0
END
116 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Use TwidoSuite to create an application program with three primary parts. First,
initialize the Control and Transmission tables to use for the EXCH instruction. In this
example, a command is set up to both send and receive data. The amount of data
to send will be set to 4 bytes, as defined in the application, followed by the end of
frame character used (in this case, the first end character "A"). Start and end
characters do not display in the Animation table, where only data characters show
up. Anyway, those characters are automatically transmitted or checked at reception
(by %SW63 and %SW64), when used.
Next, check the status bit associated with %MSG2 and issue the EXCH2 instruction only
if the port is ready. For the EXCH2 instruction, a value of 8 words is specified. There are
2 Control words (%MW10 and %MW11), 2 words to be used for transmit information
(%MW12 and %MW13), and 4 words to receive data (%MW14 through %MW16).
Finally, the error status of the %MSG2 is sensed and stored on the first output bit on
the local base controller I/O. Additional error checking using %SW64 could also be
added to make this more accurate.
Step 5: Initialize the Animation Table Editor:
Address Current Retained Format
1 %MW10 0104 Hexadecimal
2 %MW11 0000 Hexadecimal
3 %MW12 4F4B Hexadecimal
4 %MW13 0A0D Hexadecimal
5 %MW14 TW ASCII
6 %MW15 ID ASCII
7 %MW16 O ASCII
The final step is to download this application controller and run it. Initialize an
Animation Table Editor to animate and display the %MW10 through %MW16 words.
On the Terminal Emulator, characters "O- K - CR - LF - A" can be displayed as many
times as the EXCH block response timeout has elapsed. On the Terminal Emulator,
type in "T - W - I - D - O - A". This information is exchanged with Twido controller and
displayed in the Animation Table Editor.
35011386 06/2006 117

Communications
Modbus Communications
Introduction The Modbus protocol is a master-slave protocol that allows for one, and only one,
master to request responses from slaves, or to act based on the request. The master
can address individual slaves, or can initiate a broadcast message to all slaves.
Slaves return a message (response) to queries that are addressed to them
individually. Responses are not returned to broadcast queries from the master.
CAUTION
z Be sure that there is only one Modbus master controller on the bus and that
each Modbus slave has a unique address. Failure to observe this precaution
may lead to corrupted data or unexpected and ambiguous results.
z Be sure that all Modbus slaves have unique addresses. No two slaves should
have the same address. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to
118 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Hardware A Modbus link can be established on either the EIA RS-232 or EIA RS-485 port and
Configuration can run on as many as two communications ports at a time. Each of these ports can
be assigned its own Modbus address, using system bit %S101 and system words
%SW101 and %SW102 (See System Bits (%S), p. 564).
TWDLC•A10/16/24DRF, 1 Base controller supporting a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a miniDIN connector.
TWDLCA•40DRF,
TWDLMDA20/40DTK,
TWDLMDA20DRT
TWDNOZ232D 2 Communication module equipped with a 3-wire EIA RS-232 port with a miniDIN connector.
TWDNOZ485D 2 Communication module equipped with a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a miniDIN connector.
TWDNAC232D 2 Communication adapter equipped with a 3-wire EIA RS-232 port with a miniDIN connector.
TWDNAC485D 2 Communication adapter equipped with a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a miniDIN connector.
TWDNAC485T 2 Communication adapter equipped with a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a terminal connector.
miniDIN connector, a 3-wire EIA RS-485 port with a miniDIN connector and a 3-wire
EIA RS-485 port with a terminal.
Note: The presence and configuration (RS232 or RS485) of Port 2 is checked at

power-up or at reset by the firmware executive program.
35011386 06/2006 119

Communications
Nominal Cabling Nominal cable connections are illustrated below for both the EIA RS-232 and the
EIA RS-485 types.
Note: If port 1 is used on the Twido controller, the DPT signal on pin 5 must be tied
to the circuit common (COM) on pin 7. This signifies to the Twido controller that the
communications through port 1 is Modbus and is not the protocol used to
communicate with the TwidoSuite software.
The cable connections made to each remote device are shown below.
Mini-DIN connection
RS-232 EIA cable
Twido Remote
controller peripheral
TXD RXD COM TXD RXD COM
3 4 7
RS-485 EIA cable

Twido Remote Remote
D1(A+) D0(B-) COM DPT D1(A+) D0(B-) COM D1(A+) D0(B-) COM
1 2 7 5
Remote Master Remote

controller controller controller
A(+) B(-) 0V A(+) B(-) 0V A(+) B(-) 0V
A B SG
120 35011386 06/2006

Communications
EIA RS-485 Line There is no internal pre-polarization in TWDLCA•40DRF controllers. Therefore,

Polarization on external line polarization is required when connecting the TWDLCA•40DRF Modbus
TWDLCA•40DRF master controller to the EIA-485 Modbus network.
Controllers (When there is no data activity on an EIA-485 balanced pair, the lines are not driven
and, therefore, susceptible to external noise or interference. To ensure that its
receiver stays in a constant state, when no data signal is present, the Modbus
master device needs to bias the network via external line polarization.)
Note: EIA RS-485 external line polarization must be implemented on the Modbus
Master controller only; you must not implement it on any slave device.
The external line polarization assembly on the TWDLCA•40DRF mini-DIN RS-485

EIA line shall consist in:
z One pull-up resistor to a 5V voltage on D1(A+) circuit,
z One pull-down resistor to the common circuit on D0(B-) circuit.
The following figure illustrates the external line polarization assembly on the
TWDLCA•40DRF mini-DIN RS-485 EIA line:
Mini-DIN connection
RS-485 EIA cable
Twido (Master) Remote (Slave) Remote (Slave)

D1(A+) D0(B-) COM DPT D1(A+) D0(B-) COM D1(A+) D0(B-) COM
1 2 7 5
+5 V
TWDLCA40•DRF Master
RS-485 EIA Line Polarization
Assembly
R
D1(A+)
D0(B-)
R
COM (0V)
where R = 600-650 Ω resistor
External polarization can be performed in any of two ways:

z Connecting externally the user-provided polarization assembly via mini-DIN fly
cable. (Please refer to pin definition for connector.)
z Using a polarization tap (configured for 2-wire polarization) and polarization
assembly (available soon from the catalog).
35011386 06/2006 121

Communications
Software To configure the controller to use a serial connection to send and receive characters
Configuration using the Modbus protocol, you must:
Step Description
1 Configure the serial port for Modbus using TwidoSuite.
2 Create in your application a transmission/reception table that will be used by the EXCHx instruction.
Configuring the A Twido controller can use its primary port 1 or an optionally configured port 2 to use
Port the Modbus protocol. To configure a serial port for Modbus:
Step Action
1 Define any additional communication adapters or modules configured to the base.
2 Declare the Modbus network in the Describe step of TwidoSuite (see (See How to Create a Network (Modbus
Example), TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help).
3 Select Port 1 (or Port 2 if installed) to configure in the Describe window (see (See Configuring an Object,
TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help).
4 To configure the Modbus element, use any of the two methods:
z Click the Configure icon from the toolbar then select the Modbus element in the describe graphic,
z Double click the Modbus element in the describe graphic.
5 To bring up the Feature dialog box (See Configuring an Object, TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online
Help) associated to the Modbus link hardware parameters, use any of the two methods:
z Click the Configure icon from the toolbar then select the Modbus link in the describe graphic,
z Double click the Modbus link in the describe graphic.
6 Configure the Feature dialog box that appears, as explained in the subsequent steps:.
TwidoSuite
Network
Type: Name: Modb1
Modbus
Parameters
Baudrate: 19200 Stop Bits: 1
Data Bits: 8 (RTU) Response Timeout: 10 x 100 ms
Parity: Even Inter-frame Delay: 2 ms
Cancel Advanced... OK
7 Select Modbus in the Protocol :Type box.

8 Set the associated communication parameters.
122 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Modbus Master Modbus master mode allows the controller to send a Modbus query to a slave, and
to wait for the response. The Modbus Master mode is only supported via the EXCHx
instruction. Both Modbus ASCII and RTU are supported in Modbus Master mode.
The maximum size of the transmitted and/or received frames is 250 bytes.
Moreover, the word table associated with the EXCHx instruction is composed of the
control, transmission and reception tables.
Most significant byte Least significant byte
Control table Command Length (Transmission/Reception)
Reception offset Transmission offset
Transmission table Transmitted Byte 1 Transmitted Byte 2
... ...
... Transmitted Byte n
Transmitted Byte n+1
Reception table Received Byte 1 Received Byte 2
... ...
... Received Byte p
Received Byte p+1
Note: In addition to queries to invidual slaves, the Modbus master controller can
initiate a broadcast query to all slaves. The command byte in case of a boradcast
query must be set to 00, while the slave address must be set to 0.
35011386 06/2006 123

Communications
Control table The Length byte contains the length of the transmission table (maximum 250
bytes), which is overwritten by the number of characters received at the end of the
reception, if reception is requested.
This parameter is the length in bytes of the transmission table. If the Tx Offset
parameter is equal to 0, this parameter will be equal to the length of the transmission
frame. If the Tx Offset parameter is not equal to 0, one byte of the transmission table
(indicated by the offset value) will not be transmitted and this parameter is equal to
the frame length itself plus 1.
The Command byte in case of Modbus RTU request (except for broadcast) must
always equal to 1 (Tx and Rx).
The Tx Offset byte contains the rank (1 for the first byte, 2 for the second byte, and
so on) within the Transmission Table of the byte to ignore when transmitting the
bytes. This is used to handle the issues associated with byte/word values within the
Modbus protocol. For example, if this byte contains 3, the third byte would be
ignored, making the fourth byte in the table the third byte to be transmitted.
The Rx Offset byte contains the rank (1 for the first byte, 2 for the second byte, and
so on) within the Reception Table to add when transmitting the packet. This is used
to handle the issues associated with byte/word values within the Modbus protocol.
For example, if this byte contains 3, the third byte within the table would be filled with
a ZERO, and the third byte which was actually received would be entered into the
fourth location in the table.
124 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Transmission/ When using either mode (Modbus ASCII or Modbus RTU), the Transmission table
reception tables is filled with the request prior to executing the EXCHx instruction. At execution time,
the controller determines what the Data Link Layer is, and performs all conversions
necessary to process the transmission and response. Start, end, and check
characters are not stored in the Transmission/Reception tables.
Once all bytes are transmitted, the controller switches to reception mode and waits
to receive any bytes.
Reception is completed in one of several ways:
z timeout on a character or frame has been detected,
z end of frame character(s) received in ASCII mode,
z the Reception table is full.
Transmitted byte X entries contain Modbus protocol (RTU encoding) data that is to
be transmitted. If the communications port is configured for Modbus ASCII, the
correct framing characters are appended to the transmission. The first byte contains
the device address (specific or broadcast), the second byte contains the function
code, and the rest contain the information associated with that function code.
Note: This is a typical application, but does not define all the possibilities. No
validation of the data being transmitted will be performed.
Received Bytes X contain Modbus protocol (RTU encoding) data that is to be

received. If the communications port is configured for Modbus ASCII, the correct
framing characters are removed from the response. The first byte contains the
device address, the second byte contains the function code (or response code), and
the rest contain the information associated with that function code.
Note: This is a typical application, but does not define all the possibilities. No
validation of the data being received will be performed, except for checksum
verification.
35011386 06/2006 125

Communications
Modbus Slave Modbus slave mode allows the controller to respond to standard Modbus queries
from a Modbus master.
When TSXPCX1031 cable is attached to the controller, TwidoSuite communications
are started at the port, temporarily disabling the communications mode that was
running prior to the cable being connected.
The Modbus protocol supports two Data Link Layer formats: ASCII and RTU. Each
is defined by the Physical Layer implementation, with ASCII using 7 data bits, and
RTU using 8 data bits.
When using Modbus ASCII mode, each byte in the message is sent as two ASCII
characters. The Modbus ASCII frame begins with a start character (':'), and can end
with two end characters (CR and LF). The end of frame character defaults to 0x0A
(line feed), and the user can modify the value of this byte during configuration. The
check value for the Modbus ASCII frame is a simple two's complement of the frame,
excluding the start and end characters.
Modbus RTU mode does not reformat the message prior to transmitting; however,
it uses a different checksum calculation mode, specified as a CRC.
The Modbus Data Link Layer has the following limitations:
z Address 1-247
z Bits: 128 bits on request
z Words: 125 words of 16 bits on request
Message The language offers two services for communication:

Exchange z EXCHx instruction: to transmit/receive messages
z %MSGx Function Block: to control the message exchanges.
The Twido controller uses the protocol configured for that port when processing an
EXCHx instruction.
Note: Each communications port can be configured for different protocols or the
same. The EXCHx instruction or %MSGx function block for each communications
port is accessed by appending the port number (1 or 2).
126 35011386 06/2006

Communications
EXCHx The EXCHx instruction allows the Twido controller to send and/or receive information to/
Instruction from Modbus devices. The user defines a table of words (%MWi:L) containing control
information and the data to be sent and/or received (up to 250 bytes in transmission and/
or reception). The format for the word table is described earlier.
A message exchange is performed using the EXCHx instruction:
Syntax: [EXCHx %MWi:L]
where: x = port number (1 or 2)
L = number of words in the control words, transmission and reception tables
before a second can be launched. The %MSGx function block must be used when
sending several messages.
The processing of the EXCHx list instruction occurs immediately, with any
transmissions started under interrupt control (reception of data is also under
interrupt control), which is considered background processing.
35011386 06/2006 127

Communications
%MSGx Function The use of the %MSGx function block is optional; it can be used to manage data
Block exchanges. The %MSGx function block has three purposes:
z Communications error checking
The error checking verifies that the parameter L (length of the Word table)
programmed with the EXCHx instruction is large enough to contain the length of
the message to be sent. This is compared with the length programmed in the
least significant byte of the first word of the word table.
z Coordination of multiple messages
To ensure the coordination when sending multiple messages, the %MSGx
function block provides the information required to determine when transmission
of a previous message is complete.
z Transmission of priority messages
The %MSGx function block allows current message transmissions to be stopped
in order to allow the immediate sending of an urgent message.
The %MSGx function block has one input and two outputs associated with it:
Input/Output Definition Description
R Reset input Set to 1: re-initializes communication or resets block
(%MSGx.E = 0 and %MSGx.D = 1).
%MSGx.D Communication 0: request in progress.
complete 1: communication done if end of transmission, end
character received, error, or reset of block.
%MSGx.E Error 0: message length OK and link OK.
1: if bad command, table incorrectly configured, incorrect
character received (speed, parity, and so on.), or
reception table full.
Limitations It is important to note the following limitations:

z Port 2 presence and configuration (RS232 or RS485) is checked at power-up or reset
z Any message processing on Port 1 is aborted when the TwidoSuite is connected
z EXCHx or %MSG can not be processed on a port configured as Remote Link
z EXCHx aborts active Modbus Slave processing
z Processing of EXCHx instructions is not re-tried in the event of an error
z Reset input (R) can be used to abort EXCHx instruction reception processing
z EXCHx instructions can be configured with a time out to abort reception
z Multiple messages are controlled via %MSGx.D
128 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Error and If an error occurs when using the EXCHx instruction, bits %MSGx.D and %MSGx.E
Operating Mode are set to 1 and system word %SW63 contains the error code for Port 1, and
Conditions %SW64 contains the error code for Port 2.
System Words Use

%SW63 EXCH1 error code:
0 - operation was successful
6 - transmission
9 - reception error
10 - can not use %KW if receiving
%SW64 EXCH2 error code: See %SW63.
Master If a master/slave controller restarts, one of the following events happens:

Restart z A warm start (%S1 = 1) forces a re-initialization of the communications.
z In Stop mode, the controller stops all Modbus communications.
35011386 06/2006 129

Communications
Modbus Link To configure a Modbus Link, you must:

Example 1 1. Configure the hardware.
2. Connect the Modbus communications cable.
3. Configure the port.
5. Initialize the Animation Table Editor.
The diagrams below illustrate the use of Modbus request code 3 to read a slave’s
output words. This example uses two Twido Controllers.
1 Controller RS-485 EIA Port 1 To serial COM 1

Master
Module RS-485 EIA Port 2 TSXPCX1031
2
1 3
0
2 Controller RS-485 EIA Port 1
Slave
Modbus RS-485 EIA Port 2
The hardware configuration is two Twido controllers. One will be configured as the
Modbus Master and the other as the Modbus Slave.
Note: In this example, each controller is configured to use EIA RS-485 on Port 1
and an optional EIA RS-485 Port 2. On a Modular controller, the optional Port 2 can
be either a TWDNOZ485D or a TWDNOZ485T, or if you use TWDXCPODM, it can
be either a TWDNAC485D or a TWDNAC485T. On a Compact controller, the
optional Port 2 can be either a TWDNAC485D or a TWDNAC485T.
To configure each controller, connect the TSXPCX1031 cable to Port 1 of the controller.
Note: The TSXPCX1031 can only be connected to one controller at a time, on RS-
485 EIA port 1 only.
Next, connect the cable to the COM 1 port of the PC. Be sure that the cable is in
switch position 2. Download and monitor the application. Repeat procedure for
second controller.
130 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Step 2: Connect the Modbus Communications Cable:

Mini-DIN connection
Twido Twido
Modbus Master Modbus Slave
D1(A+) D0(B-) COM D1(A+) D0(B-) COM
1 2 7
Twido Twido
D1(A+) D0(B-) 0V D1(A+) D0(B-) 0V
A B SG
The wiring in this example demonstrates a simple point to point connection. The
three signals D1(A+), D0(B-), and COM(0V) are wired according to the diagram.
If using Port 1 of the Twido controller, the DPT signal (pin 5) must be tied to circuit
common (pin 7). This conditioning of DPT determines if TwidoSuite is connected.
When tied to the ground, the controller will use the port configuration set in the
application to determine the type of communication.
35011386 06/2006 131

Communications
Hardware -> Add Option Hardware -> Add Option

TWDNOZ485- TWDNOZ485-
Hardware => Controller Comm. Setting Hardware => Controller Comm. Setting
Serial Port 2 Serial Port 2
Protocol Modbus Protocol Modbus
Address 1 Address 2
Baud Rate 19200 Baud Rate 19200
Data Bits 8 (RTU) Data Bits 8 (RTU)
Parity None Parity None
Stop Bit 1 Stop Bit 1
Response Timeout (x100ms) 10 Response Timeout (x100ms) 100
Time between frames (ms) 10 Time between frames (ms) 10
In both master and slave applications, the optional EIA RS-485 ports are configured.
Ensure that the controller's communication parameters are modified in Modbus
protocol and at different addresses.
In this example, the master is set to an address of 1 and the slave to 2. The number
of bits is set to 8, indicating that we will be using Modbus RTU mode. If this had been
set to 7, then we would be using Modbus-ASCII mode. The only other default
modified was to increase the response timeout to 1 second.
Note: Since Modbus RTU mode was selected, the "End of Frame" parameter was ignored.
132 35011386 06/2006

Communications

LD 1 LD 1
[%MW0 := 16#0106 ] [%MW0 := 16#6566 ]
[%MW1 := 16#0300 ] [%MW1 := 16#6768 ]
[%MW2 := 16#0203 ] [%MW2 := 16#6970 ]
[%MW3 := 16#0000 ] [%MW3 := 16#7172 ]
[%MW4 := 16#0004 ] END
LD 1
AND %MSG2.D
[EXCH2 %MW0:11]
LD %MSG2.E
ST %Q0.0
END
Using TwidoSuite, an application program is written for both the master and the
slave. For the slave, we simply write some memory words to a set of known values.
In the master, the word table of the EXCHx instruction is initialized to read 4 words
from the slave at Modbus address 2 starting at location %MW0.
Note: Notice the use of the RX offset set in %MW1 of the Modbus master. The
offset of three will add a byte (value = 0) at the third position in the reception area
of the table. This aligns the words in the master so that they fall correctly on word
boundaries. Without this offset, each word of data would be split between two
words in the exchange block. This offset is used for convenience.
Before executing the EXCH2 instruction, the application checks the communication
bit associated with %MSG2. Finally, the error status of the %MSG2 is sensed and
stored on the first output bit on the local base controller I/O. Additional error checking
using %SW64 could also be added to make this more accurate.
Step 5:Initialize the animation table editor in the master:
1 %MW5 0203 0000 Hexadecimal
After downloading and setting each controller to run, open an animation table on the
master. Examine the response section of the table to check that the response code
is 3 and that the correct number of bytes was read. Also in this example, note that
the words read from the slave (beginning at %MW7) are aligned correctly with the
word boundaries in the master.
35011386 06/2006 133

Communications
Modbus Link The diagram below illustrates the use of Modbus request 16 to write output words to
Example 2 a slave. This example uses two Twido Controllers.
1 Controller RS-485 EIA Port 1 To serial COM 1

Modbus
master RS-485 EIA Port 2 TSXPCX1031
2
1 3
0
2 Controller RS-485 EIA Port 1
Modbus
slave RS-485 EIA Port 2
The hardware configuration is identical to the previous example.

Step 2: Connect the Modbus Communications Cable (RS-485):
Mini-DIN connection
Twido Twido
D1(A+) D0(B-) COM D1(A+) D0(B-) COM
1 2 7
Twido Twido
D1(A+) D0(B-) 0V D1(A+) D0(B-) 0V
A B SG
The Modbus communications cabling is identical to the previous example.
134 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Hardware -> Add Option Hardware -> Add Option

TWDNOZ485- TWDNOZ485-
Hardware => Controller Comm. Setting Hardware => Controller Comm. Setting
Serial Port 2 Serial Port 2
Protocol Modbus Protocol Modbus
Address 1 Address 2
Baud Rate 19200 Baud Rate 19200
Data Bits 8 (RTU) Data Bits 8 (RTU)
Parity None Parity None
Stop Bit 1 Stop Bit 1
Response Timeout (x100ms) 10 Response Timeout (x100ms) 100
Time between frames (ms) 10 Time between frames (ms) 10
The port configurations are identical to those in the previous example.

LD 1 LD 1
[%MW0 := 16#010C ] [%MW18 := 16#FFFF ]
[%MW1 := 16#0007 ] END
[%MW2 := 16#0210 ]
[%MW3 := 16#0010 ]
[%MW4 := 16#0002 ]
[%MW5 := 16#0004 ]
[%MW6 := 16#6566 ]
[%MW7 := 16#6768 ]
LD 1
AND %MSG2.D
[EXCH2 %MW0:11]
LD %MSG2.E
ST %Q0.0
END
Using TwidoSuite, an application program is created for both the master and the
slave. For the slave, write a single memory word %MW18. This will allocate space
on the slave for the memory addresses from %MW0 through %MW18. Without
allocating the space, the Modbus request would be trying to write to locations that
did not exist on the slave.
In the master, the word table of the EXCH2 instruction is initialized to read 4 bytes
to the slave at Modbus address 2 at the address %MW16 (10 hexadecimal).
Note: Notice the use of the TX offset set in %MW1 of the Modbus master
application. The offset of seven will suppress the high byte in the sixth word (the
value 00 hexadecimal in %MW5). This works to align the data values in the
transmission table of the word table so that they fall correctly on word boundaries.
35011386 06/2006 135

Communications
Before executing the EXCH2 instruction, the application checks the communication
bit associated with %MSG2. Finally, the error status of the %MSG2 is sensed and
stored on the first output bit on the local base controller I/O. Additional error checking
using %SW64 could also be added to make this more accurate.
Step 5:Initialize the Animation Table Editor:
Create the following animation table on the master:
1 %MW0 010C 0000 Hexadecimal
Create the following animation table on the slave:

After downloading and setting each controller to run, open an animation table on the
slave controller. The two values in %MW16 and %MW17 are written to the slave. In the
master, the animation table can be used to examine the reception table portion of the
exchange data. This data displays the slave address, the response code, the first word
written, and the number of words written starting at %MW8 in the example above.
136 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Standard Modbus Requests
Introduction These requests are used to exchange memory words or bits between remote
devices. The table format is the same for both RTU and ASCII modes.
Format Reference number
Bit %Mi
Word %MWi
Modbus Master: The following table represents requests 01 and 02.

Read N Bits
Table Most significant byte Least significant byte
Index
Control table 0 01 (Transmission/reception) 06 (Transmission length) (*)
1 03 (Reception offset) 00 (Transmission offset)
Transmission table 2 Slave@(1..247) 01 or 02 (Request code)
3 Address of the first bit to read
4 N1 = Number of bits to read
Reception table 5 Slave@(1..247) 01 or 02 (Response code)
(after response) 6 00 (byte added by Rx Offset action) N2
= Number of data bytes to read
= [1+(N1-1)/8],
where [] means integral part
7 Value of the 1 byte (value = 00 or 01) Value of the 2nd byte (if N1>1)
st
8 Value of the 3rd byte

(if N1>1)
...
(N2/2)+6 (if N2 is Value of the N th byte (if N >1)
2 1
even)
(N2/2+1)+6 (if N2
is odd
(*) This byte also receives the length of the string transmitted after response
35011386 06/2006 137

Communications
Modbus Master: The following table represents requests 03 and 04.

Read N Words
Index
1 03 (Reception Offset) 00 (Transmission offset)
Transmission 2 Slave@(1..247) 03 or 04 (Request code)
table 3 Address of the first word to read
4 N = Number of words to read
Reception table 5 Slave@(1..247) 03 or 04 (Response code)
(after response) 6 00 (byte added by Rx Offset 2*N (number of bytes read)
action)
7 First word read
8 Second word read (if N>1)
...
N+6 Word N read (if N>2)
Note: The Rx offset of three will add a byte (value = 0) at the third position in the
reception table. This ensures a good positioning of the number of bytes read and
of the read words’ values in this table.
138 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Modbus Master: This table represents Request 05.

Write Bit
Index
Transmission table 2 Slave@(1..247) 05 (Request code)
3 Address of the bit to write
4 Bit value to write
Reception table 5 Slave@(1..247) 05 (Response code)
(after response) 6 Address of the bit written
7 Value written
Note:
z This request does not need the use of offset.
z The response frame is the same as the request frame here (in a normal case).
z For a bit to write 1, the associated word in the transmission table must contain
the value FF00H, and 0 for the bit to write 0.
35011386 06/2006 139

Communications

Write Word
Index
Transmission 2 Slave@(1..247) 06 (Request code)
table 3 Address of the word to write
4 Word value to write
Reception table 5 Slave@(1..247) 06 (Response code)
(after response) 6 Address of the word written
7 Value written
Note:
z This request does not need the use of offset.
z The response frame is the same as the request frame here (in a normal case).
140 35011386 06/2006

Communications

Write of N Bits
Table Index Most significant byte Least significant byte
Control table 0 01 (Transmission/reception) 8 + number of bytes (transmission)
1 00 (Reception Offset) 07 (Transmission offset)
3 Number of the first bit to write
4 N1 = Number of bits to write
5 00 (byte not sent, offset effect) N2
= Number of data bytes to write
= [1+(N1-1)/8],
where [] means integral part
6 Value of the 1st byte Value of the 2nd byte
7 Value of the 3rd byte Value of the 4th byte
...
(N2/2)+5 (if N2 is even) Value of the N2th byte
(N2/2+1)+5 (if N2 is odd
Reception table Slave@(1..247) 15 (Response code)
(after response)
Address of the 1st bit written
Address of bits written (= N1)
Note:
z The Tx Offset=7 will suppress the 7th byte in the sent frame. This also allows a
good correspondence of words’ values in the transmission table.
35011386 06/2006 141

Communications

Write of N Words
Index
Control table 0 01 (Transmission/reception) 8 + (2*N) (Transmission length)
3 Address of the first word to write
4 N = Number of words to write
5 00 (byte not sent, offset effect) 2*N = Number of bytes to write
6 First word value to write
7 Second value to write
...
N+5 N values to write
Reception table (after response) N+6 Slave@(1..247) 16 (Response code)
N+7 Address of the first word written
N+8 Address of words written (= N)
Note: The Tx Offset = 7 will suppress the 5th MMSB byte in the sent frame. This
also allows a good correspondence of words’ values in the transmission table.
142 35011386 06/2006

Communications
Transparent Ready Implementation Class (Twido Serial A05, Ethernet A15)
Overview The following Modbus Function codes are supported by both serial Modbus and TCP/IP
Modbus. For detailed information about Modbus protocol, please refer to document
Modbus Application Protocol which is available at http://www.modbus-ida.org
Twido Supported The following table describes function codes supported by both Twido serial and
Modbus TCP/IP Modbus:
Function Codes
Supported MB FC Supported Sub-fc code Function
(MB FC)
1 — Read multiple internal bits %M
2 — Read multiple internal bits %M
3 — Read multiple internal registers %MW
4 — Read multiple internal registers %MW
5 — Force single internal bit %M
6 — Write single internal register %MW
8 00 only Echo diagnostics
15 — Write multiple internal bits %M
16 — Write multiple internal registers %MW
23 — Read/write multiple internal registers %MW
43 14 Read device identification (regular service)
35011386 06/2006 143

Communications
144 35011386 06/2006

Built-In Analog Functions
6
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter describes how to manage the built-in analog channel and
Chapter potentiometers.

Chapter?
Topic Page
Analog potentiometer 146
Analog Channel 148
35011386 06/2006 145

Analog potentiometer
Introduction Twido controllers have:

z An analog potentiometer on TWDLC•A10DRF, TWDLC•A16DRF controllers and
on all modular controllers (TWDLMDA20DTK, TWDLMDA20DUK,
TWDLMDA20DRT, TWDLMDA40DTK and TWDLMDA40DUK,
z Two potentiometers on the TWDLC•A24DRF and TWDLCA•40DRFcontrollers.
Programming The numerical values, from 0 to 1023 for analog potentiometer 1, and from 0 to 511
for analog potentiometer 2, corresponding to the analog values provided by these
potentiometers are contained in the following two input words:
z %IW0.0.0 for analog potentiometer 1 (on left)
z %IW0.0.1 for analog potentiometer 2 (on right)
These words can be used in arithmetic operations. They can be used for any type
of adjustment, for example, presetting a time-delay or a counter, adjusting the
frequency of the pulse generator or machine preheating time.
146 35011386 06/2006

Example Adjusting the duration of a time-delay from 5 to 10 s using analog potentiometer 1:

For this adjustment practically the entire
adjustment range of analog 10s
potentiometer 1 from 0 to 1023 is used.
5s
0 1023
The following parameters are selected at configuration for the time-delay block
%TM0:
z Type TON
z Timebase: 10 ms
The preset value of the time-delay is calculated from the adjustment value of the
potentiometer using the following equation %TM0.P := (%IW0.0.0/2)+500.
Code for the above example:
%MW0:=%IW0.0.0/2
LD 1
[%MW0:=%IW0.0.0/2]
%TM0.P:=%MW0+500 [%TM0.P:=%MW0+500]
BLK %TM0
LD %I0.0
%TM0 IN
%I0.0 %Q0.0 OUT_BLK
IN Q
LD Q
ST %Q0.0
END_BLK
...................
35011386 06/2006 147

Analog Channel
Introduction All Modular controllers (TWDLMDA20DTK, TWDLMDA20DUK, TWDLMDA20DRT,

TWDLMDA40DTK, and TWDLMDA40DUK) have a built-in analog channel. The voltage
input ranges from 0 to 10 V and the digitized signal from 0 to 511. The analog channel
takes advantage of a simple averaging scheme that takes place over eight samples.
Principle An analog to discrete converter samples an input voltage from 0 to 10 V to a discrete

value from 0 to 511. This value is stored in system word %IW0.0.1. The value is
linear through the entire range, so that each increment is approximately 20 mV (10
V/512). Once the system detects value 511, the channel is considered saturated.
Programming Controlling the temperature of an oven: The cooking temperature is set to 350°C.
Example A variation of +/- 2.5°C results in tripping of output %Q0.0 and %Q0.2, respectively.
Practically all of the possible setting ranges of the analog channel from 0 to 511 is
used in this example. Analog setting for the temperature set points are:
Temperature (°C) Voltage System Word %IW0.0.1
0 0 0
347.5 7.72 395
350 7.77 398
352.5 7.83 401
450 10 511
Code for the above example:
%IW0.0.1 = 395 %Q0.0

LD [%IW0.0.1 = 395]
ST %Q0.0
%IW0.0.1 <= 398 %Q0.1

LD [%IW0.0.1 <= 398]
ST %Q0.1
%IW0.0.1 >= 401
%Q0.2
LD [%IW0.0.1 >= 401]
ST %Q0.2
148 35011386 06/2006

Managing Analog Modules
7
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter provides an overview of managing analog modules for Twido
Chapter controllers.

Chapter?
Topic Page
Analog Module Overview 150
Addressing Analog Inputs and Outputs 151
Configuring Analog Inputs and Outputs 152
Analog Module Status Information 158
Example of Using Analog Modules 160
35011386 06/2006 149

Analog Module Overview
Introduction In addition to the built-in 10-bit potentiometer and 9-bit analog channel, all the Twido
controllers that support expansion I/O are also able to configure and communicate
analog I/O modules.
These analog modules are:
Name Points Signal Range Encoding
TWDAMI2HT 2 In 0 - 10 Volts or 4 - 20 mA 12 Bit
TWDAMO1HT 1 Out 0 - 10 Volts or 4 - 20 mA 12 Bit
TWDAMM3HT 2 In, 1 Out 0 - 10 Volts or 4 - 20 mA 12 Bit
TWDAMM6HT 4 In, 2 Out 0 - 10 Volts or 4 - 20 mA 12 Bit
TWDALM3LT 2 In, 1 Out 0 - 10 Volts, Inputs Th or PT100, 12 Bit
Outputs 4 - 20 mA
TWDAVO2HT 2 Out +/- 10 Volts 11 Bit + sign
TWDAMI4LT 4 In 0 - 10 Volts, 0 - 20 mA, NI or PT 3- 12 Bit
wire sensors
TWDAMI8HT 8 In 0 - 10 Volts or 0 - 20 mA 10 Bit
TWDARI8HT 8 In NTC or PTC sensors 10 Bit
Operating Input and output words (%IW and %QW) are used to exchange data between the
Analog Modules user application and any of the analog channels. The updating of these words is
done synchronously with the controller scan during RUN mode.
CAUTION
UNEXPECTED START-UP OF DEVICES
When the controller is set to STOP, the analog output is set to its fall-back position.
As is the case with discrete output, the default setpoint is zero.
150 35011386 06/2006

Addressing Analog Inputs and Outputs
Introduction Addresses are assigned to the analog channels depending on their location on the expansion bus.
Example of In this example, a TWDLMDA40DUK has a built-in analog-adjusted 10-bit

Addressing potentiometer, a 9-bit built-in analog channel. On the expansion bus are the
Analog I/O following: a TWDAMM3HT analog module, a TWDDMM8DRT input/output discrete
relay module, and a second TWDAMM3HT analog module are configured.
Base Module 1 Module 2 Module 3

The table below details the addressing for each output.
Description Base Module 1 Module 2 Module 3
Potentiometer 1 %IW0.0.0
Built-in analog channel %IW0.0.1
Analog input channel 1 %IW0.1.0 %IW0.3.0
Analog input channel 2 %IW0.1.1 %IW0.3.1
Analog output channel 1 %QW0.1.0 %QW0.3.0
Discrete input channels %I0.2.0 - %I0.2.3
Discrete output channels %Q0.2.0 -%Q0.2.3
35011386 06/2006 151

Configuring Analog Inputs and Outputs
Introduction This section provides information on configuring analog module’s inputs and
outputs.
Configuring Use the Configuration Editor to set parameters of analog I/O modules that you
Analog I/O added as expansion modules when you described the system (see (See Positioning
a Module, TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help)).
Note: You can only modify the parameters offline, when you are not connected to
a controller.
Configuration The upper part of the dialog box shows a Description zone with the module
Editor Contents reference number and a short description.
Module description zone Configuration table
Description of the module Reference num TWDLMDA20DTK Address 0

Description Modular base controller, 12 24V DC inputs, 8 outputs (0.3A
source transistors). Removable MIL connectors.
Module configuration. Apply Cancel

Table of inputs
Used Address Symbol Used By Filtering Latch? Run/Stop? Deactivation High Priority SR Number
%I0.0 3 ms
%I0.1 3 ms
%I0.2 3 ms Not used
%I0.3 3 ms Not used
%I0.4 3 ms Not used
Table of outputs
Used Address Symbol Status? Used By

%Q0.0
%Q0.1
%Q0.2
%Q0.3
A table shows: Address, Symbol, Type, Range, Minimum, Maximum and Units
z In TWDAMI4LT and TWIDAMI8HT, the table is preceded by an Input type list
box.
z In TWDAVO2HT and TWDAMI8HT, the Type column is replaced by a Used
column with check boxes.
z In TWDARI8HT, each channel (0-7) is configured individually within a tab, in
which you can choose either the Chart or Formula configuration method. The
table can be seen in a Recap tab.
152 35011386 06/2006

Description The Description zone displays a short summary of the module.
Address Each row of the spreadsheet represents either an input or output channel of the module.
The addresses of each of these are identified in the following table, where "i" is the
location of the module on the expansion bus.
Module Name Address
TWDALM3LT 2 Inputs (%IWi.0, %IWi.1), 1 Output (%QWi.0)
TWDAMM3HT 2 Inputs (%IWi.0, %IWi.1), 1 Output (%QWi.0)
TWDAMM6HT 4 Inputs (%IWi.0 to %IWi.3), 2 Outputs (%QWi.0, %QWi.1)
TWDAMI2HT 2 Inputs (%IWi.0, %IWi.1)
TWDAMO1HT 1 Output (%QWi.0)
TWDAVO2HT 2 Outputs (%QWi.0, %QWi.1)
TWDAMI4LT 4 Inputs (%IWi.0 to %IWi.3)
TWDAMI8HT 8 Inputs (%IWi.0 to %IWi.7)
TWDARI8HT 8 Inputs (%IWi.0 to %IWi.7)
Symbol This is a read-only display of a symbol, if assigned, for the address.
35011386 06/2006 153

Input and Output This identifies the mode of a channel. The choices depend on the channel and type of module.
Type For the TWDAMO1HT, TWDAMM3HT and TWDALM3LT, you can configure the
single output channel type as:
Type
Not used
0 - 10 V
4 – 20 mA
For the TWDAMM6HT, you can configure the 4 input and the 2 output channel types as:
Input type
0 - 10 V
4 – 20 mA
For the TWDAMI2HT and TWDAMM3HT, you can configure the 2 input channel types as:
Type
Not used
0 - 10 V
4 – 20 mA
For the TWDALM3LT, you can configure the 2 input channel types as:
Type
Not used
Thermocouple K
Thermocouple J
Thermocouple T
PT 100
For the TWDAVO2HT, there is no type to adjust.

For the TWDAMI4LT, you can configure the 4 input types as:
Input type Type
Not used
Voltage
0-10 V
Not used
Current
0-20 mA
154 35011386 06/2006

Input type Type

Not used
PT 100
Temperature PT 1000
NI 100
NI 1000
For the TWDAMI8HT, you can configure the 8 input types as:
Input type
0 - 10 V
0 - 20 mA
For the TWDARI8HT, you can configure each input channel (0-7) individually, from the Operation
field in the lower part of the window. Directly choose a Mode, and a Range, if needed. You can
then view a summary of all information in the Recap tab, with a Type column showing:
Type
Not used
NTC / CTN
PTC / CTP
CAUTION
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
If you have wired your input for a voltage measurement, and you configure TwidoSuite
for a current type of configuration, you may permanently damage the analog module.
Ensure that the wiring is in agreement with the TwidoSuite configuration.
35011386 06/2006 155

Range This identifies the range of values for a channel. The choices depend on the specific
type of channel and module.
Once the Type is configured, you can set the corresponding Range. A table shows
the Minimum and Maximum values accepted - either fixed or user-defined -
together with the Unit, if needed.
Range (NTC sensors) Minimum Maximum Units I/O Analog Modules
TWDALM3LT
TWDAMO1HT
TWDAMM3HT
0 4095
TWDAMM6HT
Normal None TWDAMI2HT
TWDAMI4LT
-2048 2047 TWDAVO2HT
TWDAMI8HT
0 1023
TWDARI8HT
User defined with a User defined with a
Custom None All I/O Analog Modules
min. of -32768 max. of 32767
-1000 5000 TWDALM3LT
Dynamically updated by TwidoSuite TWDARI8HT
Celsius according to user-defined parameters 0.1°C
-2000 6000 TWDAMI4LT (Pt sensor)
-500 1500 TWDAMI4LT (Ni sensor)
-1480 9320 TWDALM3LT
Dynamically updated by TwidoSuite TWDARI8HT
Fahrenheit according to user-defined parameters 0.1°F
-3280 11120 TWDAMI4LT (Pt sensor)
-580 3020 TWDAMI4LT (Ni sensor)
100 10000 TWDARI8HT
74 199 TWDAMI4LT (Ni100)
Resistance 742 1987 Ohm TWDAMI4LT (Ni1000)
18 314 TWDAMI4LT (Pt100)
184 3138 TWDAMI4LT (Pt1000)
156 35011386 06/2006

Chart or Formula In TWDARI8HT, each channel (0-7) is configured individually within a tab. Check the
Method Used box then choose between Chart and Formula configuration methods.
z Chart (graphical) method
(R1, T1) and (R2, T2) correspond to float format coordinates of two points
belonging to the curve.
R1(default 8700) and R2 (default 200) values are expressed in Ohms.
T1 (default 233.15) and T2 (default 398.15) values can have their unit set in the
Unit list box: Kelvin (default), Celsius or Farenheit.
Note: Changing the temperature unit after setting the T1 and T2 values will not
automatically recalculate T1 and T2 values with the new unit.
z Formula method
Provided you know Rref, Tref and B parameters, you can use this method to
define sensor characteristics.
Rref (default 330) is expressed in Ohms.
B is default 3569 (min. 1, max. 32767).
Tref (default 298.15) can have its unit set in the Unit list box: Kelvin (default),
Celsius or Farenheit.
Here is a table of corresponding min./max. Tref values between units:
Unit Min. value Max. value
Kevin 1 650
Celsius -272 376
Farenheit -457 710
In both Chart and Formula windows, you can import values from another channel in
the currently configured channel:
1. Select a channel number out of the Channel No box.
2. Press the Import values button.
Some error or warning messages can be associated with these windows.
Note: If you start setting values then decide to switch from Chart to Formula or from
Formula to Chart, a warning message pops up, explaining that it will revert to
default values and that any modified values will be lost.
35011386 06/2006 157

Analog Module Status Information
Status Table The following table has the information you need to monitor the status of Analog I/O
modules.
System Word Function Description
%SW80 Base I/O Status For standard analog module, %SW8x is described as follows:
Bit [0] All analog channels in normal state
Bit [1] Module in initialization state
Bit [2] Power supply default
Bit [3] Configuration default
Bit [4] Conversion in running for input channel 0
Bit [6] Invalid parameter for input channel 0
Bit [8 & 9] Not used
Bit [10] Overflow value for input channel 0
Bit [12] Underflow value for input channel 0
Bit [14] Not used
Bit [15] Invalid parameter for output channel
%SW80 Base I/O Status For TWDAMI4LT analog module, %SW8x is described as follows:
cont’d cont’d Bit [0 & 1] Channel 0 state
0 0: Analog channel in normal state
0 1: Invalid parameter for input channel
1 0: Unavailable input value (module in initialization state, conversion in running),
1 1: Invalid value for input channel (overflow or underflow value)
Bit [2 & 3] Channel 1 state (same description as bit [0 & 1])
Bit [8 to 15] Not used
158 35011386 06/2006

System Word Function Description

%SW80 Base I/O Status For TWDAMI8HT analog module, %SW8x is described as follows:
1 0: Unavailable input value (module in initialization state, conversion in running),
%SW81 Expansion I/O Module 1 Status: Same definitions as %SW80
35011386 06/2006 159

Example of Using Analog Modules
Introduction This section provides an example of using Analog modules available with Twido.
Example: analog This example compares the analog input signal with five separate threshold values.
input A comparison of the analog input is made and a bit is set on the base controller if it
is less than or equal to the threshold.
LD [%IW1.0 < 16]

%IW1.0 < 16 %Q0.0 ST %Q0.0
LD [%IW1.0 < 32]

%IW1.0 < 32 %Q0.1 ST %Q0.1
LD [%IW1.0 < 64]

%IW1.0 < 64 ST %Q0.2
%Q0.2
LD [%IW1.0 < 128]
ST %Q0.3
%IW1.0 < 128 %Q0.3
LD [%IW1.0 < 256]
ST %Q0.4
%IW1.0 < 256 %Q0.4
160 35011386 06/2006

Example: analog The following program uses an analog card in slot 1 and 2. The card used in slot 1
output has a 10-volt output with a "normal" range:
LD 1
%QW0.1.0:=4095 [%QW0.1.0:=4095
LD 1
[%QW0.2.0:=%MW0
%QW0.2.0:=%MW0
z Example of output values for %QW1.0=4095 (normal case):

The following table shows the output voltage value according to the maximum value
assigned to %QW1.0:
numerical value analog value (volt)
Minimum 0 0
Maximum 4095 10
Value 1 100 0.244
Value 2 2460 6
z Example of output values for a customized range (minimum = 0, maximum =

1000):
The following table shows the output voltage value according to the maximum value
assigned to %QW1.0:
numerical value analog value (volt)
Minimum 0 0
Maximum 1000 10
Value 1 100 1
Value 2 600 6
35011386 06/2006 161

162 35011386 06/2006

Installing the AS-Interface V2 bus
8
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter provides information on the software installation of the AS-Interface
Chapter Master module TWDNOI10M3 and its slaves.

Chapter?
Topic Page
Presentation of the AS-Interface V2 bus 164
General functional description 165
Software set up principles 168
Description of the configuration screen for the AS-Interface bus 170
Configuration of the AS-Interface bus 172
Description of the AS-Interface Window in Online Mode 178
Modification of Slave Address 182
Updating the AS-Interface bus configuration in online mode 184
Automatic addressing of an AS-Interface V2 slave 188
How to insert a slave device into an existing AS-Interface V2 configuration 189
Automatic replacement of a faulty AS-Interface V2 slave 190
Addressing I/Os associated with slave devices connected to the AS-Interface 191
V2 bus
Programming and diagnostics for the AS-Interface V2 bus 192
AS-Interface V2 bus interface module operating mode: 197
35011386 06/2006 163

Installing the AS-Interface bus
Presentation of the AS-Interface V2 bus
Introduction The AS-Interface Bus (Actuator Sensor-Interface) allows the interconnection on a

single cable of sensor devices/actuators at the lowest level of automation.
These sensors/actuators will be defined in the documentation as slave devices.
To implement the AS-Interface application you need to define the physical context of the
application into which it will integrated (expansion bus, supply, processor, modules, AS-
Interface slave devices connected to the bus) then ensure its software implementation.
This second aspect will be carried out from the different TwidoSuite editors:
z either in local mode,
z or in online mode.
AS-Interface V2 The AS-interface Master module TWDNOI10M3 includes the following functionalities:
Bus z M3 profile: This profile includes all the functionalities defined by the AS-Interface
V2 standard, but does not support the S7-4 analog profiles
z One AS-Interface channel per module
z Automatic addressing for the slave with the address 0
z Management of profiles and parameters
z Protection from polarity reversion on the bus inputs
The AS-Interface bus then allows:
z Up to 31 standard address and 62 extended address slaves
z Up to 248 inputs and 186 outputs
z Up to 7 analog slaves (Max of four I/0 per slave)
z A cycle time of 10 ms maximum
A maximum of 2 AS-Interface Master modules can be connected to a Twido modular
controller, a TWDLC•A24DRF or a TWDLCA•40DRFcompact controller.
164 35011386 06/2006

General functional description
General For the AS-Interface configuration, TwidoSuite software allows the user to:
Introduction z Manually configure the bus (declaration of slaves and assignment of addresses
on the bus)
z Adapt the configuration according to what is present on the bus
z Acknowledge the slave parameters
z Control bus status
For this reason, all data coming from or going to the AS-Interface Master are stored
in specific objects (words and bits).
35011386 06/2006 165

AS-Interface The AS-Interface module includes data fields that allow you to manage the lists of slaves
Master Structure and the images of input / output data. This information is stored in volatile memory.
The figure below shows TWDNOI10M3 module architecture.
TWDNOI10M3
1 I/O data
Parameters
2
current AS-Interface bus
3 Configuration /
Identification
4 LDS
5 LAS
6 LPS
7 LPF
Key:
Address Item Description
1 I/O data Images of 248 inputs and 186 outputs of AS-Interface V2
(IDI, ODI) bus.
2 Current parameters Image of the parameters of all the slaves.
(PI, PP)
3 Configuration/ This field contains all the I/O codes and the identification
Identification codes for all the slaves detected.
(CDI, PCD)
4 LDS List of all slaves detected on the bus.
5 LAS List of slaves activated on the bus.
6 LPS List of slaves provided on the bus and configured via
TwidoSuite.
7 LPF List of slaves having a device fault.
166 35011386 06/2006

Structure of The standard address slaves each have:

Slave Devices z 4 input/output bits
z 4 parametering bits
The slaves with extended addresses each have:
z 4 input/output bits (the last bit is reserved for entry only)
z 3 parametering bits
Each slave has its own address, profile and sub-profile (defines variables
exchange).
The figure below shows the structure of an extended address slave:
AS-Interface slave
Input Bit Only
(D3)
1 I/O data
D0
2 Parameters P2
P0
Configuration/
3 Identification AS-Interface bus
4 Address
Key:
Address Item Description
1 Input/output Input data is stored by the slave and made available for the AS-
data Interface master.
Output data is updated by the master module.
2 Parameters The parameters are used to control and switch internal operating
modes to the sensor or the actuator.
3 Configuration/ This field contains:
Identification z the code which corresponds to I/O configuration,
z the slave identification (ID) code,
z the slave identification codes (ID1 and ID2).
4 Address Physical address of slave.
Note: The operating parameters, address, configuration and identification data are saved in
a non-volatile memory.
35011386 06/2006 167

Software set up principles
At a Glance To respect the philosophy adopted in TwidoSuite, the user should adopt a step-by-
step approach when creating an AS-Interface application.
Set up principle The user must know how to functionally configure his AS-Interface bus (See How to
insert a slave device into an existing AS-Interface V2 configuration, p. 189).
The following table shows the different software implementation phases of the AS-Interface bus.
Mode Phase Description
Local Declaration of module Choice of the slot for the AS-Interface Master
module TWDNOI10M3 on the expansion bus.
Configuration of the Choice of "master" modes.
module channel
Declaration of slave Selection for each device:
devices z of its slot number on the bus,
z of the type of standard or extended address
slave.
Confirmation of Confirmation at slave level.
configuration parameters
Global confirmation of Confirmation of application level.
the application
Local or Symbolization (optional) Symbolization of the variables associated with the
connected slave devices.
Programming Programming the AS-Interface V2 function.
Connected Transfer Transfer of the application to the PLC.
Debugging Debugging the application with the help of:
z the AS-Interface Window used on the one hand
to display slaves (address, parameters), and on
the other, to assign them the desired addresses,
z diagnostic screens allowing identification of
errors.
Note: The declaration and deletion of the AS-Interface Master module on the
expansion bus is the same as for another expansion module. However, once two
AS-Interface Master modules have been declared on the expansion bus,
TwidoSuite will not permit another one to be declared.
168 35011386 06/2006

Precautions Before connecting (via the software) the PC to the controller and to avoid any
Prior to detection problem:
Connection z Ensure that no slave is physically present on the bus with address 0
z Ensure that 2 slaves are not physically present with the same address.
35011386 06/2006 169

Description of the configuration screen for the AS-Interface bus
At a Glance The configuration screen of the AS-Interface master module gives access to the
parameters associated with the module and the slave devices.
It can be used to display and modify parameters in offline mode.
Illustration of Illustration of the configuration screen in offline mode:

Offline Mode
Description of the module Reference num TWDNOI10M3 Address 1
Description AS-Interface Master expansion module (80mA)
Module configuration.
Std slaves/ Slaves /B Apply Cancel

00
Slave 1A 01 Slave 1/A Name: Slave 1A
02
Permanent caracteristics
03 ASI20MT4IE
04 Profile I/O F ID F ID1 F ID2 F
05 INOUT24/12 Comment Comment
06
WXA36 07 Permanent parameters
08 Bits 0 Parameter 1 2 Parameter 3
09
Decimal 1 Parameter 2 3 Parameter 4
10
11 Inputs / Outputs
12 Input Address Symbol Output Address Symbol
13
14
15
16
17 Master mode
18 Activate data exchange Network down
19
20 Automatic addressing
170 35011386 06/2006

Description of This screen groups all data making up the bus in three blocks of information:
the Screen in
Blocks Description
Offline Mode
AS-interface Bus image desired by the user: view of standard and extended address
configuration setting slaves expected on the bus. Move the cursor down the vertical bar to
access the following addresses.
Grayed out addresses correspond to addresses not available here for slave
configuration. If, for example, a new standard address setting slave is
declared with the address 1A, the address 1B is automatically grayed out.
Slave xxA/B Configuration of the selected slave:
z Characteristics: IO code, ID code, ID1 and ID2 codes (profiles), and
comments on the slave,
z Parameters: list of parameters (modifiable), in binary (4 check boxes) or
decimal (1 check box) form, at the discretion of the user,
z Inputs/Outputs: list of available I/Os and their respective addresses.
Master mode Activation or deactivation is possible for the two functionalities available for
this AS-Interface module (for example, automatic addressing).
"Network down" allows you to force the AS-Interface bus to enter the offline
mode.
"Automatic addressing" mode is checked by default.
Note: The "Data exchange activation" function is not yet available.
The screen also includes 2 buttons:

Buttons Description
Apply Saves the AS-Interface Bus current configuration data.
The configuration can then be transferred to the Twido controller.
Cancel Discard all changes in progress.
Note: Changes in the configuration screen can only be made in offline mode.
35011386 06/2006 171

Configuration of the AS-Interface bus
Introduction AS-Interface bus configuration takes place in the configuration screen in local mode.
Once the AS-Interface Master and the master modes have been selected,
configuration of the AS-Interface bus consists of configuring the slave devices.
Procedure for Procedure for creating or modifying a slave on the AS-Interface V2 bus:
Declaring and
Step Action
Configuring a
Slave 1 Select the desired address cell (not grayed out) in the bus image:
Module Configuration
Std Slaves/A Slaves/B

00
XVBC21A 01
02
03 ASI20MT4IE
04
05 INOUT24/12
06
WXA36 07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
172 35011386 06/2006

Step Action
2 In the slave configuration screen, enter or modify:
z the name of the new profile (limited to 13 characters),
z a comment (optional).
Or click Insert from catalog button in the function bar and select a slave from
the pre-configured AS-Interface profile family.
Illustration of a Configuration Screen for a slave:
Apply Cancel
Slave 1/A Name: Slave 3A

Profile I/O F ID F ID1 F ID2 F
Comment Comment
Permanent parameters
Bits 0 Parameter 1 2 Parameter 3

Inputs / Outputs
Input Address Symbol Output Address Symbol
Master mode
Activate data exchange Network down
Automatic addressing
Note:
z For a new slave, a new screen for configuring the slave is displayed, the "Address"
field shows the selected address, the "Profile" fields are set to F by default and all
other fields in the screen are blank
z For a modification, the slave configuration screen is displayed with fields
containing the values previously defined for the selected slave
3 Enter:
z the IO code (corresponds to the input/output configuration),
z the ID code (identifier), (plus ID1 and for an extended type).
Note:
The "Inputs" and "Outputs" fields show the number of input and output channels.
They are automatically implemented when the IO code is entered.
4 For each parameter define:
z the system's acknowledgement (box checked in "Bits" view, or decimal value
between 0 and 15 in "Decimal" view),
z a name that is more meaningful than "Parameter X" (optional).
Note:
The selected parameters are the image of permanent parameters to be provided to
the AS-Interface Master.
35011386 06/2006 173

Step Action
5 If needed, modify "Address" (within the limit of available addresses on the bus), by
clicking the up/down arrows to the left of the address (access is then given to
authorized addresses) or by entering the address using the keyboard.
6 Confirm the slave configuration by clicking on the Apply button.
The result is the check that:
z the IO and ID are authorized,
z the slave address is authorized (if keyboard entry is used) according to the ID code
("bank" /B slaves are only available if the ID code is equal to A).
If an error occurs, an error message warns the user (for example: "The slave cannot
have this address") and the screen is displayed again with the initial values (in the
profile or address, depending on the error).
Note: The software limits the number of analog slave declarations to 7.
Note: About the Schneider AS-Interface catalog: when you click Insert from
catalog, you can create and configure slaves in "Private family" (other than those
in the Schneider AS-Interface catalog.
174 35011386 06/2006

AS-Interface
Catalog The Insert from catalog button can be used to facilitate configuration of
slaves on the bus. When you use a slave from the Schneider products family, use
this button to simplify and speed up configuration.
Clicking on Insert from catalog opens the following pane:
AS-Interface profile family:
6: Illuminated indicator banks Insert
AS-Interface Catalog: Illuminated indicator banks
Reference:XVBC21A
Profile AS-Interface... @ Comment
7.F.F.F XVBC21A std Illuminated indicator bank XVB AS-i adaptator unit for illuminated indicator banks
7.F.F.F XVBC21B std Illuminated indicator bank XVB XVB = MAXIMO.
This adaptator must be the lowest unit on the stack.
Version:
Supplier:Telemecanique
AS-i Profil:7.F.F.F
I/O Configuration:
Inputs:
D0: Status unit 1 : 1 = "OK", 0 = "NOK"
Outputs:
Fallback = 0 by watchdog
D0: Unit 1 : "Off" = 0 / "On" = 1
D1: Unit 2 : "Off" = 0 / "On" = 1
35011386 06/2006 175

The drop-down menu gives you access to all product families of the Schneider AS-
Interface catalog:
AS-Interface profile family:
6:Keyboards
Illuminated
Up/Down
5: indicator banks
Counter Insert
AS-Interface
5: Keyboards Catalog: Illuminated
6: Illuminated indicator banks @
Profi AS-Interface Comment Reference:XVBC21A
7: Command and signaling
7.F.F. XVBC21A
4: Motor-starters
std Illuminated indicator bank
7.F.F. XVBC21B std Illuminated indicator AS-i adaptator unit for illuminated indicator banks
11: Inductive sensors
9: Phototronic sensors
XVB = MAXIMO.
1: Private family This adaptator must be the lowest unit on the stack.
18: Compact IP20 interfaces
12: Telefast IP20 interfaces Version:
Supplier:Telemecanique
AS-i Profil:7.F.F.F
I/O Configuration:
Inputs:
Outputs:
Fallback = 0 by watchdog
D0: Unit 1 : "Off" = 0 / "On" = 1
D1: Unit 2 : "Off" = 0 / "On" = 1
D2: Unit 3 : "Off" = 0 / "On" = 1
D3: Unit 4 : "Off" = 0 / "On" = 1
After you have selected a product, the list of corresponding slaves appears. Click on
the required slave and validate by clicking "Insert"
Note:
z Click the product name in the AS-Interface catalog to display its characteristics
in the right pane.
z You can add and configure slaves that are not part of the Schneider catalog.
Simply select the private family and configure the new slave.
176 35011386 06/2006

Shortcut menu When you right click, a shortcut menu appears:

Module Configuration
Std Slaves/A Slaves/B

00
XVBC21A 01
02
03 ASI20MT4IE
04
Cut 05 INOUT24/12
Copy
06
Paste
WXA36 07
Delete
08
Accept Conf.
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The shorcut menu is used to:

z Cut (Ctrl+X)
z Copy (Ctrl+C)
z Paste (Ctrl+V)
z Delete (Del)
35011386 06/2006 177

Description of the AS-Interface Window in Online Mode
At a Glance When the PC is connected to the controller (after uploading the application to the
controller), the AS-Interface Window displays online features.
In online mode, the AS-Interface Window dynamically provides an image of the
physical bus that includes the:
z List of expected slaves (entered) during configuration with their name, and the list
of detected slaves (with unknown names, but otherwise expected),
z Status of the AS-Interface module and the slave devices,
z Image of the profile, parameters and input/output values of the selected slaves.
It also enables the user:
z To obtain diagnostics of the slaves on which an error has occurred (See
Displaying Slave Status, p. 181),
z To modify the address of a slave in online mode (See Modification of Slave
Address, p. 182),
z To transmit the image of the slaves to the configuration screen (See Updating the
AS-Interface bus configuration in online mode, p. 184),
z To address all the slaves with the desired addresses (during the first debugging).
178 35011386 06/2006

Illustration of the The illustration of the AS-Interface Window (in online mode only) looks like this:
AS-Interface
Window
Description of the module Reference num TWDNOI10M3 Address 1
Description AS-Interface Master expansion module (80mA)
Std slaves/ Slaves /B Apply Cancel

00
Slave 1A 01 Name:
Slave 1/A Slave 1A
02
03 ASI20MT4IE
04 Profile I/O F ID F ID1 F ID2 F
05 INOUT24/12
Comment Comment
06
WXA36 07 Permanent parameters
08 Bits 0 Parameter 1 2 Parameter 3

09
10
11 Inputs / Outputs
12 Unknown
Input Address Symbol Output Address Symbol
13
14
15
16
17 Master mode
18
19
20
AS-Interface Bus
Configuration OK OFF Auto addressing possible OFF Slaves at Adr 0 Detected OFF ASI PWR Supply Cut OFF
Slaves OK ON Protected Mode OFF Auto Addressing Active ON Network Down OFF
35011386 06/2006 179

Description of The AS-Interface Window provides the same information as the configuration
the AS-Interface screen (See Description of the Screen in Offline Mode, p. 171).
Window The differences are listed in the following table:
Schedule Description
AS-interface V2 Image of the physical bus.
configuration Includes slave status:
z Green indicator lamp: the slave with this address is active.
z Red indicator lamp: an error has occurred on the slave at this address, and the message
informs you of the error type in the "Error on the network" window.
Slave xxA/B Image of the configuration of the selected slave:
z Characteristics: image of the profile detected (grayed out, non-modifiable),
z Parameters: image of the parameters detected. The user can select only the parameter
display format,
z Inputs/Outputs: the input/output values detected are displayed, non-modifiable.
Error on the network Informs you of the error type, if an error has occurred on the selected slave.
AS-Interface Bus Information resulting from an implicit "Read Status" command.
z Shows bus status: for example, "Configuration OK = OFF" indicates that the configuration
specified by the user does not correspond to the physical configuration of the bus,
z Shows the authorized functionalities for the AS-Interface Master module: for example,
"Automatic addressing active = ON" indicates that the automatic addressing Master mode
is authorized.
180 35011386 06/2006

Displaying Slave When the indicator lamp associated with an address is red, there is an error on the
Status slave associated with this address. The "Error on the network" window then provides
the diagnostics of the selected slave.
Description of errors:
z The profile specified by the user by the configuration of a given address does not
correspond to the actual profile detected for this address on the bus (diagnostics:
"Profile error"),
z A new slave, not specified at configuration, is detected on the bus: a red indicator
lamp is then displayed for this address and the slave name displayed is
"Unknown" (diagnostics: "Slave not projected"),
z Peripheral fault, if the slave detected supports it (diagnostics: "Peripheral fault"),
z A configured profile is specified but no slave is detected for this address on the
bus (diagnostics: "Slave not detected").
35011386 06/2006 181

Modification of Slave Address
At a Glance From the AS-Interface Window, the user can modify the address of a slave in online
mode.
Modification of
Slave Address The following table shows the procedure for modifying a slave address:
Step Description
1 Access the AS-Interface Window.
2 Select a slave in the "AS-interface V2 Configuration" zone.
3 Drag and drop the slave to the cell corresponding to the desired address.
Illustration: Dragging and dropping slave 3B to address 15B
Std slaves/ Slaves /B
00
Slave 1A 01
02
03 ASI20MT4IE
04
05 INOUT24/12
06
WXA36 07
08
09
ASI20MT41E
10
11 Unknown
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
182 35011386 06/2006

Step Description
Result:
All the slave parameters are automatically checked to see if the operation is possible.
Illustration of result:
00
XVBC21A 01
02
03 ASI20MT4IE
04
05 INOUT24/12
06
WXA36 07
08
09
10
11 Unknown
12
13
14
15 Unknown
16
17
18
19
20
After performing this operation, the diagnostics for the slave at address 3B indicate "slave not
detected" meaning that the slave expected at this address is no longer there. By selecting
the address 15B, the profile and the parameters of the moved slave can be re-located, but
the name of the slave remains unknown as it was not expected at this address.
Note: The profile and parameters of a slave are not associated with a name.
Several slaves with different names can have the same profiles and parameters.
35011386 06/2006 183

Updating the AS-Interface bus configuration in online mode
At a Glance In online mode, no modification of the configuration screen is authorized and the
physical configuration and software configuration can be different. Any difference in
profile or parameters for a configured or non-configured slave can be taken into
account in the configuration screen; in fact, it is possible to transmit any modification
to the configuration screen before transferring the new application to the controller.
The procedure to follow in order to take the physical configuration into account is the
following:
Step Description
1 Transfer of the desired slave configuration to the configuration screen.
2 Acceptance of the configuration in the configuration screen.
3 Confirmation of the new configuration.
4 Transfer of the application to the module.
Transfer of a In the case when a slave that is not specified in the configuration is detected on the
Slave Image to bus, an "Unknown" slave appears in the "AS-interface V2 Configuration zone" of the
the AS-Interface window for the detected address.
Configuration The following table describes the procedure for transferring the image of the
Screen. "Unknown" slave to the configuration screen:
Step Description
1 Access the AS-Interface window.
2 Select the desired slave in the "AS-interface V2 Configuration" zone.
184 35011386 06/2006

Step Description
3 Right click on the mouse to select "Transfer Conf".
Illustration:
00
XVBC21A 01
02
03 ASI20MT4IE
04
05 INOUT24/12
06
WXA36 07
08
09
10
11 Unknown
12 Transfer Conf
13
14
15 Unknown
16
17
18
19
20
Result:
The image of the selected slave (image of the profile and parameters) is then
transferred to the configuration screen.
4 Repeat the operation for each of the slaves whose image you would like to transfer
to the configuration screen.
35011386 06/2006 185

Return to the When the user returns to the configuration screen, all the new slaves (unexpected)
Configuration which have been transferred are visible.
Screen Illustration of the configuration screen following the transfer of all slaves:
00
XVBC21A 01
02
03 ASI20MT4IE
04
05 INOUT24/12
06
WXA36 07
08
09
10
11 Unknown
12
13
14
15 Unknown
16
17
18
19
20
Key:
z The cross signifies that there are differences between the image of the profile of
the transferred slave, and the profile initially desired in the configuration screen.
z The exclamation mark signifies that a new profile was added to the configuration screen.
Explanation:
The configuration screen always shows the permanent image of the desired
configuration (this is why the slave is still present as 3B in spite of the change of
address (See Modification of Slave Address, p. 182)), completed by the current
image of the bus.
The profiles and parameters of the expected slaves displayed correspond to those
which were expected. The profiles and parameters of the unknown slaves displayed
correspond to the images of those detected.
186 35011386 06/2006

Procedure for Before transferring a new application to the module, the user can, for each slave,
Transferring the accept the detected profile and parameters (transferred to the configuration screen)
Definitive or modify the configuration "manually" (See Procedure for Declaring and
Application to Configuring a Slave, p. 172).
the Module The following table describes the steps to follow to confirm and transfer the definitive
configuration to the module:
Step Action
1 Via the software, disconnect the PC from the module.
Note:
No modification can be carried out in the configuration screen if the PC is connected to the module.
2 Right click on the desired slave.
3 2 choices:
z Select "Accept Conf" to accept the detected profile of the selected slave.
Illustration:
00
XVBC21A 01
02
03 ASI20MT4IE
04
05 INOUT24/12
06
Cut
WXA36 07
Copy
08
Paste
09
10 Delete
11 Unknown
Accept Conf.
12
13
14
15 Unknown
16
17
18
19
20
For each of the slaves marked with a cross, a message will warn the user that this operation will overwrite the
initial profile (displayed on-screen) of the slave.
z Select the other choices in the right click menu to configure the selected slave manually.
4 Repeat the operation for each of the desired slaves in the configuration.
5 Press the "OK" button to confirm and create the new application.
Result: Automatic return to the main screen.
6 Transfer the application to the module.
35011386 06/2006 187

Automatic addressing of an AS-Interface V2 slave
At a Glance Each slave on the AS-Interface bus must be assigned (via configuration) a unique
physical address. This must be the same as the one declared in TwidoSuite.
TwidoSuite software offers an automatic slave addressing utility so that an AS-

Interface console does not have to be used.
The automatic addressing utility is used for:
z replacing a faulty slave,
z inserting a new slave.
Procedure The table below shows the procedure for setting the Automatic addressing
parameter.
Step Action
1 Access the AS-Interface V2 master module’s configuration screen.
2 Click on the Automatic addressing check box found in the Master mode zone.
Result: The Automatic addressing utility will be activated (box checked) or disabled
(box not checked.
Note: By default, the Automatic addressing parameter has been selected in the
configuration screen.
188 35011386 06/2006

How to insert a slave device into an existing AS-Interface V2 configuration
At a Glance It is possible to insert a device into an existing AS-Interface V2 configuration without

having to use the pocket programmer.
This operation is possible once:
z the Automatic addressing utility of configuration mode is active (See Automatic
addressing of an AS-Interface V2 slave, p. 188),
z a single slave is absent in the physical configuration,
z the slave which is to be inserted is specified in the configuration screen,
z the slave has the profile expected by the configuration,
z the slave has the address 0 (A).
The AS-Interface V2 module will therefore automatically assign to the slave the
value predefined in the configuration.
Procedure The following table shows the procedure for making the automatic insertion of a new
slave effective.
Step Action
1 Add the new slave in the configuration screen in local mode.
2 Carry out a configuration transfer to the PLC in connected mode.
3 Physically link the new slave with address 0 (A) to the AS-Interface V2 bus.
Note: An application can be modified by carrying out the above manipulation as

many times as necessary.
35011386 06/2006 189

Automatic replacement of a faulty AS-Interface V2 slave
Principle When a slave has been declared faulty, it can be automatically replaced with a slave
of the same type.
This happens without the AS-Interface V2 bus having to stop, and without requiring
any manipulation since the configuration mode's Automatic addressing utility is
active (See Automatic addressing of an AS-Interface V2 slave, p. 188).
Two options are available:
z The replacement slave is programmed with the same address using the pocket
programmer, and has the same profile and sub-profile as the faulty slave. It is
thus automatically inserted into the list of detected slaves (LDS) and into the list
of active slaves (LAS),
z The replacement slave is blank (address 0 (A), new slave) and has the same
profile as the faulty slave. It will automatically assume the address of the replaced
slave, and will then be inserted into the list of detected slaves (LDS) and the list
of active slaves (LAS).
190 35011386 06/2006

Addressing I/Os associated with slave devices connected to the AS-Interface V2 bus
At a Glance This page presents the details relating to the addressing of discrete or analog I/Os
of slave devices.
To avoid confusion with Remote I/Os, new symbols are available with an AS-
Interface syntax: %IA for example.
Illustration Reminder of the principles of addressing:
% IA, QA, IWA, QWA x . n . i

Symbol Type of object Expansion slave Channel
module address no.
address
Specific Values The table below gives specific values to AS-Interface V2 slave objects:
Part Values Comment
IA - Image of the physical discrete input of the slave.
QA - Image of the physical discrete output of the slave.
IWA - Image of the physical analog input of the slave.
QWA - Image of the physical analog output of the slave.
x 1 to 7 Address of AS-Interface module on the expansion bus.
n 0A to 31B Slot 0 cannot be configured.
i 0 to 3 -
Examples The table below shows some examples of I/O addressing:

%IWA4.1A.0 Analog input 0 of slave 1A of the AS-Interface module situated in position 4
on the expansion bus.
%QA2.5B.1 Discrete output 1 of slave 5B of the AS-Interface module situated in position
2 on the expansion bus.
%IA1.12A.2 Discrete input 2 of slave 12A of the AS-Interface module situated in position
1 on the expansion bus.
Implicit The objects described below are exchanged implicitly, in other words they are
Exchanges exchanged automatically on each PLC cycle.
35011386 06/2006 191

Programming and diagnostics for the AS-Interface V2 bus
Explicit Objects (words and bits) associated with the AS-Interface bus contribute data (for
Exchanges example: bus operation, slave status, etc.) and additional commands to carry out
advanced programming of the AS-Interface function.
These objects are exchanged explicitly between the Twido controller and the AS-
Interface Master by the expansion bus:
z At the request of the program user by way of the instruction: ASI_CMD (see
"Presentation of the ASI_CMD" instruction below)
z Via the AS-Interface window or the animation table.
Reserved System words reserved in the Twido controller for the AS-Interface Master modules
Specific System enable you to determine the status of the network: %SW73 is reserved for the first
Words AS-Interface expansion module, and %SW74 for the second. Only the first 5 bits of
these words are used; they are read-only.
The following table shows the bits used:
System Words Bit Description
0 system status ( = 1 if configuration OK, otherwise 0)
%SW73 1 data exchange ( = 1 data exchange is enabled, 0 if in mode Data
and Exchange Off (See AS-Interface V2 bus interface module operating
%SW74 mode:, p. 197))
2 system stopped ( = 1 if the Offline (See Offline Mode, p. 197) mode
is enabled, otherwise 0)
3 ASI_CMD instruction terminated ( = 1 if terminated, 0 if in progress)
4 ASI_CMD error instruction ( = 1 if there is an error in the instruction,
otherwise 0)
Example of use (for the first AS-Interface expansion module):

Before using an ASI_CMD instruction, the %SW73:X3 bit must be checked to see
whether an instruction is not in progress: check that %SW73:X3 = 1.
To ascertain whether the instruction has then correctly executed, check that the
%SW73:X4 bit equals 0.
192 35011386 06/2006

Presentation of For each user program, the ASI_CMD instruction allows the user to program his
the ASI_CMD network and obtain the slave diagnostics. The instruction parameters are passed by
Instruction internal words (memory words) %MWx.
The syntax of the instruction is as follows:
ASI_CMDn %MWx:l
Legend:
Symbol Description
n Address of AS-Interface expansion module (1 to 7).
x Number of the first internal word (memory word) passed in parameter.
l Length of the instruction in number of words (2).
Using the The following table describes the action of the ASI_CMD instruction according to the
ASI_CMD value of the parameters %MW(x), and %MW(x+1) when necessary. For slave
Instruction diagnostics requests, the result is returned in %MW(x+1).
%MWx %MWx+1 Action
1 0 Exits Offline mode.
1 1 Switches to Offline mode.
2 0 Prohibits the exchange of data between the Master and its slaves
(enters Data Exchange Off mode).
2 1 Authorizes the exchange of data between the Master and its slaves
(exits Data Exchange Off mode).
3 Reserved -
4 Result Reads the list of active slaves (LAS table) with addresses from 0A to
15A (1 bit per slave).
5 Result Reads the list of active slaves (LAS table) with addresses from 16A to
31A (1 bit per slave).
6 Result Reads the list of active slaves (LAS table) with addresses from 0B to
15B (1 bit per slave).
7 Result Reads the list of active slaves (LAS table) with addresses from 16B to
31B (1 bit per slave).
8 Result Reads the list of detected slaves (LDS table) with addresses from 0A
to 15A (1 bit per slave).
9 Result Reads the list of detected slaves (LDS table) with addresses from 16A
to 31A (1 bit per slave).
10 Result Reads the list of detected slaves (LDS table) with addresses from 0B
to 15B (1 bit per slave).
35011386 06/2006 193

%MWx %MWx+1 Action

11 Result Reads the list of detected slaves (LDS table) with addresses from 16B
to 31B (1 bit per slave).
12 Result Reads the list of peripheral faults on slaves (LPF table) with addresses
0A to 15A (1 bit per slave).
16A to 31A (1 bit per slave).
0B to 15B (1 bit per slave).
16B to 31B (1 bit per slave).
16 Result Reads bus status.
See the results details in the next paragraph.
32 Param Writes a new parameter in an AS-Interface slave (PI table).
Param:
z Byte 0: New parameter to write – 0 to 15
z Byte 1: Address - 0 to 31 (for 0A to 31A) and 100 to 131 (for 0B to
31B)
33 Param Reads a parameter on an AS-Interface slave (PI table).
Param:
z Byte 0: New parameter to write – 0 to 15
z Byte 1: Address - 0 to 31 (for 0A to 31A) and 100 to 131 (for 0B to
31B)
Note: Bus status is updated on each PLC scan.. But the result of the ASI_CMD bus
reading instruction is available only at the end if the following PLC scan.
194 35011386 06/2006

Details of the In the case when bus status is read by the ASI_CMD instruction (value of the %MWx
results of the parameter is equal to 16), the format of the result in the %MWx+1 word is as follows:
ASI_CMD
%MWx+1 Designation (1=OK, 0=NOK)
instruction to
read bus status least significant bit 0 Configuration OK
bit 1 LDS.0 (slave present with address 0)
bit 2 Auto addressing active
bit 3 Auto addressing available
bit 4 Configuration Mode active
bit 5 Normal operation active
bit 6 APF (power supply problem)
bit 7 Offline ready
most significant bit 0 Peripheral fault
bit 1 Data exchange active
bit 2 Offline Mode
bit 3 Normal mode (1)
bit 4 Communication fault with the AS-Interface Master
bit 5 ASI_CMD instruction in progress
bit 6 ASI_CMD instruction error
Details of the In the case of slave diagnostics by ASI_CMD instruction (%MWx value between 4 and
results of the 15), the slaves' status is returned in the bits (1=OK) of the %MWx+1 word. The following
ASI_CMD table gives the detail of the results according to the value of the %MWx word:
instruction to
read slave status
%MWx %MWx+1
value most significant byte least significant byte
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
4, 8, 12 15A 14A 13A 12A 11A 10A 9A 8A 7A 6A 5A 4A 3A 2A 1A 0A
5, 9, 13 31A 30A 29A 28A 27A 26A 25A 24A 23A 22A 21A 20A 19A 18A 17A 16A
6, 10, 14 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B 0B
7, 11, 15 31B 30B 29B 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B
To read whether slave 20B is active, the ASI_CMD instruction must be executed
with the %MWx internal word having a value of 7. The result is returned in the
%MWx+1 internal word; the status of slave 20B is given by the value of bit 4 of the
least significant byte: If bit 4 is equal to 1, then slave 20B is active.
35011386 06/2006 195

Programming To force the AS-Interface Master (positioned at 1 on the expansion bus) to switch to
Examples for the Offline mode:
ASI_CMD LD 1
Instruction
[%MW0 := 16#0001 ]
[%MW1 := 16#0001 ]
LD %SW73:X3 //If no ASI_CMD instruction is in progress, then continue
[ASI_CMD1 %MW0:2] //to force the switch to Offline mode
To read the table of slaves active for addresses 0A to 15A:

LD 1
[%MW0 := 16#0004 ]
[%MW1 := 16#0000 //optional]
LD %SW73:X3 //If no ASI_CMD instruction is in progress, then continue
[ASI_CMD1 %MW0:2] //to read the LAS table for addresses 0A to 15A
196 35011386 06/2006

AS-Interface V2 bus interface module operating mode:
At a Glance The AS-Interface bus interface module TWDNOI10M3 has three operating modes,
each of which responds to particular needs. These modes are:
z Protected mode,
z Offline mode,
z Data Exchange Off mode.
Using the ASI_CMD (See Presentation of the ASI_CMD Instruction, p. 193)
instruction in a user program allows you to enter or exit these modes.
Protected Mode The protected operating mode is the mode generally used for an application which is
running. It assumes that the AS-Interface V2 module is configured in TwidoSuite. This:
z continually checks that the list of detected slaves is the same as the list of
expected slaves,
z monitors the power supply.
In this mode, a slave will only be activated if it has been declared in the configuration
and been detected.
At power up or during the configuration phase, the Twido controller forces the AS-
Interface module into protected mode.
Offline Mode When the module is put into Offline mode, it first resets all the slaves present to zero and
stops exchanges on the bus. When in Offline mode, the outputs are forced to zero.
In addition to using the PB2 button on the TWDNOI10M3 AS-Interface module,
Offline mode can also be accessed via the software by using the ASI_CMD (See
Programming Examples for the ASI_CMD Instruction, p. 196) instruction, which also
allows you to exit the mode and return to protected mode.
Data Exchange When the Data Exchange Off mode is engaged, exchanges on the bus continue to
Off Mode function, but data is no longer refreshed.
This mode can only be accessed by using the ASI_CMD (See Using the ASI_CMD
Instruction, p. 193) instruction.
35011386 06/2006 197

198 35011386 06/2006

Installing and Configuring the
CANopen Fieldbus
9
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter describes how to install and configure the TWDNCO1M CANopen
Chapter master module and its slave devices on the CANopen fieldbus.
What's in this This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter?
Section Topic Page
9.1 CANopen Fieldbus Overview 201
9.2 Implementing the CANopen Bus 215
35011386 06/2006 199

Installing and Configuring the CANopen Fieldbus
200 35011386 06/2006

9.1 CANopen Fieldbus Overview
At a Glance
Subject of this This section is intended to provide you with general knowledge about the CANopen
Section fieldbus technology and to introduce CAN-specific terminology that will be used
throughout the remainder of this chapter.
What's in this This section contains the following topics:

Section?
Topic Page
CANopen Knowledge Base 202
About CANopen 203
CANOpen Boot-Up 205
Process Data Object (PDO) Transmission 209
Access to Data by Explicit Exchanges (SDO) 211
"Node Guarding" and "Life Guarding" 212
Internal Bus Management 214
35011386 06/2006 201

CANopen Knowledge Base
Introduction The following explanations of technical terms and acronyms are helpful for
understanding the basic knowledge of CANopen network communication.
EDS file EDS (Electronic Data Sheet)

An EDS file describes the communication properties of a device on the CAN network
(baudrates, transmission types, I/O offer, ...). It is provided by the device
manufacturer. It is used in the configuration tool to configure a node (like a driver in
an operating system).
PDO PDO (Process Data Object)

CANopen frame containing I/O data.
We distinguish between:
z Transmit-PDOs (TPDOs with data provided by a node) and
z Receive PDOs (RPDOs with data to be consumed by a node).
The transmission direction is always seen from a node's point of view. A PDO does
not necessarily contain the whole data image of a node (for both TPDO and RPDO).
Normally, analog input data and discrete input data are divided onto different
TPDOs. The same is true for outputs.
SDO SDO (Service Data Object)

CANopen frames containing parameters.
SDOs are typically used to read parameters from or write parameters to drives while
the application is running.
COB-ID COB-ID (Communication Object Identifier)

Each CANopen frame starts with a COB-ID working as the Identifier in the CAN
frame. During the configuration phase each node is receiving the COB-ID(s) for the
frame(s) he is the provider or the consumer.
202 35011386 06/2006

About CANopen
Introduction CANopen is a standard fieldbus protocol for industrial control systems. It is

particularly well suited to real-time PLCs, as it provides an effective, low-cost
solution for integrated and transportable industrial applications.
The CANopen The CANopen protocol was created as a subset of CAL. By defining profiles, it is able
Protocol to be even more specifically adapted to use with standard industrial components.
CANopen is a CiA (CAN in Automation) standard which was taken up very rapidly as
soon as it was made available on the market. In Europe, CANopen is now recognized
as the industry standard for industrial systems based on a CAN design.
Physical Layer CAN uses a differentially driven two-wire bus line (common return). A CAN signal is
the difference between the voltage levels of the CAN-high and CAN-low wires. (See
figure below.)
The following diagram shows the components of the physical layer of a two-wire
CAN bus:
1 CAN-high wire
2 CAN-low wire
3 potential difference between CAN-high/CAN-low signals
4 120Ω resistance jack
5 node
The bus wires can be routed in parallel, twisted or shielded form in accordance with
electromagnetic compatibility requirements. A single line structure minimizes reflection.
35011386 06/2006 203

CANopen The communication profile

Profiles The CANopen profile family is based on a "communication profile", which specifies
the main communication mechanisms and their description (DS301).
The device profile
The most important types of devices used in industrial automation are described in
the "Device profiles". They also define device functionalities.
Examples of the standard devices described are:
z discrete and analog input/output modules (DS401),
z motors (DS402),
z control devices (DSP403),
z closed loop controllers (DSP404),
z PLCs (DS405),
z encoders (DS406).
Device The possibility of configuring devices via the CAN bus is one of the basic principles
Configuration via of the autonomy required by manufacturers (for each profile family).
the CAN Bus
General CANopen is a set of profiles for CAN systems with the following specifications:
Specifications z open bus system,
for CANopen z real-time data exchange without protocol overload,
Profiles z modular design with possibility of resizing,
z interoperability and interchangeability of devices,
z supported by a large number of international manufacturers,
z standardized network configuration,
z access to all device parameters,
z synchronization and circulation of cyclical process data and/or event-driven data
(possibility of short system response times).
CANopen All manufacturers offering CANopen-certified products on the market are members
Product of the CiA group. As an active member of the CiA group, Schneider Electric
Certification Industries SAS develops its products in compliance with the standardization
recommendations set by this association.
204 35011386 06/2006

CAN Standards CANopen specifications are defined by the CiA group and can be accessed (subject
to some restrictions) on the group site at http://www.can-cia.com. The sourcecodes
for master and slave devices are available from the various suppliers.
Note: To find out more about CANopen standard specifications and mechanisms,
please visit CiA's home page (http://www.can-cia.de/).
Communication The communication profile is based on CAL services and protocols.

on a CANopen It provides the user with access to two types of exchange: SDO and PDO.
Network
On power up, the device enters an initialization phase then goes into pre-operational
state. At this stage, only SDO communication is authorized. After receiving a startup
command, the device switches to the operational state. PDO exchanges can then
be used, and SDO communication remains possible.
CANOpen Boot-Up
35011386 06/2006 205

Boot-up The minimum device configuration specifies a shortened boot procedure. This
Procedure procedure is illustrated in the following diagram:
1
Initialization
Reset Application
Reset Communication
Init
7 Pre-operational 6
4 5
4 3 Stopped 6
3 5
7 Operational 6
Legend
Number Description
1 Module power up
2 After initialization, the module automatically goes into PRE-OPERATIONAL state.
3 NMT service indication: START REMOTE NODE
4 NMT service indication: PRE-OPERATIONAL
5 NMT service indication: STOP REMOTE NODE
6 NMT service indication: RESET NODE
7 NMT service indication: RESET COMMUNICATION
206 35011386 06/2006

Active CANopen The crosses in the table below indicate which CANopen objects are active for which
Objects states of the state machine.
depending on
Initialization Pre-operational Operational Stopped
State Machine
PDO object X
SDO object X X
Emergency X X
Boot-Up X X
NMT X X X
Reset The device goes into "Reset Application" state:

Application z after the device starts up,
z or by using the "Reset Node" Network management (NMT) service.
In this state, the device profile is initialized, and all the device profile information is
reset to default values. When initialization is complete, the device automatically
goes into the "Reset Communication" state.
Reset The device goes into the "Reset Communication" state:

Communication z after the "Reset Application" state,
z or by using the "Reset Communication" Network management (NMT) service.
In this state, all the parameters (standard value, depending on the device
configuration) of the supported communication objects (objects pertaining to device
identification such as device type, heartbeat, etc.: 1000H - 1FFFH) are saved in the
object directory. The device then automatically goes into the "Init" state.
Init The device goes into "Init" mode after being in the "Reset Communication" state.
This state enables you to:
z define the required communication objects (SDO, PDO, Emergency),
z install the corresponding CAL services
z configure the CAN-Controller.
Initialization of the device is complete and the device automatically goes into the
"Pre-Operational" state.
Note: The TWDNCO1M CANopen master module does not support SYNC mode.
35011386 06/2006 207

Pre-Operational The device goes into "Pre-Operational" state:

z after the "Init" state,
z on receiving the "Enter Pre-Operational" NMT indication if it was in Operational state.
When the device is in this state, its configuration can be modified. However, only
SDOs can be used to read or write device-related data.
When configuration is complete, the device goes into one of the following states on
receiving the corresponding indication:
z "Stopped" on receiving the "STOP REMOTE NODE" NMT indication,
z "Operational" on receiving the "START REMOTE NODE" NMT indication.
Stopped The device goes into the "Stopped" state on receiving the "Node stop" indication
(NMT service) if it was in "Pre-Operational" or "Operational" state.
In this state, the device cannot be configured. No service is available to read and
write device-related data (SDO). Only the slave monitoring function ("Node
guarding") remains active.
Operational The device goes into the "Operational" state if it was in the "Pre-Operational" state
on receiving the "Start Remote Node" indication.
When the CANopen network is started using the "Node start" NMT services in
"Operational" state, all device functionalities can be used. Communication can use
PDOs or SDOs.
Note: Modifications to the configuration in "Operational" mode may have

unexpected consequences and should therefore only be made in "Pre-
Operational" mode.
208 35011386 06/2006

Process Data Object (PDO) Transmission
Definition of PDO PDOs are objects which provide the communication interface with process data and
enable them to be exchanged in real time. A CANOpen device's PDO set describes the
implicit exchanges between this device and its communication partners on the network.
The exchange of PDOs is authorized when the device is in "Operational" mode.
Types of PDO There are two types of PDO:

z PDOs transmitted by the device (often labeled:Transmit PDO or Tx-PDO or TPDO),
z PDOs received by the device (often labeled:Receive PDO or Rx-PDO or RPDO).
PDO Producers PDOs are based on a "Producer / Consumer" model. The device which sends out a
and Consumers PDO is called the "producer" while one that receives it is known as the "consumer".
Thus, writing an output to the TWDNCO1M master module sends a TPDO associated
with the master, which contains the value of the output to be updated. In this case, the
master is the PDO "producer" (while the slave device is the PDO "consumer".
In contrast, an input is updated by the transmission of a RPDO by the master module
which is then the "consumer".
PDO In addition to data to be transported, it is possible to configure the type of exchange

Transmission for each PDO.
Mode PDO can be exchanged by the TWDNCO1M master module in the following
transmission mode:
Mode number Mode type Mode name
254 or 255 Asynchronous Change of state
Change of state producer
consumer(s)
35011386 06/2006 209

Change of state "Change of state" corresponds to the modification of an input value (event control).
(Modes 254 Immediately after the change, the data are sent onto the bus. Event control makes
and 255) it possible to make optimal use of bus bandwidth, as only the modification is
transmitted, rather than the whole process image. This makes it possible to achieve
a very short response time, as when an input value is modified, it is not necessary
to await the next request from the master.
When selecting "change of state" PDO transmission, you should however bear in
mind that it is probable that a number of events may occur at the same time,
generating delays whilst waiting for a lower priority PDO to be transmitted to the bus.
You should also avoid a situation where continual modification of an input with a
high-priority PDO blocks the bus (this is known as a "babbling idiot").
Note: As a general rule, you should only choose to use PDO transmission with
analog input modules if the Delta mode (object 6426H) or the inhibit time (objects
1800H to 1804H, sub-index 3) are set to avoid a bus overload.
210 35011386 06/2006

Access to Data by Explicit Exchanges (SDO)
What is an SDO? Service Data Objects (SDO) allow a device's data to be accessed by using explicit requests.
The SDO service is available when the device is in "Operational" or "Pre-
Operational" state.
Types of SDO There are two types of SDO:

z read SDOs (Download SDO),
z write SDOs (Upload SDO).
Client/Server The SDO protocol is based on a 'Client / Server' model.

Model For a Download SDO
The client sends a request indicating the object to be read.
The server return the data contained within the object.
For an Upload SDO
The client sends a request indicating the object to be written to and the desired value.
After the object has been updated, the server returns a confirmation message.
For an unprocessed SDO
In both cases, if an SDO was not able to be processed, the server returns an error
code (abort code).
35011386 06/2006 211

"Node Guarding" and "Life Guarding"
Definition of Life- The "Life time" parameter is calculated as follows:

Time Life Time = Guard Time x Life Time Factor
The object 100CH contains the ''Guard Time'' parameter expressed in milliseconds.
The object 100DH contains the "Life Time Factor" parameter.
Activation of If one of these two parameters is set to "0" (default configuration) the module does
Monitoring not perform monitoring (no "Life Guarding").
To activate monitoring over time, you must at least enter the value 1 in the object
100DH and specify a time in ms in the object 100CH.
Guarantee of To guarantee reliable operation, it is advisable to enter a "Life time factor" of 2.

Reliable If not, should a delay occur (for example due to processing of messages of the
Operation highest priority or internal processing on the "Node Guarding") master, the module
switches into "Pre-Operational" state without generating an error.
Importance of These two monitoring mechanisms are particularly important to the CANopen
Monitoring system, given that devices do not usually operate in event-controlled mode.
Slave Monitoring Monitoring is performed in the following way:

Phase Description
1 The master sets "Remote Frames" (remote transmit requests) on the "Guarding
COB-IDs" of the slaves to be monitored.
2 The slaves concerned respond by sending the "Guarding" message. It contains the
"Status Code" of the slave and the "Toggle Bit", which must change after each
message.
3 The master compares the "Status" and "Toggle Bit" information:
If they are not in the state expected by the NMT master or if no response is received,
the master considers that an error has occurred on the slave.
212 35011386 06/2006

Master If the master requests "Guarding" messages on a strictly cyclical basis, the slave
Monitoring can detect a master failure.
If the slave does not receive a request from the master within the defined "Life Time" interval
(Guarding error), it considers the a master failure has occurred ("Watchdog" function).
In this case, the corresponding outputs go into the error state and the slave switches
back into "Pre-Operational" mode.
Note: The "Remote" request from the master obtains a response, even if there are
no values entered in the "Guard Time" and "Life Time Factor" objects. Time
monitoring is only activated when the values in the two objects are greater than 0.
Typical values for the "Guard Time" parameter are between 250 ms and 2
seconds.
"Guarding" The value of the ''Toggle Bit'' (t) sent in the first ''Guarding'' message is ''0''.
Protocol Then, the bit changes (''toggles'') in each subsequent ''Guarding'' message, which
makes it possible to indicate if a message has been lost.
The bus head indicates its network state (s) in the seven remaining bits:
Network state Response
Stopped 0x04 or 0x84
Pre-operational 0x7F or 0xFF
Operational 0x05 or 0x85
35011386 06/2006 213

Internal Bus Management
Switching the The internal bus automatically switches from the ''Stop'' to the ''Run'' state when the
Internal Bus to communication module switches from the "Pre-operational" to the "Operational" state.
the "Stop" State When the internal bus switches to the "Stop" state all the expansion module outputs
are set to zero.
The communication module outputs are maintained in their current state.
Configuration of The internal bus is used to update the configuration of the discrete and analog
Expansion expansion module parameters.
Modules The parameters are sent to the communication module when the bus is in the ''Stop'' state.
These new configuration parameters are acknowledged when the bus goes into the
''Run'' state.
214 35011386 06/2006

9.2 Implementing the CANopen Bus
Overview
Introduction This section describes how to implement the CANopen fieldbus on the Twido PLC
system, using the TWDNCO1M CANopen master module.

Section?
Topic Page
Overview 216
Hardware Setup 217
Configuration Methodology 218
Declaration of CANopen Master 220
Network CANopen Slave Declaration 221
CANopen Objects Mapping 225
CANopen Objects Linking 229
CANopen Objects Symbolization 231
Addressing PDOs of the CANopen master 233
Programming and diagnostics for the CANopen fieldbus 234
35011386 06/2006 215

Overview
Hardware and The following hardware and software is required to implement a CANopen bus on
Software your Twido PLC system:
Requirements
Hardware Requirements
Twido PLC compact or modular base controller Compact base:
z TWDLC•24DRF
z TWDLCA•40DRF
Modular base:
z TWDLMDA20•••
z TWDLMDA40•••
CANopen master 1 CANopen master module: TWDNCO1M

CANopen slave devices 16 CANopen slaves maximum
CANopen connectors and cables
Programming cable for the Twido PLC
Software Requirements
Twido PLC configuration software TwidoSuite
CANopen The following procedure will guide you through the installation, configuration and
Implementation use of your CANopen network:
Procedure
Step Description
1 Hardware Setup
2 Configuration Methodology
3 Declaration of the CANopen Master
4 Network CANopen Slave Declaration
5 CANopen Objects Mapping
6 CANopen Objects Linking
7 CANopen Objects Symbolization
8 Network CANopen Diagnostics
The following sub-sections will provide a detailed description of each step of this
procedure.
216 35011386 06/2006

Hardware Setup
Installing the Install the TWDNCO1M master module on a Twido PLC system (DIN-rail or panel
TWDNCO1M mounting) and connect it to the Twido PLC internal bus (for more details, see
Master Module TwdoHW - Installing an expansion module). Follows these steps:
Step Action Description
1 Installation Preparation Consult the Twido Programmable Controllers Hardware Reference Guide (TWD
USE 10AE) for instructions on:
z correct mounting positions for Twido modules,
z adding and removing Twido components from a DIN rail,
z direct mounting on a panel surface,
z minimum clearances for modules in a control panel.
2 Mounting the Install the TWDNCO1M master module on a DIN rail or panel. For more details, see
TWDNCO1M Module TwdoHW - Installing an expansion module.
3 Module Connection to Connect the CANopen master module to the Twido PLC internal bus (for more
the Twido PLC’s Bus details, see TwdoHW - Installing an expansion module).
4 CANopen Wiring and Follow the wiring and connections directions outlined in CANopen Wiring and
Connections Connections to connect the CAN bus power supply and signal lines.
35011386 06/2006 217

Configuration Methodology
Overview The CANopen configuration is performed via the CANopen Configuration tool
available on TwidoSuite.
Note:
1. CANopen network, master and slave configuration, as well as configuration of
communication parameters is performed only in Offline mode.
2. No change to the CANopen configuration is allowed in Online mode.
3. In Online mode, only certain parameters can be adjusted, such as %IWC and
%QWC PDO addressing parameters.
Configuration The following table describes the different software implementation phases of the
Methodology CANopen bus:
Mode Phase Description
Local Declaration of the Choose an available slot number to install the TWDNCO1M master module
TWDNCO1M module on the Twido expansion bus.
Configuration of the Configure the CANopen network by:
CANopen network z importing EDS files of all slave device to the network catalog,
z adding the slave devices from the catalog to the CANopen network.
PDO mapping Perform the mapping of TPDOs and RPDOs objects of each slave device
declared on the network.
PDO Linking Link each slave PDO to the corresponding master module PDO.
Local or Symbolization (optional) Symbolization of the variables associated with the slave devices.
connected Programming Programming the CANopen function.
Connected Transfer Transfer of the application to the PLC.
Debugging Debugging the application with the help of:
z the debug screen, used on the one hand to display slaves (address,
parameters), and on the other, to assign them the desired addresses,
z diagnostic screens allowing identification of errors.
Note: The declaration and deletion of the TWDNCO1M CANopen master module
on the expansion bus is the same as for any other expansion module. However,
only one CANopen master module is allowed on the Twido expansion bus. The
TwidoSuite user interface program will not permit any other CANopen module to
be added.
218 35011386 06/2006

Precautions Before connecting (via the software) the PC to the controller and to avoid any
Prior to detection problem:
Connection z Ensure that no slave is physically present on the bus with address 127 (127 is a
reserved, factory-set address assigned to the TWDNCO1M master module).
z Ensure that there a no slaves installed on the CANopen bus with duplicate
addresses.
35011386 06/2006 219

Declaration of CANopen Master
Procedure The table below shows the different steps when declaring the master CANopen.
Step Action Comment
1 Select Describe step from the TwidoSuite See .
interface.
2 Display the product catalog and select a See (See Positioning a Module, TwidoSuite Programming
TWDNCO1M module to add to the system Software, Online Help).
description. Note: A TWDNCO1M master can be inserted in any available
expansion slot numbered 1 to 7 on the Twido bus.
At this stage, you may continue adding any other expansion
module (up to 7) that you want to include into your Twido system.
Note: Only one TWDNCO1M CANopen master module is
allowed.
Only TWDC•A24DRF, TWDCA•40DRF, TWDLMDA20••• and
TWDLMDA40••• controllers are supported
220 35011386 06/2006

Network CANopen Slave Declaration
Overview The network CANopen slave declaration is a three-stage process that consists in:
1. importing the CANopen slave devices’ EDS files into the Twido CANopen
configurator’s catalog,
2. building the CANopen network by adding up to 16 slave devices from the catalog
to the network,
3. configuring the network management parameters (network speed and error
control protocol parameters.)
CANopen From the TwidoSuite user interface, select the Program → Configure → Configure
Configurator the Hardware task and select the TWDNCO1M module in the PCE View (See PCE
View, TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help).
Result: The CANopen Configuration Tool appears on screen in the DSO view
(DSO View, TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help), as shown in the
following sub-section.
Network The network CANopen configuration and slave declaration is performed via the
Dialogbox TwidosSoft CANopen Configurator Network dialogbox, as shown below:
CANopen Configuration Tool
Network Mapping Linking Symbol
Catalogue Network
(DS-401) I/O Modules # Slave Type Supervision

MIDU 401 (V2.1) 1 MIDU 4011 MIDU 401 (V2.1) Guard Time
(DS-403) Human Machine Interface 2 MIDU 4031 MIDU 403 (V2.0) Guard Time
MIDU 403 (V2.0)
3 MIDU 4032 MIDU 403 (V2.0) Guard Time
5 Heart Beat
6 None
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Properties Value
14
Vendor CROUZET AUTOMATISMES 401
15
Description Description 401
16
Author Author 401
Creation 07-09-99 Baudrate 125 Kbit/s Supervision 1000 ms
OK Cancel Apply
35011386 06/2006 221

Importing Slave The table below describes how to import CANopen slaves profiles (.EDS files) into
Profiles the CANopen Configuration Tool catalog:
Step Action
1
From the Catalog area in the Network dialog box, click the Import icon .
Result: The operating system’s Open dialogbox appears.
2 Browse to the location of the folder containing the EDS files of CANopen slave devices you want to add to the catalog.
Result: The name of available EDS files appears in the Open dialogbox:
3 Choose an EDS file ("filename".EDS) from the list and click Open.
Result: The CANopen Configuration Tool loads the object dictionary for the selected device.
Note: This process may take several minutes, depending on the size of the selected EDS file. A progress bar
indicates the state of completion of the loading process, as shown in the example below:
MIDU 401 (V2.1) - Object Dictionary Loading 55%
4 Wait till the loading process is complete, then repeat steps 2 to 3 for any new slave profile you want to add to
the catalog.
Note: You only need to perform this process once, for all device profiles and object dictionaries listed in the
loaded catalog are stored by TwidoSuite.
5 To display the device properties of a CANopen slave:
1. Click twice on the device type listed in the catalog.
Example: (DS-401) I/O Modules .
(DS-401) I/O Modules

Result: MIDU 401 (V2.1) .
2. Click once on the slave profile (for example, MIDU 401 V2.1).
Result: The device properties of the selected CANopen slave appear in lower half of the Catalog area,
showing:
z the vendor’s name (for example, Crouzet Automatismes 401),
z the slave profile (for example, Description 401),
z the author’s name (for example, Author 401),
z the creation date for that profile (for example, 07-09-99.)
6 To delete a slave profile from the Catalog, select the device name in the Catalog window and click the Delete
icon .
Note: You may store in the Network CANopen Catalog more device profiles than you actually need for your current
CANopen bus configuration. Profiles that are already loaded to the Catalog may be provisioned for future use.
7 Press the Apply button to confirm changes to the Catalog and save slave profiles to the TwidoSuite project.
222 35011386 06/2006

Building the The table below describes how to declare slave devices on the Twido CANopen
CANopen network. (Note that you may only declare slaves which EDS profiles have been prior
Network added to or are already stored in the Catalog.)
Step Action
1 From the Catalog area in the Network dialog box, select the slave profile from the list
of available devices already stored in the catalog.
Result: The Add icon appears at the top right corner of the catalog frame.
2
Click the Add icon once.
Result: The slave device is added to the network slaves table.
Notes:
z A maximum of 16 slaves can be declared on the Twido CANopen network.
z The newly declared slave device takes the node address with the lowest available
index. (For example, if slave devices are declared at node addresses 1, 2 and 4,
the a newly added slave device with take the available node address 3, as default.)
3 You may assign a slave device to any available node address (1 to 16). To move a
slave device to the desired node address, use the Move up/down arrow icons /
.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for any new slave device you want to declare on the CANopen
network.
5 To delete a slave device from the Network, select the device name in the slaves table
and click the Delete icon .

6 Press the Apply button to confirm changes and save the network configuration to the
TwidoSuite project.
Configuring the The procedure below describes how to configure network management parameters
Network such as the Baudrate (network speed), life-time and error control protocol.)
Management
Step Action
Parameters
1 In the Network dialog box, select the Baudrate (network speed) from the drop-down
list: 125, 250 (default value), 500.
Note: Make sure that each slave device declared on the network is individually
configured so that its own Baudrate is strictly identical to the network speed defined
above, or otherwise the CANopen network communications will not function properly.
2 Configure the Life-time period. This parameter defines the communications cycle-
time period that will be implemented in the supervision field of each slave device, as
explained in step 3 below.
Note: Do not enter 0 in this field.
35011386 06/2006 223

Step Action
3 Click once in the Supervision field to configure the error control protocol options of
each slave device declared in the network slaves table.
Result: The available surpervision options supported by the selected device appear
in a listbox as shown in the following example:
5 Heart Beat
6 None
4 Select the error control protocol you wish to use to manage communications between
the TWDNCO1M master module and the selected slave device:
z Guard Time
z Heartbeat
z None
5 If the surpervision option is set to None in the network slaves table, the outputs will
not return to their fallback values in the event of a break in connection (*) between this
slave and the TWDNCO1M master module.
(*) this disconnection can be caused by:
z disconnection of the expansion bus cable linking the TWDNCO1M CANopen
master module to the Twido PLC base controller,
z disconnection of this CANopen slave from the Twido CANopen bus,
z a faulty bus cable,
z a TwidoSuite "Reset" command (Online → Firmware / Reset),
z a TwidoSuite load configuration command (Online → Download),
z a command for firmware download to the TWDNCO1M master module via
TwidoSuite (Online → Firmware Download).
6 Press the Apply button to confirm changes and save the network configuration to the
TwidoSuite project.
224 35011386 06/2006

CANopen Objects Mapping
Overview The Mapping dialogbox of the CANopen Configuration Tool allows you configure
the PDOs of each slave device declared on the network.
Mapping Select the Mapping tab from the CANopen Configuration Tool (See CANopen
Dialogbox Configurator, p. 221).
Result: The CANopen Configuration Tool appears on screen, as shown in the
following figure:
Slaves Available Objects PDO

# Slave 2000 - Mots de données UES0 Type Receive
1 MIDU 4011 2001 - Mots de données UES1
Name Index COB-ID
1 PDO RX 1 1600 201
2003 - Mots de données UES3
3 MIDU 4032 2 PDO RX 2 1601 301
5 2006 - Mots de données UES6
6 2007 - Mots de données UES7
7 6300 - Write State 16 output Lines Mapped Object
6414 - Read Input Manufacturer spec
8 64
9 # Name Index Size
10 1 Write 16 Outputs UES0 6300sub01 8
21
3 Write 16 Outputs UES2 6300sub02 8
14
16
SDO
Memory space 0%
OK Cancel Apply
35011386 06/2006 225

Objects Mapping To find out how to use the Mapping dialog box to configure the TPDOs and RPDOs
of each slave device, follow these guidelines:
Step Action
1 In the Slaves frame, click once on the device name to select the slave you wish to
configure the PDOs.
2 Example: The DS-401 I/O module labeled MIDU 4011. Note that the slave names
and node addresses appear in this frame exactly as defined in the previous stage of
network configuration (see Network CANopen Slave Declaration, p. 221.)
Slaves
# Slave
1 MIDU 4011
2 MIDU 4031
3 MIDU 4032
4 MIDU 4012
5
226 35011386 06/2006

Step Action
3 Results:
1. All of the CANopen objects supported by the selected slave are displayed in the
Available Objects frame, as shown in the example below:
Available Objects
6300 - Write State 16 output Lines
6414 - Read Input Manufacturer spec
2. The PDO frame is showing the predefined Transmit-PDOs (PDO TX) for the
selected slave, as default. You may use the Type toggle list to display the
predefined Receive-PDOs (PDO RX) as well. In this example, the MIDU 4011 DS-
401 I/O module supports two Transmit-PDOs (PDO TX) and two Receive-PDOs
(PDO RX), as shown below:
PDO
Type Transmit
Name Index COB-ID

1 PDO TX 1 1A00 181
2 PDO TX 2 1A01 281
PDO
Type Receive
Name Index COB-ID

1 PDO RX 1 1600 201
2 PDO RX 2 1601 301
3. The predefined mapping of each selected PDO is showing in the Mapped Objects
frame as well. :
Mapped Object
64
# Name Index Size
35011386 06/2006 227

Step Action
4 You may choose to customize the PDO mapping, using the Mapped Objects frame.
A RPDO or TPDO is a 64-byte object that can contain up to eight 8-byte word objects
or four 16-byte word objects or any combination of those two types of word objects,
not too exceed the overall 64-byte limit of the PDO.
To customize PDO mapping, continue to step 5 and subsequent below, and follow
these directions.
5 For the desired slave (see step 2), select the PDO you wish to modify the mapping
from the PDO frame.
Example: Select the first Transmit-PDO (PDO TX 1).
Result: The predefined PDO mapping (or the current customized mapping) appears
in the Mapped Object frame.
6 To delete an unused word object from the PDO mapping structure, select the word
object (indexed 1 to 8) and click the Delete icon .

7 From the Available Objects frame, select the word object in the object family that you
wish to map, and click the Add icon to append the word object to the Mapped
Objects structure.
Note: To restore the default mapping structure for the selected PDO, click the Default
icon .
8 To change a word object’s address within the mapped PDO structure, use the Move
up/down arrow icons / .

9 Press the Apply button to confirm changes to the mapped PDO structure and save
the PDO mapping to the TwidoSuite project.
10 Repeat steps 5 through 9 for each PDO mapping you wish to configure.
11 Notes on memory usage:
z PDO memory usage:
Usage of PDO memory can be monitored via the memory status bar located in the
56
upper right corner of the Mapped Objects frame: .
z SDO additional memory usage:
Predefined PDOs and word objects do not use any additional SDO memory.
However, both the removal and the addition of word objects to the PDO mapping
structure require the use of additional system memory. The current use of SDO
memory is in the status bar located at the bottom of the Mapping
SDO
Memory space 5%
dialogbox: .
228 35011386 06/2006

CANopen Objects Linking
Overview The Linking dialogbox of the CANopen Configuration Tool is used to define the
physical link between the selected PDOs of the slave devices and the TWDNCO1M
CANopen master module PDOs.
Linking Select the Linking tab from the CANopen Configuration Tool (See CANopen
following figure:
Slaves PDO Master PDO

Type Receive Type Transmit
# Slave Name COB-ID

Slave Name COB-ID
1 MIDU 4011 PDO RX 1 201
MIDU 4031 PDO RX 2 302
2 MIDU 4011 PDO RX 2 301
3 MIDU 4031 PDO RX 1 202
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OK Cancel Apply
35011386 06/2006 229

Objects Linking To find out how to use the Linking dialogbox to define the physical link between
slave device and master module PDOs, follow these guidelines:
Step Action
1 In the Slave PDOs frame, select the PDO Type: Receive or Transmit.
Result: All the PDO slaves of the selected type are displayed in the Slave PDOs
frame, as shown in the following example:
Slaves PDO
Type Receive
Slave Name COB-ID

Note: Selecting Receive or Transmit in the Slave PDOs frame automatically toggles
the Master PDOs to the opposite type: Transmit or Receive, respectively.
2 From the Slave PDOs frame, select the PDO you wish to link to the TWDNCO1M
CANopen master and click the Add icon to append the PDO to the Master
PDOs link list.
Note: The TWDNCO1M master supports a maximum of 16 TPDO links and 16 RPDO
links.
3 To change the address index of a PDO link within the Master PDOs frame, use the
Move up/down arrow icons / .

4 To delete an unused PDO link within the Master PDOs frame, select the desired PDO
(indexed 1 to 16) and click the Delete icon .

5 Press the Apply button to confirm changes to the mapped PDO structure and save
the PDO mapping to the TwidoSuite project.
6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each slave PDO you wish to link to the CANopen master.
230 35011386 06/2006

CANopen Objects Symbolization
Overview The Symbol dialogbox allows you to define a symbolization of the variables
associated with the CANopen master.
Symbol Select the Symbol tab from the CANopen Configuration Tool (See CANopen
following figure:
Symbol Slave Object Size Access

I_O_MODULE1_WRITE16OUTPUTS_UES0 MIDU 4011 Write 16 Outputs UES0 8 %IWC1.0.0
MIDU 4011 1er mots UES 4 16 %IWC1.0.1
MIDU 4011 Output 0 UES 0 16 %IWC1.1.0
MIDU 4031 Write 16 Outputs UES0 8 %IWC1.2.0
OK Cancel Apply
35011386 06/2006 231

Objects To find out how to use the Symbol dialogbox to define symbols for the CANopen
Symbolization object variables, follow these guidelines:
Step Action
1
In the Symbol field, double-click the symbol editing icon on the same line you
wish to symbolize the variable.
Result: The symbol textbox is activated and the cursor is right-aligned inside this
textbox.
2 Fill in a descriptive name.
A valid symbol can have up to 32 characters: only letters A-Z, numbers 0-9 and
underscore "_" are allowed (no "/", "%", space or any other special characters.)
Note: For more details about editing symbols, please refer to Symbolizing Objects,
p. 51.
3 Press the Apply button to confirm changes to the symbols table and save to the
TwidoSuite project.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each variable you wish to symbolize.
232 35011386 06/2006

Addressing PDOs of the CANopen master
At a Glance This sub-section describes addressing of PDO inputs and PDO outputs of the
CANopen master.
To avoid confusion with Remote I/Os, a new designation is implemented for
CANopen objects’ syntax: %IWC for example.
Illustration Reminder of the addressing principles:
% IWC, QWC, IWCD, x . n . i

Symbol QWCD, IWCF, QWCF Expansion PDO Channel
module number number
Type of object
address
Specific Values The table below gives specific values to CANopen slave objects:
Part Values Comment
IWC - Image of the physical PDO input.
QWC - Image of the physical PDO output.
IWCD - Same usage as IWC, but in double-word format.
QWCD - Same usage as QWC, but in double-word format.
IWCF - Same usage as IWC, but in float format.
QWCF - Same usage as QWC, but in float format.
x 1 to 7 Address of TWDNCO1M CANopen master module on the
Twido expansion bus.
n 0 to 15 PDO number (according to PDO index.)
i 0 to 7 Channel number (according to PDO sub-index.)
Example The table below shows an example of PDO addressing:

%IWC4.1.0 PDO number 1, sub-index 0 input of the CANopen module located at address
4 on the Twido expansion bus.
Implicit The objects described below are exchanged implicitly, in other words they are
Exchanges exchanged automatically on each PLC cycle.
35011386 06/2006 233

Programming and diagnostics for the CANopen fieldbus
Explicit Objects (words and bits) associated with the CANopen fieldbus contribute data (for
Exchanges example: bus operation, slave status, etc.) and additional commands to carry out
advanced programming of the CANopen function.
These objects are exchanged explicitly between the Twido controller and the
CANopen Master module via the expansion bus:
z at the request of the program user by way of the instruction: CAN_CMD (see
"Presentation of the CAN_CMD" instruction below)
z via the debug screen or the animation table.
CANopen Master System words reserved in the Twido controller for the CANopen Master module
Reserved enable you to determine the status of the network: %SW8x (x=1-7) is reserved for
Specific System the CANopen master moduled installed at expansion address x on the Twido bus.
Words Only the first 7 bits of these words are used; they are read-only.
The following table shows the bits used:
System Words Bit Description
0 Configuration status of CANopen master ( = 1 if configuration OK,
%SW8x otherwise 0)
(x=1-7) 1 Operational mode of CANopen master ( = 1 data exchange is
enabled, otherwise 0)
2 System stopped ( = 1 if the Offline mode is enabled, otherwise 0)
3 CAN_CMD instruction complete ( = 1 if command complete,
otherwise 0 when command is in progress)
4 CAN_CMD instruction error ( = 1 if there is an error in the instruction,
otherwise 0)
5 Initialization error ( = 1)
6 Loss of message, power supply error ( = 1)
Example of use (for the CANopen master module installed at expansion address 1
on the Twido bus):
Before using an CAN_CMD instruction, the %SW81:X3 bit must be checked to see
whether an instruction is not in progress: check that %SW81:X3 = 1.
To ascertain whether the instruction has then correctly executed, check that the
%SW81:X4 bit equals 0.
234 35011386 06/2006

CANopen Slave %SW20 to %SW27 are reserved system words that allow you to know the current
Reserved state of the 16 CANopen slaves with node addresses ranging from 1 to 16. The
Specific System content of these memory words is read-only.
Words The following table describes system words %SW20 to %SW27:
Node address
System (slave number)
Word content / Description
words Bit Bit
[0-7] [8-15]
%SW20 1 2 When %SW2x takes the following value:
%SW21 3 4 z = 1 => Unexpected module was present on the network. It has signalled itself as "not
error free" before it was removed from the network.
%SW22 5 6
z = 2 => Node State Operational (module is in operational state):
%SW23 7 8
- "error free".
%SW24 9 10
z = 3 => Node State Operational (module is in operational state):
%SW25 11 12
- "not error free".
%SW26 13 14
z = 4 => Node State Preoperational (module is in preoperational state):
%SW27 15 16 - expected modules only (those declared as expected in the configuration table);
- module can be set to operational;
- "error free".
- expected modules only (those declared as expected in the configuration table);
- module can be set to operational;
- "not error free".
35011386 06/2006 235

Node address
System (slave number)
Word content / Description
words Bit Bit
[0-7] [8-15]
- module is present but its current state does not allow to set it to operational;
- "error free".
- module is present but its current state does not allow to set it to operational;
- "not error free".
z = 8 => Wrong module (a module was detected with different device identity information):
- "error free".
z = 9 => Wrong module (a module was detected with different device identity information):
- "not error free".
z = 10 => Slave configuration error (module has answered SDO Write request of the SDO
command table with an error confirmation or has not followed the rules of the SDO protocol):
- "error free".
z = 11 => Slave configuration error:
- "not error free".
z = 12 => Missing Module / Error Control Timeout / SDO Timeout (a module that was configured
is not available, has disappeared during operation or does not answer SDO access):
- "error free".
z = 13 => Missing Module / Error Control Timeout / SDO Timeout (a module that was configured
is not available, has disappeared during operation or does not answer SDO access):
- "not error free".
z = 14 => Unexpected module (a module was detected that is not in the configuration table):
- "error free".
z = 15 => Unexpected module (a module was detected that is not in the configuration table):
- "not error free".
236 35011386 06/2006

Presentation of For each user program, the CAN_CMD instruction allows the user to program his
the CAN_CMD network and obtain the slave diagnostics. The instruction parameters are passed by
Instruction internal words (memory words) %MWx.
The syntax of the instruction is as follows:
CAN_CMDn %MWx:l
Legend:
Symbol Description
n Expansion address of CANopen master module on the Twido bus (1 to 7).
x Number of the first internal word (memory word) passed in parameter.
l Length of the instruction in number of words (2 or 6).
35011386 06/2006 237

Using the The CAN_CMD instruction allows you to program and manage the CANopen
CAN_CMD network and to perform diagnostic checks of individual slave devices. Command
Instruction parameters are passed via memory words %MWx.
The following table describes the action of the CAN_CMD instruction according to
the value of the parameters %MW(x) to %MW(x+5) as needed:
%MWx %MWx+1 %MWx+2 %MWx+3 %MWx+4 %MWx+5
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Action
[0-7] [8-15] [0-7] [8-15] [0-7] [8-15] [0-7] [8-15] [0-7] [8-15]
Reset CANopen
1 0
communication.
1 1 Reset CANopen nodes.
—
Switch from operational to
2 0
pre-operational mode.
2 1 Switch to operational mode.
3 => Start Read SDO
command.
3 or 4
4 => Start Write SDO
command.
Node = 1-16 => Node
Node
address
Index PDO object index.
Sub = 0-255 => Object sub-index
Len Sub
Len = Length of data in byte
Payload according to the
Data 1
length field (Len) value
Payload according to the
Data 2
length field (Len) value
Note: Bus status is updated on each PLC scan. However, the result of the
CAN_CMD bus reading instruction is available only at the end if the following PLC
scan.
238 35011386 06/2006

Programming Example 1:
Examples for the To force the CANopen Master (located at address 1 on the Twido expansion bus) to
CAN_CMD switch to Init mode:
Instruction
LD 1
[%MW0 := 16#0001 ]
[%MW1 := 16#0001 ]
LD %SW81:X3 // If no CAN_CMD instruction is in progress, then continue
[CAN_CMD1 %MW0:2] // To force the CANopen master to switch to Init mode
LD %SW81:X4 // (optional) To know if the CAN_CMD instruction has been
succesfully completed, before sending a new one.
Example 2:
To read the following variable: SDO_Slave:1_index:24576_sub-index:1_length:4
LD 1
[%MW6 := %MW4] // Store the result of the last SDO command
[%MW7 := %MW5] // Store the result of the last SDO command
LD %SW81:X3 // If there is no CAN_CMD instruction in progress, then continue
[%MW0 := 16#0003]
[%MW1 := 16#0001] // SDO read to address node 1
[%MW2 := 16#6000] // Access to index number 24576
[%MW3 := 16#0104] // Access to sub-index number 1 and length value 4
[CAN_CMD1 %MW0:6] // Start SDO command
Example 3:
To write the following variable: SDO_Slave:1_index:24576_sub-index:1_length:4
LD 1
[%MW0 := 16#0004]
[%MW1 := 16#0001] // SDO write to address node 1
[%MW2 := 16#6000] // Access to index number 24576
[%MW3 := 16#0104] // Access to sub-index number 1 and length value 4
[%MW4 := 16#1234] // Data 1 value
[%MW5 := 16#1234] // Data 2 value
LD %SW81:X3 // If there is no CAN_CMD instruction in progress, then continue
[CAN_CMD1 %MW0:6] // Start SDO command
35011386 06/2006 239

240 35011386 06/2006

Configuring the TwidoPort
Ethernet Gateway
10
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter provides information on the software configuration of the ConneXium
Chapter TwidoPort Ethernet Gateway module.

Chapter?
Section Topic Page
10.1 Normal Configuration and Connection of TwidoPort 243
10.2 TwidoPort’s Telnet Configuration 252
10.3 Communication Features 266
35011386 06/2006 241

Configuring the TwidoPort Ethernet Gateway
242 35011386 06/2006

10.1 Normal Configuration and Connection of

TwidoPort
At a Glance
Subject of this This section provides information on how to perform a normal configuration of the
Section ConneXium TwidoPort module with the TwidoSuite application program, module
connectivity and BootP configuration information, as well.

Section?
Topic Page
Normal Configuration with TwidoSuite 244
BootP Configuration 251
35011386 06/2006 243

Normal Configuration with TwidoSuite
Foreword Configure TwidoPort with these instructions:
Note: Plug 'n play feature

When TwidoPort is configured with TwidoSuite, TwidoPort’s IP configuration is
stored in the Twido controller. Therefore, maintenance personnel can exchange
TwidoPorts without additional configuration.
To use the plug 'n play functionality, use TwidoSuite and upgrade the Twido
firmware to 3.4 or higher.
244 35011386 06/2006

Installing the To install TwidoPort on a Twido PLC system (DIN-rail or panel mounting) and
499TWD01100 connect it to the Twido PLC internal bus, follow these steps:
TwidoPort
Module
Step Description Action
1 Installation Preparation Consult the Twido Programmable Controllers Hardware Reference Guide
(TWD USE 10AE) for instructions on:
z correct mounting positions for Twido modules,
z adding and removing Twido components from a DIN rail,
z direct mounting on a panel surface,
z minimum clearances for modules in a control panel.
2 Mounting the 499TWD01100 Install the module on a DIN rail or panel. For more details, see How to
TwidoPort Module Install the TwidoPort Ethernet Interface Module.
3 Protective Earth (PE) Grounding Attach a grounded wire to the M3 screw terminal on the bottom of TwidoPort.
4 Serial and Ethernet Connections
Top plug:
from Twido (serial)
Connect the modular plug end of the (supplied) TwidoPort-to-Twido cable
to TwidoPort's serial port and connect the other end to the Twido PLC’s
RS-485 serial port.
Connect the RJ-45 plug from a standard Ethernet network cable (not
supplied) into TwidoPort’s Ethernet port.
Bottom plug:
from Ethernet, either a
straight or crossover
cable
35011386 06/2006 245

Declaring the The table below shows the different stages when declaring the 499TWD01100
499TWD01100 TwidoPort module.
TwidoPort
Module
Step Action Comment
1 Select Port 1 (or Port 2 if See (See Configuring an Object, TwidoSuite Programming Software,
installed) to configure in the Online Help).
Describe window.
2 Configure the Feature dialog
box (See Configuring an TwidoSuite
Object, TwidoSuite
Port 1 :
Programming Software,
Online Help) that appears, as Protocol
explained in the following Type : Modbus

steps.
Address: 1
Cancel Advanced OK
3 Select Modbus in the

Protocol Type box.
4 Select Describe step from See .
the TwidoSuite interface.
5 Display the product catalog See (See Positioning a Module, TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online
and select and add a Help).
499TWD01100 module to the At this stage, you may continue adding any other optional module
system description. supported by your Twido controller.
Note: Only one 499TWD01100 TwidoPort module is allowed.
Note 1 Any RS-485 Modbus port on Twido can be used.
Note 2 For the fastest initial autobaud, choose 19200-8-N-1 with a Twido Modbus address of 1.
246 35011386 06/2006

Configuring the
499TWD01100
Note: The Ethernet parameters of TwidoPort can be configured when the
TwidoPort
TwidoSuite application program is in offline mode only.
Module
To configure TwidoPort’s Ethernet parameters, follow this procedure:
Step Action Comment
Foreword To find out more about IP parameters (IP address, subnet mask and gateway address), please refer to
(See IP Addressing, TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help) and (See Assigning IP Addresses,
TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help).
1 Select the 499TWD01100 TwidoPort Result: The Ethernet Configuration dialog box appears,
module to configure TwidoPort’s IP as shown in the example below.
parameters, see (See Configuring an
Configuration
Object, TwidoSuite Programming Software,
Online Help). Ethernet networks
Result: The TwidoPort Configuration ID address configuration
window appears on screen, as shown in IP Address
the following sub-section. Subnet mask
Gateway Address
Cancel Advanced OK
2 Enter TwidoPort’s static IP Address in Caution: For good device communication, the IP
dotted decimal notation. addresses of the PC running the TwidoSuite application
(See notes 1 and 2.) and TwidoPort must share the same network ID.
Note 1 Consult with your network or system administrator to obtain valid IP parameters for your network.
Note 2 To allow good communication over the network, each connected device must have a unique IP
address. When connected to the network, TwidoPort runs a check for duplicate IP address. If a
duplicate IP address is located over the network, the STATUS LED will emit 4 flashes periodically.
You must then enter a new duplicate-free IP address in this field.
Note 3 Unless TwidoPort has special need for subnetting, use the default subnet mask.
Note 4 If there is no gateway device on your network, simply enter TwidoPort’s IP address in the Gateway
Address field.
35011386 06/2006 247

Step Action Comment

3 Enter the valid Subnetwork mask assigned Caution: For good device communication, the subnet mask
to TwidoPort by your network administrator. configured on the PC running the TwidoSuite application
Please note that you cannot leave this field and TwidoPort’s subnet mask must match.
blank; you must enter a value. As default, the TwidoSuite application automatically
(See notes 1 and 3.) computes and displays a default subnet mask based on the
class IP that you have provided in the IP Address field
above. Default subnet mask values, according to the
category of the TwidoPort’s network IP address, follow this
rule:
Class A network -> Default subnet mask: 255.0.0.0
Class B network -> Default subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
Class C network -> Default subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
4 Enter the IP address of the Gateway. On the LAN, the gateway must be on the same segment as
(See notes 1 and 4.) TwidoPort. This information typically is provided to you by
your network administrator. Please note that no default
value is provided by the application, and that you must enter
a valid gateway address in this field.
5 Validate the configuration and transfer it to
the Twido controller.
6 Power off the Twido controller, then power
on again.
Note 1 Consult with your network or system administrator to obtain valid IP parameters for your network.
Note 2 To allow good communication over the network, each connected device must have a unique IP
address. When connected to the network, TwidoPort runs a check for duplicate IP address. If a
duplicate IP address is located over the network, the STATUS LED will emit 4 flashes periodically.
You must then enter a new duplicate-free IP address in this field.
Note 3 Unless TwidoPort has special need for subnetting, use the default subnet mask.
Note 4 If there is no gateway device on your network, simply enter TwidoPort’s IP address in the Gateway
Address field.
248 35011386 06/2006

Setting Up To allow the PC running TwidoSuite and the Twido controller to communicate over
Ethernet the Ethernet network.
Connection in
TwidoSuite Select Preferences
Result:
The following Connections Management dialog box appears:
Preferences Apply Restore
Default project directory Directory: C:\Program File\Schneider Electric\TwidoSuite\My project
Default projects _None

_Schneider default
_Customized C:\Program File\Schneider Electric\TwidoSuite\My project
Default program editor Ladder

List
Autosave project Yes every 15 minutes
No
Default background color
Clear Dark
Default project image Default image
Personalized image C:\Documents and Settings\Administrateur\My documents\
Default functional levels of applications Automatic Automatic management
The very highest
The very lowest
Manual Manual management
Level 1.0
Level 2.0
Level 2.5
Level 3.0
Name Connection type IP / Phone Punit / Address Baud rate Parity Stop bits Timeout Break timeout
My connection 1 Serial 192.168.1.1 Direct 5000 20
Modem connection Ethernet xxxxxxxxxx 19200 None 1 5000 20
Add Modify Delete
Step Action
1 Click the Add button in the Connections Management dialog box.
Result: A new connection line is added. The new line displays suggested default
connection settings. You will need to change these settings.
Note: To set a new value in a field, you have two options:
z Select the desired field, then click the Modify button.
z Double click the desired field.
2 In the Name field, enter a descriptive name for the new connection. A valid name may
contain up to 32 alphnumeric characters.
35011386 06/2006 249

Step Action
3 In the Connection Type field, click to unfold the dropdown list that includes: Serial,
Ethernet, and USB (if any).
Select Ethernet as you are setting up a new Ethernet connection between your PC
and an Ethernet-capable Twido controller.
4 In the IP / Phone field, enter a valid IP address which is the IP information of the
Twido controller you wish to connect to.
IP Address: Enter the static IP address that you have previously specified for your
Twido controller.
5 The Punit / Address field can be filled in when IP / Phone has been selected.
For a Ethernet connection, the default Punit/Address value is Direct. This default
must be changed to 1 (or to whatever address you have previously used for the
controller).
For a Serial Type connection, default value is Punit. When any of those is selected,
the next three fields (Baudrate, Parity and Stop Bits) are disabled.
If you do not know the controller address, @ allows you to select it later, once the
program has been transferred. (A window pops up before the first connection to let
you choose the controller to which you transfer, with a 1-247 range, and 1 as the
default address value.)
6 Use the default settings in Timeout and Break timeout fields, unless you have
specific timeout needs. (For more details, please refer to .)
7 Click the OK button to save the new connection settings and close the Connections
management dialog box.
Result: All newly-added connections are appended in the Preferences →
Connections Management table and in the Program → Debug → Connect →
Select a connection table.
250 35011386 06/2006

BootP Configuration
BootP Process TwidoPort expects a response from the BootP server within two minutes of its BootP
request transmission. Failing that, TwidoPort assumes the default IP configuration
that is constructed from a MAC address of this structure:
MAC Address The MAC Address has the structure:

MAC[0] MAC[1] MAC[2] MAC[3] MAC[4] MAC[5].
For Example, if the MAC address is 0080F4012C71, the default IP address would
be 85.16.44.113.
35011386 06/2006 251

10.2 TwidoPort’s Telnet Configuration
At a Glance
Subject of this This section describes how to configure the ConneXium TwidoPort module with a
Section Tenet session.

Section?
Topic Page
Introducing Telnet Configuration 253
Telnet Main Menu 254
IP/Ethernet Settings 255
Serial Parameter Configuration 256
Configuring the Gateway 257
Security Configuration 258
Ethernet Statistics 259
Serial Statistics 260
Saving the Configuration 261
Restoring Default Settings 262
Upgrading the TwidoPort Firmware 263
Forget Your Password and/or IP Configuration? 265
252 35011386 06/2006

Introducing Telnet Configuration
Overview of Configure TwidoPort with a Telnet session (using a VT100-compatible Telnet client)
Telnet for those cases in which a specific Twido configuration is not found or in which the
Configuration BootP request is not answered after two minutes (resulting in the implementation of
the default IP address).
Preparation to
Telnet
Note: TwidoPort’s Telenet requirements
Configuration
While configuring TwidoPort with Telnet, make sure:
z TwidoPort is supplied with power (from a Twido controller) through its serial
connection.
z Telnet’s local echo is set to off.
To use Telnet, add TwidoPort's default IP address (or TwidoPort’s configured IP

address) to the PC's routing table using the command:
C:\> route add 85.0.0.0 mask 255.0.0.0 local_IP_address_of_PC
Example:
If the IP address of the PC is 192.168.10.30 and the default IP address (or the
configured IP address) of TwidoPort is 85.16.44.113, the complete command
would be:
C:\> route add 85.0.0.0 mask 255.0.0.0 192.168.10.30
35011386 06/2006 253

Telnet Main Menu
Launching the When you start a Telnet session (e.g., by typing telnet 85.16.44.113 at a
Telnet Main command prompt or by using WindowsTM HyperterminalTM), the Telnet main menu
Menu appears after your press Enter:
254 35011386 06/2006

IP/Ethernet Settings
Configuring the Use the following instructions to change the IP/Ethernet settings:
IP/Ethernet
Step Action Comment
Settings
1 Start a Telnet session. Use the instructions above to open the Telnet
main menu (See Telnet Main Menu, p. 254).
2 Select (type) 1 to change the IP STORED may already be the IP source.
source to STORED and press Enter.
3 Set desired IP parameters manually. Other parameters include:
(See TwidoPort Ethernet settings z IP Address
following this table.) z Default Gateway
z Netmask
z Ethernet Frame Type
4 Select R and press Enter. The Telnet main menu appears. (You may have
to press Enter again to update the screen.)
IP Source The select IP Source option dictates the location from which the IP configuration
is obtained:
z STORED—from local flash memory.
z SERVED—from BootP server.
z TWIDO—from the Twido controller.
The default IP address (DEFAULT) is derived from the MAC address. (By definition,
the default is not selectable.)
Note: A valid IP configuration in the Twido controller overrides the user selection.
Example of The following figure shows an example of TwidoPort’s Ethernet settings:

Ethernet
Settings
35011386 06/2006 255

Serial Parameter Configuration
Foreword
Note: Under normal circumstances, it is not necessary to configure TwidoPort’s
serial parameters because the module supports an autobaud algorithm that
eliminates the need for serial configuration.
Configuring the To configure TwidoPort’s serial parameters:

Serial
Step Action Comment
Parameters
2 Select (type) 2 to change the serial See the following figure.
settings.
3 Verify or reset the settings. Other parameters include:
z Baud Rate
z Data Bits
z Parity
z Stop Bits
z Protocol
Example of Serial The following figure shows an example of TwidoPort’s serial settings:
Settings
256 35011386 06/2006

Configuring the Gateway
Foreword
Note: Usually, it is not necessary to configure TwidoPort’s gateway parameters.
Configuring the To configure the TwidoPort’s gateway:

Gateway
Step Action Comment
Parameters
1 Start a Telnet session. Use the instructions above to open the Telnet main
menu (See Telnet Main Menu, p. 254).
2 Select (type) 3 to change See the following figure.
the gateway parameters.
3 The following gateway parameters are available:
(1) Slave Address Source FIXED If the slave address source is FIXED, set
the address to the value of the Twido
controller’s Modbus address. Valid
addresses are in the 1 to 247 range.
UNIT_ID The unit ID of the Modbus/TCP frame will
be used.
(2) Gateway Mode SLAVE Only option for this version.
(3) MB broadcasts DISABLED No broadcast messages are sent on
TwidoPort’s serial port.
ENABLED Broadcast messages are sent from the
Twido controller’s serial port. (See note
below.)
4 Select R and press Enter. The Telnet main menu appears. (You may have to
press Enter again to update the screen.)
Note Twido does not support any broadcast Modbus messages.
Example of The following figure shows an example of TwidoPort’s gateway settings:

Gateway
Settings
35011386 06/2006 257

Security Configuration
Configuring the Use the following instructions to change the default password:
Security Settings
Step Action Comment
2 Select (type) 4 and press Enter. The Security Configuration Screen appears.
3 Select C and press Enter.
4 Enter the old password. Authorized users will know the old password
(default is USERUSER).
5 Enter a new password. Retype the new password. (See note below.)
6 Enter the new password again. See the note below for acceptable passwords.
Note Password details:
z minimum length: 4 characters
z maximum length: 10 characters
z allowed characters: 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z (no spaces)
258 35011386 06/2006

Ethernet Statistics
Viewing Ethernet To view TwidoPort’s Ethernet statistics:

Statistics
Step Action Comment
1 Start a Telnet session. Use the instructions above to open the
Telnet main menu (See Telnet Main
Menu, p. 254).
2 Select (type) 5 to display the Ethernet See the figure that follows this table.
Module Statistics screen.
3 Press Enter to refresh the screen.
4 Press C to clear statistics and press All counters are reset to 0.
Enter.
5 Select R and press Enter. The Telnet main menu appears. (You
may have to press Enter again to update
the screen.)
The Ethernet TwidoPort’s Ethernet Module Statistics screen:

Module Statistics
Screen
35011386 06/2006 259

Serial Statistics
Viewing Serial To view TwidoPort’s serial statistics:

Statistics
Step Action Comment
Menu, p. 254).
2 Select (type) 6 to display the Serial See the figure that follows this table.
Statistics screen and press Enter. The serial statistics are updated.
3 Press C to clear statistics and press All counters are reset to 0.
Enter.
4 Select R and press Enter. The Telnet main menu appears. (You
may have to press Enter again to update
the screen.)
The Serial TwidoPort’s Serial Statistics screen:

Statistics Screen
260 35011386 06/2006

Saving the Configuration
Saving the To save the changes to the configuration, type the configuration password:
Configuration
Step Action Comment
Menu, p. 254).
2 Select S and press Enter.
3 Enter the configuration password. The default password is USERUSER).
(See note below.)
Note For more details on how to set a personalized security password, please refer
to Security Configuration, p. 258.
The Save TwidoPort’s Save Configuration confirmation screen:

Configuration
Confirmation
Screen
35011386 06/2006 261

Restoring Default Settings
Restoring To restore TwidoPort’s default settings:

Default Settings
Step Action Comment
Menu, p. 254).
2 Select D to display the Default See the figure that follows this table.
Configuration screen.
3 Press Enter. Press Enter. is required to display the
main menu.
4 Save the default configuration. See Saving the Configuration (See
Saving the Configuration, p. 261), above.
The Default TwidoPort’s Default Configuration screen:

Configuration
Screen
262 35011386 06/2006

Upgrading the TwidoPort Firmware
Foreword
Note:
1. Obtain a newer version of the TwidoPort firmware before attempting to upgrade
the firmware with these instructions.
2. Stop the process before upgrading the firmware.
3. Modbus communication will not be available during the firmware upgrade
procedure.
Upgrading the To upgrade the current TwidoPort’s firmware with the latest firmware release you
Firmware have obtained, follow this procedure:
Step Action Comment
Menu, p. 254).
2 Select (type) F to initiate the firmware Five seconds after selecting F (firmware
upgrade. upgrade), TwidoPort resets and the
Telnet connection is lost.
3 At the command line, type: ftp and For example: ftp 85.16.44.113
TwidoPort’s IP address.
4 Enter: ftptwd At the login name prompt.
5 Enter: cd fw This takes the user to the fw directory.
6 Enter: put App.out . A message indicates that the ftp was
(See notes 1 and 2.) successful. (See note 3.)
Note 1 File names are case-sensitive.
Note 2 Make sure App.out is in the current working directory of the ftp client.
Note 3 A message indicates that TwidoPort will automatically reboot 5 seconds after
a successful ftp.
35011386 06/2006 263

Firmware The following figure shows a typical Firmware Upgrade In-Progress screen:
Upgrade In
Progress
Kernel Mode In the absence of valid firmware, TwidoPort goes into Kernel mode. If you attempt
to use Telnet to connect to TwidoPort while it is in this mode, you will see:
264 35011386 06/2006

Forget Your Password and/or IP Configuration?
Connecting in Use these instructions to connect to TwidoPort in backup mode.

Backup Mode
Step Action Comment
1 Connect pin 3 to pin 6 (ground) of the Use the Schneider 170 XTS 04 100 RJ-
serial connector. 45 T-connector. (See the following
illustration.)
2 Connect via ftp to TwidoPort. (See note.) TwidoPort uses the following default IP
configuration:
z IP address: 192.168.2.102
z Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
z Gateway address: 192.168.2.102
z Frame type: Ethernet II
3 Get file fw/Conf.dat. Obtain the IP configuration and password

4 Open the Conf.dat file in a text editor. from the Conf.dat file.
Note No password is required.
FTP Connection The following illustration shows how to connect to TwidoPort via ftp in backup mode:
green/white
green
35011386 06/2006 265

10.3 Communication Features
At a Glance
Subject of this This section describes the communications features supported by the ConneXium
Section TwidoPort Ethernet gateway.

Section?
Topic Page
Ethernet Features 267
Modbus/TCP Communications Protocol 268
Locally Supported Modbus Function Codes 269
266 35011386 06/2006

Ethernet Features
Introduction The ConneXium TwidoPort adds Ethernet connectivity to Telemecanique's Twido

product line. It is the gateway between a single Twido Modbus/RTU (RS-485) device
and the physical layer of Modbus/TCP networks in slave mode. TwidoPort does not
require a separate power supply because it gets power from the Twido controller
through its serial port. This gateway module supports slave mode only.
Ethernet TwidoPort supports the following Ethernet features:

Features z Auto-negotiation
TwidoPort supports 10/100TX auto-negotiation. It communicates only in half-
duplex mode.
z Auto-MDI/MDI-X
TwidoPort supports auto-switching of transmit and receive wire pairs to establish
communications with the end device (auto-MDI/MDI-X). TwidoPort, therefore,
transparently interconnects infrastructure or end devices with either straight-
through or crossover cables.
35011386 06/2006 267

Modbus/TCP Communications Protocol
About Modbus The Modbus protocol is a master/slave protocol that allows one master to request
responses from slaves or to take action based on their requests. The master can
address individual slaves or can initiate a broadcast message to all slaves. Slaves
return a message (response) to queries that are addressed to them individually.
Responses are not returned to broadcast queries from the master.
About Modbus/ TwidoPort supports up to 8 simultaneous Modbus/TCP connections. Attempting to

TCP use more than 8 connections results in a degradation of performance because
Communications TwidoPort closes the connection with the longest idle time to accept a new
connection request.
Theory of Modbus/TCP clients can communicate with Twido through TwidoPort, a bridge
Operations between Twido devices (Modbus/RTU over RS-485 serial link) and Modbus/TCP
over Ethernet networks.
Note: When implementing TwidoPort on a network, the system design

requirements must account for the inherent limited bandwidth of serial
connections. Expect a peak performance of approximately 40 Modbus transactions
per second. Requesting multiple registers in a single request is more efficient than
placing a separate request for each register.
You cannot initiate read or write requests from the Twido controller through TwidoPort.
268 35011386 06/2006

Locally Supported Modbus Function Codes
List Function TwidoPort answers the following locally supported Modbus function codes only
Codes when the unit ID is set to 254. (Locally supported function codes are those answered
directly by TwidoPort and not by the Twido controller.)
Modbus Function Subfunction OPCODE Description
Code Code
8 0 N/A return query data
8 10 N/A clear counters
8 11 N/A return bus message count
8 12 N/A return bus comm. error count
8 13 N/A return bus exception error count
8 14 N/A return slave message count
8 15 N/A return slave no response count
8 21 3 get Ethernet statistics
8 21 4 clear Ethernet statistics
43 14 N/A read device ID (see note 1.)
Note 1 TwidoPort supports only the basic object IDs of the read device
identification function code with both stream and individual
access.
Note: See the Modbus specification at www.modbus.org for details on message

formats and access classes.
35011386 06/2006 269

270 35011386 06/2006

Operator Display Operation
11
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter provides details for using the optional Twido Operator Display.
Chapter

Chapter?
Topic Page
Operator Display 272
Controller Identification and State Information 275
System Objects and Variables 277
Serial Port Settings 284
Time of Day Clock 285
Real-Time Correction Factor 286
35011386 06/2006 271

Operator Display
Introduction The Operator Display is a Twido option for displaying and controlling application
data and some controller functions such as operating state and the Real-Time Clock
(RTC). This option is available as a cartridge (TWDXCPODC) for the Compact
controllers or as an expansion module (TWDXCPODM) for the Modular controllers.
The Operator Display has two operating modes:
z Display Mode: only displays data.
z Edit mode: allows you to change data.
Note: The operator display is updated at a specific interval of the controller scan
cycle. This can cause confusion in interpreting the display of dedicated outputs for
%PLS or %PWM pulses. At the time these outputs are sampled, their value will
always be zero, and this value will be displayed.
Displays and The Operator Display provides the following separate displays with the associated
Functions functions you can perform for each display.
z Controller Identification and State Information: Operations Display
Display firmware revision and the controller state. Change the controller state
with the Run, Initial, and Stop commands.
z System Objects and Variables: Data Display
Select application data by the address: %I, %Q, and all other software objects on the
base controller. Monitor and change the value of a selected software data object.
z Serial Port Settings: Communication Display
Display and modify communication port settings.
z Time of Day Clock: Time/Date Display
Display and configure the current date and time (if the RTC is installed).
z Real Time Correction: RTC Factor
Display and modify the RTC Correction value for the optional RTC.
Note:
1. The TWDLCA•40DRF series of compact controllers have RTC onboard.
2. On all other controllers, time of day clock and real-time correction are only available
if the Real-Time Clock (RTC) option cartridge (TWDXCPRTC) is installed.
272 35011386 06/2006

Illustration The following illustration shows a view of the Operator Display, which consists of a
display area (here in Normal mode) and four push-button input keys.
Display area
T M 1 2 3
V 1 2 3 4
MOD/
ESC ENTER
Input keys
Display area The Operator Display provides an LCD display capable of displaying two lines of
characters:
z The first line of the display has three 13-segment characters and four 7-segment
characters.
z The second line has one 13-segment character, one 3-segment character (for a
plus/minus sign), and five 7-segment characters.
Note: If in Normal mode, the first line indicates an object name and the second line
displays its value. If in Data mode, the first line displays %SW68 value and the
second line displays %SW69 value.
35011386 06/2006 273

Input keys The functions of the four input push-buttons depend on the Operator Display mode.
Key In Display Mode In Edit Mode
ESC Discard changes and return to previous display.
Go to the next value of an object being edited.
Advance to next display. Go to the next object type to edit.
MOD/ENTER Go to edit mode. Accept changes and return to previous display.
Selecting and The initial display or screen of the Operator Display shows the controller identifi-
Navigating the cation and state information. Press the push-button to sequence through each
Displays of the displays. The screens for the Time of Day Clock or the Real-Time Correction
Factor are not displayed if the optional RTC cartridge (TWDXCPRTC) is not
detected on the controller.
As a shortcut, press the ESC key to return to the initial display screen. For most screens,
pressing the ESC key will return to the Controller Identification and State Information
screen. Only when editing System Objects and Variables that are not the initial entry
(%I0.0.0), will pressing ESC take you to the first or initial system object entry.
To modify an object value, instead of pressing the push-button to go to the first
value digit, press the MOD/ENTER key again.
274 35011386 06/2006

Controller Identification and State Information
Introduction The initial display or screen of the Twido optional Operator Display shows the
Controller Identification and State Information.
Example The firmware revision is displayed in the upper-right corner of the display area, and
the controller state is displayed in the upper-left corner of the display area, as seen
in the following:
R U N 1 0 0
Controller Firmware
state revision
35011386 06/2006 275

Controller States Controller states include any of the following:

z NCF: Not Configured
The controller is in the NCF state until an application is loaded. No other state is
allowed until an application program is loaded. You can test the I/O by modifying
system bit S8 (see System Bits (%S), p. 564).
z STP: Stopped
Once an application is present in the controller, the state changes to the STP or
Stopped state. In this state, the application is not running. Inputs are updated and
data values are held at their last value. Outputs are not updated in this state.
z INI: Initial
You can choose to change the controller to the INI or initial state only from the
STP state. The application is not running. The controller's inputs are updated and
data values are set to their initial state. No outputs are updated from this state.
z RUN: Running
When in the RUN or running state the application is running. The controller's
inputs are updated and data values are set according to the application. This is
the only state where the outputs are updated.
z HLT: Halted (User Application Error)
If the controller has entered an ERR or error state, the application is halted. Inputs
are updated and data values are held at their last value. From this state, outputs
are not updated. In this mode, the error code is displayed in the lower-right portion
of the Operator Display as an unsigned decimal value.
z NEX: Not Executable (not executable)
An online modification was made to user logic. Consequences: The application
is no longer executable. It will not go back into this state until all causes for the
Non-Executable state have been resolved.
Displaying and Using the Operator Display, you can change to the INI state from the STP state, or
Changing from STP to RUN, or from RUN to STP. Do the following to change the state of the
Controller States controller:
Step Action
1 Press the key until the Operations Display is shown (or press ESC). The current
controller state is displayed in the upper-left corner of the display area.
2 Press the MOD/ENTER key to enter edit mode.
3 Press the key to select a controller state.
4 Press the MOD/ENTER key to accept the modified value, or press the ESC key to
discard any modifications made while in edit mode.
276 35011386 06/2006

System Objects and Variables
Introduction The optional Operator Display provides these features for monitoring and adjusting
application data:
z Select application data by address (such as %I or %Q).
z Monitor the value of a selected software object/variable.
z Change the value of the currently displayed data object (including forcing inputs
and outputs).
35011386 06/2006 277

System Objects The following table lists the system objects and variables, in the order accessed, that
and Variables can be displayed and modified by the Operator Display.
Object Variable/Attribute Description Access
Input %Ix.y.z Value Read/Force
Output %Qx.y.z Value Read/Write/Force
Timer %TMX.V Current Value Read/Write
%TMX.P Preset value Read/Write
%TMX.Q Done Read
Counter %Cx.V Current Value Read/Write
%Cx.P Preset value Read/Write
%Cx.D Done Read
%Cx.E Empty Read
%Cx.F Full Read
Memory Bit %Mx Value Read/Write
Word Memory %MWx Value Read/Write
Constant Word %KWx Value Read
System Bit %Sx Value Read/Write
System Word %SWx Value Read/Write
Analog Input %IWx.y.z Value Read
Analog output %QWx.y.z Value Read/Write
Fast Counter %FCx.V Current Value Read
%FCx.VD* Current Value Read
%FCx.P Preset value Read/Write
%FCx.PD* Preset value Read/Write
%FCx.D Done Read
Very Fast Counter %VFCx.V Current Value Read
%VFCx.VD* Current Value Read
%VFCx.P Preset value Read/Write
%VFCx.PD* Preset value Read/Write
%VFCx.U Count Direction Read
%VFCx.C Catch Value Read
%VFCx.CD* Catch Value Read
%VFCx.S0 Threshold 0 Value Read/Write
%VFCx.S0D* Threshold 0 Value Read/Write
%VFCx.S1 Threshold Value1 Read/Write
%VFCx.S1D* Threshold Value1 Read/Write
%VFCx.F Overflow Read
%VFCx.T Timebase Read/Write
%VFCx.R Reflex Output Enable Read/Write
%VFCx.S Reflex Input Enable Read/Write
Input Network Word %INWx.z Value Read
Output Network Word %QNWx.z Value Read/Write
Grafcet %Xx Step Bit Read
278 35011386 06/2006

Object Variable/Attribute Description Access

Pulse Generator %PLS.N Number of Pulses Read/Write
%PLS.ND* Number of Pulses Read/Write
%PLS.P Preset value Read/Write
%PLS.D Done Read
%PLS.Q Current Output Read
Pulse Width Modulator %PWM.R Ratio Read/Write
%PWM.P Preset value Read/Write
Drum Controller %DRx.S Current Step Number Full Read
%DRx.F Read
Step counter %SCx.n Step Counter bit Read/Write
Register %Rx.I Input Read/Write
%Rx.O Output Read/Write
%Rx.E Empty Read
%Rx.F Full Read
Shift bit register %SBR.x.yy Register Bit Read/Write
Message %MSGx.D Done Read
%MSGx.E Error Read
AS-Interface slave input %IAx.y.z Value Read/Force
AS-Interface analog slave input %IWAx.y.z Value Read
AS-Interface slave output %QAx.y.z Value Read/Write/Force
AS-Interface analog slave output %QWAx.y.z Value Read/Write
CANopen slave PDO input %IWCx.y.z Single-word value Read
CANopen slave PDO output %QWCx.y.z Single-word value Read/Write
Notes:
1. (*) means a 32-bit double word variable. The double word option is available on
all controllers with the exception of the Twido TWDLC•A10DRF controllers.
2. Variables will not be displayed if they are not used in an application since Twido
uses dynamic memory allocation.
3. If the value of %MW is greater than +32767 or less than -32768, the operator
display will continue to blink.
4. If the value of %SW is greater than 65535, the operator display continues to blink,
except for %SW0 and %SW11. If a value is entered that is more than the limit,
the value will return to the configured value.
5. If a value is entered for %PLS.P that is more than the limit, the value written is the
saturation value.
35011386 06/2006 279

Displaying and Each type of system object is accessed by starting with the Input Object (%I),
Modifying sequencing through to the Message object (%MSG), and finally looping back to the
Objects and Input Object (%I).
Variables To display a system object:
Step Action
1 Press the key until the Data Display screen is shown.
The Input object ("I") will be displayed in the upper left corner of the display area. The
letter " I " (or the name of the object previously viewed as data) is not blinking.
The Input Object "I" character (or previous object name viewed as data) begins
blinking.
3 Press the key to step sequentially through the list of objects.
4 Press the key to step sequentially through the field of an object type and press the
key to increment through the value of that field. You can use the key and
key to navigate and modify all fields of the displayed object.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until editing is complete.
6 Press the MOD/ENTER key to accept the modified values.
Note: The object's name and address have to be validated before accepting any
modifications. That is, they must exist in the configuration of the controller prior to
using the operator display.
Press ESC to discard any changes made in edit mode.
Data Values and In general, the data value for an object or variable is shown as a signed or unsigned
Display Formats integer in the lower-right of the display area. In addition, all fields suppress leading
zeros for displayed values. The address of each object is displayed on the Operator
Display in one of the following seven formats:
z I/O format
z AS-Interface slaves I/O format
z CANopen slaves I/O format
z Function Block Format
z Simple Format
z Network I/O format
z Step Counter Format
z Shift bit register format
280 35011386 06/2006

Input/Output The input/output objects (%I, %Q, %IW and %QW) have three-part addresses (e.g.:
Format %IX.Y.Z) and are displayed as follows:
z Object type and controller address in the upper-left
z Expansion address in the upper-center
z I/O channel in the upper-right
In the case of a simple input (%I) and output (%Q), the lower-left portion of the
display will contain a character that is either "U" for unforced or "F" for a forced bit.
The force value is displayed in the lower-right of the screen.
The output object %Q0.3.11 appears in the display area as follows:
Q 0 3 1 1
F 1
AS-Interface AS-Interface slave I/O objects (%IA, %QA, %IWA and %QWA) have four-part
slaves I/O format addresses (e.g.: %IAx.y.z) and are displayed as follows:
z The object type in the upper-left
z AS-Interface master address on the expansion bus in the upper-left center
z Address of the slave on the AS-Interface bus in the upper-right center
z Slave I/O channel in the upper-right.
In the case of a simple input (%IA) and output (%QA), the lower-left portion of the
display will contain a character that is either "U" for unforced or "F" for a forced bit.
The force value is displayed in the lower-right of the screen.
The output object %QA1.3A.2 appears in the display area as follows:
QA 1 3A 2
F 1
35011386 06/2006 281

CANopen slaves CANopen slave PDO I/O objects (%IWC and %QWC) have four-part addresses
I/O format (e.g.: %IWCx.y.z) and are displayed as follows:
z The object type in the upper-left
z CANopen master address on the expansion bus in the upper-left center
z Address of the slave on the CANopen bus in the upper-right center
z Slave PDO I/O channel in the upper-right.
z Signed value for the object in the lower portion
In the following example, the PDO output object %QWC1.3.2 contains the signed
value +24680:
QWC 1 3 2
+ 24680
Function Block The function blocks (%TM, %C, %FC, %VFC, %PLS, %PWM, %DR, %R, and
Format %MSGj) have two-part addresses containing an object number and a variable or
attribute name. They are displayed as follows:
z Function block name in the upper-left
z Function block number (or instance) in the upper-right
z The variable or attribute in the lower-left
z Value for the attribute in the lower-right
In the following example, the current value for timer number 123 is set to 1,234.
T M 1 2 3
V 1 2 3 4
Simple Format A simple format is used for objects %M, %MW, %KW, %MD, %KD, %MF, %KF, %S,
%SW and %X as follows:
z Object number in the upper-right
z Signed value for the objects in the lower portion
In the following example, memory word number 67 contains the value +123.
M W 6 7
+ 1 2 3
282 35011386 06/2006

Network Input/ The network input/output objects (%INW and %QNW) appear in the display area as
Output Format follows:
z Object type in the upper-left
z Controller address in the upper-center
z Object number in the upper-right
z Signed value for the object in the lower portion
In the following example, the first input network word of the remote controller
configured at remote address #2 is set to a value -4.
I N W 2 0
- 4
Step Counter The step counter (%SC) format displays the object number and the step counter bit
Format as follows:
z Object name and number in the upper-left
z Step counter bit in the upper right
z The value of the step counter bit in the lower portion of the display
In the following example, bit number 129 of step counter number 3 is set to 1.
S C 3 1 2 9
1
Shift Bit Register The shift bit register (%SBR) appears in the display area as follows:
Format z Object name and number in the upper-left
z Register bit number in the upper-right
z Register bit value in the lower-right
The following example shows the display of shift bit register number 4.
S B R 4 9
1
35011386 06/2006 283

Serial Port Settings
Introduction The operator display allows you to display the protocol settings and change the
addresses of all serial ports configured using TwidoSuite. The maximum number of
serial ports is two. In the example below, the first port is configured as Modbus
protocol with an address 123. The second serial port is configured as a remote link
with an address of 4.
M 1 2 3
R 4
Displaying and Twido controllers can support up to two serial ports. To display the serial port
Modifying Serial settings using the operator display:
Port Settings
Step Action
1 Press the key until the Communication Display is shown. The single letter of the
protocol setting of the first serial port ("M", "R", or "A") will be displayed in the upper
left corner of the operator display.
2 Press the MOD/ENTER key to enter the edit mode.
3 Press the key until you are in the field that you wish to modify.
4 Press the key to increment the value of that field.
5 Continue steps 3 and 4 until the address settings are complete.
6 Press the MOD/ENTER key to accept the modified values or ESC to discard any
modifications made while in edit mode.
Note: The address is part of the configuration data on the Controller. Changing its
value using the operator display means that you can no longer connect using
TwidoSuite as equal. TwidoSuite will require that you do a download to become equal
again.
284 35011386 06/2006

Time of Day Clock
Introduction You can modify the date and time using the operator display if the RTC option
cartridge (TWDXCPRTC) is installed on your Twido controller. The Month is
displayed in the upper-left side of the HMI Display. Until a valid time has been
entered, the month field will contain the value "RTC". The day of the month is
displayed in the upper-right corner of the display. The time of day is in military
format. The hours and minutes are shown in the lower-right corner of the display and
are separated by the letter "h". The example below shows that the RTC is set to
March 28, at 2:22 PM.
M A R 2 8
1 4 h 2 2
Note:
1. The TWDLCA•40DRF series of compact controllers have RTC onboard.
2. On all other controllers, time of day clock and real-time correction are only
available if the Real-Time Clock (RTC) option cartridge (TWDXCPRTC) is
installed.
Displaying and To display and modify the Time of Day Clock:

Modifying Time
Step Action
of Day Clock
1 Press the key until the Time/Date Display is shown. The month value ("JAN",
"FEB") will be displayed in the upper-left corner of the display area. The value "RTC"
will be displayed in the upper-left corner if no month has been initialized.
2 Press the MOD/ENTER key to enter the edit mode.
4 Press the key increment the value of that field.
5 Continue steps 3 and 4 until the Time of Day value is complete.
35011386 06/2006 285

Real-Time Correction Factor
Introduction You can display and modify the Real-Time Correction Factor using the operator
display. Each Real-Time Clock (RTC) Option module has a RTC Correction Factor
value that is used to correct for inaccuracies in the RTC module's crystal. The
correction factor is an unsigned 3-digit integer from 0 to 127 and is displayed in the
lower-right corner of the display.
The example below shows a correction factor of 127.
R T C C o r r
1 2 7
Displaying and To display and modify the Real-Time Correction Factor:

Modifying RTC
Step Action
Correction
1 Press the key until the RTC Factor Display is shown. "RTC Corr" will be
displayed in the upper line of the operator display.
4 Press the key to increment the value of that field.
5 Continue Steps 3 and 4 until the RTC correction value is complete.
286 35011386 06/2006

Description of Twido Languages
III
At a Glance
Subject of this This part provides instructions for using the Ladder, List, and Grafcet programming
Part languages to create control programs for Twido programmable controllers.

Part?
12 Ladder Language 289
13 Instruction List Language 313
14 Grafcet 325
35011386 06/2006 287

Twido Languages
288 35011386 06/2006

Ladder Language
12
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter describes programming using Ladder Language.

Chapter

Chapter?
Topic Page
Introduction to Ladder Diagrams 290
Programming Principles for Ladder Diagrams 292
Ladder Diagram Blocks 294
Ladder Language Graphic Elements 298
Special Ladder Instructions OPEN and SHORT 301
Programming Advice 303
Ladder/List Reversibility 308
Guidelines for Ladder/List Reversibility 309
Program Documentation 311
35011386 06/2006 289

Ladder Language
Introduction to Ladder Diagrams
Introduction Ladder diagrams are similar to relay logic diagrams that represent relay control
circuits. The main differences between the two are the following features of Ladder
programming that are not found in relay logic diagrams:
z All inputs are represented by contact symbols ( ).
z All outputs are represented by coil symbols ( ).
z Numerical operations are included in the graphical Ladder instruction set.
Ladder The following illustration shows a simplified wiring diagram of a relay logic circuit and
Equivalents to the equivalent Ladder diagram.
Relay Circuits
LS1 PB1 CR1 M1

LS1 PB1 CR1 M1 %I0.0 %I0.2 %I0.4 %Q0.4
LS2 SS1
LS2 SS1 %I0.1 %I0.7
Relay logic circuit Ladder diagram
Notice that in the above illustration, all inputs associated with a switching device in
the relay logic diagram are shown as contacts in the Ladder diagram. The M1 output
coil in the relay logic diagram is represented with an output coil symbol in the Ladder
diagram. The address numbers appearing above each contact/coil symbol in the
Ladder diagram are references to the locations of the external input/output
connections to the controller.
290 35011386 06/2006

Ladder Language
Ladder Rungs A program written in Ladder language is composed of rungs which are sets of
graphical instructions drawn between two vertical potential bars. The rungs are
executed sequentially by the controller.
The set of graphical instructions represent the following functions:
z Inputs/outputs of the controller (push buttons, sensors, relays, pilot lights, etc.)
z Functions of the controller (timers, counters, etc.)
z Math and logic operations (addition, division, AND, XOR, etc.)
z Comparison operators and other numerical operations (A<B, A=B, shift, rotate,
etc.)
z Internal variables in the controller (bits, words, etc.)
These graphical instructions are arranged with vertical and horizontal connections
leading eventually to one or several outputs and/or actions. A rung cannot support
more than one group of linked instructions.
Example of The following diagram is an example of a Ladder program composed of two rungs.
Ladder Rungs
%I0.1 %M42
Example Rung 1
%I0.3
%M42 %Q1.2
Example Rung 2
%MW22:=%MW15+%KW1
35011386 06/2006 291

Ladder Language
Programming Principles for Ladder Diagrams
Programming Each Ladder rung consists of a grid of seven rows by eleven columns that are
Grid organized into two zones as shown in the following illustration.
Columns
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Rows
1
4 Potential
Grid Bars
5 Cells
Test Zone
Action Zone
Grid Zones The Ladder diagram programming grid is divided into two zones:
z Test Zone
Contains the conditions that are tested in order to perform actions. Consists of
columns 1 - 10, and contains contacts, function blocks, and comparison blocks.
z Action Zone
Contains the output or operation that will be performed according to the results of
the tests of the conditions in the Test Zone. Consists of columns 8 - 11, and
contains coils and operation blocks.
292 35011386 06/2006

Ladder Language
Entering A Ladder rung provides a seven by eleven programming grid that starts in the first
Instructions in cell in the upper left-hand corner of the grid. Programming consists of entering
the Grid instructions into the cells of the grid. Test instructions, comparisons, and functions
are entered in cells in the test zone and are left-justified. The test logic provides
continuity to the action zone where coils, numerical operations, and program flow
control instructions are entered and are right-justified.
The rung is solved or executed (tests made and outputs assigned) within the grid
from top to bottom and from left to right.
Sections/ Each section/subroutine consists of:

Subroutines z A section header with with section number (automatically assigned by the
program), section/subroutine label, a user-defined section/subroutine title and
four lines of user comments. See .
z A sequence of rungs below the section/subroutine header.
Rung Headers In addition to the rung, a rung header appears directly above the rung. Use the rung
header to document the logical purpose of the rung. The rung header can contain
the following information:
z Rung number
z Labels (%Li)
z Rung title
z Rung comments
For more details about using the rung header to document your programs, see
Program Documentation, p. 311.
35011386 06/2006 293

Ladder Language
Ladder Diagram Blocks
Introduction Ladder diagrams consist of blocks representing program flow and functions such as
the following:
z Contacts
z Coils
z Program flow instructions
z Function blocks
z Comparison blocks
z Operation blocks
Contacts, Coils, Contacts, coils, and program flow (jump and call) instructions occupy a single cell of
and Program the ladder programming grid. Function blocks, comparison blocks, and operation
Flow blocks occupy multiple cells.
The following are examples of a contact and a coil.
1 LD contact - coil
Rung 1
CONTACT COIL
%I0.4 %Q0.4
294 35011386 06/2006

Ladder Language
Function Blocks Function blocks are placed in the test zone of the programming grid. The block must
appear in the first row; no ladder instructions or lines of continuity may appear above
or below the function block. Ladder test instructions lead to the function block’s input
side, and test instructions and/or action instructions lead from the block’s output side.
Function blocks are vertically oriented and occupy two columns by four rows of the
programming grid.
The following is an example of a counter function block.
1 LD counter
Rung 1
RESET COUNTER0 SOWNCT_O
VERFLOW
%I0.0 %C0 %Q0.0
P R E
ADJ Y PSET_OUT_
SET
%CO.P REACHED
%I0.1 9999 %Q0.1
P S D
UPCOUNT
%I0.2
P CU F
DOWNCOUNT
%I0.3
P CD
35011386 06/2006 295

Ladder Language
Comparison Comparison blocks are placed in the test zone of the programming grid. The block
Blocks may appear in any row or column in the test zone as long as the entire length of the
instruction resides in the test zone.
Comparison blocks are horizontally oriented and occupy two columns by one row of
the programming grid.
See the following example of a comparison block.
2 LD comparison block
Rung 1
%MW0=%SW50 OUTPUTS5
%I0.4 %Q0.5
<
To edit the comparison block, click on the field just above the comparison box and
type in your expression. Both symbols and addresses may be used as operands
here. The comment field however is disabled.
296 35011386 06/2006

Ladder Language
Operation blocks Operation blocks are placed in the action zone of the programming grid. The block
may appear in any row in the action zone. The instruction is right-justified; it appears
on the right and ends in the last column.
Operation blocks are horizontally oriented and occupy four columns by one row of
the programming grid.
The following is an example of an operation block.
2 LD operation block
Rung 1
%MW120 := SQRT(%MW15)
%MW120 := SQRT(%MW15)
SHORT
To edit the operation block, click on the field just above the operation box and type
in your expression. Both symbols and addresses may be used as operands here.
The expression will be displayed twice as shown in the above example. The
comment field (top box), however, is disabled.
If symbols have been previously defined, the expression will be displayed with both
addresses (lower box) and symbols (upper box) as shown in the following example
of an operation block. Here, the address %MW2 has been previously defined with
the symbol OPERATE_SWITCH
3 LD operation block
Rung 1
OPERATE_SWITCH := %MW3
%MW2 := %MW3
SHORT
35011386 06/2006 297

Ladder Language
Ladder Language Graphic Elements
Introduction Instructions in Ladder diagrams consist of graphic elements.
Contacts The contacts graphic elements are programmed in the test zone and take up one
cell (one row high by one column wide).
Name Graphic Instruction Function
element
Normally open contact LD Passing contact when the
controlling bit object is at state 1.
Normally closed LDN Passing contact when the

contact controlling bit object is at state 0.
Contact for detecting a LDR Rising edge: detecting the change

rising edge P from 0 to 1 of the controlling bit
object.
Contact for detecting a LDF Falling edge: detecting the change

falling edge N from 1 to 0 of the controlling bit
object.
Link Elements The graphic link elements are used to insert/delete ladder loops:.
Name Graphic Function
element
Insert a link Insert an empty ladder loop
Delete a link Delete an empty ladder loop

Note:
1. If the ladder loop contains any elements, you
must first delete all ladder elements before you
can delete the ladder loop,
2. The keyboard shortcut used to remove an
element is DELETE.
298 35011386 06/2006

Ladder Language
Coils The coil graphic elements are programmed in the action zone and take up one cell
(one row high and one column wide).
Name Graphic Instruction Function
element
Direct coil ST The associated bit object takes the
value of the test zone result.
Inverse coil STN The associated bit object takes the

negated value of the test zone result.
Set coil S The associated bit object is set to 1

S
when the result of the test zone is 1.
Reset coil R The associated bit object is set to 0

R when the result of the test zone is 1.
Jump or Subroutine JMP Connect to a labeled instruction,

call ->>%Li SR upstream or downstream.
->>%SRi
Transition condition Grafcet language. Used when the

coil programming of the transition
# conditions associated with the
transitions causes a changeover to the
next step.
Return from a RET Placed at the end of subroutines to
subroutine <RET> return to the main program.
Stop program END Defines the end of the program.

<END>
35011386 06/2006 299

Ladder Language
Function blocks The graphic elements of function blocks are programmed in the test zone and
require four rows by two columns of cells (except for very fast counters which require
five rows by two columns).
element
Timers, counters, Each of the function blocks uses inputs and outputs
registers, and so on. that enable links to the other graphic elements..
Note: Outputs of function blocks can not be
connected to each other (vertical shorts).
Operate and Comparison blocks are programmed in the test zone, and operation blocks are
Comparison programmed in the action zone.
Blocks
element
Comparison block Compares two operands, the output changes to 1
≤ when the result is checked.
Size: one row by two columns
operation block Performs arithmetic and logic operations.

Size: one row by four columns
•••
300 35011386 06/2006

Ladder Language
Special Ladder Instructions OPEN and SHORT
Introduction The OPEN and SHORT instructions provide a convenient method for debugging
and troubleshooting Ladder programs. These special instructions alter the logic of a
rung by either shorting or opening the continuity of a rung as explained in the
following table.
Instruction Description List Instruction

OPEN At the beginning of the rung. LD 0
Within a rung: Creates a break in the AND 0
continuity of a ladder rung regardless of the
results of the last logical operation.
SHORT At the beginning of the rung. LD 1
Within a rung: Allows the continuity to pass OR 1
through the rung regardless of the results of
the last logical operation.
In List programming, the LD, OR and AND instructions are used to create the OPEN
and SHORT instructions using immediate values of 0 and 1 respectively.
35011386 06/2006 301

Ladder Language
Examples The following are examples of using the OPEN and SHORT instructions.
%I0.1 %M3 %Q0.1 LD %I0.1

OPEN OR %Q1.5
ANDN %M3
%Q1.5
AND 0
ST %Q0.1
%I0.9 %Q1.6 LD %I0.9
OR 1
ST %Q1.6
SHORT
When no RESET input is required, as you cannot delete the link segment to the function
block R-input, use the OPEN element to permanently break the input segment.
BLK %C0
%C0
OPEN R E LD 0
R
%M1 %Q0.1 LD %I0.2
S D AND %M0
%I0.2 %M0 CU
OUT_BLK
CU F LD D
AND %M1
CD
ST %Q0.1
END_BLK
302 35011386 06/2006

Ladder Language
Programming Advice
Handling Use program jumps with caution to avoid long loops that can increase scan time.
Program Jumps Avoid jumps to instructions that are located upstream. (An upstream instruction line
appears before a jump in a program. A downstream instruction line appears after a
jump in a program.).
Programming of Output bits, like internal bits, should only be modified once in the program. In the
Outputs case of output bits, only the last value scanned is taken into account when the
outputs are updated.
Using Directly- Sensors used directly for emergency stops must not be processed by the controller.
Wired They must be connected directly to the corresponding outputs.
Emergency Stop
Sensors
Handling Power Make power returns conditional on a manual operation. An automatic restart of the
Returns installation could cause unexpected operation of equipment (use system bits %S0,
%S1 and %S9).
Time and The state of system bit %S51, which indicates any RTC faults, should be checked.
Schedule Block
Management
Syntax and Error When a program is entered, TwidoSuite checks the syntax of the instructions, the
Checking operands, and their association.
35011386 06/2006 303

Ladder Language
Additional Notes Assignment operations should not be placed within parentheses:

on Using
Parentheses LD %I0.0
%I0.0 %I0.1 %Q0.1 AND %I0.1
OR( %I0.2
ST %Q0.0
%I0.2 %I0.3
AND %I0.3
)
ST %Q0.1
%Q0.0
In order to perform the same function, the following equations must be programmed:
LD %I0.0
%I0.0 %I0.1 %Q0.1 MPS
AND( %I0.1
OR( %I0.2
AND %I0.3
%I0.2 %I0.3
)
)
ST %Q0.1
%I0.2 %Q0.0 MPP
AND %I0.2
ST %Q0.0
304 35011386 06/2006

Ladder Language
If several contacts are parellelized, they must be nested within each other or
completely separate:
%I0.0 %I0.1 %I0.5 %Q0.1
%I0.2 %I0.3
%I0.6 %I0.7
%I0.0 %I0.1 %I0.5 %Q0.1
%I0.2 %I0.4
35011386 06/2006 305

Ladder Language
The following schematics cannot be programmed:
%I0.0 %I0.1 %Q0.1
%I0.2 %I0.3
%I0.4
%I0.0 %I0.1 %I0.5 %Q0.1
%I0.2 %I0.3
%I0.4
306 35011386 06/2006

Ladder Language
In order to execute schematics equivalent to those, they must be modified as

follows:
LD %I0.0
%I0.0 %I0.1 %Q0.1 AND( %I0.1
OR( %I0.2
AND %I0.3
)
%I0.2 %I0.3
)
OR( %I0.4
AND %I0.3
%I0.4 %I0.3 )
ST %Q0.1
LD %I0.0
%I0.0 %I0.1 %I0.5 %Q0.1
AND( %I0.1
OR( %I0.2
AND %I0.3
)
%I0.2 %I0.3
AND %I0.5
OR( %I0.2
AND %I0.4
%I0.2 %I0.4 )
)
ST %Q0.1
35011386 06/2006 307

Ladder Language
Ladder/List Reversibility
Introduction Program reversibility is a feature of the TwidoSuite programming software that

provides conversion of application programs from Ladder to List and from List back
to Ladder.
Use TwidoSuite to set the default display of programs: either List or Ladder format
(by setting user preferences). TwidoSuite can also be used to toggle List and Ladder
views.
Understanding A key to understanding the program reversibility feature is examining the

Reversibility relationship of a Ladder rung and the associated instruction List sequence:
z Ladder rung: A collection of Ladder instructions that constitute a logical
expression.
z List sequence: A collection of List programming instructions that correspond to
the Ladder instructions and represents the same logical expression.
The following illustration displays a common Ladder rung and its equivalent program
logic expressed as a sequence of List instructions.
%I0.5 %Q0.4
LD %I0.5
OR %I0.4
%I0.4 ST %Q0.4
An application program is stored internally as List instructions, regardless if the

program is written in Ladder language or List language. TwidoSuite takes advantage
of the program structure similarities between the two languages and uses this
internal List image of the program to display it in the List and Ladder viewers and
editors as either a List program (its basic form), or graphically as a Ladder diagram,
depending upon the selected user preference.
Ensuring Programs created in Ladder can always be reversed to List. However, some List
Reversibility logic may not reverse to Ladder. To ensure reversibility from List to Ladder, it is
important to follow the set of List programming guidelines in Guidelines for Ladder/
List Reversibility, p. 309.
308 35011386 06/2006

Ladder Language
Guidelines for Ladder/List Reversibility
Instructions The structure of a reversible function block in List language requires the use of the
Required for following instructions:
Reversibility z BLK marks the block start, and defines the beginning of the rung and the start of
the input portion to the block.
z OUT_BLK marks the beginning of the output portion of the block.
z END_BLK marks the end of the block and the rung.
The use of the reversible function block instructions are not mandatory for a properly
functioning List program. For some instructions it is possible to program in List which
is not reversible. For a description of non-reversible List programming of standard
function blocks, see Standard function blocks programming principles, p. 358.
Non-Equivalent Avoid the use of certain List instructions, or certain combinations of instructions and
Instructions to operands, which have no equivalents in Ladder diagrams. For example, the N
Avoid instruction (inverses the value in the Boolean accumulator) has no equivalent
Ladder instruction.
The following table identifies all List programming instructions that will not reverse
to Ladder.
List Instruction Operand Description
JMPCN %Li Jump Conditional Not
N none Negation (Not)
ENDCN none End Conditional Not
35011386 06/2006 309

Ladder Language
Unconditional Programming unconditional rungs also requires following List programming

Rungs guidelines to ensure List-to-Ladder reversibility. Unconditional rungs do not have
tests or conditions. The outputs or action instructions are always executed.
The following diagram provides examples of unconditional rungs and the equivalent
List sequence.
%Q0.4
LD 1
ST %Q0.4
%MW5 := 0
LD 1
[%MW5 := 0]
JMP %L6
>>%L6
Notice that each of the above unconditional List sequences begin with a load
instruction followed by a one, except for the JMP instruction. This combination sets
the Boolean accumulator value to one, and therefore sets the coil (store instruction)
to one and sets%MW5 to zero on every scan of the program. The exception is the
unconditional jump List instruction (JMP %L6) which is executed regardless of the
value of the accumulator and does not need the accumulator set to one.
Ladder List If a List program is reversed that is not completely reversible, the reversible portions
Rungs are displayed in the Ladder view and the irreversible portions are displayed in
Ladder List Rungs.
A Ladder List Rung functions just like a small List editor, allowing the user to view
and modify the irreversible parts of a Ladder program.
310 35011386 06/2006

Ladder Language
Program Documentation
Documenting You can document your program by entering comments using the List and Ladder editors:
Your Program z Use the List Editor to document your program with List Line Comments. These
comments may appear on the same line as programming instructions, or they
may appear on lines of their own.
z Use the Ladder Editor to document your program using rung headers. These are
found directly above the rung.
The TwidoSuite programming software uses these comments for reversibility. When
reversing a program from List to Ladder, TwidoSuite uses some of the List
comments to construct a rung header. For this, the comments inserted between List
sequences are used for rung headers.
Example of List The following is an example of a List program with List Line Comments.
Line Comments
---- ( * THIS IS THE TITLE OF THE HEADER FOR RUNG 0 * )
---- ( * THIS IS THE FIRST HEADER COMMENT FOR RUNG 0 * )
---- ( * THIS IS THE SECOND HEADER COMMENT FOR RUNG 0 * )
0 LD % I0. 0 ( * THIS IS A LINE COMMENT *)
1 OR %I0. 1 ( * A LINE COMMENT IS IGNORED WHEN REVERSING TO LADDER * )
2 ANDM %M10
3 ST M101
---- ( * THIS IS THE HEADER FOR RUNG 1 * )
---- ( * THIS RUNG CONTAINS A LABEL * )
---- ( * THIS IS THE SECOND HEADER COMMENT FOR RUNG 1 * )
---- ( * THIS IS THE THIRD HEADER COMMENT FOR RUNG 1 * )
---- ( * THIS IS THE FOURTH HEADER COMMENT FOR RUNG 1 * )
4 % L5:
5 LD %M101
6 [ %MW20 := %KW2 * 16 ]
---- ( * THIS RUNG ONLY CONTAINS A HEADER TITLE * )
7 LD %Q0. 5
8 OR %I0. 3
9 ORR I0. 13
10 ST %Q0.5
35011386 06/2006 311

Ladder Language
Reversing List When List instructions are reversed to a Ladder diagram, List Line Comments are
Comments to displayed in the Ladder Editor according to the following rules:
Ladder z The first comment that is on a line by itself is assigned as the rung header.
z Any comments found after the first become the body of the rung.
z Once the body lines of the header are occupied, then the rest of the line
comments between List sequences are ignored, as are any comments that are
found on list lines that also contain list instructions.
Example of Rung The following is an example of a Ladder program with rung header comments.
Header Enter your comments here. Enter your comments here.
Comments 1 LD SECTION TITLE Enter your comments here. Enter your comments here.
Enter your comments here. Enter your comments here.
Rung 1 %I0.0 %M10 M101
%I0.1
Rung 2
%L
0 %MW20 :- %KW2*16
%M101
Rung 3 %Q0.5 %Q0.5
%I0.3
Reversing When a Ladder diagram is reversed to List instructions, rung header comments are
Ladder displayed in the List Editor according to the following rules:
Comments to z Any rung header comments are inserted between the associated List sequences.
List z Any labels (%Li: ) or subroutine declarations (SRi:) are placed on the next line
following the header and immediately prior to the List sequence.
z If the List was reversed to Ladder, any comments that were ignored will reappear
in the List Editor.
312 35011386 06/2006

Instruction List Language
13
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter describes programming using Instruction List Language.
Chapter

Chapter?
Topic Page
Overview of List Programs 314
Operation of List Instructions 316
List Language Instructions 317
Using Parentheses 321
Stack Instructions (MPS, MRD, MPP) 323
35011386 06/2006 313

Overview of List Programs
Introduction A program written in List language consists of a series of instructions executed

sequentially by the controller. Each List instruction is represented by a single
program line and consists of three components:
z Line number
z Instruction code
z Operand(s)
Example of a List The following is an example of a List program.

Program
0 LD %I0.1
1 ST %Q0.3
0 LD %I0.1
2 LDN %M0
3 ST %Q0.2 Operand(s)
4 LDR %I0.2
5 ST %Q0.4 Instruction Code
6 LDF %I0.3 Line Number
7 ST %Q0.5
Line Number Line numbers are generated automatically when you enter an instruction. Blank
lines and Comment lines do not have line numbers.
314 35011386 06/2006

Instruction Code The instruction code is a symbol for an operator that identifies the operation to be performed
using the operand(s). Typical operators specify Boolean and numerical operations.
For example, in the sample program above, LD is the abbreviation for the instruction
code for a LOAD instruction. The LOAD instruction places (loads) the value of the
operand %I0.1 into an internal register called the accumulator.
There are basically two types of instructions:
z Test instructions
These setup or test for the necessary conditions to perform an action. For
example, LOAD (LD) and AND.
z Action instructions
These perform actions as a result of setup conditions. For example, assignment
instructions such as STORE (ST) and RESET (R).
Operand An operand is a number, address, or symbol representing a value that a program

can manipulate in an instruction. For example, in the sample program above, the
operand %I0.1 is an address assigned the value of an input to the controller. An
instruction can have from zero to three operands depending on the type of
instruction code.
Operands can represent the following:
z Controller inputs and outputs such as sensors, push buttons, and relays.
z Predefined system functions such as timers and counters.
z Arithmetic, logical, comparison, and numerical operations.
z Controller internal variables such as bits and words.
35011386 06/2006 315

Operation of List Instructions
Introduction List instructions have only one explicit operand, the other operand is implied. The
implied operand is the value in the Boolean accumulator. For example, in the
instruction LD %I0.1, %I0.1 is the explicit operand. An implicit operand is stored in
the accumulator and will be written over by value of %I0.1.
Operation A List instruction performs a specified operation on the contents of the accumulator
and the explicit operand, and replaces the contents of the accumulator with the
result. For example, the operation AND %I1.2 performs a logical AND between the
contents of the accumulator and the Input 1.2 and will replace the contents of the
accumulator with this result.
All Boolean instructions, except for Load, Store, and Not, operate on two operands.
The value of the two operands can be either True or False, and program execution
of the instructions produces a single value: either True or False. Load instructions
place the value of the operand in the accumulator, while Store instructions transfer
the value in the accumulator to the operand. The Not instruction has no explicit
operands and simply inverts the state of the accumulator.
Supported List The following table shows a selection of instructions in List Instruction language:
Instructions
Type of Instruction Example Function
Bit instruction LD %M10 Reads internal bit %M10
Block instruction IN %TM0 Starts the timer %TM0
Word instruction [%MW10 := %MW50+100] Addition operation
Program instruction SR5 Calls subroutine #5
Grafcet instruction -*-8 Step #8
316 35011386 06/2006

List Language Instructions
Introduction List language consists of the following types of instructions:

z Test Instructions
z Action instructions
z Function block instructions
This section identifies and describes the Twido instructions for List programming.
Test Instructions The following table describes test instructions in List language.
Name Equivalent Function
graphic
element
LD The Boolean result is the same as the status of the operand.
LDN The Boolean result is the same as the reverse status of the operand.
LDR The Boolean result changes to 1 on detection of the operand (rising edge)
P changing from 0 to 1.
LDF The Boolean result changes to 1 on detection of the operand (falling edge)
N changing from 1 to 0.
AND The Boolean result is equal to the AND logic between the Boolean result of the
previous instruction and the status of the operand.
ANDN The Boolean result is equal to the AND logic between the Boolean result of the
previous instruction and the reverse status of the operand.
ANDR The Boolean result is equal to the AND logic between the Boolean result of the
P previous instruction and the detection of the operand's rising edge (1 = rising
edge).
ANDF The Boolean result is equal to the AND logic between the Boolean result of the
N previous instruction and the detection of the operand's falling edge (1 = falling
edge).
OR The Boolean result is equal to the OR logic between the Boolean result of the
previous instruction and the status of the operand.
AND( Logic AND (8 parenthesis levels)
35011386 06/2006 317


graphic
element
OR( Logic OR (8 parenthesis levels)
XOR, XORN, Exclusive OR

XOR
XORR, XORF
XORN
XORR
XORF
MPS Switching to the coils.

MRD
MPP
N - Negation (NOT)
318 35011386 06/2006

Action The following table describes action instructions in List language.

instructions
graphic
element
ST The associated operand takes the value of the test zone
result.
STN The associated operand takes the reverse value of the test
zone result.
S The associated operand is set to 1 when the result of the

S test zone is 1.
R The associated operand is set to 0 when the result of the

R test zone is 1.
JMP Connect unconditionally to a labeled sequence, upstream

->>%Li or downstream.
SRn Connection at the beginning of a subroutine.

->>%SRi
RET Return from a subroutine.

<RET>
END End of program.

<END>
ENDC End of the conditioned program at a Boolean result of 1.

<ENDC>
ENDCN End of the conditioned program at a Boolean result of 0.

<ENDCN>
35011386 06/2006 319

Function Block The following table describes function blocks in List language.
Instructions
graphic
element
Timers, counters, For each of the function blocks, there are
registers, and so on. instructions for controlling the block.
A structured form is used to hardwire the block
inputs and outputs directly.
Note: Outputs of function blocks can not be
connected to each other (vertical shorts).
320 35011386 06/2006

Using Parentheses
Introduction In AND and OR logical instructions, parentheses are use to specify divergences in
Ladder Editors. Parentheses are associated with instructions, as follows:
z Opening the parentheses is associated with the AND or OR instruction.
z Closing the parentheses is an instruction which is required for each open
parentheses.
Example Using The following diagrams are examples of using a parentheses with an AND
an AND instruction: AND(...).
Instruction
%I0.0 %I0.1 %Q0.0
LD %I0.0
AND %I0.1
%I0.2 OR %I0.2
ST %Q0.0
%I0.0 %I0.1 %Q0.1 LD %I0.0

AND( %I0.1
%I0.2 OR %I0.2
)
ST %Q0.1
Example Using The following diagrams are examples of using parentheses with an OR instruction:
an OR OR(...).
Instruction
LD %I0.0
%I0.0 %I0.1 %Q0.0
AND %I0.1
OR( %I0.2
%I0.2 %I0.3
AND %I0.3
)
ST %Q0.0
35011386 06/2006 321

Modifiers The following table lists modifiers that can be assigned to parentheses.
Modifier Function Example
N Negation AND(N or OR(N
F Falling edge AND(F or OR(F
R Rising edge AND(R or OR(R
[ Comparison See Comparison Instructions, p. 384
Nesting It is possible to nest up to eight levels of parentheses.

Parenthesis Observe the following rules when nesting parentheses:
z Each open parentheses must have a corresponding closed parentheses.
z Labels (%Li:), subroutines (SRi:), jump instructions (JMP), and function block
instructions must not be placed in expressions between parentheses.
z Store instructions ST, STN, S, and R must not be programmed between
parentheses.
z Stack instructions MPS, MRD, and MPP cannot be used between parentheses.
Examples of The following diagrams provide examples of nesting parentheses.

Nesting
Parentheses LD %I0.0
%I0.0 %I0.1 %Q0.0
AND( %I0.1
OR(N %I0.2
%I0.2 %M3 AND %M3
)
)
ST %Q0.0
LD %I0.1
%I0.1 %I0.2 %I0.3 %I0.4 %Q0.0
AND( %I0.2
AND %I0.3
%I0.5 %I0.6
OR( %I0.5
AND %I0.6
)
%I0.7 %I0.8 AND %I0.4
OR( %I0.7
AND %I0.8
)
)
ST %Q0.0
322 35011386 06/2006

Stack Instructions (MPS, MRD, MPP)
Introduction The Stack instructions process routing to coils.The MPS, MRD, and MPP
instructions use a temporary storage area called the stack which can store up to
eight Boolean expressions.
Note: These instructions can not be used within an expression between parentheses.
Operation of The following table describes the operation of the three stack instructions.
Stack
Instruction Description Function
Instructions
MPS Memory Push onto stack Stores the result of the last logical instruction
(contents of the accumulator) onto the top of stack
(a push) and shifts the other values to the bottom
of the stack.
MRD Memory Read from stack Reads the top of stack into the accumulator.
MPP Memory Pop from stack Copies the value at the top of stack into the
accumulator (a pop) and shifts the other values
towards the top of the stack.
Examples of The following diagrams are examples of using stack instructions.

Stack
Instructions %I0.0 %M1 %I0.1 %Q0.0 LD %I0.0
AND %M1
MPS
MPS %I0.2 %Q0.1 AND %I0.1
ST %Q0.0
MRD
MRD %I0.3 %Q0.2
AND %I0.2
ST %Q0.1
MPP %I0.4 %Q0.3
MRD
AND %I0.3
ST %Q0.2
MPP
AND %I0.4
ST %Q0.3
35011386 06/2006 323

Examples of The following diagrams display how stack instructions operate.

Stack Operation
%I0.0 %I0.1 %I0.3 %Q0.0 LD %I0.0
MPS
AND %I0.1
%M0
MPS
AND( %I0.3
%M1 %Q0.1 OR %M0
)
ST %Q0.0
%I0.4 %Q0.2 MPP
ANDN %M1
ST %Q0.1
%M10 %Q0.3 MRD
AND %I0.4
ST %Q0.2
MPP
AND %M10
ST %Q0.3
324 35011386 06/2006

Grafcet
14
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter describes programming using Grafcet Language.

Chapter

Chapter?
Topic Page
Description of Grafcet Instructions 326
Description of Grafcet Program Structure 331
Actions Associated with Grafcet Steps 334
35011386 06/2006 325

Grafcet
Description of Grafcet Instructions
Introduction Grafcet instructions in TwidoSuite offer a simple method of translating a control

sequence (Grafcet chart).
The maximum number of Grafcet steps depend on the type of Twido controller. The
number of steps active at any one time is limited only by the total number of steps.
For the TWDLCAA10DRF and the TWDLCAA16DRF, steps 1 through 62 are
available. Steps 0 and 63 are reserved for pre- and post-processing. For all other
controllers, steps 1 through 95 are available.
326 35011386 06/2006

Grafcet
Grafcet The following table lists all instructions and objects required to program a Grafcet chart:
Instructions
Graphic Transcription in Function
representation (1) TwidoSuite language
Illustration:
Initial step =*= i Start the initial step (2)
#i Activate step i after deactivating the

Transition
current step
-*- i Start step i and validate the associated
Step
transition (2)
# Deactivate the current step without
activating any other steps
#Di Deactivate step i and the current step
=*= POST Start post-processing and end
sequential processing
%Xi Bit associated with step i, can be tested
and written (maximum number of steps
depends on controller)
LD %Xi, LDN %Xi Test the activity of step i
AND %Xi, ANDN %Xi,
Xi
OR %Xi, ORN %Xi
XOR %Xi, XORN %Xi
S %Xi Activate step i
Xi
R %Xi Deactivate step i
S
Xi
R
(1) The graphic representation is not taken into account.

(2) The first step =*=i or -*-i written indicates the start of sequential processing and
thus the end of preprocessing.
35011386 06/2006 327

Grafcet
Grafcet Linear sequence:

Examples
%I0.5 %S21 LD %I0.5
%I0.5
ST %S21
=*= 1
=*=1
1 %Q0.1 LD %I0.1
%I0.1 2 # 2
# -*- 2
%I0.1 LD %I0.2
-*-2 # 3
%I0.2 3 -*- 3
2 %Q0.2 LD %I0.3
#
# 1
%I0.2 -*-2 =*= POST
%I0.3 1 LD %X1
# ST %Q0.1
3 %Q0.3
LD %X2
= * = POST ST %Q0.2
%I0.3 LD %X3
%X1 %Q0.1
ST %Q0.3
%X2 %Q0.2
%X3 %Q0.3
Not supported Twido Ladder Twido Instruction

Language program List program
328 35011386 06/2006

Grafcet
Alternative sequence:
=* = 4
4
%I0.3 5 =*= 4
%I0.3 %I0.4 LD %I0.3
#
# 5
%I0.4 6 LD %I0.4
# 6
5 6 #
-*- 5
%I0.5 %I0.6 -*-5
LD %I0.5
%I0.5 7 # 7
#
7 -*- 6
-*-6 LD %I0.6
%I0.6 7 # 7
#

35011386 06/2006 329

Grafcet
Simultaneous sequences:
8 -*-8
-*- 8
%I0.7 %I0.7 9 LD %I0.7
# # 9
# 10
10
9 10
# -*- 9
%I0.8 %I0.9 -*-9
LD %I0.8
%I0.8 11 # 11
11 12 #
-*- 10
%M0 - * - 10 LD %I0.9
# 12
%I0.9 12
# -*- 11
13 LD %M0
- * - 11 AND %X12
#D 12
%M0 %X12 12
# 13
#D
13 -*- 12
LD %M0
# AND %X11
- * - 12 #D 11
%M0 %X11 11 # 13
#D
13
#

Note: For a Grafcet Chart to be operational, at least one active step must be
declared using the =*=i instruction (initial step) or the chart should be pre-
positioned during preprocessing using system bit %S23 and the instruction S %Xi.
330 35011386 06/2006

Grafcet
Description of Grafcet Program Structure
Introduction A TwidoSuite Grafcet program has three parts:

z Preprocessing
z Sequential processing
z Post-Processing
Preprocessing Preprocessing consists of the following:

z Power returns
z Faults
z Changes of operating mode
z Pre-positioning Grafcet steps
z Input logic
The rising edge of input %I0.6 sets bit %S21 to 1. This disables the active steps and
enables the initial steps.
%I0.6 %S22 000 LDN %I0.6

/ S 001 S %S22
002 ST %M0
%M0 003 LDR %I0.6
004 S %S21
%I0.6 %S21
P S
Preprocessing begins with the first line of the program and ends with the first
occurrence of a "= * =" or "- * -" instruction.
Three system bits are dedicated to Grafcet control: %S21, %S22 and %S23. Each
of these system bits are set to 1 (if needed) by the application, normally in
preprocessing. The associated function is performed by the system at the end of
preprocessing and the system bit is then reset to 0 by the system.
System Bit Name Description
%S21 Grafcet initialization All active steps are deactivated and the initial steps are activated.
%S22 Grafcet re-initialization All steps are deactivated.
%S23 Grafcet pre-positioning This bit must be set to 1 if %Xi objects are explicitly written by the application in
preprocessing. If this bit is maintained to 1 by the preprocessing without any explicit
change of the %Xi objects, Grafcet is frozen (no updates are taken into account).
35011386 06/2006 331

Grafcet
Sequential Sequential processing takes place in the chart (instructions representing the chart):
Processing z Steps
z Actions associated with steps
z Transitions
z Transition conditions
Example:
=*= 1
005 =*= 1
%I0.2 %I0.3 2 006 LD %I0.2
/ # 007 ANDN %I0.3
008 # 2
%I0.3 %I0.2 3
009 LD %I0.3
/ # 010 ANDN %I0.2
011 # 3
-*- 2 012 -*- 2
013 LD %I0.4
%I0.4 1 014 # 1
015 -*- 3
# 016 LD %I0.5
017 # 1
-*- 3
%I0.5 1
#
Sequential processing ends with the execution of the "= * = POST" instruction or with
the end of the program.
332 35011386 06/2006

Grafcet
Post-Processing Post-processing consists of the following:

z Commands from the sequential processing for controlling the outputs
z Safety interlocks specific to the outputs
Example:
=*= POST
%X1 %Q0.1 018 =*= POST

019 LD %X1
020 ST %Q0.1
%X2 %Q0.2 021 LD %X2
022 ST %Q0.2
023 LD %X3
%X3 %Q0.3
024 OR( %M1
025 ANDN %I0.2
026 AND %I0.7
027 )
%M1 %I0.2 %I0.7 028 ST %Q0.3
/
35011386 06/2006 333

Grafcet
Actions Associated with Grafcet Steps
Introduction A TwidoSuite Grafcet program offers two ways to program the actions associated with steps:
z In the post-processing section
z Within List instructions or Ladder rungs of the steps themselves
Associating If there are security or running mode constraints, it is preferable to program actions in the
Actions in Post- post-processing section of a Grafcet application. You can use Set and Reset List
Processing instructions or energize coils in a Ladder program to activate Grafcet steps (%Xi).
Example:
%X1 %Q0.1 018 =*= POST

019 LD %X1
020 ST %Q0.1
%X2 %Q0.2 021 LD %X2
022 ST %Q0.2
023 LD %X3
%X2 %Q0.3
024 ST %Q0.3
Associating You can program the actions associated with steps within List instructions or Ladder
Actions from an rungs. In this case, the List instruction or Ladder rung is not scanned unless the step
Application is active. This is the most efficient, readable, and maintainable way to use Grafcet.
Example:
-*- 3
%Q0.5 020 -*- 3
021 LD 1
S 022 S %Q0.5
023 LD %M10
4 024 # 4
# 025 -*- 4
026 LD 1
027 R %Q0.5
-*- 4 028 ...
%Q0.5 029 ...
334 35011386 06/2006

Description of Instructions and
Functions
IV
At a Glance
Subject of this This part provides detailed descriptions about basic and advanced instructions and
Part system bits and words for Twido languages.

Part?
15 Basic Instructions 337
16 Advanced Instructions 403
17 System Bits and System Words 563
35011386 06/2006 335

Instructions and Functions
336 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
15
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter provides details about instructions and function blocks that are used to
Chapter create basic control programs for Twido controllers.

Chapter?
Section Topic Page
15.1 Boolean Processing 339
15.2 Basic Function Blocks 355
15.3 Numerical Processing 378
15.4 Program Instructions 396
35011386 06/2006 337

Basic Instructions
338 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
15.1 Boolean Processing
At a Glance
Aim of this This section provides an introduction to Boolean processing including descriptions
Section and programming guidelines for Boolean instructions.

Section?
Topic Page
Boolean Instructions 340
Understanding the Format for Describing Boolean Instructions 342
Load Instructions (LD, LDN, LDR, LDF) 344
Assignment instructions (ST, STN, R, S) 346
Logical AND Instructions (AND, ANDN, ANDR, ANDF) 348
Logical OR Instructions (OR, ORN, ORR, ORF) 350
Exclusive OR, instructions (XOR, XORN, XORR, XORF) 352
NOT Instruction (N) 354
35011386 06/2006 339

Basic Instructions
Boolean Instructions
Introduction Boolean instructions can be compared to Ladder language elements. These

instructions are summarized in the following table.
Item Instruction Example Description
Test elements The Load (LD) LD %I0.0 Contact is closed when bit
instruction is equivalent %I0.0 is at state 1.
to an open contact.
Action elements The Store (ST) ST %Q0.0 The associated bit object
instruction is equivalent takes a logical value of the bit
to a coil. accumulator (result of
previous logic).
The Boolean result of the test elements is applied to the action elements as shown
by the following instructions.
LD %I0.0
AND %I0.1
ST %Q0.0
Testing Boolean test instructions can be used to detect rising or falling edges on the
Controller Inputs controller inputs. An edge is detected when the state of an input has changed
between "scan n-1" and the current "scan n". This edge remains detected during the
current scan.
Rising Edge The LDR instruction (Load Rising Edge) is equivalent to a rising edge detection
Detection contact. The rising edge detects a change of the input value from 0 to 1.
A positive transition sensing contact is used to detect a rising edge as seen in the
following diagram.
%I0.0
LDR %I0.0 P P: Positive transition sensing contact
340 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Falling Edge The LDF instruction (Load Falling Edge) is equivalent to a falling edge detection
Detection contact. The falling edge detects a change of the controlling input from 1 to 0.
A negative transition sensing contact is used to detect a falling edge as seen in the
following diagram.
%I0.0
LDF %I0.0 N N: Negative transition sensing contact
Edge Detection The following table summarizes the instructions and timing for detecting edges:
Edge Test Ladder Timing diagram
Instruction diagram
Rising edge LDR %I0.0
Rising edge
%I0.0
P %I0.0 time
T
Boolean T=1 controller
result scan
time
Falling edge LDF %I0.0
Falling edge
%I0.0
%I0.0 time
N
T
Boolean
result T=1 controller
scan
time
Note: It is now possible to apply edge instructions to the %Mi internal bits.
35011386 06/2006 341

Basic Instructions
Understanding the Format for Describing Boolean Instructions
Introduction Each Boolean instruction in this section is described using the following information:
z Brief description
z Example of the instruction and the corresponding ladder diagram
z List of permitted operands
z Timing diagram
The following explanations provide more detail on how Boolean instructions are
described in this section.
Examples The following illustration shows how examples are given for each instruction.
%I0.1 %Q0.3
LD %I0.1
ST %Q0.3
%M0 %Q0.2 LDN %M0
ST %Q0.2
%I0.1 %Q0.4
P
LDR %I0.1
ST %Q0.4
%I0.3 %Q0.5
N
LDF %I0.3
ST %Q0.5
Ladder diagram equivalents List instructions
Permitted The following table defines the types of permitted operands used for Boolean
Operands instructions.
Operand Description
0/1 Immediate value of 0 or 1
%I Controller input %Ii.j
%Q Controller output %Qi.j
%M Internal bit %Mi
%S System bit %Si
%X Step bit %Xi
%BLK.x Function block bit (for example, %TMi.Q)
%•:Xk Word bit (for example, %MWi:Xk)
[ Comparison expression (for example, [%MWi<1000])
342 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Timing Diagrams The following illustration shows how timing diagrams are displayed for each
instruction.
LD
Input state LD LDN LDR LDF
%I0.1 %I0.1 %M0 %I0.2 %I0.3
Output state %Q0.3 %Q0.2 %Q0.4 %Q0.5
%Q0.3 Timing diagrams for the four types of Load in-

structions are grouped together.
Timing diagram for the
LD instruction
35011386 06/2006 343

Basic Instructions
Load Instructions (LD, LDN, LDR, LDF)
Introduction Load instructions LD, LDN, LDR, and LDF correspond respectively to the opened,
closed, rising edge, and falling edge contacts (LDR and LDF are used only with
controller inputs and internal words, and for AS-Interface and PDO CANopen slave
inputs).
Examples The following diagrams are examples of Load instructions.

%I0.1 %Q0.3
LD %I0.1
%M0 %Q0.2 ST %Q0.3
LDN %M0
ST %Q0.2
%I0.2 %Q0.4 LDR %I0.2
P ST %Q0.4
LDF %I0.3
%I0.3 %Q0.5
ST %Q0.5
N
Permitted The following table lists the types of load instructions with Ladder equivalents and
Operands permitted operands.
List Instruction Ladder Equivalent Permitted Operands
LD 0/1, %I, %IA, %IWCx.y.z:Xk, %Q, %QA, %M, %S,
%X, %BLK.x, %•:Xk,[
LDN 0/1, %I, %IA, %IWCx.y.z:Xk, %Q, %QA, %M, %S,

%X, %BLK.x, %•:Xk,[
LDR %I, %IA, %M

P
LDF %I, %IA, %M

N
344 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Timing diagram The following diagram displays the timing for Load instructions.
LD LDN LDR LDF
%I0.1 %M0 %I0.2 %I0.3
%Q0.3 %Q0.2 %Q0.4 %Q0.5
35011386 06/2006 345

Basic Instructions
Assignment instructions (ST, STN, R, S)
Introduction The assignment instructions ST, STN, S, and R correspond respectively to the
direct, inverse, set, and reset coils.
Examples The following diagrams are examples of assignment instructions.
%I0.1 %Q0.3
LD %I0.1
ST %Q0.3
%Q0.2
STN %Q0.2
/ S %Q0.4
%Q0.4
S LD %I0.2
R %Q0.4
%I0.2 %Q0.4
R
Permitted The following table lists the types of assignment instructions with ladder equivalents
Operands and permitted operands.
ST %Q,%QA,%M,%S,%BLK.x,%•:Xk
STN %Q,%QA%M,%S,%BLK.x,%•:Xk
S %Q,%QA,%M,%S,%X,%BLK.x,%•:Xk
S
R %Q,%QA,%M,%S,%X,%BLK.x,%•:Xk
R
346 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Timing diagram The following diagram displays the timing for assignment instructions.
ST STN S R
%I0.1 %I0.1 %I0.1 %I0.2
%Q0.3 %Q0.2 %Q0.4 %Q0.4
35011386 06/2006 347

Basic Instructions
Logical AND Instructions (AND, ANDN, ANDR, ANDF)
Introduction The AND instructions perform a logical AND operation between the operand (or its
inverse, or its rising or falling edge) and the Boolean result of the preceding
instruction.
Examples The following diagrams are examples of logic AND instructions.
LD %I0.1
%I0.1 %M1 %Q0.3
AND %M1
ST %Q0.3
%M2 %I0.2 %Q0.2 LD %M2
ANDN %I0.2
ST %Q0.2
%I0.3 %I0.4 %Q0.4 LD %I0.3
ANDR %I0.4
P S
S %Q0.4
%M3 %I0.5 %Q0.5 LD %M3
ANDF %I0.5
N S
S %Q0.5
Permitted The following table lists the types of AND instructions with ladder equivalents and
AND 0/1, %I, %IA, %Q, %QA, %M, %S, %X, %BLK.x,
%•:Xk, [
ANDN 0/1, %I, %IA, %Q, %QA, %M, %S, %X, %BLK.x,
%•:Xk, [
ANDR %I, %IA, %M

P
ANDF %I, %IA, %M

N
348 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Timing diagram The following diagram displays the timing for the AND instructions.
AND ANDN ANDR ANDF
%I0.1 %M2 %I0.3 %M3
%M1 %I0.2 %I0.4 %I0.5
%Q0.3 %Q0.2 %Q0.4 %Q0.5
35011386 06/2006 349

Basic Instructions
Logical OR Instructions (OR, ORN, ORR, ORF)
Introduction The OR instructions perform a logical OR operation between the operand (or its
inverse, or its rising or falling edge) and the Boolean result of the preceding
instruction.
Examples The following diagrams are examples of logic OR instructions.
%I0.1 %Q0.3
LD %I0.1
OR %M1
%M1 ST %Q0.3
%M2 %Q0.2
LD %M2
ORN %I0.2
%I0.2 ST %Q0.2
%M3 %Q0.4
S
LD %M3
ORR %I0.4
%I0.4 S %Q0.4
P
%I0.5 %Q0.5
LDF %I0.5
N S
ORF %I0.6
%I0.6 S %Q0.5
N
350 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Permitted The following table lists the types of OR instructions with Ladder equivalents and
OR 0/1, %I,%IA, %Q, %QA, %M, %S, %X, %BLK.x,
%•:Xk
ORN 0/1, %I,%IA, %Q, %QA, %M, %S, %X, %BLK.x,

%•:Xk
ORR %I, %IA, %M
ORF %I, %IA, %M
Timing diagram The following diagram displays the timing for the OR instructions.
OR ORN ORR ORF
%I0.1 %M2 %M3 %I0.5
%M1 %I0.2 %I0.4 %I0.6
%Q0.3 %Q0.2 %Q0.4 %Q0.5
35011386 06/2006 351

Basic Instructions
Exclusive OR, instructions (XOR, XORN, XORR, XORF)
Introduction The XOR instructions perform an exclusive OR operation between the operand (or
its inverse, or its rising or falling edge) and the Boolean result of the preceding
instruction.
Examples The following example shows the use of XOR instructions.

Schematic using XOR instruction:
%I0.1 %M1 %Q0.3 LD %I0.1

XOR %M1
XOR
ST %Q0.3
Schematic NOT using XOR instruction :

%I0.1 %M1 %Q0.3 LD %I0.1
ANDN %M1
OR( %M1
%M1 %I0.1
ANDN %I0.1
)
ST %Q0.3
Permitted The following table lists the types of XOR instructions and permitted operands.
Operands
List instruction Permitted Operands
XOR %I, %IA, %Q, %QA, %M, %S, %X, %BLK.x, %•:Xk
XORN %I, %IA, %Q, %QA, %M, %S, %X, %BLK.x, %•:Xk
XORR %I, %IA, %M
XORF %I, %IA, %M
352 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Timing Diagram The following diagram displays the timing for the XOR instructions.
XOR
%I0.1
%M1
%Q0.3
Special Cases The following are special precautions for using XOR instructions in Ladder
programs:
z Do not insert XOR contacts in the first position of a rung.
z Do not insert XOR contacts in parallel with other ladder elements (see the
following example.)
As shown in the following example, inserting an element in parallel with the XOR
contact will generate a validation error.
%M13 %I1.5 %Q1.10

XOR
%M10
35011386 06/2006 353

Basic Instructions
NOT Instruction (N)
Introduction The NOT (N) instruction negates the Boolean result of the preceding instruction.
Example The following is an example of using the NOT instruction.
LD %I0.1
OR %M2
ST %Q0.2
N
AND %M3
ST %Q0.3
Note: The NOT instruction is not reversible.
Permitted Not applicable.

Operands
Timing Diagram The following diagram displays the timing for the NOT instruction.
NOT
%I0.1
%M2
%Q0.2
%M3
%Q0.3
354 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
15.2 Basic Function Blocks
At a Glance
Aim of this This section provides descriptions and programming guidelines for using basic
Section function blocks.

Section?
Topic Page
Basic Function Blocks 356
Standard function blocks programming principles 358
Timer Function Block (%TMi) 360
TOF Type of Timer 362
TON Type of Timer 363
TP Type of Timer 364
Programming and Configuring Timers 365
Up/Down Counter Function Block (%Ci) 368
Programming and Configuring Counters 372
Shift Bit Register Function Block (%SBRi) 374
Step Counter Function Block (%SCi) 376
35011386 06/2006 355

Basic Instructions
Basic Function Blocks
Introduction Function blocks are the sources for bit objects and specific words that are used by programs.
Basic function blocks provide simple functions such as timers or up/down counting.
Example of a The following illustration is an example of an up/down Counter function block.

Function Block
%Ci
R E
S D
ADJ Y
%Ci.P 9999
CU
CD F
Up/down counter block
Bit Objects Bit objects correspond to the block outputs. These bits can be accessed by Boolean
test instructions using either of the following methods:
z Directly (for example, LD E) if they are wired to the block in reversible
programming (see Standard function blocks programming principles, p. 358).
z By specifying the block type (for example, LD %Ci.E).
Inputs can be accessed in the form of instructions.
Word Objects Word objects correspond to specified parameters and values as follows:
z Block configuration parameters: Some parameters are accessible by the
program (for example, pre-selection parameters) and some are inaccessible by
the program (for example, time base).
z Current values: For example, %Ci.V, the current count value.
356 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Accessible Bit The following table describes the Basic function blocks bit and word objects that can
and Word be accessed by the program.
Objects
Basic Function Symbol Range (i) Types of Description Address Write
Block Objects Access
Timer %TMi 0 - 127 Word Current Value %TMi.V no
Preset value %TMi.P yes
Bit Timer output %TMi.Q no
Up/Down Counter %Ci 0 - 127 Word Current Value %Ci.V no
Preset value %Ci.P yes
Bit Underflow output (empty) %Ci.E no
Preset output reached %Ci.D no
Overflow output (full) %Ci.F no
35011386 06/2006 357

Basic Instructions
Standard function blocks programming principles
Introduction Use one of the following methods to program standard function blocks:
z Function block instructions (for example, BLK %TM2): This reversible method of
programming ladder language enables operations to be performed on the block
in a single place in the program.
z Specific instructions (for example, CU %Ci): This non-reversible method enables
operations to be performed on the block’s inputs in several places in the program
(for example, line 100 CU %C1, line 174 CD %C1, line 209 LD %C1.D).
Reversible Use instructions BLK, OUT_BLK, and END_BLK for reversible programming:
Programming z BLK: Indicates the beginning of the block.
z OUT_BLK: Is used to directly wire the block outputs.
z END_BLK: Indicates the end of the block.
Example with The following example shows reversible programming of a counter function block
Output Wiring with wired outputs.
%I1.1
N R %C8 E BLK %C8
LDF %I1.1
S %M1 %Q0.4 R Input
%I1.2 %M0 ADJ Y D LD %I1.2 Processing
CU %Ci.P 9999 AND %M0
CU
OUT_BLK
CD F
LD D
Output
AND %M1
Processing
ST %Q0.4
END_BLK
358 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Example without This example shows reversible programming of a counter function block without
Output Wiring wired outputs.
%I1.1
N R %C8 E BLK %C8
LDF %I1.1
S R Input
%I1.2 %M0 ADJ Y D LD %I1.2 Processing
%Ci.P 9999 AND %M0
CU
CU
END_BLK
CD F
LD %C8.D
AND %M1 Output
ST %Q0.4 Processing
%C8.D %M1 %Q0.4
Note: Only test and input instructions on the relevant block can be placed between
the BLK and OUT_BLK instructions (or between BLK and END_BLK when
OUT_BLK is not programmed).
35011386 06/2006 359

Basic Instructions
Timer Function Block (%TMi)
Introduction There are three types of Timer function blocks:

z TON (Timer On-Delay): this type of timer is used to control on-delay actions.
z TOF (Timer Off-Delay): this type of timer is used to control off-delay actions.
z TP (Timer - Pulse): this type of timer is used to create a pulse of a precise
duration.
The delays or pulse periods are programmable and may be modified using the
TwidoSuite.
Illustration The following is an illustration of the Timer function block.
%TMi
IN Q
TYPE TON
TB 1min
ADJ Y
%TMi.P 9999
Timer function block
360 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Parameters The Timer function block has the following parameters:

Parameter Label Value
Timer number %TMi 0 to 63: TWDLCAA10DRF and TWDLCAA16DRF
0 to 127 for all other controllers.
Type TON • Timer On-Delay (default)
TOF • Timer Off-Delay
TP • pulse (monostable)
Time base TB 1 min (default), 1 s, 100 ms, 10 ms, 1 ms
Current Value %TMi.V Word which increments from 0 to %TMi.P when the timer is
running. May be read and tested, but not written by the
program. %TMi.V can be modified using the Animation
Tables Editor.
Preset value %TMi.P 0 - 9999. Word which may be read, tested, and written by
the program. Default value is 9999. The period or delay
generated is %TMi.P x TB.
Animation Tables Y/N Y: Yes, the preset %TMi.P value can be modified using the
Editor Animation Tables Editor.
N: No, the preset %TMi.P value cannot be modified.
Enable (or IN Starts the timer on rising edge (TON or TP types) or falling
instruction) input edge (TOF type).
Timer output Q Associated bit %TMi.Q is set to 1 depending on the function
performed: TON, TOF, or TP
Note: The larger the preset value, the greater the timer accuracy.
35011386 06/2006 361

Basic Instructions
TOF Type of Timer
Introduction Use the TOF (Timer Off-Delay) type of timer to control off-delay actions. This delay
is programmable using TwidoSuite.
Timing Diagram The following timing diagram illustrates the operation of the TOF type timer.
(1) (1)
(3)
IN
(2)
(5)
Q
%TMi.P
(4)
%TMi.V
Operation The following table describes the operation of the TOF type timer.
Phase Description
1 The current value %TMi.V is set to 0 on a rising edge at input IN, even if the timer is
running.
2 The %TMi.Q output bit is set to 1 when a rising edge is detected at input N.
3 The timer starts on the falling edge of input IN.
4 The current value %TMi.V increases to %TMi.P in increments of one unit for each
pulse of the time base TB.
5 The %TMi.Q output bit is reset to 0 when the current value reaches %TMi.P.
362 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
TON Type of Timer
Introduction The TON (Timer On-Delay) type of timer is used to control on-delay actions. This
delay is programmable using the TwidoSuite.
Timing Diagram The following timing diagram illustrates the operation of the TON type timer.
(1)
IN
(3) (5)
Q
%TMi.P (4)
(2)
%TMi.V
Operation The following table describes the operation of the TON type timer.
Phase Description
1 The timer starts on the rising edge of the IN input.
2 The current value %TMi.V increases from 0 to %TMi.P in increments of one unit for
each pulse of the time base TB.
3 The %TMi.Q output bit is set to 1 when the current value has reached %TMi.P.
4 The %TMi.Q output bit remains at 1 while the IN input is at 1.
5 When a falling edge is detected at the IN input, the timer is stopped, even if the timer
has not reached %TMi.P, and %TMi.V is set to 0.
35011386 06/2006 363

Basic Instructions
TP Type of Timer
Introduction The TP (Timer - Pulse) type of timer is used to create pulses of a precise duration.
This delay is programmable using the TwidoSuite.
Timing Diagram The following timing diagram illustrates the operation of the TP type timer.
(1)
IN
(2) (6)
(4)
Q
%TMi.P
(3) (5)
%TMi.V
Operation The following table describes the operation of the TP type timer.
Phase Description
1 The timer starts on the rising edge of the IN input. The current value %TMi.V is set
to 0 if the timer has not already started.
2 The %TMi.Q output bit is set to 1 when the timer starts.
3 The current value %TMi.V of the timer increases from 0 to %TMi.P in increments of
one unit per pulse of the time base TB.
4 The %TMi.Q output bit is set to 0 when the current value has reached %TMi.P.
5 The current value %TMi.V is set to 0 when %TMi.V equals %TMi.P and input IN
returns to 0.
6 This timer cannot be reset. Once %TMi.V equals %TMi.P, and input IN is 0, then
%TMi.V is set to 0.
364 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Programming and Configuring Timers
Introduction Timer function blocks (%TMi) are programmed in the same way regardless of how
they are to be used. The timer function (TON, TOF, or TP) is selected during
configuration.
Examples The following illustration is a timer function block with examples of reversible and
non-reversible programming.
%I0.1 %TMi %Q0.3

IN Q
TYPE TON
TB 1min
ADJ Y
%TMi.P 9999
Reversible programming Non-Reversible programming
BLK %TM1 LD %I0.1

LD %I0.1 IN %TM1
IN LD %TM1.Q
OUT_BLK ST %Q0.3
LD Q
ST %Q0.3
END_BLK
Configuration The following parameters must be entered during configuration:

z Timer type: TON, TOF, or TP
z Timebase: 1 min, 1 s, 100 ms, 10 ms or 1 ms
z Preset value (%TMi.P): 0 to 9999
z Adjust: Checked or Not Checked
35011386 06/2006 365

Basic Instructions
Special Cases The following table contains a list of special cases for programming the Timer
function block.
Special case Description
Effect of a cold restart (%S0=1) Forces the current value to 0. Sets output %TMi.Q to
0. The preset value is reset to the value defined
during configuration.
Effect of a warm restart (%S1=1) Has no effect on the current and preset values of the
timer. The current value does not change during a
power outage.
Effect of a controller stop Stopping the controller does not freeze the current value.
Effect of a program jump Jumping over the timer block does not freeze the
timer. The timer will continue to increment until it
reaches the preset value (%TMi.P). At that point, the
Done bit (%TMi.Q) assigned to output Q of the timer
block changes state. However, the associated output
wired directly to the block output is not activated and
not scanned by the controller.
Testing by bit %TMi.Q (done bit) It is advisable to test bit %TMi.Q only once in the program.
Effect of modifying the preset %TMi.P Modifying the present value by using an instruction or
by adjusting the value only takes effect on the next
activation of the timer.
Timers with a 1 The 1 ms time base is only available with the first five timers. The four system words
ms Time Base %SW76, %SW77, %SW78, and SW79, can be used as "hourglasses." These four
words are decremented individually by the system every millisecond if they have a
positive value.
Multiple timing can be achieved by successive loading of one of these words or by
testing the intermediate values. If the value of one of these four words is less than
0, it will not be modified. A timer can be "frozen" by setting the corresponding bit 15
to 1, and then "unfrozen" by resetting it to 0.
366 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Programming The following is an example of programming a timer function block.

Example
LDR %I0.1 (Launching the timer on the rising edge of %I0.1)
[%SW76:=XXXX] (XXXX = required value)
LD %I0.2 (optional management of freeze, input I0.2 freezes)
ST %SW76:X15
LD [%SW76=0] (timer end test)
ST %M0
..............
%I0.1 %SW76:=XXXX
P
%I0.2 %SW76:X15
%SW76:=0 %M0
35011386 06/2006 367

Basic Instructions
Up/Down Counter Function Block (%Ci)
Introduction The Counter function block (%Ci) provides up and down counting of events. These
two operations can be done simultaneously.
Illustration The following is an illustration of the up/down Counter function block.
%Ci
R E
S D
ADJ Y
%Ci.P 9999
CU
CD F
Up/down counter function block
368 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Parameters The Counter function block has the following parameters:

Counter number %Ci 0 to 127
Current Value %Ci.V Word is incremented or decremented according to inputs (or instructions) CU
and CD. Can be read and tested but not written by the program. Use the Data
Editor to modify %Ci.V.
Preset value %Ci.P 0 ≤ %Ci.P ≤ 9999. Word can be read, tested, and written (default value: 9999).
Edit using the ADJ z Y: Yes, the preset value can be modified by using the Animation Tables Editor.
Animation Tables z N: No, the preset value cannot be modified by using the Animation Tables Editor.
Editor
Reset input R At state 1: %Ci.V = 0.
(or instruction)
Reset input S At state 1: %Ci.V = %Ci.P.
(or instruction)
Upcount input (or CU Increments %Ci.V on a rising edge.
instruction)
Downcount input CD Decrements %Ci.V on a rising edge.
(or instruction)
Downcount overflow E (Empty) The associated bit %Ci.E=1, when down counter %Ci.V changes from 0 to 9999
output (set to 1 when %Ci.V reaches 9999, and reset to 0 if the counter continues to
count down).
Preset output reached D (Done) The associated bit %Ci.D=1, when %Ci.V=%Ci.P.
Upcount overflow F (Full) The associated bit %Ci.F=1, when %Ci.V changes from 9999 to 0 (set to 1 when
output %Ci.V reaches 0, and reset to 0 if the counter continues to count up).
35011386 06/2006 369

Basic Instructions
Operation The following table describes the main stages of up/down counter operation.
Operation Action Result
Counting A rising edge appears at the upcounting input The %Ci.V current value is incremented by one unit.
CU (or instruction CU is activated).
The %Ci.V current value is equal to the The "preset reached" output bit %Ci.D switches to 1.
%Ci.P preset value.
The %Ci.V current value changes from 9999 to 0. The output bit %Ci.F (upcounting overflow) switches to 1.
If the counter continues to count up. The output bit %Ci.F (upcounting overflow) is reset
to zero.
Downcount A rising edge appears at the downcounting The current value %Ci.V is decremented by one unit.
input CD (or instruction CD is activated).
The current value %Ci.V changes from 0 to 9999. The output bit %Ci.E (downcounting overflow)
switches to 1.
If the counter continues to count down. The output bit %Ci.F (downcounting overflow) is
reset to zero.
Up/down count To use both the upcount and downcount functions simultaneously (or to activate both instructions CD and
CU), the two corresponding inputs CU and CD must be controlled simultaneously. These two inputs are
then scanned in succession. If they are both at 1, the current value remains unchanged.
Reset Input R is set to state 1(or the R instruction is The current value %Ci.V is forced to 0. Outputs
activated). %Ci.E, %Ci.D and %Ci.F are at 0. The reset input
has priority.
Preset If input S is set to 1 (or the S instruction is The current value %Ci.V takes the %Ci.P value and
activated) and the reset input is at 0 (or the R the %Ci.D output is set to 1.
instruction is inactive).
370 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Special Cases The following table shows a list of special operating/configuration cases for
counters.
Effect of a cold restart (%S0=1) z The current value %Ci.V is set to 0.
z Output bits %Ci.E, %Ci.D, and %Ci.F are set to 0.
z The preset value is initialized with the value
defined during configuration.
Effect of a warm restart (%S1=1) of a Has no effect on the current value of the counter
controller stop (%Ci.V).
Effect of modifying the preset %Ci.P Modifying the preset value via an instruction or by
adjusting it takes effect when the block is processed by
the application (activation of one of the inputs).
35011386 06/2006 371

Basic Instructions
Programming and Configuring Counters
Introduction The following example is a counter that provides a count of up to 5000 items. Each
pulse on input %I1.2 (when internal bit %M0 is set to 1) increments the counter %C8
up to its final preset value (bit %C8.D=1). The counter is reset by input %I1.1.
Programming The following illustration is a counter function block with examples of reversible and
Example non-reversible programming.
%I1.1
R %C8 E
S
%I1.2 %M0 ADJ Y D
CU %Ci.P 9999
CD F
%C8.D %Q0.0
Ladder diagram
BLK %C8 LD %I1.1

LD %I1.1 R %C8
R LD %I1.2
LD %I1.2 AND %M0
AND %M0 CU %C8
CU LD %C8.D
END_BLK ST %Q0.0
LD %C8.D
ST %Q0.0
Reversible Programming Non-Reversible programming
372 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Configuration The following parameters must be entered during configuration:

z Preset value (%Ci.P): set to 5000 in this example
z Adjust: Yes
Example of an The following illustration is an example of an Up/Down Counter function block.

Up/Down
Counter %M0 %I0.0 %M0
R %C1 E R
S %M0
D S
CU
%M0 %I0.0
CD F
Ladder diagram
In this example, if we take %C1.P 4, the current value of the %C1.V counter will be
incremented from 0 to 3, then decremented from 3 to 0. Whereas %I0.0=1 %C1.V
oscillates between 0 and 3.
35011386 06/2006 373

Basic Instructions
Shift Bit Register Function Block (%SBRi)
Introduction The Shift Bit Register function block (%SBRi) provides a left or right shift of binary
data bits (0 or 1).
Illustration The following is an example of a Shift Register function block.
%SBRi
R
CU
CD
Parameters The Shift Bit Register function block has the following parameters.
Register number %SBRi 0 to 7
Register bit %SBRi.j Bits 0 to 15 (j = 0 to 15) of the shift register can be
tested by a Test instruction and written using an
Assignment instruction.
Reset input (or R When function parameter R is 1, this sets register
instruction) bits 0 to 15 %SBRi.j to 0.
Shift to left input (or CU On a rising edge, shifts a register bit to the left.
instruction)
Shift to right input (or CD On a rising edge, shifts a register bit to the right.
instruction)
374 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Operation The following illustration shows a bit pattern before and after a shift operation.
Operation
Initial state 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0
Bit 15 Bit 0
CU %SBRi performs a
shift to the left
Bit 15 is lost 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
Bit 15 Bit 0
This is also true of a request to shift a bit to the right (Bit 15 to Bit 0) using the CD
instruction. Bit 0 is lost.
If a 16-bit register is not adequate, it is possible to use the program to cascade
several registers.
Programming In the following example, a bit is shifted to the left every second while Bit 0 assumes
the opposite state to Bit 15.
Reversible
programming
%SBR0.15 %SBR0.0
/
LDN %SBR0.15
ST %SBR0.0
BLK %SBR0
LD %S6
CU
%SBR0 END_BLK
R
%S6 Non-Reversible
CU programming
LDN %SBR0.15
CD ST %SBR0.0
LD %S6
CU %SBR0
Special Cases The following table contains a list of special cases for programming the Shift Bit
Register function block.
Special Case Description
Effect of a cold restart (%S0=1) Sets all the bits of the register word to 0.
Effect of a warm restart (%S1=1) Has no effect on the bits of the register word.
35011386 06/2006 375

Basic Instructions
Step Counter Function Block (%SCi)
Introduction A Step Counter function block (%SCi) provides a series of steps to which actions can be
assigned. Moving from one step to another depends on external or internal events. Each
time a step is active, the associated bit (step counter bit %SCi.j) is set to 1. The step
counter can control output bits (%Qi.j), internal bits (%Mi) or AS interface slave output
bits (%QAx.y.z). Only one step of a step counter can be active at a time.
Illustration The following is an example of a Step Counter function block.
%SCi
R
CU
CD
Parameters The step function block has the following parameters:

Step counter number %SCi 0-7
Step Counter bit %SCi.j Step counter bits 0 to 255 (j = 0 to 255) can be tested by a Load logical
operation and written by an Assignment instruction.
Reset input (or instruction) R When function parameter R is 1, this resets the step counter.
Increment input (or instruction) CU On a rising edge, increments the step counter by one step.
Decrement input (or instruction) CD On a rising edge, decrements the step counter by one step.
Timing Diagram The following timing diagram illustrates the operation of the step function block.
CU input
CD input
Active step
0 1 2 3 2 1 0
number
376 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Programming The following is an example of a Step Counter function block.

z Step Counter 0 is incremented by input %I0.2.
z Step Counter 0 is reset to 0 by input %I0.3 or when it arrives at step 3.
z Step 0 controls output %Q0.1, step 1 controls output %Q0.2, and step 2 controls
output %Q0.3.
The following illustration shows both reversible and non-reversible programming for
this example.
Reversible
programming
BLK %SC0
%SC0.3
LD %SC0.3
OR %I0.3
R
%I0.3 %SC0 LD %I0.2
R CU
END_BLK
%I0.2 LD %SC0.0
CU ST %Q0.1
LD %SC0.1
ST %Q0.2
CD LD %SC0.2
Non-reversible
%SC0.0 %Q0.1 programming
LD %SC0.3
OR %I0.3
%SC0.1 %Q0.2 R %SC0
LD %I0.2
CU %SC0
LD %SC0.0
%SC0.2 %Q0.3
ST %Q0.1
LD %SC0.1
ST %Q0.2
LD %SC0.2
Special case The following table contains a list of special cases for operating the Step Counter
function block.
Effect of a cold restart (%S0=1) Initializes the step counter.
Effect of a warm restart (%S1=1) Has no effect on the step counter.
35011386 06/2006 377

Basic Instructions
15.3 Numerical Processing
At a Glance
Aim of this This section provides an introduction to Numerical Processing including descriptions
Section and programming guidelines.

Section?
Topic Page
Introduction to Numerical Instructions 379
Assignment Instructions 380
Comparison Instructions 384
Arithmetic Instructions on Integers 386
Logic Instructions 389
Shift Instructions 391
Conversion Instructions 393
Single/double word conversion instructions 395
378 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Introduction to Numerical Instructions
At a Glance Numerical instructions generally apply to 16-bit words (see Word Objects, p. 29) and
to 32-bit double words (See Floating point and double word objects, p. 32). They are
written between square brackets. If the result of the preceding logical operation was
true (Boolean accumulator = 1), the numerical instruction is executed. If the result of
the preceding logical operation was false (Boolean accumulator = 0), the numerical
instruction is not executed and the operand remains unchanged.
35011386 06/2006 379

Basic Instructions
Assignment Instructions
Introduction Assignment instructions are used to load operand Op2 into operand Op1.
Assignment Syntax for Assignment instructions.
[Op1:=Op2] <=> Op2 -> Op1
Assignment operations can be performed on:

z Bit strings
z Words
z Double words
z Floating word
z Word tables
z Double word tables
z Floating word tables
Assignment of Operations can be performed on the following bit strings (see Structured Objects, p. 46):
Bit Strings z Bit string -> bit string (Example 1)
z Bit string -> word (Example 2) or double word (indexed)
z Word or double word (indexed) -> bit string (Example 3)
z Immediate value -> bit string
Examples Examples of bit string assignments.

%Q0:8:=%M64:8
LD 1
[%Q0:8:=%M64:8] (Ex. 1)
%I0.2 %MW100:=%I0:16
LD %I0.2 (Ex. 2)
[%MW100:=%I0:16]
%I0.3 %M104:16:=%KW0
P LDR %I0.3 (Ex. 3)
Usage rules:
z For bit string -> word assignment: The bits in the string are transferred to the word
starting on the right (first bit in the string to bit 0 in the word), and the word bits
which are not involved in the transfer (length ≤16) are set to 0.
z For word -> bit string assignment: The word bits are transferred from the right
(word bit 0 to the first bit in the string).
380 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Bit String Syntax for bit string assignments.

Assignments
Operator Syntax Operand 1 (Op1) Operand 2 (Op2)
:= [Op1: = Op2 ] %MWi,%QWi, Immediate value,
%QWAi,%SWi %MWi, %KWi,
Operand 1 (Op1) %MWi[%MWi], %MDi, %IW,%IWAi, %INWi,
assumes the value of %MDi[%MWi] %QWi, %QWAi
operand 2 (Op2) %Mi:L, %Qi:L, %Si:L, %QNWi, %SWi,
%Xi:L %BLK.x, %MWi[%MWi],
%KWi[%MWi],
%MDi[%MWi],
%KDi[%MWi],
%Mi:L,%Qi:L, %Si:L,
%Xi:L, %Ii:L
Note: The abbreviation %BLK.x (for example, %C0.P) is used to describe any
function block word.
Assignment of Assignment operations can be performed on the following words and double words:
Words z Word (indexed) -> word (2, for example) (indexed or not)
z Double word (indexed) -> double word (indexed or not)
z Immediate whole value -> word (Example 3) or double word (indexed or not)
z Bit string -> word or double word
z Floating point (indexed or not)-> floating point (indexed or not)
z Word or double word -> bit string
z Immediate floating point value -> floating point (indexed or not)
Examples Examples of word assignments.

%SW112:=%MW100
LD 1
[%SW112:=%MW100] (Ex. 1)
%I0.2 %MW0[%MW10]:=%KW0[%MW20]
LD %I0.2
[%MW0[%MW10]:= (Ex. 2)
%KW0[%MW20]]
%I0.3 %MW10:=100
P LDR %I0.3 (Ex. 3)
[%MW10:=100]
35011386 06/2006 381

Basic Instructions
Syntax Syntax for word assignments.

Operator Syntax
:= [Op1: = Op2 ]
Operand 1 (Op1) assumes the value of operand 2 (Op2)
The following table gives details operands:

Type Operand 1 (Op1) Operand 2 (Op2)
word, double %BLK.x, %MWi, %QWi, Immediate value, %MWi, %KWi, %IW,
word, bit string %QWAi, %SWi %IWAi, %QWi, %QWAi, %SWi,
%MWi[MWi, %MDi, %MWi[MWi], %KWi[MWi], %MDi,
%MDi[%MWj]], %MDi[%MWj], %KDi, %KDi[MWj] , %INW,
%Mi:L, %Qi:L, %Si:L, %Xi:L %Mi:L, %Qi:L, %QNW, %Si:L, %Xi:L, %Ii:L
Floating point %MFi, %MFi[%MWj] Immediate floating point value, %MFi,
%MFi[%MWj], %KFi, %KFi[%MWj]
Note: The abbreviation %BLK.x (for example, R3.I) is used to describe any
function block word. For bit strings %Mi:L, %Si:L, and %Xi:L, the base address of
the first of the bit string must be a multiple of 8 (0, 8, 16, ..., 96, ...).
Assignment of Assignment operations can be performed on the following object tables (see Tables
Word, Double of words, p. 47):
Word and z Immediate whole value -> word table (Example 1) or double word table
Floating Point z Word -> word table (Example 2)
Tables z Word table -> word table (Example 3)
Table length (L) should be the same for both tables.
z Double word -> double word table
z Double word table -> double word table
z Immediate floating point value -> floating point table
z Floating point -> floating point table
z Floating point table-> floating point table
382 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Examples Examples of word table assignments:
%MW0:10:=100 LD 1
[%MW0:10:=100] (Ex. 1)
%I0.2 %MW0:10:=%MW11 LD %I0.2

[%MW0:10:=%MW11] (Ex. 2)
%I0.3 %MW10:20:=%KW30:20 LDR %I0.3

P [%MW10:20:=%KW30:20] (Ex. 3)
Syntax Syntax for word, double word and floating point table assignments
Operator Syntax
:= [Op1: = Op2 ]
Operand 1 (Op1) assumes the value of operand 2 (Op2)
The following table gives details operands:

word table %MWi:L, %SWi:L %MWi:L, %SWi:L, Immediate whole value,
%MWi, %KWi, %IW, %QW, %IWA, %QWA,
%SWi, %BLK.x
Double word tables %MDi:L Immediate whole value, %MDi,
%KDi,%MDi:L, %KDi:L
Floating word tables %MFi:L] Immediate floating point value, %MFi, %KFi,
%MFi:L, %KFi:L
Note: The abbreviation %BLK.x (for example, R3.I) is used to describe any
function block word.
35011386 06/2006 383

Basic Instructions
Comparison Instructions
Introduction Comparison instructions are used to compare two operands.

The following table lists the types of Comparison instructions.
Instruction Function
> Test if operand 1 is greater than operand 2
>= Test if operand 1 is greater than or equal to operand 2
< Test if operand 1 is less than operand 2
<= Test if operand 1 is less than or equal to operand 2
= Test if operand 1 is equal than operand 2
<> Test if operand 1 is different from operand 2
Structure The comparison is executed inside square brackets following instructions LD, AND,
and OR. The result is 1 when the comparison requested is true.
Examples of Comparison instructions.
%MW10>100 %Q0.3
LD [%MW10 > 100]
ST %Q0.3
%M0 %MW20<%KW35 %Q0.2 LD %M0

AND [%MW20 < %KW35]
ST %Q0.2
%I0.2 %Q0.4 LD %I0.2

OR [%MF30>=%MF40]
ST %Q0.4
%MF30>=%MF40
384 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Syntax Syntax for Comparison instructions:

Operator Syntax
>, >=, <, <=, =, <> LD [Op1 Operator Op2]
AND [Op1 Operator Op2]
OR [Op1 Operator Op2]
Operands:
Words %MWi, %KWi, %INWi, %IW, Immediate value, %MWi, %KWi, %INWi,
%IWAi, %QNWi, %QWi, %IW, %IWAi, %QNWi, %QW, %QWAi,
%QWAi, %QNWi, %SWi, %SWi, %BLK.x, %MWi [%MWi], %KWi
%BLK.x [%MWi]
Double words %MDi, %KDi Immediate value, %MDi, %KDi, %MDi
[%MWi], %KD [%MWi]
Floating word %MFi, %KFi Immediate floating point value, %MFi,
%KFi, %MFi [%MWi], %KFi [%MWi]
Note: Comparison instructions can be used within parentheses.
An example of using Comparison instruction within parentheses:

LD %M0
AND( [%MF20 > 10.0]
OR %I0.0
)
ST %Q0.1
35011386 06/2006 385

Basic Instructions
Arithmetic Instructions on Integers
Introduction Arithmetic instructions are used to perform arithmetic operations between two
integer operands or on one integer operand.
The following table lists the types of Arithmetic instructions.
+ Add two operands
- Subtract two operands
* Multiply two operands
/ Divide two operands
REM Remainder of division of the two operands
SQRT Square root of an operand
INC Increment an operand
DEC Decrement an operand
ABS Absolute value of an operand
Structure Arithmetic operations are performed as follows:
%M0 %MW0:=%MW10+100
LD %M0
[%MW0:=%MW10 + 100]
%I0.2 %MW0:=SQRT(%MW10) LD %I0.2

[%MW0:=SQRT(%MW10)]
%I0.3 INC %MW100 LDR %I0.3

P [INC %MW100]
386 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Syntax The syntax depends on the operators used as shown in the table below.
Operator Syntax
+,-,*,/,REM [Op1: = Op 2 Operator Op3]
INC, DEC [Operator Op1]
SQRT (1) [Op1: = SQRT(Op2)]
ABS (1) [Op1: = ABS(Op2)]
Operands:
Type Operand 1 (Op1) Operands 2 and 3 (Op2 & 3) (1)
Words %MWi, %QWi, Immediate value, %MWi, %KWi, %INW,
%QWAi, %SWi %IW, %IWAi, %QNW, %QW, %QWAi,
%SWi, %BLK.x
Double words %MDi Immediate value, %MDi, %KDi
Note: (1) With this operator, Op2 cannot be an immediate value.

The ABS function can only be used with double words (%MD and %KD) and
floating points (%MF and %KF). Consequently, OP1 and OP2 must be double
words or floating points.
35011386 06/2006 387

Basic Instructions
Overflow and Addition

Error Conditions z Overflow during word operation
If the result exceeds the capacity of the result word, bit %S18 (overflow) is set to 1 and the
result is not significant (see Example 1, next page). The user program manages bit %S18.
Note:
For double words, the limits are -2147483648 and 21474836487.
Multiplication
z Overflow during operation
If the result exceeds the capacity of the result word, bit %S18 (overflow) is set to
1 and the result is not significant.
Division / remainder
z Division by 0
If the divider is 0, the division is impossible and system bit %S18 is set to 1. The
result is then incorrect.
If the division quotient exceeds the capacity of the result word, bit %S18 is set to 1.
Square root extraction
Square root extraction is only performed on positive values. Thus, the result is
always positive. If the square root operand is negative, system bit %S18 is set to
1 and the result is incorrect.
Note: The user program is responsible for managing system bits %S17 and %S18.
These are set to 1 by the controller and must be reset by the program so that they
can be reused (see previous page for example).
Examples Example 1: overflow during addition.

%M0 %MW0:=%MW1+%MW2
LD %M0
[%MW0:=%MW1 + %MW2]
%S18 %MW10:=%MW0
/ LDN %S18
[%MW10:=%MW0]
%S18 %MW10:=32767
LD %S18
%S18 [%MW10:=32767]
R R %S18
If %MW1 =23241 and %MW2=21853, the real result (45094) cannot be expressed
in one 16-bit word, bit %S18 is set to 1 and the result obtained (-20442) is incorrect.
In this example when the result is greater than 32767, its value is fixed at 32767.
388 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Logic Instructions
Introduction The Logic instructions are used to perform a logical operation between two word
operands or on one word operand.
The following table lists the types of Logic instructions.
AND AND (bit-wise) between two operands
OR Logic OR (bit-wise) between two operands
XOR Exclusive OR (bit-wise) between two operands
NOT Logic complement (bit-wise) of an operand
Structure Logic operations are performed as follows:
%M0 %MW0:=%MW10 AND 16#FF00

LD %M0
[%MW0:=%MW10 AND 16#FF00]
[%MW0:=%KW5 OR %MW10]
LD 1
[%MW0:=%KW5 OR %MW10]
%I0.3 %MW102:=NOT (%MW100)

LD %I0.3
[%MW102:=NOT(%MW100)]
35011386 06/2006 389

Basic Instructions
Syntax The syntax depends on the operators used:

Operator Syntax Operand 1 (Op1) Operands 2 and 3 (Op2
& 3)
AND, OR, XOR [Op1: = Op2 Operator Op3] %MWi, %QWi, Immediate value (1),
NOT [Op1:=NOT(Op2)] %QWAi, %SWi %MWi, %KWi, %IW,
%IWAi, %QW, %QWAi,
%SWi, %BLK.x
Note: (1) With NOT, Op2 cannot be an immediate value.
Example The following is an example of a logical AND instruction:

[%MW15:=%MW32 AND %MW12]
390 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Shift Instructions
Introduction Shift instructions move bits of an operand a certain number of positions to the right
or to the left.
The following table lists the types of Shift instructions.
Logic shift
SHL(op2,i) Logic shift of i positions to F 0
the left.
%S17
SHR(op2,i) Logic shift of i positions to F 0
the right.
%S17
Rotate shift
ROR(op2,i) Rotate shift of i positions
to the left.
F 0
%S17
ROL(op2,i) Rotate shift of i positions
F 0
to the right.
%S17
Note: System bit %S17 (See System Bits (%S), p. 564) is used for capacity overrun.
35011386 06/2006 391

Basic Instructions
Structure Shift operations are performed as follows:
%I0.1
LDR %I0.1
P %MW0:=SHL(%MW10, 5) [%MW0 :=SHL(%MW10, 5)]
%I0.2 LDR %I0.2

P %MW10:=ROR(%KW9, 8) [%MW10 :=ROR(%KW9, 8)]
Operator Syntax
SHL, SHR [Op1: = Operator (Op2,i)]
ROL, ROR
Operands:
Types Operand 1 (Op1) Operand 2 (Op2)
Words %MWi, %QWi, %QWAi, %SWi %MWi, %KWi, %IW, %IWAi, %QW,
%QWAi, %SWi, %BLK.x
Double word %MDi %MDi, %KDi
392 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Conversion Instructions
Introduction Conversion instructions perform conversion between different representations of numbers.

The following table lists the types of Conversion instructions.
BTI BCD --> Binary conversion
ITB Binary --> BCD conversion
Review of BCD Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) represents a decimal digit (0 to 9) by coding four binary
Code bits. A 16-bit word object can thus contain a number expressed in four digits (0000 -
9999), and a 32 bit double word object can therefore contain an eight-figure number.
During conversion, system bit %S18 is set to 1 if the value is not BCD. This bit must
be tested and reset to 0 by the program.
BCD representation of decimal numbers:
Decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BCD 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001
Examples:
z Word %MW5 expresses the BCD value "2450" which corresponds to the binary
value: 0010 0100 0101 0000
z Word %MW12 expresses the decimal value "2450" which corresponds to the
binary value: 0000 1001 1001 0010
Word %MW5 is converted to word %MW12 by using instruction BTI.
Word %MW12 is converted to word %MW5 by using instruction ITB.
Structure Conversion operations are performed as follows:
%M0 %MW0:=BTI(%MW10)
LD %M0
[%MW0 :=BTI(%MW10)]
%I0.2 %MW10:=ITB(%KW9)
LD %I0.2
[%MW10 :=ITB(%KW9)]
35011386 06/2006 393

Basic Instructions
Operator Syntax
BTI, ITB [Op1: = Operator (Op2)]
Operands:
Words %MWi, %QWi, %MWi, %KWi, %IW, %IWAi, %QW,
%QWAi, %SWi %QWAi, %SWi, %BLK.x
Double word %MDi %MDi, %KDi
Application The BTI instruction is used to process a setpoint value at controller inputs via BCD
Example: encoded thumb wheels.
The ITB instruction is used to display numerical values (for example, the result of a
calculation, the current value of a function block) on BCD coded displays.
394 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Single/double word conversion instructions
Introduction The following table describes instructions used to perform conversions between
single and double words:
LW LSB of double word extracted to a word.
HW MSB of double word extracted to a word.
CONCATW Concatenates two words into a double word.
DWORD Converts a 16 bit word into a 32 bit double word.
Structure Conversion operations are performed as follows:
%M0 %MW0:=HW(%MD10)
LD %M0
[%MW0 :=HW(%MD10)]
%I0.2 %MD10:=DWORD(%KW9)
LD %I0.2
[%MD10 :=DWORD(%KW9)]
%I0.3 %MD11:=CONCATW(%MW10, %MW5)

LD %I0.3
[%MD11:=CONCATW(%MW10,%MW5)]
Syntax The syntax depends on the operators used as shown in the following table: l
Operator Syntax Operand 1 (Op1) Operand 2 (Op2) Operand 3 (Op3)
LW, HW Op1 = Operator (Op2) %MWi %MDi, %KDi [-]
CONCATW Op1 = Operator (Op2, Op3)) %MDi %MWi, %KWi, %MWi, %KWi,
immediate value immediate value
DWORD Op1 = Operator (Op2) %MDi %MWi, %KWi [-]
35011386 06/2006 395

Basic Instructions
15.4 Program Instructions
At a Glance
Aim of this This section provides an introduction to Program Instructions.

Section

Section?
Topic Page
END Instructions 397
NOP Instruction 399
Jump Instructions 400
Subroutine Instructions 401
396 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
END Instructions
Introduction The End instructions define the end of the execution of a program scan.
END, ENDC, and Three different end instructions are available:

ENDCN z END: unconditional end of program
z ENDC: end of program if Boolean result of preceding test instruction is 1
z ENDCN: end of program if Boolean result of preceding test instruction is 0
By default (normal mode) when the end of program is activated, the outputs are
updated and the next scan is started.
If scanning is periodic, when the end of period is reached the outputs are updated
and the next scan is started.
35011386 06/2006 397

Basic Instructions
Examples Example of an unconditional END instruction.
%M1 %Q0.1
LD %M1
ST %Q0.1
LD %M2
ST %Q0.2
%M2 %Q0.2
...................
END END
Example of a conditional END instruction.
%M1 %Q0.1
LD %M1
ST %Q0.1
LD %M2
ST %Q0.2
%M2 %Q0.2
...................
%I0.2
LD %I0.2
END ENDC If %I0.2 = 1, end of
LD %M2 program scanning
ST %Q0.2
%M2 %Q0.2
If %I0.2 = 0, continues
program scanning
................... until new END instruc-
tion
END END
398 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
NOP Instruction
NOP The NOP instruction does not perform any operation. Use it to "reserve" lines in a
program so that you can insert instructions later without modifying the line numbers.
35011386 06/2006 399

Basic Instructions
Jump Instructions
Introduction Jump instructions cause the execution of a program to be interrupted immediately

and to be continued from the line after the program line containing label %Li (i = 1
to 16 for a compact and 1 to 63 for the others).
JMP, JMPC and Three different Jump instructions are available:

JMPCN z JMP: unconditional program jump
z JMPC: program jump if Boolean result of preceding logic is 1
z JMPCN: program jump if Boolean result of preceding logic is 0
Examples Examples of jump instructions.

000 LD %M15
001 JMPC %L8 Jump to label %L8 if %M15
002 LD [%MW24>%MW12] is at 1
003 ST %M15
004 JMP %L12 Unconditional jump to label
005 %L8: %L12:
006 LD %M12
007 AND %M13
008 ST %M12
009 JMPCN %L12 Jump to label %L12 if
010 OR %M11 %M12 is at 0
011 S %Q0.0
012 %L12:
013 LD %I0.0
...............
Guidelines z Jump instructions are not permitted between parentheses, and must not be placed
between the instructions AND(, OR( and a close parenthesis instruction ")".
z The label can only be placed before a LD, LDN, LDR, LDF or BLK instruction.
z The label number of label %Li must be defined only once in a program.
z The program jump is performed to a line of programming which is downstream or
upstream. When the jump is upstream, attention must be paid to the program
scan time. Extended scan time can cause triggering of the watchdog.
400 35011386 06/2006

Basic Instructions
Subroutine Instructions
Introduction The Subroutine instructions cause a program to perform a subroutine and then
return to the main program.
SRn, SRn: and The subroutines consist of three steps:

RET. z The SRn instruction calls the subroutine referenced by label SRn, if the result of
the preceding Boolean instruction is 1.
z The subroutine is referenced by a label SRn:, with n = 0 to 15 for
TWDLCAA10DRF, TWDLCAA16DRF and 0 to 63 for all other controllers.
z The RET instruction placed at the end of the subroutine returns program flow to
the main program.
Example Examples of subroutine instructions.

000 LD %M15
001 AND %M5
002 ST %Q0.0
003 LD [%MW24>%MW12]
004 SR8 Jump to subroutine SR8
005 LD %I0.4
006 AND M13
007 _
008 _
009 _
010 END
011 SR8:
012 LD 1
013 IN %TM0
014 LD %TM0.Q
015 ST %M15
010 RET Return to main subroutine
.....................
35011386 06/2006 401

Basic Instructions
Guidelines z A subroutine should not call up another subroutine.

z Subroutine instructions are not permitted between parentheses, and must not be
placed between the instructions AND(, OR( and a close parenthesis instruction ")".
z The label can only be placed before a LD or BLK instruction marking the start of
a Boolean equation (or rung).
z Calling the subroutine should not be followed by an assignment instruction. This
is because the subroutine may change the content of the boolean accumulator.
Therefore upon return, it could have a different value than before the call. See the
following example.
Example of programming a subroutine.
LD %I0.0
SR0
%I0.0
ST %Q0.0
>>%SR0
%Q0.0 LD %I0.0
ST %Q0.0
SR0
402 35011386 06/2006

Advanced Instructions
16
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter provides details about instructions and function blocks that are used to
Chapter create advanced control programs for Twido programmable controllers.

Chapter?
Section Topic Page
16.1 Advanced Function Blocks 405
16.2 Clock Functions 447
16.3 Twido PID Quick Start Guide 457
16.4 PID Function 478
16.5 Floating point instructions 533
16.6 Instructions on Object Tables 544
35011386 06/2006 403

404 35011386 06/2006

16.1 Advanced Function Blocks
At a Glance
Aim of this This section provides an introduction to advanced function blocks including
Section programming examples.

Section?
Topic Page
Bit and Word Objects Associated with Advanced Function Blocks 406
Programming Principles for Advanced Function Blocks 408
LIFO/FIFO Register Function Block (%Ri) 410
LIFO Operation 411
FIFO,operation 412
Programming and Configuring Registers 413
Pulse Width Modulation Function Block (%PWM) 416
Pulse Generator Output Function Block (%PLS) 419
Drum Controller Function Block (%DR) 422
Drum Controller Function Block %DRi Operation 424
Programming and Configuring Drum Controllers 426
Fast Counter Function Block (%FC) 428
Very Fast Counter Function Block (%VFC) 431
Transmitting/Receiving Messages - the Exchange Instruction (EXCH) 443
Exchange Control Function Block (%MSGx) 444
35011386 06/2006 405

Bit and Word Objects Associated with Advanced Function Blocks
Introduction Advanced function blocks use similar types of dedicated words and bits as the
standard function blocks. Advanced function blocks include:
z LIFO/FIFO registers (%R)
z Drum controllers (%DR)
z Fast counters (%FC)
z Very fast counters (%VFC)
z Pulse width modulation output (%PWM)
z Pulse generator output (%PLS)
z Shift Bit Register (%SBR)
z Step counter (%SC)
z Message control block (%MSG)
Objects The table below contains an overview of the words and bits accessible by the
Accessible by program that are associated with the various advanced function blocks. Please note
the Program that write access in the table below depends on the "Adjustable" setting selected
during configuration. Setting this allows or denies access to the words or bits by
TwidoSuite or the operator interface.
Advanced Associated Words and Bits Address Write
Function Block Access
%R Word Register input %Ri.I Yes
Word Register output %Ri.O Yes
Bit Register output full %Ri.F No
Bit Register output empty %Ri.E No
%DR Word Current step number %DRi.S Yes
Bit Last step equals current step %DRi.F No
%FC Word Current Value %FCi.V Yes
Word Preset value %FCi.P Yes
Bit Done %FCi.D No
406 35011386 06/2006

Advanced Associated Words and Bits Address Write

Function Block Access
%VFC Word Current Value %VFCi.V No
Word Preset value %VFCi.P Yes
Bit Counting direction %VFCi.U No
Word Capture Value %VFCi.C No
Word Threshold 0 Value %VFCi.S0 Yes
Word Threshold Value1 %VFCi.S1 Yes
Bit Overflow %VFCi.F No
Bit Reflex Output 0 Enable %VFCi.R Yes
Bit Reflex Output 1 Enable %VFCi.S Yes
Bit Threshold Output 0 %VFCi.TH0 No
Bit Threshold Output 1 %VFCi.TH1 No
Bit Frequency Measure Time Base %VFCi.T Yes
%PWM Word Percentage of pulse at 1 in %PWMi.R Yes
relationship to the total period.
Word Preset period %PWMi.P Yes
%PLS Word Number of pulses %PLSi.N Yes
Word Preset value %PLSi.P Yes
Bit Current output enabled %PLSi.Q No
Bit Generation done %PLSi.D No
%SBR Bit Register Bit %SBRi.J No
%SC Bit Step counter Bit %SCi.j Yes
%MSG Bit Done %MSGi.D No
Bit Error %MSGi.E No
35011386 06/2006 407

Programming Principles for Advanced Function Blocks
At a Glance All Twido applications are stored in the form of List programs, even if written in the
Ladder Editor, and therefore, Twido controllers can be called List "machines." The
term "reversibility" refers to the ability of TwidoSuite to represent a List application
as Ladder and then back again. By default, all Ladder programs are reversible.
As with basic function blocks, advanced function blocks must also take into
consideration reversibility rules. The structure of reversible function blocks in List
language requires the use of the following instructions:
z BLK: Marks the block start and the input portion of the function block
z OUT_BLK: Marks the beginning of the output portion of the function block
z END_BLK: Marks the end of the function block
Note: The use of these reversible function block instructions is not mandatory for
a properly functioning List program. For some instructions it is possible to program
in List language without being reversible.
Dedicated Inputs The Fast Counter, Very Fast Counter, PLS, and PWM advanced functions use
and Outputs dedicated inputs and outputs, but these bits are not reserved for exclusive use by
any single block. Rather, the use of these dedicated resources must be managed.
When using these advanced functions, you must manage how the dedicated inputs
and outputs are allocated. TwidoSuite assists in configuring these resources by
displaying input/output configuration details and warning if a dedicated input or
output is already used by a configured function block.
The following tables summarizes the dependencies of dedicated inputs and outputs
and specific functions.
When used with counting functions:
Inputs Use
%I0.0.0 %VFC0: Up/Down management or Phase B
%I0.0.1 %VFC0: Pulse input or Phase A
%I0.0.2 %FC0: Pulse input or %VFC0 pre-set input
%I0.0.3 %FC1: Pulse input or %VFC0 capture input
%I0.0.4 %FC2: Pulse input or %VFC1 capture input
%I0.0.5 %VFC1 pre-set input
%I0.0.6 %VFC1: Up/Down management or Phase B
%I0.0.7 %VFC1: Pulse input or Phase A
408 35011386 06/2006

When used with counting or special functions:

Outputs Use
%Q0.0.0 %PLS0 or PWM0 output
%Q0.0.1 %PLS1 or PWM1 output
%Q0.0.2 Reflex outputs for %VFC0
%Q0.0.3
%Q0.0.4 Reflex outputs for %VFC1
%Q0.0.5
Using Dedicated TwidoSuite enforces the following rules for using dedicated inputs and outputs.
Inputs and z Each function block that uses dedicated I/O must be configured and then
Outputs referenced in the application. The dedicated I/O is only allocated when a function
block is configured and not when it is referenced in a program.
z After a function block is configured, its dedicated input and output cannot be used
by the application or by another function block.
For example, if you configure %PLS0, you can not use %Q0.0.0 in %DR0 (drum
controller) or in the application logic (that is, ST %Q0.0.0).
z If a dedicated input or output is needed by a function block that is already in use
by the application or another function block, this function block cannot be
configured.
For example, if you configure %FC0 as an up counter, you can not configure
%VFC0 to use %I0.0.2 as capture input.
Note: To change the use of dedicated I/O, unconfigure the function block by setting
the type of the object to "not used," and then remove references to the function
block in your application.
35011386 06/2006 409

LIFO/FIFO Register Function Block (%Ri)
Introduction A register is a memory block which can store up to 16 words of 16 bits each in two
different ways:
z Queue (First In, First Out) known as FIFO.
z Stack (Last In, First Out) know as LIFO.
Illustration The following is an illustration of the register function block.
%Ri
R E
I F
TYPE FIFO
Register function block
Parameters The Counter function block has the following parameters:

Register number %Ri 0 to 3.
Type FIFO or Queue or Stack.
LIFO
Input word %Ri.I Register input word. Can be read, tested, and written.
Output word %Ri.O Register output word. Can be read, tested and written.
Storage Input (or instruction) I (In) On a rising edge, stores the contents of word %Ri.I in the register.
Retrieval Input (or instruction) O (Out) On a rising edge, loads a data word of the register into word %Ri.O.
Reset input (or instruction) R (Reset) At state 1, initializes the register.
Empty Output E (Empty) The associated bit %Ri.E indicates that the register is empty. Can be
tested.
Full Output F (Full) The associated bit %Ri.F indicates that the register is full. Can be tested.
410 35011386 06/2006

LIFO Operation
Introduction In LIFO operation (Last In, First Out), the last data item entered is the first to be
retrieved.
Operation The following table describes LIFO operation.

Step Description Example
1 When a storage request is received (rising
Storage of the contents of %Ri.I
edge at input I or activation of instruction I), at the top of the stack.
the contents of input word %Ri.I (which has
already been loaded) are stored at the top 20
of the stack (Fig. a). When the stack is full
(output F=1), no further storage is possible. %Ri.I
(a) 20
80
50
2 When a retrieval request is received (rising

Retrieval of the data word high-
edge at input
est in the stack.
O or activation of instruction O), the highest
data word (last word to be entered) is
loaded into word %Ri.0 (Fig. b). When the
%Ri.O
register is empty (output E=1) no further 20 20
retrieval is possible. Output word %Ri.O 80 (b)
does not change and retains its value. 50
3 The stack can be reset at any time (state 1
at input R or activation of instruction R).
The element indicated by the pointer is 80
then the highest in the stack. 50
35011386 06/2006 411

FIFO,operation
Introduction In FIFO operation (First In, First Out), the first data item entered is the first to be
retrieved.
Operation The following table describes FIFO operation.

Step Description Example
1 When a storage request is received (rising
Storage of the contents of %Ri.I
edge at input I or activation of instruction at the top of the queue.
I), the contents of input word %Ri.I (which
has already been loaded) are stored at the 20
top of the queue (Fig. a). When the queue
is full (output F=1), no further storage is %Ri.I
possible. (a) 20
80
50
2 When a retrieval request is received

Retrieval of the first data item
(rising edge at input O or activation of
which is then loaded into %Ri.O.
instruction O), the data word lowest in the
queue is loaded into output word %Ri.O
(b)
and the contents of the register are moved 20
down one place in the queue (Fig. b).
80 %Ri.O
When the register is empty (output E=1)
50 50
no further retrieval is possible. Output
word %Ri.O does not change and retains
its value. 20
3 The queue can be reset at any time (state 80
1 at input R or activation of instruction R).
412 35011386 06/2006

Programming and Configuring Registers
Introduction The following programming example shows the content of a memory word
(%MW34) being loaded into a register (%R2.I) on reception of a storage request
(%I0.2), if register %R2 is not full (%R2.F = 0). The storage request in the register
is made by %M1. The retrieval request is made by input %I0.3, and %R2.O is loaded
into %MW20, if the register is not empty (%R2.E = 0).
35011386 06/2006 413

Programming The following illustration is a register function block with examples of reversible and
Example non-reversible programming.
R %R2 E
%M1
I F
%I0.3 TYPE FIFO

O
%I0.3 %R2.E %MW20:=%R2.O
%I0.2 %R2.F %R2.I:=%MW34
%M1
Ladder diagram
BLK %R2 LD %M1

LD %M1 I %R2
I LD %I0.3
LD %I0.3 O %R2
O ANDN %R2.E
END_BLK [%MW20:=%R2.O]
LD %I0.3 LD %I0.2
ANDN %R2.E ANDN %R2.F
[%MW20:=%R2.O] [%R2.I:=%MW34]
LD %I0.2 ST %M1
ANDN %R2.F
[%R2.I:=%MW34]
ST %M1
Reversible program Non-reversible program
414 35011386 06/2006

Configuration The only parameter that must be entered during configuration is the type of register:
z FIFO (default), or
z LIFO
Special Cases The following table contains a list of special cases for programming the Shift Bit
Register function block:
Effect of a cold restart (%S0=1) Initializes the contents of the register. The output
bit %Ri.E associated with the output E is set to 1.
Effect of a warm restart (%S1=1) of a Has no effect on the current value of the register,
controller stop nor on the state of its output bits.
35011386 06/2006 415

Pulse Width Modulation Function Block (%PWM)
Introduction The Pulse Width Modulation (%PWM) function block generates a square wave
signal on dedicated output channels %Q0.0.0 or %Q0.0.1, with variable width and,
consequently, duty cycle. Controllers with relay outputs for these two channels do
not support this function due to a frequency limitation.
There are two %PWM blocks available. %PWM0 uses dedicated output %Q0.0.0
and %PMW1 uses dedicated output %Q0.0.1. The %PLS function blocks contend
to use these same dedicated outputs so you must choose between the two
functions.
Illustration PWM block and timing diagram:
%PWM0
IN
programmable width
Tp
TB
%PWMi.P
configurable
fixed period
T
416 35011386 06/2006

Parameters The following table lists parameters for the PWM function block.
Parameter Label Description
Timebase TB 0.142 ms, 0.57 ms, 10 ms, 1 s (default value)
Preselection of %PWMi.P 0 < %PWMi.P <= 32767 with time base 10 ms or 1 s
the period 0 < %PWMi.P <= 255 with time base 0.57 ms or 0.142 s
0 = Function not in use
Duty cycle %PWMi.R This value gives the percentage of the signal in state 1 in a
period. The width Tp is thus equal to:
Tp = T * (%PWMi.R/100). The user application writes the
value for %PWMi.R. It is this word which controls the duty
cycle of the period. For T definition, see "range of periods"
below.
The default value is 0 and values greater than 100 are
considered to be equal to 100.
Pulse IN At state 1, the pulse width modulation signal is generated at
generation input the output channel. At state 0, the output channel is set to 0.
Range of Periods The preset value and the time base can be modified during configuration. They are
used to fix the signal period T=%PWMi.P * TB. The lower the ratios to be obtained,
the greater the selected %PWMi.P must be. The range of periods available:
z 0.142 ms to 36.5 ms in steps of 0.142 ms (27.4Hz to 7kHz)
z 0.57 ms to 146 ms in steps of 0.57 ms (6./84 Hz to 1.75 kHz)
z 10 ms to 5.45 mins in steps of 10 ms
z 1 sec to 9.1 hours in steps of 1 sec
Operation The frequency of the output signal is set during configuration by selecting the time
base TB and the preset %PWMi.P. Modifying the % PWMi.R duty cycle in the
program modulates the width of the signal. Below is an illustration of a pulse diagram
for the PWM function block with varying duty cycles.
Input IN
80%
50%
20%
Ratio
Dedicated Output
35011386 06/2006 417

Programming In this example, the signal width is modified by the program according to the state
and of controller inputs %I0.0.0 and %I0.0.1.
Configuration If %I0.0.1 and %I0.0.2 are set to 0, the %PWM0.R ratio is set at 20%, the duration
of the signal at state 1 is then: 20 % x 500 ms = 100 ms.
If %I0.0.0 is set to 0 and %I0.0.1 is set to 1, the %PWM0.R ratio is set at 50%
(duration 250 ms).
If %I0.0.0 and %I0.0.1 are set to 1, the %PWM0.R ratio is set at 80% (duration 400 ms).
Programming Example:
%I0.0 %I0.1 %PWM0.R:=20 LDN %I0.0
/ / ANDN %I0.1
[%PWM0.R:=20]
%I0.0 %I0.1 %PWM0.R:=50 LD %I0.0
ANDN %I0.1
/ [%PWM0.R:=50]
LD %I0.0
%I0.0 %I0.1 %PWM0.R:=80
AND %I0.1
[%PWM0.R:=80]
BLK %PWM0
%PWM0
LD %I0.2
%I0.2 IN
IN END_BLK
TB
%PWMi0.P
Special Cases The following table shows a list of special operating of the PWM function block.
Effect of a cold restart (%S0=1) Sets the %PWMi.R ratio to 0. In addition, the value for
%PWMi.P is reset to the configured value, and this will
supersede any changes made with the Animations
Table Editor or the optional Operator Display.
Effect of a warm restart (%S1=1) Has no effect.
Effect due to the fact that outputs Forcing output %Q0.0.0 or %Q0.0.1 using a
are dedicated to the %PWM block programming device does not stop the signal
generation.
418 35011386 06/2006

Pulse Generator Output Function Block (%PLS)
Introduction The %PLS function block is used to generate square wave signals. There are two
%PLS functions available on the dedicated output channels %Q0.0.0 or %Q0.0.1.
The %PLS function block allows only a single signal width, or duty cycle, of 50%.
You can choose to limit the number of pulses or the period when the pulse train is
executed. These can be determined at the time of configuration and/or updated by
the user application.
Note: Controllers with relay outputs for these two channels do not support %PLS function.
Representation An example of the pulse generator function block in single-word mode:
%PLS0 TON
IN Q
TB
SINGLE
ADJ Variable period
%PLSi.P T
R D
z TON=T/2 for the 0.142ms and 0.57ms time bases

= (%PLSi.P*TB)/2
z TON=[whole part(%PLSi.P)/2]*TB for the 10ms to 1s time bases.
35011386 06/2006 419

Specifications The table below contains the characteristics of the PLS function block:
Function Object Description
Timebase TB 0.142 ms, 0.57 ms, 10 ms, 1 sec
Preset period %PLSi.P Pulses on output %PLS1 are not stopped when %PLS1.N or %PLS1.ND* is
reached for time bases 0.142 ms and 0.57 ms.
z 1 < %PLSi.P <= 32767 for time base 10 ms or 1 s
z 0 < %PLSi.P <= 255 for time base 0.57 ms or 0.142 ms
z 0 = Function not in use.
To obtain a good level of precision from the duty cycle with time bases of 10ms
and 1s, you are recommended to have a %PLSi >= 100 if P is odd.
Number of pulses %PLSi.N The number of pulses to be generated in period T can be limited to the range 0 <=
%PLSi.ND %PLSi.N <= 32767 in standard mode or 0 <= %PLSi.ND <= 4294967295 in
* double word mode . The default value is set to 0.
To produce an unlimited number of pulses, set %PLSi.N or %PLSi.ND to zero. The
number of pulses can always be changed irrespective of the Adjustable setting.
Adjustable Y/N If set to Y, it is possible to modify the preset value %PLSi.P via the HMI or
Animation Tables Editor. Set to N means that there is no access to the preset.
Pulse generation IN At state 1, the pulse generation is produced at the dedicated output channel. At
input state 0, the output channel is set to 0.
Reset input R At state 1, outputs %PLSi.Q and %PLSi.D are set to 0.The number of pulses
generated in period T is set to 0.
Current pulse output %PLSi.Q At state 1, indicates that the pulse signal is generated at the dedicated output
generation channel configured.
Pulse generation %PLSi.D At state 1, signal generation is complete. The number of desired pulses has been
done output reached.
Note: (*) Means a double word variable.
420 35011386 06/2006

Range of Periods The preset value and the time base can be modified during configuration. They are
used to fix the signal period T=%PLSi.P * TB. The range of periods available:
z 0.142 ms to 36.5 ms in steps of 0.142 ms (27.4Hz to 7kHz)
z 0.57 ms to 146 ms in steps of 0.57 ms (6.84 Hz to 1.75 kHz)
z 20 ms to 5.45 mins in steps of 10 ms
z 2 sec to 9.1 hours in steps of 1 sec
Operation The following is an illustration of the %PLS function block.
Input IN
Number of pulses
Dedicated Output
%PLSi.Q
%PLSi.D
Special Cases
Effect of cold restart (%S0=1) Sets the %PLSi.P to that defined during configuration
Effect of warm restart Has no effect
(%S1=1)
Effect of modifying the preset Takes effect immediately
(%PLSi.P)
Effect due to the fact that Forcing output %Q0.0.0 or %Q0.0.1 using a programming
outputs are dedicated to the device does not stop the signal generation.
%PLS block
Note: %PLSx.D is set when the number of desired pulses has been reached. It is
reset by either setting the IN or the R inputs to 1.
35011386 06/2006 421

Drum Controller Function Block (%DR)
Introduction The drum controller operates on a principle similar to an electromechanical drum

controller which changes step according to external events. On each step, the high
point of a cam gives a command which is executed by the controller. In the case of
a drum controller, these high points are symbolized by state 1 for each step and are
assigned to output bits %Qi.j, internal bits %Mi or AS interface slave output bits
%QAx.y.z known as control bits.
Illustration The following is an illustration of the drum controller function block.
%DRi
R F
U
STEPS 8
Drum controller function block
422 35011386 06/2006

Parameters The drum controller function block has the following parameters:
Number %DRi 0 to 3 Compact Controller0 to 7 Modular Controllers
Current step number %DRi.S 0<%DRi.S<7. Word which can be read and written.
Written value must be a decimal immediate value.
When written, the effect takes place on the next
execution of the function block.
Number of steps 1 to 8 (default)
Input to return to step R (Reset) At state 1, sets the drum controller to step 0.
0(or instruction)
Advance input (or U (Upper) On a rising edge, causes the drum controller to
instruction) advance by one step and updates the control bits.
Output F (Full) Indicates that the current step equals the last step
defined. The associated bit %DRi.F can be tested (for
example, %DRi.F=1, if %DRi.S= number of steps
configured - 1).
Control bits Outputs or internal bits associated with the step (16
control bits) and defined in the Configuration Editor.
35011386 06/2006 423

Drum Controller Function Block %DRi Operation
Introduction The drum controller consists of:

z A matrix of constant data (the cams) organized in eight steps (0 to 7) and 16 data
bits (state of the step) arranged in columns numbered 0 to F.
z A list of control bits is associated with a configured output (%Qi.j.k), memory word
(%Mi) or AS interface slave output (%QAx.y.z). During the current step, the
control bits take on the binary states defined for this step.
The example in the following table summarizes the main characteristics of the drum
controller.
Column 0 1 2 D O F
Control bits %Q0.1 %Q0.3 %Q1.5 %Q0.6 %Q0.5 %Q1.0
0 steps 0 0 1 1 1 0
1 steps 1 0 1 1 0 0
5 steps 1 1 1 0 0 0
6 steps 0 1 1 0 1 0
7 steps 1 1 1 1 0 0
Operation In the above example, step 5 is the current step, control bits %Q0.1, %Q0.3, and
%Q1.5 are set to state 1; control bits %Q0.6, %Q0.5, and %Q1.0 are set to state 0.
The current step number is incremented on each rising edge at input U (or on
activation of instruction U). The current step can be modified by the program.
424 35011386 06/2006

Timing Diagram The following diagram illustrates the operation of the drum controller.
Input U:
Input R:
Step No. %DRi.S 0 1 2 3 L-1 0 1 2 0 1
Output %DRi.F
Special Cases The following table contains a list of special cases for drum controller operation.
Effects of a cold restart Resets the drum controller to step 0 (update of control bits).
(%S0=1)
Effect of a warm restart Updates the control bits after the current step.
(%S1=1)
Effect of a program jump The fact that the drum controller is no longer scanned means the
control bits are not reset.
Updating the control bits Only occurs when there is a change of step or in the case of a
warm or cold restart.
35011386 06/2006 425

Programming and Configuring Drum Controllers
Introduction The following is an example of programming and configuring a drum controller. The
first six outputs %Q0.0 to %Q0.5 are activated in succession each time input %I0.1
is set to 1. Input I0.0 resets the outputs to 0.
Programming The following illustration is a drum controller function block with examples of
Example reversible and non-reversible programming.
%I0.0 %Q0.8
%DR1
R F
%I0.1
U
STEPS 6
Ladder diagram
BLK %DR1
LD %I0.0
R
LD %I0.1
U
OUT_BLK
LD F
ST %Q0.8
END_BLK
426 35011386 06/2006

Configuration The following information is defined during configuration:

z Number of steps: 6
z The output states (control bits) for each drum controller step.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Step 1: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Step 2: 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Step 3: 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Step 4: 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Step 5: 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Step 6: 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
z Assignment of the control bits.
1: %Q0.0 4: %Q0.1
2: %Q0.2 5: %Q0.3
3: %Q0.4 6: %Q0.5
35011386 06/2006 427

Fast Counter Function Block (%FC)
Introduction The Fast Counter function block (%FC) serves as either an up-counter or a down-
counter. It can count the rising edge of discrete inputs up to frequencies of 5kHz in single
word or double word computational mode. Because the Fast Counters are managed by
specific hardware interrupts, maintaining maximum frequency sampling rates may vary
depending on your specific application and hardware configuration.
The TWDLCA•40DRF Compact controllers can accomodate up to four fast
counters, while all other series of Compact controllers can be configured to use a
maximum of three fast counters. Modular controllers can only use a maximum of
two. The Fast Counter function blocks %FC0, %FC1, %FC2, and %FC3 use
dedicated inputs %I0.0.2, %I0.0.3, %I0.0.4 and %I0.0.5 respectively. These bits are
not reserved for their exclusive use. Their allocation must be considered with the use
of other function blocks for these dedicated resources.
Illustration The following is an example of a Fast Counter function block in single-word mode.
%FC0
IN D
TYPE UP
SINGLE
ADJ
%FC0.P
428 35011386 06/2006

Parameters The following table lists parameters for the Fast Counter function block.
Parameter Label Description
Function TYPE Set at configuration, this can be set to either up-count or down-
count.
Preset value Initial value may be set:
%FCi.P ->between 1 and 65535 in standard mode,
%FCi.PD ->between 1 and 4294967295 in double word mode,
Adjustable Y/N If set to Y, it is possible to modify the preset value %FCi.P or
%FCi.PD and the current value %FCi.V or %FCi.VD with the
Operator Display or Animation Tables Editor. If set to N, there is
no access to the preset.
Current Value %FCi.V The current value increments or decrements according the up or
%FCi.VD down counting function selected. For up-counting, the current
counting value is updated and can reach 65535 in standard
mode (%FCi.V) and 4294967295 in double word mode
(%FCi.VD). For down-counting, the current value is the preset
value %FCi.P or %FCi.PD and can count down to zero.
Enter to IN At state 1, the current value is updated according to the pulses
enable applied to the physical input. At state 0, the current value is held
at its last value.
Reset %FCi.R Used to initialize the block. At state 1, the current value is reset
to 0 if configured as an up-counter, or set to %FCi.P or %FCi.PD
if configured as a down-counter. The done bit %FCi.D is set
back to its default value.
Done %FCi.D This bit is set to 1 when %FCi.V or %FCi.VD reaches the
%FCi.P or %FCi.PD configured as an up-counter, or when
%FCi.V or %FCi.VD reaches zero when configured as a down-
counter.
This read-only bit is reset only by the setting %FCi.R to 1.
Special Note If configured to be adjustable, then the application can change the preset value
%FCi.P or %FCi.PD and current value %FCi.V or %FCi.VD at any time. But, a new
value is taken into account only if the input reset is active or at the rising edge of
output %FCi.D. This allows for successive different counts without the loss of a
single pulse.
35011386 06/2006 429

Operation If configured to up-count, when a rising edge appears at the dedicated input, the
current value is incremented by one. When the preset value %FCi.P or %FCi.PD is
reached, the Done output bit %FCi.D is set to 1.
If configured to down-count, when a rising edge appears at the dedicated input, the
current value is decreased by one. When the value is zero, the Done output bit
%FCi.D is set to 1.
Configuration In this example, the application counts a number of items up to 5000 while %I1.1 is
and set to 1. The input for %FC0 is the dedicated input %I0.0.2. When the preset value
Programming is reached, %FC0.D is set to 1 and retains the same value until %FC0.R is
commanded by the result of "AND" on %I1.2 and %M0.
%I1.1 %Q0.0
IN %FC0 D BLK %FC0
LD %I1.1
IN
TYPE UP LD %I1.2
I1.2 %M0 SINGLE AND %M0
R ADJY
R
%FC0.P 5000
OUT_BLK
LD D
ST %Q0.0
END_BLK
Special Cases The following table contains a list of special operating cases for the %FC function
block:
Effect of cold restart (%S0=1) Resets all the %FC attributes with the values
configured by the user or user application.
Effect of warm restart (%S1=1) Has no effect.
Effect of Controller stop The %FC continues to count with the parameter
settings enabled at the time the controller was stopped.
430 35011386 06/2006

Very Fast Counter Function Block (%VFC)
Introduction The Very Fast Counter function block (%VFC) can be configured by TwidoSuite to
perform any one of the following functions:
z Up/down counter
z Up/down 2-phase counter
z Single Up Counter
z Single Down Counter
z Frequency Meter
The %VFC supports counting of discrete input up to frequencies of 20kHz in single

word or double word computational mode. The TWDLCA•40DRF Compact
controllers can accomodate up to two very fast counters, while all other series of
Compact controllers can configure one very fast counter (%VFC). Modular
controllers can configure up to two very fast counters (%VFC).
35011386 06/2006 431

Dedicated I/O The Very Fast Counter function blocks (%VFC) use dedicated inputs and auxiliary
Assignments inputs and outputs. These inputs and outputs are not reserved for their exclusive
use. Their allocation must be considered with the use of other function blocks for
these dedicated resources. The following array summarizes these assignments:
Main inputs Auxiliary inputs Reflex outputs
%VFC0 Selected Use IA input IB input IPres Ica Output 0 Output 1
Up/down counter %I0.0.1 %I0.0.0 %I0.0.2 (1) %I0.0.3 (1) %Q0.0.2 (1) %Q0.0.3 (1)
(UP=0/DO=1)
Up/Down 2-Phase %I0.0.1 %I0.0.0 %I0.0.2 (1) %I0.0.3 (1) %Q0.0.2 (1) %Q0.0.3 (1)
Counter (Pulse)
Single Up Counter %I0.0.1 (2) %I0.0.2 (1) %I0.0.3 (1) %Q0.0.2 (1) %Q0.0.3 (1)
Single Down Counter %I0.0.1 (2) %I0.0.2 (1) %I0.0.3 (1) %Q0.0.2 (1) %Q0.0.3 (1)
Frequency Meter %I0.0.1 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
%VFC1 Selected Use IA input Input IB) IPres Ica Output 0 Output 1
Up/down counter %I0.0.7 %I0.0.6 %I0.0.5 (1) %I0.0.4 (1) %Q0.0.4 (1) %Q0.0.5 (1)
(UP = 0/DO = 1)
Up/Down 2-Phase %I0.0.7 %I0.0.6 %I0.0.5 (1) %I0.0.4 (1) %Q0.0.4 (1) %Q0.0.5 (1)
Counter (Pulse)
Single Up Counter %I0.0.7 (2) %I0.0.5 (1) %I0.0.4 (1) %Q0.0.4 (1) %Q0.0.5 (1)
Single Down Counter %I0.0.7 (2) %I0.0.5 (1) %I0.0.4 (1) %Q0.0.4 (1) %Q0.0.5 (1)
Frequency Meter %I0.0.7 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
Comments:
(1) = optional Input IA = pulse input
(2) = not used Input IB = pulses or UP/DO
Ipres = preset input UP/DO = Up / Down counting
Ica= Catch input
When not used, the input or output remains a normal discrete I/O available to be managed by the
application in the main cycle.
If %I0.0.2 is used %FC0 is not available.

432 35011386 06/2006

Illustration Here is a block representation of the Very Fast Counter (%VFC) in single-word mode:
%VFC0
IN F
TYPE UP/DN
SINGLE U
T_OUT0
T_OUT1
ADJ
TH0
%VFC0.P
S TH1
35011386 06/2006 433

Specifications The following table lists characteristics for the very fast counter (%VFC) function
block.
Function Description Values %VFC Run-time
Use Access
Current Value Current value that is increased or decreased %VFCi.V: 0 -> CM Read
(%VFCi.V) according to the physical inputs and the function 65535
(%VFCi.VD*) selected. This value can be preset or reset using the %VFCi.VD: 0 ->
preset input (%VFCi.S). 4294967295
Preset value Only used by the up/down counting function and %VFCi.P: 0 -> CM or FM Read and
(%VFCi.P) single up or down counting. 65535 Write (1)
(%VFCi.PD*) %VFCi.PD: 0 ->
4294967295
Capture Value Only used by the up/down counting function and %VFCi.C: 0 -> CM Read
(%VFCi.C) single up or down counting. 65535
(%VFCi.CD*) %VFCi.CD: 0 ->
4294967295
Counting Set by the system, this bit is used by the up/down 0 (Down CM Read
direction counting function to indicate to you the direction of counting)
(%VFCi.U) counting: 1 (Up counting)
As a single phase up or down counter, %I0.0.0
decides the direction for %VFC0 and %I0.0.6 for
%VFC1.
For a two-phase up/down counter, it is the phase
difference between the two signals that determines
the direction.
For %VFC0, %I0.0 is dedicated to IB and %I0.1 to IA.
For %VFC1, %I0.6 is dedicated to IB and %I0.7 to IA.
Enable Reflex Validate Reflex Output 0 0 (Disable) CM Read and
Output 0 1 (Enable) Write (2)
(%VFCi.R)
Enable Reflex Validate Reflex Output 1 0 (Disable) CM Read and
Output 1 1 (Enable) Write (2)
(%VFCi.S)
Threshold This word contains the value of threshold 0. The %VFCi.S0: 0 -> CM Read and
Value S0 meaning is defined during configuration of the function 65535 Write (1)
(%VFCi.S0) block. Note: This value must be less than %VFCi.S1. %VFCi.S0D: 0 -
(%VFCi.S0D*) > 4294967295
Threshold This word contains the value of threshold 0. The %VFCi.S1: 0 -> CM Read and
Value S1 meaning is defined during configuration of the function 65535 Write (1)
(%VFCi.S1) block. Note: This value must be greater than %VFCi.S1D: 0 -
(%VFCi.S1D*) %VFCi.S0. > 4294967295
Frequency Configuration item for 100 or 1000 millisecond time 1000 or 100 FM Read and
Measure Time base. Write (1)
Base
(%VFCi.T)
434 35011386 06/2006

Function Description Values %VFC Run-time

Use Access
Adjustable Configurable item that when selected, allows the user N (No) CM or FM No
(Y/N) to modify the preset, threshold, and frequency Y (Yes)
measure time base values while running.
Enter to enable Used to validate or inhibit the current function. 0 (No) CM or FM Read and
(IN) Write (3)
Preset input Depending on the configuration, at state 1: 0 or 1 CM or FM Read and
(S) z Up/Down or Down Counting: initializes the current Write
value with the preset value.
z Single Up Counting: resets the current value to
zero.
In addition, this also initializes the operation of the
threshold outputs and takes into account any user
modifications to the threshold values set by the
Operator Display or user program.
Overflow 0 to 65535 or from 65535 to 0 in standard mode 0 or 1 CM Read
output 0 to 4294967295 or from 4294967295 to 0 in double
(F) word mode
Threshold Set to 1 when the current value is greater than or equal 0 or 1 CM Read
Bit 0 to the threshold value %VFCi.S0. It is advisable to test
(%VFCi.TH0) this bit only once in the program because it is updated
in real time. The user application is responsible for the
validity of the value at its time of use.
Threshold Set to 1 when the current value is greater than or equal 0 or 1 CM Read
Bit 1 to the threshold value %VFCi.S1. It is advisable to test
(%VFCi.TH1) this bit only once in the program because it is updated
in real time. The user application is responsible for the
validity of the value at its time of use.
(*)Means a 32-bit double word variable. The double word option is available on all
controllers with the exception of the Twido TWDLC•A10DRF controllers.
(1) Writable only if Adjust is set to one.
(2) Access available only if configured.
(3) Read and write access only through the application. Not the Operator Display or
Animation Tables Editor.
CM = Counting Mode
FM = Frequency Meter Mode
35011386 06/2006 435

Counting The very fast counting function (%VFC) works at a maximum frequency of 20 kHz,
Function with a range of 0 to 65535 in standard mode and 0 to 4294967295. The pulses to
Description be counted are applied in the following way:
Table:
Function Description %VFC0 %VFC1
IA IB IA IB
Up/Down Counter The pulses are applied to the physical input, the %I0.0.1 %I0.0.0 %I0.0.7 %I0.0.6
current operation (upcount/downcount) is given by
the state of the physical input IB.
Up/Down 2-Phase The two phases of the encoder are applied to %I0.0.1 %I0.0.0 %I0.0.7 %I0.0.6
Counter physical inputs IA and IB.
Single Up Counter The pulses are applied to the physical input IA. IB is %I0.0.1 ND %I0.0.7 ND
not used.
Single Down The pulses are applied to the physical input IA. IB is %I0.0.1 ND %I0.0.7 ND
Counter not used.
Notes on Upcount or downcount operations are made on the rising edge of pulses, and only
Function Blocks if the counting block is enabled.
There are two optional inputs used in counting mode: ICa and IPres. ICa is used to
capture the current value (%VFCi.V or %VFCi.VD) and stored it in %VFCi.C or
%VFCi.CD. The Ica inputs are specified as %I0.0.3 for %VFC0 and %I0.0.4 for
%VFC1 if available.
When IPres input is active, the current value is affected in the following ways:
z For up counting, %VFCi.V or %VFCi.VD is reset to 0
z For downcounting, %VFCi.V or %VFCi.VD is written with the content of %VFCi.P
or %VFCi.PD, respectively.
z For frequency counting, %VFCi.V or %VFCi.PD is set to 0
Warning: %VFCi.F is also set to 0. The IPres inputs are specified as %I0.0.2 for
%VFC0 and %I0.0.5 for %VFC1 if available.
Notes on For all functions, the current value is compared to two thresholds (%VFCi.S0 or
Function Block %VFCi.S0D and % VFCi.S1 or %VFCi.S1D). According to the result of this
Outputs comparison two bit objects (%VFCi.TH0 and %VFCi.TH1) are set to 1 if the current
value is greater or equal to the corresponding threshold, or reset to 0 in the opposite
case. Reflex outputs (if configured) are set to 1 in accordance with these
comparisons. Note: None, 1 or 2 outputs can be configured.
%VFC.U is an output of the FB, it gives the direction of the associated counter
variation (1 for UP, 0 for DOWN).
436 35011386 06/2006

Counting The following is a counting function diagram in standard mode (in double word
Function mode, you will use the double word function variables, accordingly):
Diagram
IA = Up counter input
(Single signal or phase 1)
&
IN %VFCi + %VFCi.U
%VFC Counter Direction of

counting
-
IB = (UP/DOWN flag or phase 2)
&
%VFCi.F
%VFCi.P Overflow
output
IPres = (Preset Input)
%VFCi.V
>1 Current Value Current
value
S %VFCi
%ICa = Catch input VFCi.C

Catch
value
>1
Read %VFCi.V
instruction
%VFCi.TH0
%VFCi.S0
Threshold
Value 0 %VFCi.TH1
Comparison
& %Q0.0.x
%VFCi.S1
Threshold Reflex
Value 1 output 0
& %Q0.0.y
%VFCi.R
Reflex
or
output 1
%VFCi.S
Enable
Note: Outputs are managed independently from the controller cycle time. The
response time is between 0 and 1ms.
35011386 06/2006 437

Single Up The following is an example of using %VFC in a single up counter mode. The
Counter following configuration elements have been set for this example:
Operation %VFC0.P preset value is 17, while the %VFC0.S0 lower threshold value is 14, and
the %VFC0.S1 upper threshold is 20.
Reflex Output value < %VFC.S0 %VFC0.S0 <= value < %VFC0.S1 value >= %VFC0.S1
%Q0.0.2 X
%Q0.0.3 X X
A timing chart follows:

%VFC0.P = 17
%VFC0.S0 = 14
%VFC0.S1 = 20
1 2 3 4
IN
S
65535
20
17
14
%VFC0.V 0
TH0
TH1
Reflex
output 0
Reflex
output 1
1 : %VFC0.U = 1 because %VFC is an up-counter
2 : change %VFC0.S1 to 17
3 : S input active makes threshold S1 new value to be granted in next count
4 : a catch of the current value is made, so %VFC0.C = 17
438 35011386 06/2006

Single Down The following is an example of using %VFC in a single down counter mode. The
%Q0.0.2 X X
%Q0.0.3 X
Example:
%VFC0.P = 17
%VFC0.S0 = 14
%VFC0.S1 = 20
1 2 3 4 5
IN
S
65535
20
17
14
%VFC0.V 0
TH0
TH1
Reflex
output 0
Reflex
output 1
1 : %VFC0.U = 0 because %VFC is a down-counter
2 : change %VFC0.P to 20
35011386 06/2006 439

Up-Down The following is an example of using %VFC in an up-down counter mode. The
%Q0.0.2 X
%Q0.0.3 X X
Example:
%VFC0.P = 17
%VFC0.S0 = 14
%VFC0.S1 = 20
1 2 3 4 5
IN
S
65535
20
17
14
%VFC0.V 0
TH0
TH1
Reflex
output 0
Reflex
output 1
1 : Input IN is set to 1 and input S set to 1
2 : change %VFC0.P to 20
440 35011386 06/2006

Frequency Meter The frequency meter function of a %VFC is used to measure the frequency of a
Function periodic signal in Hz on input IA. The frequency range which can be measured is
Description from 10 to 20kHz. The user can choose between 2 time bases, the choice being
made by a new object %VFC.T (Time base). A value of 100 = time base of 100 ms
and a value of 1000 = time base of 1 second.
Time Base Measurement range Accuracy Update
100 ms 100 Hz to 20 kHz 0.05 % for 20 kHz, 10 % for 100 Hz 10 times per second
1s 10 Hz to 20 kHz 0.005 % for 20 kHz, 10 % for 10 Hz Once per second
Frequency Meter The following is a frequency meter function diagram:

Function
Diagram
IA
Signal to be measured
+
&
%VFC Counter
IN %VFCi
%VFCi.F
Overflow
output
S %VFCi %VFCi.V
Set Current Value
current value Frequency
current measured
value to 0
%VFCi.T
Select
time 1000 ms 100 ms
base
35011386 06/2006 441

Frequency Meter The following is a timing diagram example of using %VFC in a frequency meter
Operation mode.
1 2 3 4
IN
Timebase
%VFC0.V f1 f2 0 f3 0 f3 f4 f5
1 : The first frequency measurement starts here.
2 : The current frequency value is updated.
3 : Input IN is 1 and input S is 1
4 : Change %VFC0.T to 100 ms: this change cancels the current measurement
and starts another one.
Special Cases The following table shows a list of special operating of the %VFC function block.
Effect of cold restart (%S0=1) Resets all the %VFC attributes with the values
configured by the user or user application.
Effect of warm restart (%S1=1) Has no effect
Effect of Controller stop The %VFC stops its function and the outputs stay in
their current state.
442 35011386 06/2006

Transmitting/Receiving Messages - the Exchange Instruction (EXCH)
Introduction A Twido controller can be configured to communicate with Modbus slave devices or
can send and/or receive messages in character mode (ASCII).
TwidoSuite provides the following functions for these communications:
z EXCH instruction to transmit/receive messages
z Exchange control function block (%MSG) to control the data exchanges
The Twido controller uses the protocol configured for the specified port when
processing an EXCH instruction. Each communication port can be assigned a
different protocol. The communication ports are accessed by appending the port
number to the EXCH or %MSG function (EXCH1, EXCH2, %MSG1, %MSG2).
In addition, TWDLCAE40DRF series controllers implement Modbus TCP messaging
over the Ethernet network by using the EXCH3 intruction and %MSG3 function.
EXCH The EXCH instruction allows a Twido controller to send and/or receive information
Instruction to/from ASCII devices. The user defines a table of words (%MWi:L) containing the
data to be sent and/or received (up to 250 data bytes in transmission and/or
reception). The format for the word table is described in the paragraphs about each
protocol. A message exchange is performed using the EXCH instruction.
Syntax The following is the format for the EXCH instruction:

[EXCHx %MWi:L]
Where: x = serial port number (1 or 2); x = Ethernet port (3); L = total number of
words of the word table (maximum 121). Values of the internal word table %MWi:L
are such as i+L <= 255.
before a second exchange instruction can be started. The %MSG function block
must be used when sending several messages.
Note: To find out more information about the Modbus TCP messaging instruction
EXCH3, please refer to .
35011386 06/2006 443

Exchange Control Function Block (%MSGx)
Introduction
Note: The "x" in %MSGx signifies the controller port: "x = 1 or 2"
z x = 1 or 2, signifies the serial port 1 or 2 of the controller, respectively;
z x = 3, signifies the Ethernet network port of the controller (on TWDLCAE40DRF
controllers only). For more information about the %MSG3 function, please refer
to .
The %MSGx function block manages data exchanges and has three functions:
z Communications error checking:
Error checking verifies that the block length (word table) programmed with the
EXCH instruction is large enough to contain the length of the message to be sent
(compare with length programmed in the least significant byte of the first word of
the word table).
z Coordination of multiple messages:
To ensure coordination when sending multiple messages, the %MSGx function
block provides the information required to determine when a previous message
is complete.
z Transmission of priority messages:
The %MSGx function block allows the current message transmission to be
stopped, in order to allow the immediate sending of an urgent message.
The programming of the %MSGx function block is optional.
Illustration The following is an example of the %MSGx function block.

%MSG1
R D
444 35011386 06/2006

Parameters The following table lists parameters for the %MSGx function block.
Reset input (or R At state 1, reinitializes communication: %MSGx.E = 0 and
instruction) %MSGx.D = 1.
Comm. done %MSGx.D State 1, comm. done, if:
output z End of transmission (if transmission)
z End of reception (end character received)
z Error
z Reset the block
State 0, request in progress.

Fault (Error) %MSGx.E State 1, comm. done, if:
output z Bad command
z Table incorrectly configured
z Incorrect character received (speed, parity, etc.)
z Reception table full (not updated)
State 0, message length OK, link OK.
If an error occurs when using an EXCH instruction, bits %MSGx.D and %MSGx.E
are set to 1, and system word %SW63 contains the error code for Port 1, and
%SW64 contains the error code for Port 2. See System Words (%SW), p. 571.
Reset Input (R) When Reset Input set to 1:

z Any messages that are being transmitted are stopped.
z The Fault (Error) output is reset to 0.
z The Done bit is set to 1.
A new message can now be sent.
Fault (Error) The error output is set to 1 either because of a communications programming error
Output or a message transmission error. The error output is set to 1 if the number of bytes
(%MSGx.E) defined in the data block associated with the EXCH instruction (word 1, least
significant byte) is greater than 128 (+80 in hexadecimal by FA).
The error output is also set to 1if a problem exists in sending a Modbus message to
a Modbus device. In this case, the user should check wiring, and that the destination
device supports Modbus communication.
Communications When the Done output is set to 1, the Twido controller is ready to send another
Done output message. Use of the %MSGx.D bit is recommended when multiple messages are
(%MSGx.D) sent. If it is not used, messages may be lost.
35011386 06/2006 445

Transmission of Execution of the EXCH instruction activates a message block in the application
Several program. The message is transmitted if the message block is not already active
Successive (%MSGx.D = 1). If several messages are sent in the same cycle, only the first
Messages message is transmitted. The user is responsible for managing the transmission of
several messages using the program.
Example of a transmission of two messages in succession on port 2:
%I0.0 %MSG2.D EXCH2%MW2:4
P LDR %I0.0
AND %MSG2.D
%M0 [EXCH2 %MW2:4]
S S %M0
%MSG.D %M0 EXCH2%MW8:3 LD %MSG2.D
AND %M0
[EXCH2 %MW8:3]
%M0 R %M0
R
Reinitializing An exchange is cancelled by activating the input (or instruction) R. This input
Exchanges initializes communication and resets output %MSGx.E to 0 and output %MSGx.D to
1. It is possible to reinitialize an exchange if a fault is detected.
Example of reinitializing an exchange:
%MSG1
%M0
BLK %MSG1
LD %M0
R D R
END_BLK
E
Special Cases The following table the special operating cases for the %MSGx function block.
Special Case Description
Effect of a cold restart (%S0=1) Forces a reinitialization of the communication.
Effect of a warm restart (%S1=1) Has no effect.
Effect of a controller stop If a message transmission is in progress, the controller
stops its transfer and reinitializes the outputs %MSGx.D
and %MSGx.E.
446 35011386 06/2006

16.2 Clock Functions
At a Glance
Aim of this This section describes the time management functions for Twido controllers.
Section

Section?
Topic Page
Clock Functions 448
Schedule Blocks 449
Time/Date Stamping 452
Setting the Date and Time 454
35011386 06/2006 447

Clock Functions
Introduction Twido controllers have a time-of-day clock function, which requires the Real-Time
Clock option (RTC) and provides the following:
z Schedule blocks are used to control actions at predefined or calculated times.
z Time/date stamping is used to assign time and dates to events and measure
event duration.
The Twido time-of-day clock can be accessed by selecting Schedule Blocks from
from the TwidoSuite Program → Configure → Configure Data task. Additionally,
the time-of-day clock can be set by a program. Clock settings continue to operate
for up to 30 days when the controller is switched off, if the battery has been charged
for at least six consecutive hours before the controller is switched off.
The time-of-day clock has a 24-hour format and takes leap years into account.
RTC Correction The RTC Correction value is necessary for the correct operation of the RTC. Each
Value RTC unit has its own correction value written on the unit. This value is configurable
in TwidoSuite by using the Configure RTC option from the TwidoSuite Monitoring
Utility accessible via the TwidoSuite Application LAuncher.
448 35011386 06/2006

Schedule Blocks
Introduction Schedule Blocks are used to control actions at a predefined month, day, and time. A
maximum of 16 schedule blocks can be used and do not require any program entry.
Note: Check system bit %S51 and system word %SW118 to confirm that the Real-
Time Clock (RTC) option is installed see System Bits (%S), p. 564. The RTC option
is required for using schedule blocks.
Parameters The following table lists parameters for a schedule block:

Parameter Format Function/Range
Schedule block n n = 0 to 15
number
Configured Check box Check this box to configure the selected schedule block
number.
Output bit %Qx.y.z Output assignment is activated by schedule block: %Mi or
%Qj.k.
This output is set to 1 when the current date and time are
between the setting of the start of the active period and the
setting of the end of the active period.
Start month January to The month to start the schedule block.
December
End month January to The month to end the schedule block.
December
Start date 1 - 31 The day in the month to start the schedule block.
End date 1 - 31 The day in the month to end the schedule block.
Start time hh:mm The time-of-day, hours (0 to 23) and minutes (0 to 59), to start
the schedule block.
Stop time hh:mm The time-of-day, hours (0 to 23) and minutes (0 to 59), to end
the schedule block.
Day of week Monday - Check boxes that identify the day of the week for activation of
Sunday the schedule block.
35011386 06/2006 449

Enabling The bits of system word %SW114 enable (bit set to 1) or disable (bit set to 0) the
Schedule Blocks operation of each of the 16 schedule blocks.
Assignment of schedule blocks in %SW114:
%SW114
Schedule Schedule
block #15 block #0
By default (or after a cold restart) all bits of this system word are set to 1. Use of
these bits by the program is optional.
Output of If the same output (%Mi or %Qj.k) is assigned by several blocks, it is the OR of the
Schedule Blocks results of each of the blocks which is finally assigned to this object (it is possible to
have several "operating ranges" for the same output).
450 35011386 06/2006

Example The following table shows the parameters for a summer month spray program
example:
Parameter Value Description
Schedule block 6 Schedule block number 6
Output bit %Q0.2 Activate output %Q0.2
Start month June Start activity in June
End month September Stop activity in September
Start date 21 Start activity on the 21st day of June
End date 21 Stop activity on the 21st day of September
Day of week Monday, Wednesday, Run activity on Monday, Wednesday and
Friday Friday
Start time 21:00 Start activity at 21:00
Stop time 22:00 Stop activity at 22:00
Using the following program, the schedule block can be disabled through a switch
or a humidity detector wired to input %I0.1.
%I0.1 %SW114:X6 LD %I0.1

ST %SW114:X6
The following timing diagram shows the activation of output %Q0.2.
%I0.1
21 June
%Q0.2
M W F M W F M W F
Time Dating by Date and time are both available in system words %SW50 to %SW53 (see System
Program Words (%SW), p. 571). It is therefore possible to perform time and date stamping in
the controller program by making arithmetic comparisons between the current date
and time and the immediate values or words %MWi (or %KWi), which can contain
setpoints.
35011386 06/2006 451

Time/Date Stamping
Introduction System words %SW49 to %SW53 contain the current date and time in BCD format
(see Review of BCD Code, p. 393, which is useful for display on or transmission to
a peripheral device. These system words can be used to store the time and date of
an event (see System Words (%SW), p. 571.
Note: Date and time can also be set by using the optional Operator Display (see
Time of Day Clock, p. 285).
Dating an Event To date an event it is sufficient to use assignment operations, to transfer the
contents of system words to internal words, and then process these internal words
(for example, transmission to display unit by EXCH instruction).
Programming The following example shows how to date a rising edge on input %I0.1.
Example
%I0.0 %MW11:5 := %SW49.5
LDR %I0.0
P
[%MW11:5 := %SW49:5]
Once an event is detected, the word table contains:

Encoding Most significant byte Least significant byte
%MW11 Day of the week1
%MW12 00 Second
%MW13 Hour Minute
%MW14 Month Day
%MW15 Century Year
Note: (1) 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday, 4 = Thursday, 5 = Friday, 6

= Saturday, 7 = Sunday.
452 35011386 06/2006

Example of Word Example data for 13:40:30 on Monday, 19 April, 2002:

Table
Word Value (hex) Meaning
%MW11 0001 Monday
%MW12 0030 30 seconds
%MW13 1340 13 hours, 40 minutes
%MW14 0419 04 = April, 19th
%MW15 2002 2002
Date and time of System words %SW54 to %SW57 contain the date and time of the last stop, and
the last stop word %SW58 contains the code showing the cause of the last stop, in BCD format
(see System Words (%SW), p. 571).
35011386 06/2006 453

Setting the Date and Time
Introduction You can update the date and time settings by using one of the following methods:
z TwidoSuite
Use the Set Time dialog box. This dialog box is available from the TwidoSuite
Monitoring Utility accessible via the TwidoSuite Application Launcher.
z System Words
Use system words %SW49 to %SW53 or system word %SW59.
The date and time settings can only be updated when the RTC option cartridge
(TWDXCPRTC) is installed on the controller. Note that the TWDLCA•40DRF series
of compact controllers have RTC onboard.
Using %SW49 to To use system words %SW49 to %SW53 to set the date and time, bit %S50 must
%SW53 be set to 1. This results in the following:
z Cancels the update of words %SW49 to %SW53 via the internal clock.
z Transmits the values written in words %SW49 to %SW53 to the internal clock.
Programming Example:
%S50 %S50
LD %S50
R
R %S50
%I0.1 %SW49 := %MW10
P LDR %I0.1
[%SW49 := %MW10]
%SW50 := %MW11 [%SW50 := %MW11]
[%SW51 := %MW12]
[%SW52 := %MW13]
%SW51 := %MW12 [%SW53 := %MW14]
S %S50
%SW52 := %MW13
%SW53 := %MW14
%S50
S
454 35011386 06/2006

Words %MW10 to %MW14 will contain the new date and time in BCD format (see Review of
BCD Code, p. 393) and will correspond to the coding of words %SW49 to %SW53.
The word table must contain the new date and time:
Encoding Most significant byte Least significant byte
%MW10 Day of the week1
%MW11 Second
%MW12 Hour Minute
%MW13 Month Day
%MW14 Century Year
Note: (1) 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday, 4 = Thursday, 5 = Friday, 6

= Saturday, 7 = Sunday.
Example data for Monday, 19 April, 2002:

Word Value (hex) Meaning
%MW10 0001 Monday
%MW11 0030 30 seconds
%MW12 1340 13 hours, 40 minutes
%MW13 0419 04 = April, 19th
%MW14 2002 2002
Using %SW59 Another method of updating the date and time is to use system bit %S59 and date
adjustment system word %SW59.
Setting bit %S59 to 1 enables adjustment of the current date and time by word
%SW59 (see System Words (%SW), p. 571). %SW59 increments or decrements
each of the date and time components on a rising edge.
35011386 06/2006 455

Application The following front panel is created to modify the hour, minutes, and seconds of the
Example internal clock.
Hour Minute Second

Hours
13 40 30
Minutes
+ - Seconds
Description of the Commands:

z The Hours/Minutes/Seconds switch selects the time display to change using
inputs %I0.2, %I0.3, and %I0.4 respectively.
z Push button "+" increments the selected time display using input %I0.0.
z Push button "-" decrements the selected time display using input %I0.1.
The following program reads the inputs from the panel and sets the internal clock.
%M0 %S59 LD %M0

ST %S59
LD %I0.2 (Hour)
%I0.2 %I0.0 %SW59:X3 ANDR %I0.0
ST %SW59:X3
P
LD %I0.2
ANDR %I0.1
%I0.2 %I0.1 %SW59:X11 ST %SW59:X11
P LD %I0.3 (Minute)
ANDR %I0.0
%I0.3 %I0.0 %SW59:X2 ST %SW59:X2
P
LD %I0.3
ANDR %I0.1
ST %SW59:X10
%I0.3 %I0.1 %SW59:X10
LD %I0.4 (Second)
P ANDR %I0.0
ST %SW59:X1
%I0.4 %I0.0 %SW59:X1 LD %I0.4
P ANDR %I0.1
ST %SW59:X9
%I0.4 %I0.1 %SW59:X9
P
456 35011386 06/2006

16.3 Twido PID Quick Start Guide
At a Glance
Overview This section contains information for getting started with the PID control and Auto-
Tuning functions available on Twido controllers.

Section?
Topic Page
Purpose of Document 458
Step 1 - Configuration of Analog Channels Used for Control 460
Step 2 - Prerequisites for PID Configuration 462
Step3 – Configuring the PID 464
Step 4 - Initialization of Control Set-Up 469
Step 5 - Control Set-Up AT + PID 473
Step 6 - Debugging Adjustments 476
35011386 06/2006 457

Purpose of Document
Introduction This quick start guide aims to guide you, by providing examples, through all the steps
required to correctly configure and set up your Twido controller's PID control functions.
Note: Implementing the PID function on a Twido does not require any specific
knowledge but does demand a certain degree of rigor to ensure that you retain
optimum results in the shortest possible time.
This document This document explains the following steps:

contains:
Step Description
1 Configuration of analog channels used for control
2 Prerequisites for PID configuration
3 PID configuration
4 Initialization of control setup.
5 AT + PID control setup
6 Debugging and adjustments
458 35011386 06/2006

Concerning the For this example, we have chosen a Type K ThermoCouple (0-200°).
example used in We will use transistor control with the output therefore being a base controller output
this guide controlled directly by the PID controller using PWM (see Step3 – Configuring the
PID, p. 464
The diagram below shows the experimental setup used in the example:
TWDLMDA20DRT TWDALM3LT
1/L1 2/T1
4/A2- +3/A1
%Q0.1
Com(+)
-V
+24V
0V
Resistor
IN0+ Green To 0-200°

IN0- White ThermoCouple
+24V 0V
230 VAC
35011386 06/2006 459

Step 1 - Configuration of Analog Channels Used for Control
Introduction In general, a PID controller uses an analog feedback signal (known as the "process value")
to measure the value to be adjusted.
This value can be a level, a temperature, a distance, or another value for other applications.
Example of an Let us take the example of a temperature measurement.

Analog The sensor used sends an analog measurement which depends on the measured value
Measurement back to the controller. For temperature and with sensors like PT100s or Thermocouples,
Signal the measured signal increases with an increase in current temperature.
How to Add an In offline mode, once you have selected the base controller, add the analog card as a
Analog Card base extension. The numbering of the channels will depend on its configuration slot.
(Expansion
Module)
How to Configure The following table describes the procedure for configuring the analog channels of
Analog Input the expansion module:
Channels
Step Action
1 Select Describe step from the TwidoSuite interface.
See .
2 Display the product catalog and select a module to add to the system description.
For example, TWDALM3LT for measuring temperature using a PT100 or Thermocouple.
3 Add the module to the system description (see (See Positioning a Module, TwidoSuite
Programming Software, Online Help).)
4 Use the Configuration Editor to set parameters of analog I/O modules that you added
as expansion modules when you described the system.
5 In the Type column, select the input type corresponding to the type of sensor used
(ThermoCouple K, if the sensor is of this type).
6 In the Range column, select the measurement unit for the sensor. For temperature
sensors it is easier to select Celsius, as this makes the number of counts sent back
by the analog card a direct factor of the real measurement.
7 Provide an address for the input symbol of the configured analog card. It will be used
to complete the PID fields (%IW1.0, for this example).
8 Do the same for an analog output if an output must be used to drive the control system.
460 35011386 06/2006

Example of Several types of configuration are possible depending on the type of measurement
Analog Channel used, as indicated below:
Configuration z For the application in the example used in this document, we have chosen a Type
K ThermoCouple (0-200°). The process value read will be directly
comprehensible (2000 counts = 200° as the unit factor is 0.1).
z For other types of measurement, you choose 0-10V or 4-20 mA in the Type
column, or Custom in the Range column. Then adjust the value scale (enter 0 in
the Minimum column and 10000 in the Maximum column) to be able to read the
process value directly (10 V = 10000 counts).
The example below shows a configuration for a ThermoCouple K analog channel:
Description of the module Reference num TWDALM3LT Address 2

Description Expansion module with 2 analog inputs (RTD
- Th) and 1 output (0 - 10V, 4 - 20mA),
12 bits, removable screw terminal. K, J
Apply Cancel
I/O Table
Used Address Symbol Type Scope Minimum Maximum Units

%IW2.0 Not in used Normal 0 1095 None
%IW2.1 Not in used Normal 0 4095 None
%QW2.0 Not in used Normal 0 4095 None
35011386 06/2006 461

Step 2 - Prerequisites for PID Configuration
Introduction Before configuring the PID, ensure that the following phases have been performed:
Phase Description
1 PID enabled in the program.
2 Scan period configured
Enabling PID in The PID controller must be enabled in the program by an instruction. This instruction
the Program can be permanent or be a condition of an input or internal bit. In the following
example, the PID is enabled by the instruction %M0:
z In Ladder:

1 LD SECTION TITLE Enter your comments here. Enter your comments here.
Rung 1
PID 0
%M0
z In Instruction List:
----
0 LD %M0
1 [ PID 0 ]
Note: Ensure that you use correct syntax:

Check that there is a space between "PID" and the PID number (e.g.
PID<space>0).
462 35011386 06/2006

Configuration of When using PID controllers, you are strongly advised to configure the scan mode of
Scan Period the PLC cycle to periodic. The table below describes the procedure for configuring
the scan mode.
Step Action
1 Use the Program → Configure → Configure the Behavior task to configure the
controller Scan Mode settings.
2 Check the Periodic box.
3 Set the cycle time as shown in the screen below:
Configure the Behavior

Niveaux fonction- Automatic
Automatique Automatic management
Manual The Highest possible
The Lowest possible
Manual management
Level 1.0
Level 2.0
Level 2.5
Level 3.5
Scan Mode Normal

Periodic Period (2-150ms): 100 ms
Watchdog
Period (10-500 ms): 250 ms
Periodic Event
Non utilisé
Not used
Period (5-250 ms): 10 ms
Subprogram number 0
Startup Automatic start in Run
Run / Stop Input: None
Autosave Automatic RAM=>EEPROM
Apply Restore
Note: The cycle time should be adjusted to the size of the program and desired
performance. (A time of 50ms is a good compromise).
35011386 06/2006 463

Step3 – Configuring the PID
Introduction For this example, we have chosen to implement the majority of the PID controller
functions for Twido. Some selections are not essential and can be simplified.
Auto-Tuning The PID controller has an Auto-Tuning function that simplifies the regulation loop
(AT) setting (this function is referred to as AT in the rest of the document).
Operating Modes The Twido PLC PID controller offers four distinct operating modes, configurable in
the General tab in the PID dialog box:
z PID = Simple PID controller.
z AT + PID = The Auto-Tuning function is active when the PID starts up and
automatically enters the gain values Kp, Ti, Td (PID tab) and the type of PID action
(Output tab). At the end of the Auto-Tuning, sequence, the controller switches to
PID mode for the adjusted setpoint, and using the parameters set by AT.
z AT = The Auto-Tuning function is active when the PID starts up and automatically
enters the gain values Kp, Ti, Td (PID tab) and the type of PID action (Output
tab). At the end of the sequence the PID stops and waits. The gain values Kp, Ti,
Td (PID tab) and the type of PID action (Output tab) are entered.
z Word address = The selection of PID operating mode can be controlled by the
program by assigning the desired value to the word address associated to this
selection:
z %MWxx=1: The controller operates in simple PID mode.
z %MWxx=2: The controller operates in AT + PID.
z %MWxx=3: The controller operates in AT mode only.
This type of configuration via the word address enables the user to manage the
PID controller operating mode via the application program, thus making it
possible to adapt to the final requirements.
Launching the The table below shows the PID dialog box and the procedure for accessing the
PID Dialog Box different PID settings configuration tabs:
Step Action
1 Select the Program → Configure → Configure the Data task on the TwidoSuite
interface.
Result: The default software configuration window appears.
2 Select Advanced Objects from the Object Category (See Object Category Frame,
TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help) frame and choose PID) from the
Objects Type (See Object Type Frame, TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online
Help) frame.
3 Select the desired PID# from the PID table.
464 35011386 06/2006

Step Action
4 The PID dialog box appears in the foreground and is used to enter the different
controller settings as shown in the figure below. In offline mode, this displays several
tabs: General, Input, PID, AT, Output:
Général Input PID AT Output Animation
Apply Cancel
Operating mode: PID
PID States
Word address:
PID Output
Setpoint PID controller D/I
Input
Mes
AT
PV AT
Limit
Important: The tabs must be entered in the order in which they appear in the PID
dialog box: first General, Input, PID, AT then Output.
Note: In online mode, this screen displays two more tabs, Animation and Trace,
used respectively for the diagnostics and display of the controller operation.
Dynamic For the dynamic modification of the PID parameters (in operation and in online
Modification of mode), it is advised to enter the memory addresses in the associated fields, thus
Parameters avoiding switching to offline mode to make on-the-fly changes to values.
35011386 06/2006 465

General Tab The following table shows how to set the General tab in the PID dialog box:
Setting Step Action
1 In the General tab, check theConfigured box to activate the PID and set the following tabs.
2 In the Operating mode drop-down list, select the type of operation desired (See
Operating Modes, p. 464).
In the example: We will select the Memory address mode and enter the word
%MW17 in the associated field. The PID operating mode will then be linked to the
value in %MW17.
Input Tab Setting The following table shows how to set the Input tab in the PID dialog box:
Step Action
1 In the Input tab, enter the analog channel used as a measurement in the associated field.
In the example: We have chosen %IW1.0 as this is used as a temperature measurement.
2 Where necessary, set alarms on the low and high measurement thresholds by checking
the boxes and filling in the associated fields.
Note: The values entered may be fixed values (entered in the associated fields) or
modifiable values (by filling in the fields associated with the memory addresses: %MWxx).
PID Tab Setting The following table shows how to set the PID tab in the PID dialog box:
Step Action
1 In the PID tab, enter the value to be used to set the controller setpoint. In general, this
value is a memory address or setpoint of an analog input.
In the example: We have entered %MW0, which will be used as a setpoint word.
2 Set the Kp, Ti, Td parameters.
Important: If the AT or AT+PID mode is selected, it is essential that the Kp, Ti and
Td fields be completed with memory addresses, to enable the Auto-Tuning function
to automatically fill in the values found.
In the example: We have entered %MW10 for Kp, %MW11 for Ti and %MW12 for Td.
Note: In principle, it is rather difficult to determine the optimal adjustment values of Kp, Ti and
Td for an application that has not yet been created. Consequently, we strongly recommend you
enter the memory words addresses in these fields, in order to enter these values in online mode
thus avoiding switching to offline mode to make on-the-fly changes to values.
3 Enter the PID Sampling period. This value is used by the controller to acquire measurements
and update outputs.
In the example: We have set the PID sampling period to 100, or 1s. Given that the adjusted
system has a time constant of several minutes, this sampling period value seems correct.
Important: We advise you set the sampling period to a multiple of the controller scan
period, and a value consistent with the adjusted system.
466 35011386 06/2006

Tab Setting for The following table shows how to set the AT tab in the PID dialog box:
AT
Step Action
1 In the AT tab, check the Authorize box if you want to use AT.
2 Enter the Measurement limit value. This is the limit value that the measurement
must not exceed during AT.
3 Enter the Output setpoint value which is the controller output value sent to
generate AT.
Special For further details about setting these values refer to the AT tab of PID function,
Note p. 498 section.
Advice We strongly recommend you enter the memory words addresses in these fields,
in order to enter these values in online mode thus avoiding switching to offline
mode to make on-the-fly changes to values.
Output Tab The following table shows how to set the Output tab in the PID dialog box:
Setting
WARNING
RISK OF SYSTEM OVERLOAD
You are reminded that manual mode has a direct effect on the controller output.
Consequently, sending a manual setpoint (Output field) acts directly on the open
controlled system. You should therefore proceed with care in this operating mode.
equipment damage.
35011386 06/2006 467

Step Action
1 In the Output tab, enter the selection from the Action drop-down list.
This selection depends on the configured system:
z Direct action: the controller output decreases as the variation value (setpoint -
measurement) increases (cold controller).
z Inverse action: Direct action: the controller output decreases as the variation value
(setpoint - measurement) increases (hot controller).
Important: When using the AT function, this list automatically selects Bit address.
The operating mode is determined by the AT function, and in this case entered in the
bit associated with this field.
2 Where necessary, enter the threshold values of the controller output in the Alarms
field. This function may be necessary in certain applications for managing process
alarms where thresholds are exceeded.
3 Set the Manual mode operating mode.
The drop-down list offers several choices:
z Inhibit = no manual mode.
z Authorize = the controller operates in manual mode only.
z Bit address = the value of the bit is used to change the operation of manual mode
(bit set to 0 = automatic mode, bit set to 1 = manual mode).
In the example: Here we select %M2 to activate the choice, and %MW18 to adjust
the value of the manual setpoint.
4 Adjust the Discrete output word. This word is used by the controller to send the
control setpoint. It can be sent directly to an analog output channel (%QW..) or to a
memory word (%MWxx) for additional processing.
Important: When using the PWM function, enter a memory address (%MWxx) in this
field.
5 Set the PWM output if required by the system:
1. Check the Authorize box if you intend to control the system via a PWM actuator.
2. Enter the PWM control Period in the associated field.
3. Enter the Output used to control the PWM actuator. We recommend you use the
base controller transistor outputs for this function (for example, %Q0.0 or %Q0.1
for the TWDLMDA20DRT base controller).
6 Confirm the controller configuration by clicking OK in the bottom left of the screen.
7 To configure several PID controllers, clickNext to increment the number of the PID to
be set.
468 35011386 06/2006

Step 4 - Initialization of Control Set-Up
Prerequisites for Before set-up, you must follow the steps below:
Set-Up
Step Action
1 Connect the PC to the controller and transfer the application.
2 Switch the controller to RUN mode.
Note: Before switching the controller to RUN mode, check that the machine’s
operating conditions allow this for the rest of the application.
Procedure The steps below must be followed to initialize control set-up:

Step Action
1 Create an animation table containing the main objects needed for diagnostics.
In the example:
z %MW0: loop controller setpoint,
z %IW1.0: measurement,
z %M0: enabling of loop controller,
z %M1: loop controller action type (set by the AT function),
z %M2: selection of Automatic or Manual mode,
z %MW10 to %MW12: PID loop controller coefficients,
z %MW13: measurement limit not to be exceeded in AT mode,
z %MW14: loop controller output setpoint in AT mode,
z %MW15: discrete output of the PID loop controller (entered by the controller),
z %MW16: setting of the PWM period,
z %MW17: operating mode selection for the PID controller,
z %MW18: manual setpoint associated with the %M2 bit selection.
35011386 06/2006 469

Step Action
2 Check the consistency of the value measured in the %IW1.0 field.
In the example:
1. A measurement of 248 counts is obtained when the system stable and cold.
2. This seems consistent, as we have a multiplication coefficient of 10 between the temperature and the value
read. We can also influence the measurement externally to make sure the reading is consistent (increase
the temperature around the probe to check the measurement also increases).
Note: This test is quite important, as the operation of the controller depends essentially on the accuracy of
the measurement.
3. If you have any doubt about the accuracy of the measurement, set the controller to STOP mode and check
the wiring to the inputs of the analog card (voltmeter or ammeter for inputs 0-10V / 4-20mA, ohmmeter for
the PT100 (100 ohms at 20°) or Thermocouple (a few tens of ohms):
z First disconnect the probe from the analog card terminals.
z Check there is no wiring reversal (the colors of the wires connected to the inputs, compensation cable
for the PT100).
Warning: IN0 and IN1 input channels have a shared potential at the terminals (-).
z Check that the analog card is powered by a 24 VDC supply to the first two terminals.
z Check that the 4-20 mA input sensors are supplied. The Twido analog input cards are not a source of current.
3 To power up the loop controller, start by controlling the PID controller in Manual mode in order to increase the
limit values needed by the AT function.
To set the controller to Manual mode:
1. Switch the controller to RUN mode.
2. Enter the memory addresses with the following values in the animation table:
z %M2: Manual mode selection = 1,
(M2=1 => Manual Mode, M2=0 => Automatic Mode),
z %MW16: PWM period setting = 10,
z %MW17: Operating mode selection for the PID controller = 1 (PID only),
z %MW18: Manual setpoint associated with the %M2 bit selection = 1000.
This setpoint value can be selected several times, on condition that the system be left to return to its
initial state.
In the example: We have selected the value 1000, which corresponds to an average temperature
increase value (for information, 2000 counts = 200°). When cold, the system starts at a value of 250
counts.
4 Check that the controller is RUN mode.
(%M0: controller validation = 1, to be entered in the animation table.)
5 Select Advanced Objects from the Object Category (See Object Category Frame, TwidoSuite Programming
Software, Online Help) frame and choose PID) from the Objects Type (See Object Type Frame, TwidoSuite
Programming Software, Online Help) frame.
Select the desired PID# from the PID table.
470 35011386 06/2006

Step Action
6 Activate the Animation tab for the required PID number and check that the animation matches the screen
below:
Apply Cancel
Operating mode List of PID states
PID 8/29/2005 11:35 AM PID Stop
PID Output Period

Ts
20
Setpoint PID controller

Rev
Kp Ti Td
0 0 0 0 0 0
Output
Input
Mes
Note: The screens of the PID controller are only refreshed if the controller is enabled (and API set to RUN).
7 Activate the Trace tab for the required PID number, then:
1. Set the time elapse drop-down list to 15 min to see a trace of the measurement signal’s progress.
2. Check that the measurement value remains within the acceptable values for the system. The increase in
the measurement can be checked in the Trace tab. When this has stabilized, read the value corresponding
to the stabilization of the measurement graph (for example, 350 counts corresponding to 35°, or an
increase of 10° compared with the initial state).
8 Set the time elapse scroll list to 15min to see a trace of the measurement signal’s progress.
Check that the measurement value remains within the acceptable values for the system. We can view the
increase in the measurement from the Trace tab. When this has stabilized, read the value corresponding to
the stabilization of the measurement graph (for example, 350 counts corresponding to 35°, or an increase of
10° compared with the initial state).
35011386 06/2006 471

Step Action
9 If we see that the actuator is not controlled, check the output circuit:
z For an analog output, check the output voltage or current from the analog card.
z For a PWM output, check:
z the LED of the output concerned is lit (%Q0.1, in this example),
z the wiring of the supplies and 0V circuit for the TWDLMDA20DRT base outputs,
z the actuator power supply.
10 Close the PID display screen and stop the manual mode by entering the following values in the animation table:
z %M0: Enable loop controller = 0 (stop the loop controller)
z %M2: Selection of Automatic or Manual mode = 0 (stop manual mode)
z %MW17: Operating mode selection for the PID controller = 0
z %MW18: Manual setpoint associated with %M2 bit selection = 0.
472 35011386 06/2006

Step 5 - Control Set-Up AT + PID
Introduction In this section, we will be looking at how to configure the controller to start operation
in AT+PID. mode. In this operating mode, the controller will automatically adjust the
controller to coefficients Kp, Ti, Td.
Note: During the sequence, the system should not be subject to any disturbance
due to external variations that would affect the final adjustments. Also, before
launching the AT sequence, make sure the system is stabilized.
Reminder of Kp, For operation in AT+PID mode to be possible, the following two conditions must be met:
Ti and Td z The Kp, Ti, Td coefficients must be configured as memory addresses (%MWxx).
Settings z The Action type in the Output tab must be set to a memory bit address (%Mxx).
To set the controller to AT+PIDmode, proceed as follows:

Step Action
1 Enter or check the memory addresses with the following values in the animation table:
z %M2: selection of Automatic or Manual mode = 0,
z %MW0: loop controller setpoint = 600 (in this example, the setpoint is active after the AT sequence and
the controller maintains a temperature of 60°),
z %MW10 to %MW12: coefficients of the PID controller (leave at 0, the AT sequence will fill them in),
z %MW13: measurement limit not to be exceeded in AT mode = 900 (in the example, if 90° is exceeded an
error will occur inAT),
z %MW14: controller output setpoint in AT mode = 2000 (from the test in manual mode).
This is the step change value applied to the process. In AT mode, the output setpoint is directly applied at the controller output.
This value can be an internal word (%MW0 to %MW2999), an internal constant (%KW0 to %KW255) or a
direct value. The value must therefore be between 0 and 10,000.
Note: The output autotuning setpoint must always be greater than the last output applied to the process.
z %MW15: discrete output of the PID loop controller (entered by the controller),
z %MW16: PWM period setting (leave 10, as set previously),
z %MW17: operating mode selection for the PID controller = 2 (AT + PID),
z %MW18: manual setpoint associated with the %M2 bit selection = 0.
2 Configure the Twido controller so that it scans in Periodic mode.
3 Set the Time of the Twido controller scanning period so that the Sampling period (Ts) value of the PID
controller is an exact multiple.
Note: For further details on how to determine the sampling period, see Auto-Tuning Requirements, p. 515 and
Methods for Determining the Sampling Period (Ts), p. 516.
4 Check that the controller is RUN mode.
5 Enter the memory bit %M0.
%M0: controller validation = 1 in the animation table.
35011386 06/2006 473

Step Action
6 Select Advanced Objects from the Object Category (See Object Category Frame, TwidoSuite Programming
Software, Online Help) frame and choose PID) from the Objects Type (See Object Type Frame, TwidoSuite
Programming Software, Online Help) frame.
7 Activate the Animation tab for the required PID number and check that the animation matches the screen below:
Apply Cancel
AT + PID 8/29/2005 9:45 AM PID Stop
PID Output Period

Ts
20
0
Setpoint PID controller Rev
Kp Ti Td
0 0 0 0 0 0
Output
Input
Mes
AT
Output setpoint
PV 0
Limit Create an
AT animation table
0
Note: The screens of the PID controller are only refreshed if the controller is enabled (and API set to RUN).
8 Click on Trace button and wait for the system to startAT.
Trace
Note: The waiting time may last for 10-20 minutes before the AT procedure changes.
474 35011386 06/2006

Storage of Once the Auto-Tuning sequence is complete, the memory words assigned to the Kp,
Calculated Kp, Ti Ti and Td coefficients are completed with the calculated values. These values are
and Td written to the RAM memory and saved in the controller as long as the application is
Coefficients valid (power-down of less than 30 days) and no cold-start is performed (%S0).
Note: If the system is not influenced by outside fluctuations, the values may be hard written
in the settings of the PID controller and the controller switched to PID mode only.
Repetition of AT The Auto-Tuning sequence is repeated on every switch to RUN or cold start (%S0).
You should therefore test the diagnostics words using the program what to do in the
event of a restart.
35011386 06/2006 475

Step 6 - Debugging Adjustments
Accessing the To make it easier to debug the system, the animation table can be accessed at any
Animation Table time when the PID controller screens are in the foreground.
Note:
When viewing only the setpoint and process value graphs using the Detach button
in the Trace tab (see Trace tab window below), the animation table can then be
accessed via Program → Debug → Animate the program task.
PID 0
1050
1000
950
900
850
800
750
15 min
700
650
600
550
500
450
400
350 Initialize
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
15 0
Order Measure
476 35011386 06/2006

Returning to PID To return to the PID controller screens without losing the graph trace history,
Screens proceed as follows:
Step Action
TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help) frame and choose PID) from the
Help) frame.
2 Click the Animation tab.
History of PID In the Animation tab for the PID controllers, you can access the last 15 states of the
States current controller by making your selection from the drop-down list as shown below:
Apply Cancel
PID 12/04/2004 17:35 The PID setpoint is reached
12/04/2004 17:29 The PID control is in progress
12/04/2004 17:29 Autotuning process finished

12/04/2004 17:20 Phase 4 autotuning in progress

Note: The PID states are stored when the PC and TwidoSuite are in online mode.
35011386 06/2006 477

16.4 PID Function
At a Glance
Aim of this This section describes the behavior, functionalities and implementation of the PID function.
Section
Note: To find out quick setup information about your PID controller as well as the
PID autotuning, please refer to the Twido PID Quick Start Guide, p. 457.

Section?
Topic Page
Overview 479
Principal of the Regulation Loop 480
Development Methodology of a Regulation Application 481
Compatibilities and Performances 482
Detailed characteristics of the PID function 483
How to access the PID configuration 486
PID Screen Elements of PID function 487
General tab of PID function 491
Input tab of the PID 494
PID tab of PID function 496
AT tab of PID function 498
Output tab of the PID 503
How to access PID debugging 506
Animation tab of PID function 507
Trace screen of PID function 509
PID States and Errors Codes 511
PID Tuning With Auto-Tuning (AT) 515
PID parameter adjustment method 523
Role and influence of PID parameters 525
Appendix 1: PID Theory Fundamentals 529
Appendix 2: First-Order With Time Delay Model 531
478 35011386 06/2006

Overview
General The PID regulation function is a TwidoSuite programming language function.

It allows programming of PID regulation loops on controllers compatible with
TwidoSuite version 2.0 or higher.
This function is particularly adapted to:
z Answering the needs of the sequential process which need the auxiliary
adjustment functions (examples: plastic film packaging machine, finishing
treatment machine, presses, etc.)
z Responding to the needs of the simple adjustment process (examples: metal
furnaces, ceramic furnaces, small refrigerating groups, etc.)
It is very easy to install as it is carried out in the:
z Configuration
z and Debug
screens associated with a program line (operation block in Ladder Language or by
simply calling the PID in Instruction List) indicating the number of the PID used.
The correct syntax when writing a PID instruction is: PID<space>n, when n is the
PID number.
Example of a program line in Ladder Language:
1 LD
PID
Rung 1
PID 0
SHORT PID 0
Note: In any given Twido automation application, the maximum number of

configurable PID functions is 14.
Key Features The key features are as follows:

z Analog input,
z Linear conversion of the configurable measurement,
z High or low configurable input alarm,
z Analog or PWM output,
z Cut off for the configurable output,
z Configurable direct or inverse action.
35011386 06/2006 479

Principal of the Regulation Loop
At a Glance The working of a regulation loop has three distinct phases:

z The acquisition of data:
z Measurements from the process’ sensors (analog, encoders)
z Setpoint(s) generally from the controller's internal variables or from data from
a TwidoSuite animation table
z Execution of the PID regulation algorithm
z The sending of orders adapted to the characteristics of the actuators to be driven
via the discrete (PWM) or analog outputs
The PID algorithm generates the command signal from:
z The measurement sampled by the input module
z The setpoint value fixed by either the operator or the program
z The values of the different corrector parameters
The signal from the corrector is either directly handled by a controller analog output
card linked to the actuator, or handled via a PWM adjustment on a discrete output
of the controller.
Illustration The following diagram schematizes the principal of a regulation loop.
Animation Table Running

TwidoSuite
OUTPUTS
INPUTS
Corrector Adapter
MEASURE
PLC
ORDER
ACTUATORS
SENSORS
Process to order
480 35011386 06/2006

Development Methodology of a Regulation Application
Diagram of the The following diagram describes all of the tasks to be carried out during the creation
Principal and debugging of a regulation application.
Note: The order defined depends upon your own work methods, and is provided as an example.
PID Application / Configuration

Configuration of
Discrete, Analog interfaces
Application / Data
Programming: Ladder, List
Input of constant and
Regulation functions,
mnemonic data, and
Operator dialogue
numerical values
API /Connector
Transfer of the application
in the PLC
Animation tables Debugging Debugging

Variable table program PC
and adjustment
File / Save Operation Operation of the

Storing the of control process via PC
application loops
Documentation
Application
folder
35011386 06/2006 481

Compatibilities and Performances
At a Glance The Twido PID function is a function that is available for controllers compatible with
TwidoSuite version 2.0 or higher, which is why its installation is subject to a number
of hardware and software compatibilities described in the following paragraphs.
In addition, this function requires the resources presented in the Performances paragraph.
Compatibility The Twido PID function is available on Twido controllers version 2.0 or higher
software.
If you have Twidos with an earlier version of the software, you can update your
firmware in order to use this PID function.
Note: The version 1.0 analog input/output modules can be used as PID input/
output modules without needing to be updated.
In order to configure and program a PID on these different hardware versions, you
must have the TwidoSuite software.
Performance The PID regulation loops have the following performances:

Description Time
Loop execution time 0.4 ms
482 35011386 06/2006

Detailed characteristics of the PID function
General The PID function completes a PID correction via an analog measurement and
setpoint in the default [0-10000] format and provides an analog command in the
same format or a Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) on a discrete output.
All the PID parameters are explained in the windows used to configure them. Here,
we will simply summarize the functions available, indicate measurement values and
describe how they integrate into PID in a functional flow diagram.
Note: For use at full scale (optimum resolution), you can configure your analog
input connected to the PID's measurement branch in 0-10000 format. However, if
you use the default configuration (0-4095), the controller will function correctly.
Note: In order for regulation to operate correctly, it is essential that the Twido PLC
is in periodic mode. The PID function is then executed periodically on each cycle,
and the PID input data sampling complies with the period set in configuration (see
table below).
Details of The following table indicates the different functions available and their scale:
Available
Function Scale and comment
Functions
Linear conversion of input Allows you to convert a value in 0 to 10000 format
(analog input module resolution) to a value between -
32768 and 32767
Proportional gain Using a factor of 100, its value is between 1 and
10000. This corresponds to a gain value varying
between 0.01 and 100.
Note: If you enter an invalid value of gain (negative or
null gain), TwidoSuite ignores this user-setting and
automatically assigns the default value of 100 to this
factor.
Integral time Using a timebase of 0.1 seconds, its value is between
0 and 20000. This corresponds to an integral time of
between 0 and 2000.0 seconds.
Derivative time Using a timebase of 0.1 seconds, its value is between
0 and 10000. This corresponds to a derivative time of
between 0 and 1000.0 seconds.
Sampling period Using a timebase of 0.01 seconds, its value is
between 1 and 10000. This corresponds to a sampling
period of between 0.01 and 100 seconds.
35011386 06/2006 483

Function Scale and comment

PWM output Using a timebase of 0.1 seconds, its value is between
1 and 500. This corresponds to a modulation period of
between 0.1 and 50 seconds.
Analog output Value between 0 and +10000
High level alarm on process variable This alarm is set after conversion. It is set to a value
between -32768 and 32767 if conversion is activated
and to 0 and 10000 if it is not.
Low level alarm on process variable This alarm is set after conversion. It is set to a value
between -32768 and 32767 if conversion is activated
and to 0 and 10000 if it is not.
High limit value on output This limit value is between 0 and 10000 for an analog
output value. When PWM is active, the limit
corresponds to a percentage of the modulated period.
0% for 0 and 100% for 10000.
Low limit value on output This limit value is between 0 and 10000 for an analog
output value. When PWM is active, the limit
corresponds to a percentage of the modulated period.
0% for 0 and 100% for 10000.
Manual mode When manual mode is active the output is assigned a
fixed value set by the user. This output value is
between 0 and 10000 (0 to 100% for PWM output).
Direct or inverse action Direct or inverse is available and acts directly on the
output.
Auto-Tuning (AT) This function provides automatic tuning of the Kp, Ti,
Td and Direct/Reverse Action parameters to achieve
optimum convergence of the control process.
Note: For a more in-depth explanation of how each of the functions described in
the above table works, refer to the diagram below.
484 35011386 06/2006

Operating The following diagram presents the operating principle of the PID function.
Principles
Sampling period
PID CORRECTOR
TI
The Setpoint branch +

SET POINT Integrate
+ Deviat +
KP
SET POINT - ε
S.P +
TD
The Measurement branch d
dt
Derived
MEASURE High alarm
Conversion The PID action
PROCESS MEASUREMENT
VALUE Low alarm USED
P.V
The PID operation modes

High limit
1 AUTO
Limiter
Analog output
Low limit 0
PWM
Manual
Modulation
period
OPERATOR DIALOGUE
TwidoSuite PC
Note:The parameters used are described in the table on the page above and in the
configuration screens.
35011386 06/2006 485

How to access the PID configuration
At a Glance The following paragraphs describe how to access the PID configuration screens on
Twido controllers.
Procedure The following table describes the procedure for accessing the PID configuration
screens:
Step Action
1 Check that you are in offline mode.
TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help) frame and choose PID from the
Help) frame.
3 Select the desired PID# from the PID table. (See PID Selection Table of the PID
Function, p. 488)
Result: The PID configuration window opens and displays the General (See General
tab of PID function, p. 491) tab by default.
486 35011386 06/2006

PID Screen Elements of PID function
At a Glance The PID configuration window permits to:

z Configure each TWIDO PID (in offline mode),
z Debug each TWIDO PID (in online mode).
This section describes the PID Screen Elements, including:

z Access to the PID Configuration Screen,
z PID Selection Table of the PID Function,
z PID tabs of the PID Function,
z PID Trace.
Access to the To access the PID configuration window:

PID
If... Then ... Outcome
Configuration
Screen You are in Select Program → Debug → You will go to the Animation tab and will
online Monitor software configuration → have access to the debugging and
mode. Advanced objects → PID. adjustment parameters.
You are in Select Program → Configure → You will go to the General tab by default
offline Configure the datas → Advanced and will have access to the configuration
mode. objects → PID. parameters.
35011386 06/2006 487

PID Selection The table below is used to select the PID you wish to Configure/Debug.
Table of the PID
Function All
Used Address Configured

PID 0
PID 1
PID 2
PID 3
PID 4
PID 5
PID 6
PID 7
PID 8
PID 9
PID 10
PID 11
PID 12
PID 13
The table below describes the settings that you may define.
Field Description
Address Specify the PID number that you wish to configure here.
The value is between 0 and 13, 14 PID maximum per application.
Configured To configure the PID, this box must be checked. Otherwise no action can
be performed in these screens and the PID, though it exists in the
application, cannot be used.
Used Read only, this box is checked if the PID with corresponding number is
used in the application program
Sort options Select the corresponding combo box option whether you wish to display
(combo box) All, or only Used or Unused PID in the PID selection table.
Note: You must first complete the current PID configuration before switching to
another PID or performing any another software task.
488 35011386 06/2006

PID tabs of the The PID tabs allow you to to configure the PID parameters. The screen below shows
PID Function the tabs of The PID.
Apply Cancel
Operating mode: AT+PID
PID States
Word address:
PID Output
Input
Mes
AT
PV AT
Limit
The table below describes the tabs of the PID.

Field Description
General Tab Specify the PID General parameters, see General tab of PID function, p. 491
Input Tab Specify the PID Input parameters, see Input tab of the PID, p. 494
PID Tab Specify the PID internal parameters, see PID tab of PID function, p. 496
AT Tab Specify the AT parameters, see AT tab of PID function, p. 498
Output Tab Specify the PID Output parameters, see Output tab of the PID, p. 503
Animation Tab View/Debug the PID, see Animation tab of PID function, p. 507
Note: In some cases, the grayed-out tabs and fields may not be accessible for any
of the two reasons listed below:
z The operating mode (offline or online) which is currently active does not allow
you to access these parameters.
z The "PID only" operating mode is selected, which prevents access to the AT tab
parameters that are no longer needed.
35011386 06/2006 489

PIDTrace of the Trace

The PID trace button allows you to view the PID control.
PID Function
PID 0
1050
1000
950
900
850
800
750
15 min
700
650
600
550
500
450
400
350 Initialize
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
15 0
Order Measure
This tab allows you to view PID operation and to make adjustments to the way it
behaves, see Trace screen of PID function, p. 509.
490 35011386 06/2006

General tab of PID function
At a Glance Select Advanced Objects from the Object Category (See Object Category Frame,
TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help) frame and choose PID from the Objects
Type (See Object Type Frame, TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help) frame.
The PID configuration window allows you to:
z configure each TWIDO PID (in online mode),
z debug each TWIDO PID (in offline mode),
When you open this screen, if you are:
z in offline mode: you will go to the General tab by default and will have access to
the configuration parameters,
z in online mode: you will go to the Animation tab and will have access to the
debugging and adjustment parameters.
Note: In some cases, the grayed-out tabs and fields may not be accessible for any
of the two reasons listed below: The "PID only" operating mode is selected, which
prevents access to the AT tab parameters that are no longer needed.
z The operating mode (offline or online) which is currently active does not allow
you to access these parameters.
z The "PID only" operating mode is selected, which prevents access to the AT tab
parameters that are no longer needed.
The following paragraphs describe the General tab.
35011386 06/2006 491

General Tab of The screen below is used to enter the general PID parameters.
the PID Function
Apply Cancel
Operating mode: AT+PID
PID States
Word address:
PID Output
Input
Mes
AT
PV AT
Limit
492 35011386 06/2006

Description The table below describes the settings that you may define.
Field Description
PID number Specify the PID number that you wish to configure here.
Configured To configure the PID, this box must be checked. Otherwise no action can
be performed in these screens and the PID, though it exists in the
application, cannot be used.
Operating mode Specify the desired operating mode here. You may choose from three
operating modes and a word address, as follows:
z PID
z AT
z AT+PID
z Word address
Word address You may provide an internal word in this text box (%MW0 to %MW2999)
that is used to programmatically set the operating mode. The internal
word can take three possible values depending on the operating mode
you wish to set:
z %MWx = 1 (to set PID only)
z %MWx = 2 (to set AT + PID)
z %MWx = 3 (to set AT only)
PID States If you check to enable this option, you may provide a memory word in this
text box (%MW0 to %MW2999) that is used by the PID controller to store
the current PID state while running the PID controller and/or the
autotuning function (for more details, please refer to PID States and
Errors Codes, p. 511.)
Diagram The diagram allows you to view the different possibilities available for
configuring your PID.
35011386 06/2006 493

Input tab of the PID
At a Glance The tab is used to enter the PID input parameters.

Note: It is accessible in offline mode.
Input tab of the The screen below is used to enter the PID input parameters.
PID Function
Apply Cancel
Measure Conversion Alarms
Authorize Authorize
Min Low: Output:
Max High: Output:
PID Output
Input
Mes
494 35011386 06/2006

Field Description
Measurement Specify the variable that will contain the process value to be controlled here.
The default scale is 0 to 10000. You can enter either an internal word
(%MW0 to %MW2999) or an analog input (%IWx.0 to %IWx.1).
Conversion Check this box if you wish to convert the process variable specified as a PID input.
If this box is checked, both the Min value and Max value fields are
accessible.
The conversion is linear and converts a value between 0 and 10,000 into a value for
which the minimum and maximum are between -32768 and +32767.
Min value Specify the minimum and maximum of the conversion scale. The process variable is
Max value then automatically rescaled within the [Min value to Max value] interval.
Note: The Min value must always be less than the Max value.
Min value or Max value can be internal words (%MW0 to %MW2999), internal
constants (%KW0 to %KW255) or a value between -32768 and +32767.
Alarms Check this box if you wish to activate alarms on input variables.
Note: The alarm values should be determined relative to the process
variable obtained after the conversion phase. They must therefore be
between Min value and Max value when conversion is active. Otherwise
they will be between 0 and 10000.
Low Specify the high alarm value in the Low field.
Output This value can be an internal word (%MW0 to %MW2999), an internal
constant (%KW0 to %KW255) or a direct value.
Output must contain the address of the bit which will be set to 1 when the
lower limit is reached. Output can be either an internal bit (%M0 to %M255)
or an output (%Qx.0 to %Qx.32).
High Specify the low alarm value in the High field.
Output This value can be an internal word (%MW0 to %MW2999), an internal
Output must contain the address of the bit which will be set to 1 when the
upper limit is reached. Output can be either an internal bit (%M0 to %M255)
or an output (%Qx.0 to %Qx.32).
35011386 06/2006 495

PID tab of PID function
At a Glance The tab is used to enter the internal PID parameters.
PID tab of the PID The screen below is used to enter the internal PID parameters.
Function
Apply Cancel
Setpoint Parameters Sampling period
Kp (x0.01)
(10ms)
Ti (0.1 s)
Td (0.1 s)
PID Output
Input
Mes
496 35011386 06/2006

Field Description
Setpoint Specify the PID setpoint value here. This value can be an internal word
(%MW0 to %MW2999), an internal constant (%KW0 to %KW255) or a
direct value.
This value must therefore be between 0 and 10000 when conversion is
inhibited. Otherwise it must be between the Min value and the
Max value for the conversion.
Kp * 100 Specify the PID proportional coefficient multiplied by 100 here.
This value can be an internal word (%MW0 to %MW2999), an internal
The valid range for the Kp parameter is: 0 < Kp < 10000.
Note: If Kp is mistakenly set to 0 (Kp ≤ 0 is invalid), the default value
Kp=100 is automatically assigned by the PID function.
TI (0.1 sec) Specify the integral action coefficient here for a timebase of 0.1 seconds.
It must be between 0 and 20000.
Note: To disable the integral action of the PID, set this coefficient to 0.
Td (0.1 sec) Specify the derivative action coefficient here for a timebase of 0.1
seconds.
It must be between 0 and 10000.
Note: To disable the derivative action of the PID, set this coefficient to 0.
Sampling period Specify the PID sampling period here for a timebase of 10-2 seconds (10 ms).
It must be between 1 (0.01 s) and 10000 (100 s).
Note: When AT is enabled, Kp, Ti and Td parameters are no longer set by the user
for they are automatically and programmatically set by the AT algorithm. In this
case, you must enter in these fields an internal word only (%MW0 to %MW2999).
Caution: Do not enter an internal constant or a direct value when AT is enable, for
this will trigger an error when running your PID application.
35011386 06/2006 497

AT tab of PID function
At a Glance The setting of correct PID parameters may be tedious, time-consuming and error-
prone. All these make process control difficult to setup for the yet experienced, but
not necessarily process control professional user. Thus, optimum tuning may
sometimes be difficult to achieve.
The PID Auto-Tuning algorithm is designed to determine autmatically and
adequately the following four PID terms:
z Gain factor,
z Integral value,
z Derivative value, and
z Direct or Reverse action.
Thus, the AT function can provide rapid and optimum tuning for the process loop.
AT PID Auto-tuning is particularly suited for temperature control processes.

Requirements In a general manner, the processes that the AT function can be used to control must
meet the following requirements:
z the process is mostly linear over the entire operating range,
z the process response to a level change of the analog output follows a transient
asymptotic pattern, and
z there is little disturbance in process variables. (In the case of a temperature
control process, this implies there is no abnormally high rate of heat exchange
between the process and its environment.)
498 35011386 06/2006

AT Operating The following diagram describes the operating principle of the AT function and how
Principle it interacts with the PID loops:
Sampling
Auto/Manual
period Anolog
Direct/Reverse Output
PID controller Action
Operation mode Control
Integral Period
∫ dt
High Limit
TI +
SETPOINT + ε +
KP
Numerical Limiter Output Digital
Output Variable Output
-
Operation mode d +
TD dt Low Limit
External
Conversion Derivative Manual
measurement
Output
Autotuning algorithm
Alarm Alarm
Low High
AT SET-
Sampling
Period
35011386 06/2006 499

AT Tab of the PID The screen below is used to enable/disable the AT function and enter the AT parameters.
function
Note: It is accessible in offline mode only.
Apply Cancel
AT mode Measurement Limit Output Setpoint
Authorize
PID Output
Input
Mes
AT
PV
AT
Limit
500 35011386 06/2006

Description
WARNING
THE PROCESS VARIABLE (PV) LIMIT AND THE OUTPUT SETPOINT VALUES
MUST BE SET CAREFULLY.
PID Auto-Tuning is an open-loop process that is acting directly on the control
process without regulation or any limitation other than provided by the Process
Variable (PV) Limit and the Output Setpoint. Therefore, both values must be
carefully selected within the allowable range as specified by the process to prevent
potential process overload.
equipment damage.
The table below describes the settings that you may define.
Field Description
Authorize Check this box if you wish to enable the AT mode.
There are two ways to use this checkbox, depending on whether you set the operating mode manually
or via a word address in the General tab of the PID function:
z If you set the Operating mode to PID+AT or AT from the General tab (see General tab of PID function,
p. 491), then the Authorize option is automatically checked and grayed out (it cannot be unchecked).
z If you set the operating mode via a word address %MWx (%MWx = 2: PID+AT; %MWx = 3: AT), then
you must check the Authorize option manually to allow configuring the AT parameters.
Result: In either of the above cases, all the fields in this AT tab configuration screen become active and
you must fill in the Setpoint and Output fields with the appropriate values.
Process Specify the limit that the measured process variable shall not exceed during the AT process. This
Variable parameter provides safety to the control system, as AT is an open loop process.
(PV) Limit This value can be an internal word (%MW0 to a maximum of %MW2999, depending on amount of
system memory available), an internal constant (%KW0 to %KW255) or a direct value.
This value must therefore be between 0 and 10000 when conversion is inhibited. Otherwise it must be
between the Min value and the Max value for the conversion.
AT Output Specify the AT output value here. This is the value of the step-change that is applied to the process.
setpoint This value can be an internal word (%MW0 to %MW2999), an internal constant (%KW0 to %KW255) or a direct value.
This value must therefore be between 0 and 10000.
Note: The AT Output Setpoint must always be larger than the output last applied to the process.
Note: When the AT function is enabled, constants (%KWx) or direct values are no longer
allowed, only memory words are allowed in the following set of PID fields:
z Kp, Ti and Td parameters must be set as memory words (%MWx) in the PID tab;
z Action field is automatically set to "Address bit" in the OUT tab;
z Bit box must be filled in with an adequate memory bit (%Mx) in the OUT tab.
35011386 06/2006 501

Calculated Kp, Once tha AT process is complete, the calculated Kp, Ti and Td PID coefficients:
Ti, Td z are stored in their respective memory words (%MWx), and
Coefficients z can be viewed in the Animation tab, in TwidoSuite online mode only.
502 35011386 06/2006

Output tab of the PID
At a Glance The tab is used to enter the PID output parameters.
Ouput Tab of the The screen below is used to enter the internal PID parameters.
PID Function
Apply Cancel
Action Limits Manual mode Output Output PWM

analog Authorize
Bit Address Allow Allow
Min Bit Périod (0.1s)
Bit Bit
Max Output Output
PID Output
Setpoint PID Controller D/I
Input
Mes
AT
Mes AT
Limit
35011386 06/2006 503

Field Description
Action Specify the type of PID action on the process here. Three options are available: Reverse, Direct or
bit address.
If you have selected bit address, you can modify this type via the program, by modifying the
associated bit which is either an internal bit (%M0 to %M255) or an input (%Ix.0 to %Ix.32).
Action is direct if the bit is set to 1 and reverse if it is not.
Note: When AT is enabled, the Auto-Tuning algorithm automatically determines the correct type of
action direct or reverse for the control process. In this case, only one option is available from the
Action dropdown list: Address bit. You must then enter in the associated Bit textbox an internal
word (%MW0 to %MW2999). Do not attempt to enter an internal constant or a direct value in the Bit
textbox, for this will trigger an execution error.
Limits Specify here whether you want to place limits on the PID output. Three options are available:
Bit Enable, Disable or bit address.
If you have selected bit address, you can enable (bit to 1) or disable (bit to 0) limit management by
the program, by modifying the associated bit which is either an internal bit (%M0 to %M255) or an
input (%Ix.0 to %Ix.32).
Min. Set the high and low limits for the PID output here.
Max. Note: The Min. must always be less than the Max..
Min. or Max. can be internal words (%MW0 to %MW2999), internal constants (%KW0 to %KW255)
or a value between 1 and 10000.
Manual mode Specify here whether you want to change the PID to manual mode. Three options are available:
Bit Enable, Disable or bit address.
Output If you have selected bit address, you can switch to manual mode (bit to 1) or switch to automatic
mode (bit to 0) using the program, by modifying the associated bit which is either an internal bit (%M0
to %M255) or an input (%Ix.0 to %Ix.32).
The Output of manual mode must contain the value that you wish to assign to the analog output
when the PID is in manual mode.
This Output can be either a word (%MW0 to %MW2999) or a direct value in the [0-10000] format.
Analog Specify the PID output in auto mode here.
output This Analog output can be %MW-type (%MW0 to %MW2999) or %QW-type (%QWx.0).
PWM output Check this box if you want to use the PWM function of PID.
enabled Specify the modulation period in Period (0.1s). This period must be between 1 and 500 and can be
Period (0.1s) an internal word (%MW0 to %MW2999) or an internal constant (%KW0 to %KW255).
Output Specify the PWM output bit as the value in Output. This can be either an internal bit (%M0 to
%M255) or an output (%Qx.0 to %Qx.32).
Diagram The diagram allows you to view the different possibilities available for configuring your PID.
504 35011386 06/2006

Note: The term Reverse in the action field is used to °C

reach a high setpoint (e.g.: for heating) setpoint
The term Direct in the action field is used to reach a low °C

setpoint (e.g.: for cooling)
setpoint
35011386 06/2006 505

How to access PID debugging
At a Glance The following paragraphs describe how to access the PID debugging screens on
TWIDO controllers.
Procedure The following table describes the procedure for accessing the PID debugging
screens:
Step Action
1 Check that you are in online mode.
2 In the monitor software configuration screen, select Advanced Objects from the
Object Category (See Object Category Frame, TwidoSuite Programming Software,
Online Help) frame and choose PID from the Objects Type (See Object Type Frame,
TwidoSuite Programming Software, Online Help) frame.
3 Select the desired PID# from the PID table.
Note: You can also double-click the PID graphic element in the ladder rung to access
the PID configuratrion window.
4 Click the Animation tab.
Result: The PID configuration window opens and displays the Animation (See
Animation tab of PID function, p. 507) tab by default.
506 35011386 06/2006

Animation tab of PID function
At a Glance The tab is used to debug the PID.

The diagram depends on the type of PID control that you have created. Only
configured elements are shown.
The display is dynamic. Active links are shown in red and inactive links are shown in black.
Note: It is accessible in online mode.
Animation Tab of The screen below is used to view and debug the PID.
PID Function
Apply Cancel
AT + PID 8/29/2005 9:45 AM PID Stop
PID Output Period

Ts
20
0
Setpoint PID controller Rev
Kp Ti Td
0 0 0 0 0 0
Output
Input
Mes
AT
Output setpoint
PV 0
Limit Create an
AT animation table
0
35011386 06/2006 507

Description The following table describes the different zones of the window.
Field Description
PID number Specify the PID number that you wish to debug here.
Operating mode This field shows the current PID operating mode.
List of PID states This dropdown list allows you to view the last 15 PID states in real time.
This list is updated with each change of state indicating the date and time
of the change as well as the current state.
Create an Click on Create an Animation Table, to create a file containing all the
Animation Table variables shown in the diagram to enable you modify them online and
debug your PID.
508 35011386 06/2006

Trace screen of PID function
At a Glance This screen allows you to view PID operation and to make adjustments to the way it
behaves.
The graphs begin to be traced as soon as the debug window is displayed.
Note: It is accessible in online mode.
Animation Tab of The screen below is used to view the PID control.
PID Function
PID 0
1050
1000
950
900
850
800
750
60 min
700
60 min
650
45 min
600
30 min
550
500 15 min
450
400
350 Initialize
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
30 15 0
Order Measure
35011386 06/2006 509

Description The following table describes the different zones of the window.
Field Description
PID number Specify the PID number that you wish to view here.
Chart This zone displays the setpoint and process value graphs.
The scale on the horizontal axis (X) is determined using the menu to the
top right of the window.
The scale on the vertical axis is determined using the PID input
configuration values (with or without conversion). It is automatically
optimized so as to obtain the best view of the graphs.
Horizontal axis This menu allows you to modify the scale of the horizontal axis. You can
scale menu choose from 4 values: 15, 30, 45 or 60 minutes.
Initialize This button clears the chart and restarts tracing the graphs.
510 35011386 06/2006

PID States and Errors Codes
At a Glance In addition to the List of PID States available from the Animation dialog box (see
Animation tab of PID function, p. 507) that allows to view and switch back to one of the
15 latest PID states, the Twido PID controller also has the ability to record the current
state of both the PID controller and the AT process to a user-defined memory word.
To find out how to enable and configure the PID state memory word (%MWi) see
General tab of PID function, p. 491.
PID State The PID state memory word can record any of three types of PID information, as follows:
Memory Word z Current state of the PID controller (PID State)
z Current state of the autotuning process (AT State)
z PID and AT error codes
Note: The PID state memory word is read-only.
PID State The following is the PID controller state versus memory word hexadecimal coding
Memory Word concordance table:
PID State hexadecimal notation Description
0000h PID control is not active
2000h PID control in progress
4000h PID setpoint has been reached
35011386 06/2006 511

Description of AT The autotuning process is divided into 4 consecutive phases. Each phase of the process
State must be fulfilled in order to bring the autotuning to a successful completion. The following
process response curve and table describe the 4 phases of the Twido PID autotuning:
PID 0
1050
1000
950
End of Autotuning
900 (Computing the AT
parameters)
850
800
750
45 min
700
60 min
650
45 min
600
30 min
550
500 15 min
450
400
350 Initialize
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
45 30 15 0
Phase 1: Phase 2: First 15
Phase 3: Phase 4: Second
Stabilization Step-Response Relaxation Step-Response
Order Measure
512 35011386 06/2006

The autotuning phases are described in the following table:

AT Phase Description
1 Phase 1 is the stabilization phase. It starts at the time the user launches the
AT process. During this phase, the Twido autotuning performs checks to
ensure that the process variable is in steady state.
Note: The output last applied to the process before start of the autotuning is
used as both the starting point and the relaxation point for the autotuning
process.
2 Phase 2 applies the fist step-change to the process. It produces a process
step-response similar to the one shown in the above figure.
3 Phase 3 is the relaxation phase that starts when the first step-response has
stabilized.
Note: Relaxation occurs toward equilibrium that is determined as the output
last applied to the process before start of the autotuning.
4 Phase 4 applies the second step-change to the process in the same amount
and manner as in Phase 2 described above. The autotuning process ends and
the AT parameters are computed and stored in their respective memory words
upon completion of Phase 4.
Note: After this phase is complete, the process variable is restored to the
output level last applied to the process before start of the autotuning.
AT State Memory The following is the PID controller state versus memory word hexadecimal coding
Word concordance table:
AT State hexadecimal notation Description
0100h Autotuning phase 1 in progress
1000h Autotuning process complete
35011386 06/2006 513

PID and AT Error The following table describes the potential execution errors that may be
Codes encountered during both PID control and autotuning processes:
PID/AT Error code
Processes (hexadecimal) Description
PID Error 8001h Operating mode value out of range
8002h Linear conversion min and max equal
8003h Upper limit for discrete output lower than lower limit
8004h Process variable limit out of linear conversion range
8005h Process variable limit less than 0 or greater than 10000
8006h Setpoint out of linear conversion range
8007h Setpoint less than 0 or greater than 10000
8008h Control action different from action determined at AT start
Autotuning 8009h Autotuning error: the process variable (PV) limit has been
Error reached
800Ah Autotuning error : due to either oversampling or output
setpoint too low
800Bh Autotuning error: Kp is zero
800Ch Autotuning error: the time constant is negative
800Dh Autotuning error: delay is negative
800Eh Autotuning error: error calculating Kp
800Fh Autotuning error: time constant over delay ratio > 20
8010h Autotuning error: time constant over delay ratio < 2
8011h Autotuning error: the limit for Kp has been exceeded
8012h Autotuning error: the limit for Ti has been exceeded
8013h Autotuning error: the limit for Td has been exceeded
514 35011386 06/2006

PID Tuning With Auto-Tuning (AT)
Overview of PID The PID control function relies on the following three user-defined parameters: Kp,
Tuning Ti and Td. PID tuning aims at determining these process parameters accurately to
provide optimum control of the process.
Scope of the TheAT function of the Twido PLC is especially suited for automatic tuning of thermal
Auto-Tuning processes. As values of the PID parameters may vary greatly from one control
process to another, the auto-tuning function provided by the Twido PLC can help
you determine more accurate values than simply provided by best guesses, with
less effort.
Auto-Tuning When using the auto-tuning function, make sure the control process and the Twido
Requirements PLC meet all of the following four requirements:
z The control process must be an open-loop, stable system.
z At the start of the auto-tuning run, the control process must be in steady state with
a null process input (e.g.: an oven or a furnace shall be at ambient temperature.)
z During operation of the auto-tuning, make sure that no disturbances enter
through the process for either computed parameters will be erroneous or the
auto-tuning process will simply fail (e.g.: the door of the oven shall not be opened,
not even momentarily.)
z Configure the Twido PLC to scan in Periodic mode. Once you have determined
the correct sampling period (Ts) for the auto-tuning, the scan period must be
configured so that the sampling period (Ts) is an exact multiple of the Twido PLC
scan period.
Note: To ensure a correct run of the PID control and of the auto-tuning process, it
is essential that the Twido PLC be configured to execute scans in Periodic mode
(not Cyclic). In Periodic mode, each scan of the PLC starts at regular time intervals.
This way, the sampling rate is constant throughout the measurement duration
(unlike cyclic mode where a scan starts as soon as the previous one ends, which
makes the sampling period unbalanced from scan to scan.)
35011386 06/2006 515

AT Operating The auto-tuning can be used either independently (AT mode) or in conjunction with
Modes the PID control (AT + PID):
z AT mode: After convergence of the AT process and successful completion with
the determination of the PID control parameters Kp, Ti and Td (or after detection
of an error in the AT algorithm), the AT numerical output is set to 0 and the
following message appears in the List of PID States drop-down list: "Auto-tuning
complete."
z AT + PID mode: The AT is launched first. After successful completion of the AT,
the PID control loop starts (based on the Kp, TI and Td parameters computed by
the AT)."
Note on AT+PID: If the AT algorithm encounters an error:
z no PID parameter is computed;
z the AT numerical output is set to output last applied to the process before start
of the autotuning;
z an error message appears in the List of PID States drop-down list
z the PID control is cancelled.
Note: Bumpless transition

While in AT+PID mode, the transition from AT to PID is bumpless.
Methods for As will be explained in the two following sections (see Appendix 1: PID Theory
Determining the Fundamentals, p. 529 and Appendix 2: First-Order With Time Delay Model, p. 531),
Sampling Period the sampling period (Ts) is a key parameter of the PID control. The sampling
(Ts) period can be deduced from the AT time constant (τ).
There are two methods for evaluating the correct sampling period (Ts) by using the
auto-tuning:· They are described in the following sections.
z The process response curve method
z The trial-and-error method
Both methods are described in the two following subsections.
Introducing the This method consists in setting a step change at the control process input and
Process recording the process output curve with time.
Response Curve The process response curve method makes the following assumption:
Method z The control process can be adequately described as a first-order with time delay
model by the following transfer function:
S- k – θp
--- = --------------- ⋅ e
U 1 + τp
(For more details, see Appendix 2: First-Order With Time Delay Model)
516 35011386 06/2006

Using the To determine the sampling period (Ts) using the process response curve method,
Process follow these steps:
Response Curve
Step Action
Method
1 It is assumed that you have already configured the various settings in the General,
Input, PID, AT and Output tabs of the PID.
2 Select the PID > Output tab.
3 Select Authorize or Address bit from the Manual mode dropdown list to allow
manual output and set the Output field to a high level (in the [5000-10000] range).
4 Select PLC > Transfer PC => PLC... to download the application program to the
Twido PLC.
5 Within the PID configuration window, switch to Trace mode.
6 Run the PID and check the response curve rise.
7 When the response curve has reached a steady state, stop the PID measurement.
Note: Keep the PID Trace window active.
8 Use the following graphical method to determine time constant (τ) of the control
process:
1. Compute the process variable output at 63% rise (S[63%]) by using the following
formula: S[63%] = S[initial] + (S[ending]-S[initial])x63%
2. Find out graphically the time abscissa (t[63%]) that corresponds to S(63%).
3. Find out graphically the initial time (t[initial]) that corresponds the start of the
process response rise.
4. Compute the time constant (τ) of the control process by using the following
relationship: τ = t[63%]-t[initial]
9 Compute the sampling period (Ts) based on the value of (τ) that you have just
determined in the previous step, using the following rule: Ts = τ/75
Note: The base unit for the sampling period is 10ms. Therefore, you should round up/
down the value of Ts to the nearest 10ms.
10 Select Program > Configure the Behavior to set the San Mode parameters and
proceed as follows:
1. Set the Scan mode of the Twido PLC to Periodic.
2. Set the Scan Period so that the sampling period (Ts) is an exact multiple of the
scan period, using the following rule: Scan Period = Ts / n,
where "n" is a positive integer.
Note: You must choose "n" so that the resulting Scan Period is a positive integer in
the range [2 - 150 ms].
35011386 06/2006 517

Example of This example shows you how to measure the time constant (τ) of a simple thermal process
Process by using the process response curve method described in the previous subsection.
Response Curve The experimental setup for the time constant measurement is as follows:
z The control process consists in a forced air oven equipped with a heating lamp.
z Temperature measurements are gathered by the Twido PLC via a Pt100 probe,
and temperature data are recorded in °C.
z The Twido PLC drives a heating lamp via the PWM discrete output of the PID.
The experiment is carried out as follows:

Step Action
1 The PID Output tab is selected from the PID configuration screen.
2 Manual mode is selected from the Output tab.
3 The manual mode Output is set to 10000.
4 The PID run is launched from the PID Trace tab.
5 The PID run is stopped when the oven's temperature has reached a steady state.
518 35011386 06/2006

Step Action
6 The following information is obtained directly from the graphical analysis of the
response curve, as shown in the figure below:
PID 0
1050
1000
950
900
850
800
750
60 min
700
650
600
550 S[e]=660
500
450 S[63%]=512
400
350 Initialize
300
250
200
150
100
50
60 45 30 15 0
S[i]=260 τ=570s
Order Measure
where
z S[i] = initial value of process variable = 260
z S[e] = ending value of process variable = 660
z S[63%] = process variable at 63% rise = S[i] + (S[i] - S[e]) x 63%
= 260+(660-260)x63%
= 512
z τ = time constant
= time elapsed from the start of the rise till S[63%] is reached
= 9 min 30 s = 570 s
7 The sampling period (Ts) is determined using the following relationship:
Ts = τ/75
= 570/75 = 7.6 s (7600 ms)
8 In the Program > Scan mode edit dialog box, the Scan Period must be set so that
the sampling period (Ts) is an exact multiple of the scan period, as in the following
example: Scan Period = Ts/76 = 7600/76 = 100 ms (which satisfies the condition: 2
ms ≤ Scan Period ≤ 150 ms.)
35011386 06/2006 519

Trial-and-Error The trial-and-error method consists in providing successive guesses of the sampling
Method period to the auto-tuning function until the auto-tuning algorithm converges
successfully towards Kp, Ti and Td that are deemed satisfactory by the user.
Note: Unlike the process response curve method, the trial-and-error method is not
based on any approximation law of the process response. However, it has the
advantage of converging towards a value of the sampling period that is in the same
order of magnitude as the actual value.
Top perform a trial-and-error estimation of the auto-tuning parameters, follow these steps:
Step Action
1 Select the AT tab from the PID configuration window.
2 Set the Output limitation of AT to 10000.
3 Select the PID tab from the PID configuration window.
4 Provide the first or nth guess in the Sampling Period field.
Note: If you do not have any first indication of the possible range for the sampling
period, set this value to the minimum possible: 1 (1 unit of 10 ms).
5 Select PLC > Transfer PC => PLC... from menu bar to download the application
program to the Twido PLC.
6 Launch Auto-Tuning.
7 Select the Animation tab from the PID configuration screen.
8 Wait till the auto-tuning process ends.
9 Two cases may occur:
z Auto-tuning completes successfully: You may continue to Step 9.
z Auto-tuning fails: This means the current guess for the sampling period (Ts) is
not correct. Try a new Ts guess and repeat steps 3 through 8, as many times as
required until the auto-tuning process eventually converges.
Follow these guidelines to provide a new Ts guess:
z AT ends with the error message "The computed time constant is negative!":
This means the sampling period Ts is too large. You should decrease the
value of Ts to provide as new guess.
z AT ends with the error message "Sampling error!": This means the sampling period
Ts is too small. You should increase the value of Ts to provide as new guess.
10 You may now view the PID control parameters (Kp, Ti and Td) in Animation tab, and
adjust them in the PID tab of the PID configuration screen, as needed.
Note: If the PID regulation provided by this set of control parameters does not provide
results that are totally satisfactory, you may still refine the trial-and-error evaluation of
the sampling period until you obtain the right set of Kp, Ti and Td control parameters.
520 35011386 06/2006

Adjusting PID To refine the process regulation provided by the PID parameters (Kp, Ti, Td)
Parameters obtained from auto-tuning, you also have the ability to adjust those parameter values
manually, directly from the PID tab of the PID configuration screen or via the
corresponding memory words (%MW).
Limitations on The auto-tuning is best suited for processes whose time constant (τ) and delay-
Using the Auto- time (θ) meet the following requirement: (τ + θ) < 2700 s (i.e.: 45 min)
tuning and the The PID control is best suited for the regulation of processes that satisfy the
PID Control following condition: 2 < (τ/θ) < 20, where (τ) is the time constant of the process and
(θ) is the delay-time.
Note: Depending on the ratio (τ/θ):

z (τ/θ) < 2 : The PID regulation has reached its limitations; more advanced
regulation techniques are needed in this case.
z (τ/θ) > 20 : In this case, a simple on/off (or two-step) controller can be used in
place of the PID controller.
35011386 06/2006 521

Troubleshooting The following table records the auto-tuning error messages and describes possible
Errors of the causes as well as troubleshooting actions:
Auto-tuning
Function
Error Message Possible Cause Explanation / Possible Solution
Autotuning error: the The process variable is reaching This is a system safety.
process variable (PV) limit the maximum value allowed. As the AT is an open-loop process, the Process
has been reached Variable (PV) Limit works as an upper limit.
Autotuning error : due to Any of two possible causes: Increase either the sampling period or the AT
either oversampling or z Sampling period is too small. Output Setpoint value.
output setpoint too low z AT Output is set too low.
Autotuning error: the time The sampling period may be too For more details, please check out PID Tuning With
constant is negative large. Auto-Tuning (AT), p. 515.
Autotuning error: error The AT algorithm has failed (no Check the PID and AT parameters and make
calculating Kp convergence). adjustments that can improve convergence.
z Disturbances on the process Check also that there is no disturbance that could
while autotuning have affect the process variable.
caused a distortion of the Try to modify
process static gain z the ouput setpoint,
evaluation. z the sampling period.
z The process variable
Make sure there is no process disturbance while
transient response is not big
autotuning is in progress.
enough for the autotuning to
determine the static gain.
z A combination of the above
possible causes may effect
on the process.
Autotuning error: time τ/θ > 20 PID regulation is no longer guaranteed.
constant over delay ratio > 20 For more details, please check out PID Tuning With
Auto-Tuning (AT), p. 515.
Autotuning error: time τ/θ < 2 PID regulation is no longer guaranteed.
constant over delay ratio < 2 For more details, please check out PID Tuning With
Auto-Tuning (AT), p. 515.
Autotuning error: the limit for Computed value of static gain Measurement sensitivity of some application variables
Kp has been exceeded (Kp) is greater than 10000. may be too low. The application's measurement range
must be rescaled within the [0-10000] interval.
Autotuning error: the limit for Computed value of integral time Computational limit is reached.
Ti has been exceeded constant (Ti) is greater than
20000.
Autotuning error: the limit for Computed value of derivative time Computational limit is reached.
Td has been exceeded constant (Td) is greater than 10000.
522 35011386 06/2006

PID parameter adjustment method
Introduction Numerous methods to adjust the PID parameters exist, we suggest Ziegler and
Nichols which have two variants:
z closed loop adjustment,
z open loop adjustment.
Before implementing one of these methods, you must set the PID action direction:
z if an increase in the OUT output causes an increase in the PV measurement,
make the PID inverted (KP > 0),
z on the other hand, if this causes a PV reduction, make the PID direct (KP < 0).
Closed loop This principal consists of using a proportional command (Ti = 0, Td = 0 ) to start the
adjustment process by increasing production until it starts to oscillate again after having applied a
level to the PID corrector setpoint. All that is required is to raise the critical production
level (Kpc) which has caused the non damped oscillation and the oscillation period (Tc)
to reduce the values giving an optimal regulation of the regulator.
Measure
Tc
time
According to the kind of (PID or PI) regulator, the adjustment of the coefficients is
executed with the following values:
- Kp Ti Td
PID Kpc/1,7 Tc/2 Tc/8
PI Kpc/2,22 0,83 x Tc -
where Kp = proportional production, Ti = integration time and TD = diversion time.
Note: This adjustment method provides a very dynamic command which can
express itself through unwanted overshootsduring the change of setpoint pulses.
In this case, lower the production value until you get the required behavior.
35011386 06/2006 523

Open loop As the regulator is in manual mode, you apply a level to the output and make the
adjustment procedure response start the same as an integrator with pure delay time.
Output
t
Measure
Integrator Process response
M= S
Tu Tg
The intersection point on the right hand side which is representative of the integrator
with the time axes, determines the time Tu. Next, Tg time is defined as the time
necessary for the controlled variable (measurement) to have the same variation size
(% of the scale) as the regulator output.
According to the kind of (PID or PI) regulator, the adjustment of the coefficients is
executed with the following values:
- Kp Ti Td
PID -1,2 Tg/Tu 2 x Tu 0,5 x Tu
PI -0,9 Tg/Tu 3,3 x Tu -
where Kp = proportional production, Ti = integration time and TD = diversion time.
Note: Attention to the units. If the adjustment is carried out in PL7, multiply the
value obtained for KP by 100.
This adjustment method also provides a very dynamic command, which can express itself
through unwanted overshoots during the change of setpoints’ pulses. In this case, lower the
production value until you get the required behavior. The method is interesting because it
does not require any assumptions about the nature and the order of the procedure. You can
apply it just as well to the stable procedures as to real integrating procedures. It is really
interesting in the case of slow procedures (glass industry,…) because the user only requires
the beginning of the response to regulate the coefficients Kp, Ti and Td.
524 35011386 06/2006

Role and influence of PID parameters
Influence of Proportional action is used to influence the process response speed. The higher the
proportional gain, the faster the response, and the lower the static error (in direct proportion),
action though the more stability deteriorates. A suitable compromise between speed and
stability must be found. The influence of integral action on process response to a
scale division is as follows:
Kp too high
Kp correct
°C
Static error
Kp too low
35011386 06/2006 525

Influence of Integral action is used to cancel out static error (deviation between the process value
integral action and the setpoint). The higher the level of integral action (low Ti), the faster the
response and the more stability deteriorates. It is also necessary to find a suitable
compromise between speed and stability. The influence of integral action on
process response to a scale division is as follows:
Ti too high
Ti correct
Ti too low
Note: A low Ti means a high level of integral action.
where Kp = proportional gain, Ti = integration time and Td = derivative time.
526 35011386 06/2006

Influence of Derivative action is anticipatory. In practice, it adds a term which takes account of
derivative action the speed of variation in the deviation, which makes it possible to anticipate changes
by accelerating process response times when the deviation increases and by
slowing them down when the deviation decreases. The higher the level of derivative
action (high Td), the faster the response. A suitable compromise between speed and
stability must be found. The influence of derivative action on process response to a
scale division is as follows:
Td too high
Td too low
Td correct
35011386 06/2006 527

Limits of the PID If the process is assimilated to a pure delay first order with a transfer function:
control loop ( – τ )p
(e )
( H ( p ) ) = K --------------------
( 1 + θp )
where:
τ =model delay,
θ = model time constant,
100%
Measure = M0+DM
ΔM
Measure = M0
τ θ t
--τ-
The process control performance depends on the ratio θ
τ
---
The suitable PID process control is attained in the following domain: 2- θ -20
τ
---
For θ <2, in other words for fast control loops (low θ ) or for processes with a large
delay (high t) the PID process control is no longer suitable. In such cases more
complex algorithms should be used.
τ
---
For θ >20, a process control using a threshold plus hysterisis is sufficient.
528 35011386 06/2006

Appendix 1: PID Theory Fundamentals
Introduction The PID control function onboard all Twido controllers provides an efficient control
to simple industrial processes that consist of one system stimulus (referred to as
Setpoint in this document) and one measurable property of the system (referred to
as Measure or Process Variable).
The PID The Twido PID controller implements a mixed (serial - parallel) PID correction (see
Controller Model PID Model Diagram below) via an analog measurement and setpoint in the [0-
10000] format and provides an analog command to the controlled process in the
same format.
The mixed form of the PID controller model is described in the following diagram:
I (Ti)
+
ε +
P (Kp) U
D (Td)
where
where:
z I = the integral action (acting independently and parallel to the derivative action),
z D = the derivative action (acting independently and parallel to the integral
action),
z P = the proportional action (acting serially on the combined output of the integral
and derivative actions,
z U = the PID controller output (later fed as input into the controlled process.)
35011386 06/2006 529

The PID Control The PID controller is comprised of the mixed combination (serial - parallel) of the
Law controller gain (Kp), and the integral (Ti) and derivative (Td) time constants. Thus,
the PID control law that is used by the Twido controller is of the following form (Eq.1):
⎧ i ⎫
⎪ Ts Td ⎪
u ( i ) = K P ⋅ ⎨ ε ( i ) + -----
⎪ Ti ∑ ε ( j ) + ------ [ ε ( i ) – ε ( i – 1 ) ] ⎬
Ts ⎪
⎩ j = 1 ⎭
where
z Kp = the controller proportional gain,
z Ti = the integral time constant,
z Td = the derivative time constant,
z Ts = the sampling period,
z ε(i) = the deviation (ε(i) = setpoint - process variable.)
Note: Two different computational algorithms are used, depending on the value of
the integral time constant (Ti):
z Ti ≠ 0: In this case, an incremental algortihm is used.
z Ti = 0: This is the case for non-integrating processes. In this case, a positional algotrithm
is used, along with a +5000 offset that is applied to the PID output variable.
For a detailed description of Kp, Ti and Td please refer to PID tab of PID function, p. 496.
As can be inferred from (equ.1) and (equ.1’), the key parameter for the PID
regulation is the sampling period (Ts). The sampling period depends closely on
the time constant (τ), a parameter intrinsic to the process the PID aims to control.
(See Appendix 2: First-Order With Time Delay Model, p. 531.)
530 35011386 06/2006

Appendix 2: First-Order With Time Delay Model
Introduction This section presents the first-order with time delay model used to describe a variety of
simple but nonetheless important industrial processes, including thermal processes.
First-Order With It is widely assumed that simple (one-stimulus) thermal processes can be
Time Delay adequately approximated by a first-order with time delay model.
Model The transfer function of such first-order, open-loop process has the following form in
the Laplace domain (equ.2):
S- k – θp
--- = --------------- ⋅ e
U 1 + τp
where
z k = the static gain,
z τ = the time constant,
z θ = the delay-time,
z U = the process input (this is the output of the PID controller),
z S = the process output.
35011386 06/2006 531

The Process The key parameter of the process response law (equ.2) is the time constant τ. It is
Time Constant τ a parameter intrinsic to the process to control.
The time constant (τ) of a first-order system is defined as the time (in sec) it takes
the system output variable to reach 63% of the final output from the time the system
started reacting to the step stimulus u(t).
The following figure shows a typical first-order process response to a step stimulus:
Process output
s(t)
S
95% of S
Step response s(t)
86% of S
Setpoint u(t)
63% of S
Δs ΔU
τ 2τ 3τ time (t)
θ : time delay +θ +θ +θ
where
z k = the static gain computed as the ratio ΔS/ΔU,
z τ = the time at 63% rise = the time constant,
z 2τ = the time at 86% rise,
z 3τ = the time at 95% rise.
Note: When auto-tuning is implemented, the sampling period (Ts) must be chosen
in the following range: [τ/125 <Ts < τ/25]. Ideally, you should use [Ts= τ/75]. (See
PID Tuning With Auto-Tuning (AT), p. 515.)
532 35011386 06/2006

16.5 Floating point instructions
At a Glance
Aim of this This section describes advanced floating point (See Floating point and double word
Section objects, p. 32) instructions in TwidoSuite language.
The Comparison and Assignment instructions are described in the Numerical
Processing, p. 378

Section?
Topic Page
Arithmetic instructions on floating point 534
Trigonometric Instructions 537
Conversion instructions 539
Integer Conversion Instructions <-> Floating 541
35011386 06/2006 533

Arithmetic instructions on floating point
General These instructions are used to perform an arithmetic operation between two
operands or on one operand.
+ addition of two operands SQRT square root of an operand

- subtraction of two operands ABS absolute value of an operand
* multiplication of two operands TRUNC whole part of a floating point value
/ division of two operands EXP natural exponential
LOG base 10 logarithm EXPT power of an integer by a real
LN natural logarithm
Structure Ladder Language

%M0 %MF0:=%MF10+129.7
%I3.2 %MF1:=SQRT(%MF10)
%I3.3 %MF2:=ABS(%MF20)
P
%I3.5 %MF8:=TRUNC(%MF2)
P

LD %M0
[%MF0:=%MF10+129.7]
LD %I3.2
[%MF1:=SQRT(%MF10)]
LDR %I3.3
[%MF2:=ABS(%MF20)]
LDR %I3.5
[%MF8:=TRUNC(%MF2)]
534 35011386 06/2006

Ladder Language
%M0 %MF0:=LOG(%MF10)
%I3.2 %MF2:=LN(%MF20)
%I3.3 %MF4:=EXP(%MF40)
P
%I3.4 %MF6:=EXPT(%MF50,%MW52)
P

LD %M0
[%MF0:=LOG(%MF10]
LD %I3.2
[%MF2:=LN(%MF20)]
LDR %I3.3
[%MF4:=EXP(%MF40)]
LDR %I3.4
[%MF6:=EXPT(%MF50,%MW52)]
35011386 06/2006 535

Syntax Operators and syntax of arithmetic instructions on floating point

Operators Syntax
+, - *, / Op1:=Op2 Operator Op3
SQRT, ABS, TRUNC, LOG, EXP, LN Op1:=Operator(Op2)
EXPT Op1:=Operator (Op2,Op3)
Note: When you perform an addition or subtraction between 2 floating point

numbers, the two operands must comply with the condition: Op1 > Op2 × 2 –24 ,
where Op1>Op2. If this condition is not respected, the result is equal to operand 1
(Op1). This phenomenon is of little consequence in the case of an isolated
– 24
operation, as the resulting error is very low ( 2 ), but it can have unforeseen
consequences where the calculation is repeated.
E.g. in the case where the instruction %MF2:= %MF2 + %MF0 is repeated
indefinitely. If the initial conditions are %MF0 = 1.0 and %MF2 = 0, the value %MF2
becomes blocked at 16777216.
We therefore recommend you take great care when programming repeated
calculations. If, however, you wish to program this type of calculation, it is up to the
client application to manage truncation errors.
Operands of arithmetic instructions on floating point:

Operators Operand 1 (Op1) Operand 2 (Op2) Operand 3 (Op3)
+, - *, / %MFi %MFi, %KFi, %MFi, %KFi,
immediate value immediate value
SQRT, ABS, LOG, %MFi %MFi, %KFi [-]
EXP, LN
TRUNC %MFi %MFi, %KFi [-]
EXPT %MFi %MFi, %KFi %MWi, %KWi,
immediate value
Rules of use z Operations on floating point and integer values can not be directly mixed.
Conversion operations (See Integer Conversion Instructions <-> Floating, p. 541)
convert into one or other of these formats.)
z The system bit %S18 is managed in the same way as integer operations (See
Arithmetic Instructions on Integers, p. 386), the word %SW17 (See System
Words (%SW), p. 571) indicates the cause of the fault.
z When the operand of the function is an invalid number (e.g.: logarithm of a
negative number), it produces an indeterminate or infinite result and changes bit
%S18 to 1, the word %SW17 indicates the cause of the error.
536 35011386 06/2006

Trigonometric Instructions
General These instructions enable the user to perform trigonometric operations.
SIN sine of an angle expressed in ASIN π π

radian, - --- ---
arc sine (result within 2 and 2 )
COS cosine of an angle expressed in ACOS arc cosine (result within 0 and π )
radian,
TAN tangent of an angle expressed ATAN π π
in radian, - --- ---
arc tangent (result within 2 and 2 )
Structure Ladder language

%M0 %MF0:=SIN(%MF10)
%I3.2 %MF2:=TAN(%MF10)
%I3.3 %MF4:=ATAN(%MF20)
P

LD %M0
[%MF0:=SIN(%MF10)]
LD %I3.2
[%MF2:=TAN(%MF10)]
LDR %I3.3
[%MF4:=ATAN(%MF20)]
35011386 06/2006 537

Structured text language

IF %M0 THEN
%MF0:=SIN(%MF10);
END_IF;
IF %I3.2 THEN
%MF2:=TAN(%MF10);
END_IF;
IF %I3.3 THEN
%MF4:=ATAN(%MF20);
END_IF;
Syntax Operators, operands and syntax of instructions for trigonometric operations

Operators Syntax Operand 1 (Op1) Operand 2 (Op2)
SIN, COS, TAN, ASIN, Op1:=Operator(Op2) %MFi %MFi, %KFi
ACOS, ATAN
Rules of use z when the operand of the function is an invalid number (e.g.: arc cosine of a
number greater than 1), it produces an indeterminate or infinite result and
changes bit %S18 to 1, the word %SW17 (See System Words (%SW), p. 571)
indicates the cause of the error.
z the functions SIN/COS/TAN allow as a parameter an angle between – 4096π
and 4096π but their precision decreases progressively for the angles outside the
period – 2 π and +2π because of the imprecision brought by the modulo 2π
carried out on the parameter before any operation.
538 35011386 06/2006

Conversion instructions
General These instructions are used to carry out conversion operations.
DEG_TO_RAD conversion of degrees into radian, the result is the value

of the angle between 0 and 2π
RAD_TO_DEG conversion of an angle expressed in radian, the result is
the value of the angle between 0 and 360 degrees

%M0 %MF0:=DEG_TO_RAD(%MF10)
%M2 %MF2:=RAD_TO_DEG(%MF20)

LD %M0
[%MF0:=DEG_TO_RAD(%MF10)]
LD %M2
[%MF2:=RAD_TO_DEG(%MF20)]
Structured Text language

IF %M0 THEN
%MF0:=DEG_TO_RAD(%MF10);
END_IF;
IF %M2 THEN
%MF2:=RAD_TO_DEG(%MF20);
END_IF;
35011386 06/2006 539

Syntax Operators, operands and syntax of conversion instructions

Operators Syntax Operand 1 (Op1) Operand 2 (Op2)
DEG_TO_RAD Op1:=Operator(Op2) %MFi %MFi, %KFi
RAD_TO_DEG
Rules of use The angle to be converted must be between -737280.0 and +737280.0 (for
DEG_TO_RAD conversions) or between – 4096π and 4096π (for RAD_TO_DEG
conversions).
For values outside these ranges, the displayed result will be + 1.#NAN, the %S18
and %SW17:X0 bits being set at 1.
540 35011386 06/2006

Integer Conversion Instructions <-> Floating
General Four conversion instructions are offered.

Integer conversion instructions list<-> floating:
INT_TO_REAL conversion of an integer word --> floating
DINT_TO_REAL conversion of a double word (integer) --> floating
REAL_TO_INT conversation of a floating --> integer word (the result is the
nearest algebraic value)
REAL_TO_DINT conversation of a floating --> double integer word (the result
is the nearest algebraic value)
%MF0:=INT_TO_REAL(%MW10)
%I1.8 %MD4:=REAL_TO_DINT(%MF9)

LD TRUE
[%MF0:=INT_TO_REAL(%MW10)]
LD I1.8
[%MD4:=REAL_TO_DINT(%MF9)]

%MF0:=INT_TO_REAL(%MW10);
IF %I1.8 THEN
%MD4:=REAL_TO_DINT(%MF9);
END_IF;
35011386 06/2006 541

Syntax Operators and syntax (conversion of an integer word --> floating):

Operators Syntax
INT_TO_REAL Op1=INT_TO_REAL(Op2)
Operands (conversion of an integer word --> floating):

Operand 1 (Op1) Operand 2 (Op2)
%MFi %MWi,%KWi
Example: integer word conversion --> floating: 147 --> 1.47e+02
Operators and syntax (double conversion of integer word --> floating):

Operators Syntax
DINT_TO_REAL Op1=DINT_TO_REAL(Op2)
Operands (double conversion of integer word --> floating):

Operand 1 (Op1) Operand 2 (Op2)
%MFi %MDi,%KDi
Example:integer double word conversion --> floating: 68905000 --> 6.8905e+07
Operators and syntax (floating conversion --> integer word or integer double word):
Operators Syntax
REAL_TO_INT Op1=Operator(Op2)
REAL_TO_DINT
Operators (floating conversion --> integer word or integer double word):

Words %MWi %MFi, %KFi
Double words %MDi %MFi, %KFi
Example:
floating conversion --> integer word: 5978.6 --> 5979
floating conversion --> integer double word: -1235978.6 --> -1235979
Note: If during a real to integer (or real to integer double word) conversion the
floating value is outside the limits of the word (or double word),bit %S18 is set to 1.
542 35011386 06/2006

Precision of Standard IEEE 754 defines 4 rounding modes for floating operations.
Rounding The mode employed by the instructions above is the "rounded to the nearest" mode:
"if the nearest representable values are at an equal distance from the theoretical
result, the value given will be the value whose low significance bit is equal to 0".
In certain cases, the result of the rounding can thus take a default value or an excess value.
For example:
Rounding of the value 10.5 -> 10
Rounding of the value 11.5 -> 12
35011386 06/2006 543

16.6 Instructions on Object Tables
At a Glance
Aim of this This section describes instructions specific to tables:

Section z of double words,
z of floating point objects.
Assignment instructions for tables are described in the chapter on "basic
instructions" (See Assignment of Word, Double Word and Floating Point Tables,
p. 382).

Section?
Topic Page
Table summing functions 545
Table comparison functions 547
Table search functions 549
Table search functions for maxi and mini values 551
Number of occurrences of a value in a table 552
Table rotate shift function 553
Table sort function 555
Floating point table interpolation function 557
Mean function of the values of a floating point table 561
544 35011386 06/2006

Table summing functions
General The SUM_ARR function adds together all the elements of an object table:
z if the table is made up of double words, the result is given in the form of a double word
z if the table is made up of floating words, the result is given in the form of a floating word

%I3.2 %MD5:=SUM_ARR(%MD3:1)
%MD5:=SUM_ARR(%KD5:2)
%MF0:=SUM_ARR(%KF8:5)

LD %I3.2
[%MD5:=SUM_ARR(%MD3:1)]
%MD5:=SUM_ARR(%KD5:2)
%MF0:=SUM_ARR(%KF8:5)
35011386 06/2006 545

Syntax Syntax of table summing instruction:

Res:=SUM_ARR(Tab)
Parameters of table summing instruction

Type Result (res) Table (Tab)
Double word tables %MDi %MDi:L,%KDi:L
Floating word tables %MFi %MFi:L,%KFi:L
Note: When the result is not within the valid double word format range according
to the table operand, the system bit %S18 is set to 1.
Example %MD4:=SUM(%MD30:4)
where %MD30=10, %MD32=20, %MD34=30, %MD36=40
%MD4:=10+20+30+40
546 35011386 06/2006

Table comparison functions
General The EQUAL _ARR function carries out a comparison of two tables, element by element.
If a difference is shown, the rank of the first dissimilar elements is returned in the
form of a word, otherwise the returned value is equal to -1.
The comparison is carried out on the whole table.

%I3.2 %MW5:=EQUAL_ARR(%MD20:7,%KD0:7)
%MW0:=EQUAL_ARR(%MD20:7,%KF0:7)
%MW15:=EQUAL_ARR(%MF0:5,%KF0:5)

LD %I3.2
[%MW5:=EQUAL_ARR(%MD20:7,KD0:7)]

%MW0:=EQUAL_ARR(%MD20:7,%KF0:7)
%MW15:=EQUAL_ARR(%MF0:5,%KF0:5)
35011386 06/2006 547

Syntax Syntax of table comparison instruction:

Res:=EQUAL_ARR(Tab1,Tab2)
Parameters of table comparison instructions:

Type Result (Res) Tables (Tab1 and Tab2)
Double word tables %MWi %MDi:L,%KDi:L
Floating word tables %MWi %MFi:L,%KFi:L
Note:
z it is mandatory that the tables are of the same length and same type.
Example %MW5:=EQUAL_ARR(%MD30:4,%KD0:4)
Comparison of 2 tables:
Rank Word Table Constant word tables Difference
0 %MD30=10 %KD0=10 =
1 %MD32=20 %KD2=20 =
2 %MD34=30 %KD4=60 Different
3 %MD36=40 %KD6=40 =
The value of the word %MW5 is 2 (different first rank)
548 35011386 06/2006

Table search functions
General There are 3 search functions:
z FIND_EQR: searches for the position in a double or floating word table of the first
element which is equal to a given value
z FIND_GTR: searches for the position in a double or floating word table of the first
element which is greater than a given value
z FIND_LTR: searches for the position in a double or floating word table of the first
element which is less than a given value
The result of these instructions is equal to the rank of the first element which is found
or at -1 if the search is unsuccessful.

%I3.2 %MW5:=FIND_EQR(%MD20:7,%KD0)
%I1.2 %MW0:=FIND_GTR(%MD20:7,%KD0)
%MW1:=FIND_LTR(%MF40:5,%KF4)

LD %I3.2
[%MW5:=FIND_EQR(%MD20:7,KD0)]
LD %I1.2
[%MW0:=FIND_GTR(%MD20:7,%KD0)]
%MW1:=FIND_LTR(%MF40:5,%KF4)
35011386 06/2006 549

Syntax Syntax of table search instructions:

Function Syntax
FIND_EQR Res:=Function(Tab,Val)
FIND_GTR
FIND_LTR
Parameters of floating word and double word table search instructions:

Type Result (Res) Table (Tab) Value (val)
Floating word tables %MWi %MFi:L,%KFi:L %MFi,%KFi
Double word tables %MWi %MDi:L,%KDi:L %MDi,%KDi
Example %MW5:=FIND_EQR(%MD30:4,%KD0)
Search for the position of the first double word =%KD0=30 in the table:
Rank Word Table Result
0 %MD30=10 -
1 %MD32=20 -
2 %MD34=30 Value (val), rank
3 %MD36=40 -
550 35011386 06/2006

Table search functions for maxi and mini values
General There are 2 search functions:
z MAX_ARR: search for the maximum value in a double word and floating word
table
z MIN_ARR: search for the minimum value in a double word and floating word table
The result of these instructions is equal to the maximum value (or minimum) found
in the table.
%I1.2 %MD0:=MIN_ARR(%MD20:7)
%MF8:=MIN_ARR(%MF40:5)

LD %I1.2
[%MD0:=MIN_ARR(%MD20:7)]
%MF8:=MIN_ARR(%MF40:5)
Syntax Syntax of table search instructions for max and min values:
Function Syntax
MAX_ARR Res:=Function(Tab)
MIN_ARR
Parameters of table search instructions for max and min values:

Type Result (Res) Table (Tab)
Double word tables %MDi %MDi:L,%KDi:L
Floating word tables %MFi %MFi:L,%KFi:L
35011386 06/2006 551

Number of occurrences of a value in a table
General This search function:

z OCCUR_ARR: searches in a double word or floating word table for a number of
elements equal to a given value

%I3.2 %MW5:=OCCUR_ARR(%MF20:7,%KF0)
%I1.2 %MW0:=OCCUR_ARR(%MD20:7,%MD1)

LD %I3.2
[%MW5:=OCCUR_ARR(%MF20:7,%KF0)]
LD %I1.2
[%MW0:=OCCUR_ARR(%MD20:7,%MD1)
Syntax Syntax of table search instructions for max and min values:
Function Syntax
OCCUR_ARR Res:=Function(Tab,Val)
Parameters of table search instructions for max and min values:

Type Result (Res) Table (Tab) Value (Val)
Double word tables %MWi %MDi:L,%KDi:L %MDi,%KDi
Floating word tables %MFi %MFi:L,%KFi:L %MFi,%KFi
552 35011386 06/2006

Table rotate shift function
General There are 2 shift functions:
z ROL_ARR: performs a rotate shift of n positions from top to bottom of the

elements in a floating word table
Illustration of the ROL_ARR functions
0
1
2
3
4
5
z ROR_ARR: performs a rotate shift of n positions from bottom to top of the

elements in a floating word table
Illustration of the ROR_ARR functions
0
1
2
3
4
5
35011386 06/2006 553


%I3.2 ROL_ARR(%KW0,%MD20:7)
P
%I1.2 ROR_ARR(2,%MD20:7)
P
%I1.3 ROR_ARR(2,%MF40:5)
P

LDR %I3.2
[ROL_ARR(%KW0,%MD20:7)]
LDR %I1.2
[ROR_ARR(2,%MD20:7)]
LDR %I1.3
[ROR_ARR(2,%MF40:5)]
Syntax Syntax of rotate shift instructions in floating word or double word tables ROL_ARR
and ROR_ARR
Function Syntax
ROL_ARR Function(n,Tab)
ROR_ARR
Parameters of rotate shift instructions for floating word tables: ROL_ARR and
ROR_ARR:
Type Number of positions (n) Table (Tab)
Floating word tables %MWi, immediate value %MFi:L
Double word tables %MWi, immediate value %MDi:L
Note: if the value of n is negative or null, no shift is performed.
554 35011386 06/2006

Table sort function
General The sort function available is as follows:

z SORT_ARR: performs sorts in ascending or descending order of the elements
of a double word or floating word table and stores the result in the same table.

%I3.2 SORT_ARR(%MW0,%MF0:6)
%I1.2 SORT_ARR(-1,%MD20:6)
%I1.3 SORT_ARR(0,%MD40:8)

LD %I3.2
[SORT_ARR(%MW20,%MF0:6)]
LD %I1.2
[SORT_ARR(-1,%MD20:6)]
LD %I1.3
[SORT_ARR(0,%MF40:8)
35011386 06/2006 555

Syntax Syntax of table sort functions:

Function Syntax
SORT_ARR Function(direction,Tab)
z the "direction" parameter gives the order of the sort: direction > 0 the sort is done
in ascending order; direction < 0, the sort is done in descending order, direction
= 0 no sort is performed.
z the result (sorted table) is returned in the Tab parameter (table to sort).
Parameters of table sort functions:
Type Sort direction Table (Tab)
Double word tables %MWi, immediate value %MDi:L
Floating word tables %MWi, immediate value %MFi:L
556 35011386 06/2006

Floating point table interpolation function
Overview The LKUP function is used to interpolate a set of X versus Y floating point data for
a given X value.
Interpolation The LKUP function makes use the linear interpolation rule, as defined in the
Rule following equation:
( Yi + 1 – Yi )
Y = Y i + ----------------------------- ⋅ ( X – X i )
(equation 1:) ( Xi + 1 – Xi )
for X i ≤ X ≤ Xi + 1 , where i = 1… ( m – 1 ) ;
assuming Xi values are ranked in ascending order: X 1 ≤ X 2 ≤ …X… ≤ X m – 1 ≤ X m .
Note: If any of two consecutive Xi values are equal (Xi=Xi+1=X), equation (1) yields
an invalid exception. In this case, to cope with this exception the following algorithm
is used in place of equation (1):
( Yi + 1 – Yi )
Y = -----------------------------
(equation 2:) 2
for X i = Xi + 1 = X , where i = 1… ( m – 1 ) .
Graphical The following graph illustrates the linear interpolation rule described above:
Representation Y
of the Linear
Interpolation Ym
Rule
Yi+1
Ym-1
Y
Yi
0 Xi X Xi+1 Xm-1 Xm X
35011386 06/2006 557

Syntax of the The LKUP function uses three operands, two of which are function attributes, as
LKUP Function described in the following table:
Syntax Operand 1 (Op1) Operand 2 (Op2) Operands 3 (Op3)
Output variable User-defined (X) value User-defined (Xi,Yi) variable array
[Op1: = LKUP(Op2,Op3)] %MWi %MF0 Integer value, %MWi or %KWi
Definition of Op1 Op1 is the memory word that contains the output variable of the interpolation
function.
Depending on the value of Op1, the user can know whether the interpolation was
successful or failed, and what caused for the failure, as outlined in the following
table:
Op1 Description
(%MWi)
0 Successful interpolation
1 Interpolation error: Bad array, Xm < Xm-1
2 Interpolation error: Op2 out of range, X < X1
4 Interpolation error: Op2 out of range, X > Xm
8 Invalid size of data array:
z Op3 is set as odd number, or
z Op3 < 6.
Note: Op1 does not contain the computed interpolation value (Y). For a given (X)
value, the result of the interpolation (Y) is contained in %MF2 of the Op3 array (See
Definition of Op3 below).
Definition of Op2 Op2 is the floating point variable (%MF0 of the Op3 floating point array) that
contains the user-defined (X) value for which to compute the interpolated (Y) value:
z Valid range for Op2 is as follows: X 1 ≤ Op2 ≤ X m .
558 35011386 06/2006

Definition of Op3 Op3 sets the size (Op3 / 2) of the floating-point array where the (Xi,Yi) data pairs are
stored.
Xi and Yi data are stored in floating point objects with even indexes, starting at
%MF4 (note that %MF0 and %MF2 floating point objects are reserved for the user
set-point X and the interpolated value Y, respectively).
Given an array of (m) data pairs (Xi,Yi), the upper index (u) of the floating point array
(%MFu) is set by using the following relationships:
z (equation 3:) Op3 = 2 ⋅ m ;

z (equation 4:) u = 2 ⋅ ( Op3 – 1 ) .
The floating point array Op3 (%MFi) has a structure similar to that of the following
example (where Op3=8):
(X) (X1) (X2) (X3)
%MF0 %MF4 %MF8 %MF12
%MF2 %MF6 %MF10 %MF14
(Y) (Y1) (Y2) (Y3)
(Op3=8)
Note: As a result of the above floating-point array's structure, Op3 must meet both
of the following requirements, or otherwise this will trigger an error of the LKUP
function:
z Op3 is an even number, and
z Op3 ≥ 6 (for there must be at least 2 data points to allow linear interpolation).
Structure Interpolation operations are performed as follows:
%I3.2 %MW20:=LKUP(%MF0,%KW1) LD %I3.2

[%MW20:=LKUP(%MF0,%KW1)]
%I1.2 %MW22:=LKUP(%MF0,10)
LD %I1.2
[%MW22:=LKUP(%MF0,10)]
35011386 06/2006 559

Example The following is an example use of a LKUP interpolation function:

[%MW20:=LKUP(%MF0,10)]
In this example:
z %MW20 is Op1 (the output variable).
z %MF0 is the user-defined (X) value which corresponding (Y) value must be
computed by linear interpolation.
z %MF2 stores the computed value (Y) resulting from the linear interpolation.
z 10 is Op3 (as given by equation 3 above). It sets the size of the floating point
array. The highest ranking item %MFu, where u=18 is given by equation 4,
above.
There are 4 pairs of data points stored in Op3 array [%MF4..%MF18]:
z %MF4 contains X1,%MF6 contains Y1.
560 35011386 06/2006

Mean function of the values of a floating point table
General The MEAN function is used to calculate the mean average from a given number of
values in a floating point table.
Structure Ladder Language

%I3.2 %MF0:=MEAN(%MF10:5)

LD %I3.2
[%MF0:=MEAN(%MF10:5)]
Syntax Syntax of the floating point table mean calculation function:

Function Syntax
MEAN Result=Function(Op1)
Parameters of the calculation function for a given number L of values from a floating
point table:
Operand (Op1) Result (Res)
%MFi:L, %KFi:L %MFi
35011386 06/2006 561

562 35011386 06/2006

System Bits and System Words
17
At a Glance
Subject of this This chapter provides an overview of the system bits and system words that can be
Chapter used to create control programs for Twido controllers.

Chapter?
Topic Page
System Bits (%S) 564
System Words (%SW) 571
35011386 06/2006 563

System Bits and Words
System Bits (%S)
Introduction The following section provides detailed information about the function of system bits
and how they are controlled.
Detailed The following table provides an overview of the system bits and how they are
Description controlled:
System Function Description Init Control
Bit state
%S0 Cold Start Normally set to 0, it is set to 1 by: 0 S or U->S
z A power return with loss of data (battery fault),
z The user program or Animation Table Editor,
z Operations Display.
This bit is set to 1 during the first complete scan. It is reset to

0 by the system before the next scan.
%S1 Warm Start Normally set to 0, it is set to 1 by: 0 S or U->S
z A power return with data backup,
z The user program or Animation Table Editor,
z Operations Display.
It is reset to 0 by the system at the end of the complete scan.

%S4 Time base: 10 ms The rate of status changes is measured by an internal clock. - S
%S5 Time base: 100 ms They are not synchronized with the controller scan.
%S6 Time base: 1 s Example: %S4
%S7 Time base: 1 min
5 ms 5 ms
%S8 Wiring test Initially set to 1, this bit is used to test the wiring when the 1 U
controller is in "non-configured" state. To modify the value of
this bit, use the operations display keys to make the required
output status changes:
z Set to 1, output reset,
z Set to 0, wiring test authorized.
%S9 Reset outputs Normally set to 0. It can be set to 1 by the program or by the 0 U
terminal (in the Animation Table Editor):
z At state 1, outputs are forced to 0 when the controller is
in RUN mode,
z At state 0, outputs are updated normally.
%S10 I/O fault Normally set to 1. This bit can be set to 0 by the system when 1 S
an I/O fault is detected.
564 35011386 06/2006


Bit state
%S11 Watchdog overflow Normally set to 0. This bit can be set to 1 by the system when 0 S
the program execution time (scan time) exceeds the
maximum scan time (software watchdog).
Watchdog overflow causes the controller to change to HALT.
%S12 PLC in RUN mode This bit reflects the running state of the controller. The 0 S
systems sets the bit to 1 when the controller is running. Or to
0 for stop, init, or any other state.
%S13 First cycle in RUN Normally at 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system during the first 1 S
scan after the controller has been changed to RUN.
%S17 Capacity exceeded Normally set to 0, it is set to 1 by the system: 0 S->U
z During a rotate or shift operation. The system switches
the bit output to 1. It must be tested by the user program,
after each operation where there is a risk of an overflow,
then reset to 0 by the user if an overflow occurs.
%S18 Arithmetic overflow or Normally set to 0. It is set to 1 in the case of an overflow when 0 S->U
error a 16 bit operation is performed, that is:
z A result greater than + 32 767 or less than - 32 768, in
single length,
z A result greater than + 2 147 483 647 or less than - 2 147
483 648, in double length,
z A result greater than + 3.402824E+38 or less than -
3.402824E+38, in floating point,
z Division by 0,
z The square root of a negative number,
z BTI or ITB conversion not significant: BCD value out of limits.
It must be tested by the user program, after each operation

where there is a risk of an overflow, then reset to 0 by the
user if an overflow occurs.
%S19 Scan period overrun Normally at 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system in the event of a 0 S->U
(periodic scan) scan period overrun (scan time greater than the period defined
by the user at configuration or programmed in %SW0).
This bit is reset to 0 by the user.
%S20 Index overflow Normally at 0, it is set to 1 when the address of the indexed 0 S->U
object becomes less than 0 or more than the maximum size
of an object.
It must be tested by the user program, after each operation where
there is a risk of overflow, then reset to 0 if an overflow occurs.
35011386 06/2006 565


Bit state
%S21 GRAFCET initialization Normally set to 0, it is set to 1 by: 0 U->S
z A cold restart, %S0=1,
z The user program, in the preprocessing program part only,
using a Set Instruction (S %S21) or a set coil -(S)- %S21,
z The terminal.
At state 1, it causes GRAFCET initialization. Active steps are

deactivated and initial steps are activated.
It is reset to 0 by the system after GRAFCET initialization.
%S22 GRAFCET reset Normally set to 0, it can only be set to 1 by the program in 0 U->S
pre-processing.
At state 1 it causes the active steps of the entire GRAFCET
to be deactivated. It is reset to 0 by the system at the start of
the execution of the sequential processing.
%S23 Preset and freeze Normally set to 0, it can only be set to 1 by the program in the 0 U->S
GRAFCET pre-processing program module.
Set to 1, it validates the pre-positioning of GRAFCET.
Maintaining this bit at 1 freezes the GRAFCET (freezes the
chart). It is reset to 0 by the system at the start of the
execution of the sequential processing to ensure that the
GRAFCET chart moves on from the frozen situation.
%S24 Operations Display Normally at 0, this bit can be set to 1 by the user. 0 U->S
z At state 0, the Operator Display is operating normally,
z At state 1, the Operator Display is frozen, stays on current
display, blinking disabled, and input key processing stopped.
%S25 Choosing a display You can choose between two display modes on the 2-line 0 U
mode on the operator operator display: data mode and normal mode.
display z If %S25=0, then normal mode is enabled.
On the first line, you can write an object name (a system
word, a memory word, a system bit, etc.).
On the second line, you can read its value.
z If %S25=1, then data mode is enabled.
On the first line, you can display %SW68 value.
On the second line, you can display %SW69 value.
When %S25=1, the operator keyboard is disabled.
Note: Firmware version must be V3.0 or higher.
566 35011386 06/2006


Bit state
%S26 Choosing a signed or You can choose between two value types: signed or unsigned. 0 U
unsigned value on the z If %S26=0, then signed value (-32768 to 32767) display
operator display is enabled.
+/- signs appear at each start of line.
z If %S26=1, then unsigned value (0 to 65535) display is
enabled.
%S26 can only be used if %S25=1.
%S31 Event mask Normally at 1. 1 U->S
z Set to 0, events cannot be executed and are queued.
z Set to 1, events can be executed,
This bit can be set to its initial state 1 by the user and the
system (on cold re-start).
%S38 Permission for events to Normally at 1. 1 U->S
be placed in the events z Set to 0, events cannot be placed in the events queue.
queue z Set to 1, events are placed in the events queue as soon
as they are detected,
This bit can be set to its initial state 1 by the user and the
system (on cold re-start).
%S39 Saturation of the events Normally at 0. 0 U->S
queue z Set to 0, all events are reported,
z Set to 1, at least one event is lost.
This bit can be set to 0 by the user and the system (on cold re-start).
%S50 Updating the date and Normally on 0, this bit can be set to 1 or 0 by the program or 0 U->S
time using words the Operator Display.
%SW49 to %SW53 z Set to 0, the date and time can be read,
z Set to 1, the date and time can be updated.
The controller’s internal RTC is updated on a falling edge of %S50.

%S51 Time-of-day clock status Normally on 0, this bit can be set to 1 or 0 by the program or 0 U->S
the Operator Display.
z Set to 0, the date and time are consistent,
z Set to 1, the date and time must be initialized by the user.
When this bit is set to 1, the time of day clock data is not valid.
The date and time may never have been configured, the battery
may be low, or the controller correction constant may be invalid
(never configured, difference between the corrected clock value
and the saved value, or value out of range).
State 1 transitioning to state 0 forces a write of the correction
constant to the RTC.
35011386 06/2006 567


Bit state
%S52 RTC = error This bit managed by the system indicates that the RTC correction 0 S
has not been entered, and the date and time are false.
z Set to 0, the date and time are consistent,
z At state 1, the date and time must be initialized.
%S59 Updating the date and Normally on 0, this bit can be set to 1 or 0 by the program or 0 U
time using word %SW59 the Operator Display.
z Set to 0, the system word %SW59 is not managed,
z Set to 1, the date and time are incremented or
decremented according to the rising edges on the control
bits set in %SW59.
%S66 BAT LED display This system bit can be set by the user. It allows the user to 0 S or U->S
enable/disable turn on/off the BAT LED:
(only on controllers that z Set to 0, BAT LED is enabled (it is reset to 0 by the
support an external system at power-up),
battery: z Set to 1, BAT LED is disabled (LED remains off even if
TWDLCA•40DRF there is a low external battery power or there is no
controllers.) external battery in the compartment).
%S69 User STAT LED display Set to 0, STAT LED is off. 0 U
Set to 1, STAT LED is on.
%S75 External battery status This system bit is set by the system. It indicates the external 0 S
(only on controllers that battery status and is readble by the user:
support an external battery: z Set to 0, external battery is operating normally,
TWDLCA•40DRF z Set to 1, external battery power is low, or external battery
controllers.) is absent from compartment.
%S95 Restore memory words This bit can be set when memory words were previously 0 U
saved to the internal EEPROM. Upon completion the system
sets this bit back to 0 and the number of memory words
restored is set in %SW97
%S96 Backup program OK This bit can be read at any time (either by the program or while 0 S
adjusting), in particular after a cold start or a warm restart.
z Set to 0, the backup program is invalid.
z Set to 1, the backup program is valid.
%S97 Save %MW OK This bit can be read at any time (either by the program or while 0 S
adjusting), in particular after a cold start or a warm restart.
z Set to 0, save %MW is not OK.
z Set to 1, save %MW is OK.
%S100 TwidoSuite Shows whether the TwidoSuite communication cable is connected. - S

communications cable z Set to 1, TwidoSuite communications cable is either not
connection attached or TwidoSuite is connected.
z Set to 0, TwidoSuite Remote Link cable is connected.
568 35011386 06/2006


Bit state
%S101 Changing a port address Used to change a port address using system words %SW101 (port 1) 0 U
(Modbus protocol) and %SW102 (port 2). To do this, %S101 must be set to 1.
z Set to 0, the address cannot be changed. The value of
%SW101 and %SW102 matches the current port address,
z Set to 1, the address can be changed by changing the values of
%SW101 (port 1) and %SW102 (port 2). Having modified the
values of the system words, %S101 must be set back to 0.
Note: in online mode, the address of port 2 cannot be changed
using system bit %S101 and system word %SW102.
%S103 Using the ASCII protocol Enables the use of the ASCII protocol on Comm 1 (%S103) 0 U
%S104 or Comm 2 (%S104). The ASCII protocol is configured using
system words %SW103 and %SW105 for Comm 1, and
%SW104 and %SW106 for Comm 2.
z Set to 0, the protocol used is the one configured in TwidoSuite,
z Set to 1, the ASCII protocol is used on Comm 1 (%S103)
or Comm 2 (%S104). In this case, the system words
%SW103 and %SW105 must be previously configured
for Comm 1, and %SW104 and %SW106 for Comm 2.
%S110 Remote link exchanges This bit is reset to 0 by the program or by the terminal. 0 S->U
z Set to 1 for a master, all remote link exchanges (remote
I/O only) are completed.
z Set to 1 for a slave, exchange with master is completed.
%S111 Single remote link z Set to 0 for a master, a single remote link exchange is 0 S
exchange completed.
z Set to 1 for a master, a single remote link exchange is active.
%S112 Remote link connection z Set to 0 for a master, the remote link is activated. 0 U
z Set to 1 for a master, the remote link is deactivated.
%S113 Remote link z Set to 0 for a master or slave, the remote link 0 S->U
configuration/operation configuration/operation is OK.
z Set to 1 for a master, the remote link configuration/
operation has an error.
z Set to 1 for a slave, the remote link configuration/
operation has an error.
%S118 Remote I/O error Normally set to 1. This bit can be set to 0 when an I/O fault 1 S
is detected on the remote link.
%S119 Local I/O error Normally set to 1. This bit can be set to 0 when an I/O fault 1 S
is detected on the base controller. %SW118 determines the
nature of the fault. Resets to 1 when the fault disappears.
35011386 06/2006 569

Table Abbreviation table:

Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description
Described
S Controlled by the system
U Controlled by the user
U->S Set to 1 by the user, reset to 0 by the system
S->U Set to 1 by the system, reset to 0 by the user
570 35011386 06/2006

System Words (%SW)
Introduction The following section provides detailed information about the function of the system
words and how they are controlled.
Detailed The following table provides detailed information about the function of the system
Description words and how they are controlled:
System Function Description Control
Words
%SW0 Controller scan Modifies controller scan period defined at configuration through the U
period (periodic task) user program in the Animation Table Editor.
%SW1 Save the value of a Modifies the cycle time [5-255 ms] of a Periodic event, without loosing the U
Periodic event Period value saved in the Periodic event box of the Scan Mode window.
Allows you to recover the Period value saved in the Periodic event box:
z in case of a cold start, or
z if the value you write in %SW1 is outside [5-255] range.
%SW1 value can be modified at each end of a cycle, in the program

or in the Animation table, without having to stop the program. Cycle
times can be correctly observed while the program is running.
%SW6 Controller Status Controller Status: S
0 = NO CONFIG
2 = STOP
3 = RUN
4 = HALT
35011386 06/2006 571


Words
%SW7 Controller state z Bit [0]: Backup/restore in progress: S
z Set to 1 if backup/restore in progress,
z Set to 0 if backup/restore complete or disabled.
z Bit [1]: Controller's configuration OK:
z Set to 1 if configuration ok.
z Bit [3..2] EEPROM status bits:
z 00 = No cartridge
z 01 = 32 Kb EEPROM cartridge
z 10 = 64 Kb EEPROM cartridge
z 11 = Reserved for future use
z Bit [4]: Application in RAM different than EEPROM:
z Set to 1 if RAM application different to EEPROM.
z Bit [5]: RAM application different to cartridge:
z Set to 1 if RAM application different to cartridge.
z Bit [6] not used (status 0)
z Bit [7]: Controller reserved:
z Set to 1 if reserved.
z Bit [8]: Application in Write mode:
z Set to 1 if application is protected.
z Bit [9] not used (status 0)
z Bit [10]: Second serial port installed:
z Set to 1 if installed.
z Bit [11]: Second serial port type: (0 = EIA RS-232, 1 = EIA RS-
485):
z Set to 0 = EIA RS-232
z Set to 1 = EIA RS-485
z Bit [12]: application valid in internal memory:
z Set to 1 if application valid.
z Bit [13] Valid application in cartridge:
z Bit [14] Valid application in RAM:
z Bit [15]: ready for execution:
z Set to 1 if ready for execution.
%SW11 Software watchdog Contains the maximum value of the watchdog. The value (10 to 500 U
value ms) is defined by the configuration.
%SW14 Commercial version, For example, if %SW14=0232: S
Vxx.yy z 8 MSB=02 in hexadecimal, then xx=2 in decimal
z 8 LSB=32 in hexadecimal, then yy=50 in decimal
As a result, Commercial version is V2.50.

Note: Firmware version must be 2.5 or higher.
572 35011386 06/2006


Words
%SW15 Firmware patch, Pzz For example, if %SW15=0005: S
z 8 MSB is not used
z 8 LSB=05 in hexadecimal, then zz=5 in decimal
As a result, Firmware patch is P05.

%SW16 Firmware version, For example, if %SW16=0232: S
Vxx.yy z 8 MSB=02 in hexadecimal, then xx=2 in decimal
z 8 LSB=32 in hexadecimal, then yy=50 in decimal
As a result, Firmware version is V2.50.

%SW17 Default status for When a fault is detected in a floating arithmetic operation, bit %S18 S and U
floating operation is set to 1 and the default status of %SW17 is updated according to
the following coding:
z Bit [0]: Invalid operation, result is not a number (1.#NAN or -
1.#NAN),
z Bit 1: Reserved,
z Bit 2: Divided by 0, result is infinite (-1.#INF or 1.#INF),
z Bit 3: Result greater in absolute value than +3.402824e+38, result
is infinite (-1.#INF or 1.#INF).
%SW18- 100 ms absolute The counter works using two words: S and U
%SW19 timer counter z %SW18 represents the least significant word,
z %SW19 represents the most significant word.
%SW20 to Provides status for For more details, please refer to Programming and diagnostics for the S
%SW27 CANopen slave CANopen fieldbus, p. 234.
modules with node
address 1 to 16.
%SW30 Last scan time Shows execution time of the last controller scan cycle (in ms). S
Note: This time corresponds to the time elapsed between the start
(acquisition of inputs) and the end (update of outputs) of a scan cycle.
35011386 06/2006 573


Words
%SW31 Max scan time Shows execution time of the longest controller scan cycle since the S
last cold start (in ms).
Notes:
z This time corresponds to the time elapsed between the start
(acquisition of inputs) and the end (update of outputs) of a scan
cycle.
z To allow proper detection of a pulse signal when the latching input
option is selected, the pulse width (TON) and the cyclic period
(Tpulse) must meet the following two requirements:
z TON ≥ 1 ms
z The input signal cyclic period must follow the Nyquist-Shannon
sampling rule stating that the cyclic period (Tpulse) of the input
signal must be at least twice the maximum program scan time
(%SW31):
Tpulse ≥ 2 x %SW31.
Note: If this condition is not fulfilled, some pulses may be
missed.
%SW32 Min. scan time Shows execution time of shortest controller scan cycle since the last S
cold start (in ms).
Note: This time corresponds to the time elapsed between the start
(acquisition of inputs) and the end (update of outputs) of a scan cycle.
%SW48 Number of events Shows how many events have been executed since the last cold S
start. (Counts all events except periodic events.)
Note: Set to 0 (after application loading and cold start), increments
on each event execution.
574 35011386 06/2006


Words
%SW49 Real-Time Clock RTC Functions: words containing current date and time values (in S and U
%SW50 (RTC) BCD):
%SW51 %SW49 xN Day of the week (N=1 for
%SW52 Monday)
%SW53
%SW50 00SS Seconds
%SW51 HHMM Hour and minute
%SW52 MMDD Month and day
%SW53 CCYY Century and year
These words are controlled by the system when bit %S50 is at 0.
These words can be written by the user program or by the terminal
when bit %S50 is set to 1. On a falling edge of %S50 the controller’s
internal RTC is updated from the values written in these words.
%SW54 Date and time of the System words containing the date and time of the last power failure S
%SW55 last stop or controller stop (in BCD):
%SW56 %SW54 SS Seconds
%SW57
%SW55 HHMM Hour and minute
%SW56 MMDD Month and day
%SW57 CCYY Century and year
%SW58 Code of last stop Displays code giving cause of last stop: S
1= Run/Stop input edge
2= Stop at software fault (controller
scan overshoot)
3= Stop command
4= Power outage
5= Stop at hardware fault
35011386 06/2006 575


Word
%SW59 Adjust current Adjusts the current date. U
date Contains two sets of 8 bits to adjust current date.
The operation is always performed on rising edge of the bit. This word is
enabled by bit %S59.
Increment Decrement Parameter
bit 0 bit 8 Day of week
bit 1 bit 9 Seconds
bit 2 bit 10 Minutes
bit 3 bit 11 Hours
bit 4 bit 12 Days
bit 5 bit 13 Month
bit 6 bit 14 Years
bit 7 bit 15 Centuries
%SW60 RTC correction RTC correction value U
%SW63 EXCH1 block EXCH1 error code: S
error code 0 - operation was successful
6 - transmission
9 - reception error
10 - can not use %KW if receiving
%SW64 EXCH2 block EXCH2 error code: See %SW63. S
error code
576 35011386 06/2006


Word
%SW65 EXCH3 block EXCH3 error code is implemented on Ethernet-capable S
error code TWDLCAE40DRF Twido controllers only
1-4, 6-13: See %SW63. (Note that eror code 5 is invalid and replaced by
the Ethernet-specific error codes 109 and 122 described below.)
The following are Ethernet-specific error codes:
101 - no such IP address
102 - the TCP connection is broken
103 - no socket available (all connection channels are busy)
104 - network is down
105 - network cannot be reached
106 - network dropped connection on reset
107 - connection aborted by peer device
108 - connection reset by peer device
109 - connection time-out elapsed
110 - rejection on connection attempt
111 - host is down
120 - unknown index (remote device is not indexed in configuration table)
121 - fatal (MAC, Chip, Duplicated IP)122 - receiving timed-out elapsed
after data was sent
123 - Ethernet initialization in progress
%SW67 Function and Contains the following information: S
type of controller z Controller type bits [0 -11]
z 8B0 = TWDLC•A10DRF
z 8B2 = TWDLMDA20DUK/DTK
z 8B4 = TWDLMDA40DUK/DTK
z 8B6 = TWDLMDA20DRT
z 8B8 = TWDLCAA40DRF
z 8B9 = TWDLCAE40DRF
z Bit 12,13,14,15 not used = 0

Words
%SW68 Elements to be If %S25=1, then data display mode is enabled. The operator keyboard is U
and displayed disabled.
%SW69 simultaneously %SW68 and %SW69 can be displayed on the 2-line operator display:
on the 2-line z %SW68 value on the first line,
operator display z %SW69 value on the second line.
35011386 06/2006 577


Words
%SW73 AS-Interface z Bit [0]: Set to 1 if configuration OK. S and U
and System State z Bit [1]: Set to 1 if data exchange enabled.
%SW74 z Bit [2]: Set to 1 if module in Offline mode.
z Bit [3]: Set to 1 if ASI_CMD instruction terminated.
z Bit [4]: Set to 1 error in ASI_CMD instruction in progress.
%SW76 to Down counters 1- These 4 words serve as 1 ms timers. They are decremented individually S and U
%SW79 4 by the system every ms if they have a positive value. This gives 4 down
counters down counting in ms which is equal to an operating range of 1 ms
to 32767 ms. Setting bit 15 to 1 can stop decrementation.
%SW80 Base I/O Status For standard analog module, %SW8x is described as follows: S
Bit [0] All analog channels in normal state
Bit [1] Module in initialization state
Bit [2] Power supply default
Bit [3] Configuration default
Bit [8 & 9] Not used
Bit [14] Not used
Bit [15] Invalid parameter for output channel
%SW80 Base I/O Status For TWDAMI4LT analog module, %SW8x is described as follows: S
1 0: Unavailable input value (module in initialization state, conversion in
running),
Bit [8 to 15] Not used
578 35011386 06/2006


Words
%SW80 Base I/O Status For TWDAMI8HT analog module, %SW8x is described as follows: S
1 0: Unavailable input value (module in initialization state, conversion in
running),
%SW81 z Expansion I/O Module 1 Status: Same definitions as %SW80 S
z CANopen Master Module Status at Expansion Address 1:
z Bit [0] Configuration state (1 = configuration OK; 0 = configuration error)
Bit [1] Operational state (1 = PDO exchange ON; 0 = PDO exchange OFF)
Bit [2] Init state (1 = init state ON; 0 = init state OFF)
Bit [3] CAN_CMD instruction complete (1 = complete; 0 = in progress)
Bit [4] CAN_CMD instruction error (1 = error; 0 = OK)
Bit [5] Initialization error (1 = error; 0 = OK)
Bit [6] Loss of message, power supply error (1 = error; 0 = OK)
%SW82 Expansion I/O Module 2 Status: Same definitions as %SW80 S
CANopen Master Module Status at Expansion Address 2: Same definitions as %SW81
%SW94 Application’s In case of an application change, in terms of configuration or programming S
signature data, the signature (sum of all checksums) changes consequently.
If %SW94=91F3 in hexadecimal, the application’s signature is 91F3 in
hexadecimal.
35011386 06/2006 579


Words
%SW96 Command and/or z Bit [0]: Indicates that the %MW memory words must be saved to S and U
diagnostics for EEPROM:
save/restore z Set to 1 if a backup is required,
function of z Set to 0 if the backup in progress is not complete.
application z Bit [1]: This bit is set by the firmware to indicate when the save is
program and complete:
%MW. z Set to 1 if the backup is complete,
z Set to 0 if a new backup request is asked for.
z Bit [2]: Backup error, refer to bits 8, 9, 10 and 14 for further information:
z Set to 1 if an error appeared,
z Set to 0 if a new backup request is asked for.
z Bit [6]: Set to 1 if the controller contains a valid application in RAM.
z Bit [8]: Indicates that the number of %MWs specified in %SW97 is
greater than the number of %MWs configured in the application:
z Set to 1 if an error is detected,
z Bit [9]: Indicates that the number of %MWs specified in %SW97 is
greater than the maximum number of %MWs that can be defined by
any application in TwidoSuite.
z Bit [10]: Difference between internal RAM and internal EEPROM (1 =
yes).
z Set to 1 if there is a difference.
z Bit [14]: Indicates if an EEPROM write fault has occurred:
%SW97 Command or When saving memory words, this value represents the physical number S and U
diagnostics for %MW to be saved to internal EEPROM. When restoring memory words,
save/restore this value is updated with the number of memory words restored to RAM.
function For the save operation, when this number is set to 0, memory words will
not be stored. The user must define the user logic program. Otherwise, this
program is set to 0 in the controller application, except in the following
case:
On cold start, this word is set to -1 if the internal Flash EEPROM has no
saved memory word %MW file. In the case of a cold start where the
internal Flash EEPROM contains a memory word %MW list, the value of
the number of saved memory words in the file must be set in this system
word %SW97.
580 35011386 06/2006


Words
%SW101 Value of the port’s When bit %S101 is set to 1, you can change the Modbus address of port S
%SW102 Modbus address 1 or port 2. The address of port 1 is %SW101, and that of port 2 is
%SW102.
Note: in online mode, the address of port 2 cannot be changed using
system bit %S101 and system word %SW102.
%SW103 Configuration for use When bit %S103 (Comm 1) or %S104 (Comm 2) is set to 1, the ASCII S
%SW104 of the ASCII protocol protocol is used. System word %SW103 (Comm 1) or %SW104 (Comm
2) must be set according to the elements below:
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Stop bit
RTS /
Data
CTS
End of the character string Parity Baud rate
bit
z Baud rate:
z 0: 1200 bauds,
z 1: 2400 bauds,
z 2: 4800 bauds,
z 3: 9600 bauds,
z 4: 19200 bauds,
z 5: 38400 bauds.
z RTS/CTS:
z 0: disabled,
z 1: enabled.
z Parity:
z 00: none,
z 10: odd,
z 11: even.
z Stop bit:
z 0: 1 stop bit,
z 1: 2 stop bits.
z Data bits:
z 0: 7 data bits,
z 1: 8 data bits.
%SW105 Configuration for use When bit %S103 (Comm 1) or %S104 (Comm 2) is set to 1, the ASCII S
%SW106 of the ASCII protocol protocol is used. System word %SW105 (Comm 1) or %SW106 (Comm
2) must be set according to the elements below:
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Timeout response
Timeout frame in ms
in multiple of 100 ms
35011386 06/2006 581


Words
%SW111 Remote link status Indication: Bit 0 corresponds to remote controller 1, bit 1 to remote S
controller 2, etc.
Bit [0] to [6]:
z Set to 0 = remote controller 1-7 absent
z Set to 1 = remote controller 1-7 present
Bit [8] to bit [14]:

z Set to 0 = remote I/O detected on remote controller 1-7
z Set to 1 = extension controller detected on remote controller 1-7
%SW112 Remote Link 00: successful operations S

configuration/ 01: timeout detected (slave)
operation error code 02: checksum error detected (slave)
03: configuration mismatch (slave)
This is set to 1 by the system and must be reset by the user.
%SW113 Remote link Indication: Bit 0 corresponds to remote controller 1, bit 1 to remote S
configuration controller 2, etc.
Bit [0] to [6]:
z Set to 0 = remote controller 1-7 not configured
z Set to 1 = remote controller 1-7 configured
Bit [8] to bit [14]:

z Set to 0 = remote I/O configured as remote controller 1-7
z Set to 1 = peer controller configured as remote controller 1-7
%SW114 Enable schedule Enables or disables operation of schedule blocks by the user program S and U
blocks or operator display.
Bit 0: 1 = enables schedule block #0
...
Bit 15: 1 = enables schedule block #15
Initially all schedule blocks are enabled.
If schedule blocks are configured the default value is FFFF
If no schedule blocks are configured the default value is 0.
%SW118 Base controller Shows faults detected on base controller. S
status word Bit 9: 0 = External fault or comm. Fault
Bit 12: 0 = RTC not installed
Bit 13: 0 = Configuration fault (I/O extension configured but absent or
faulty).
All the other bits of this word are set to 1 and are reserved. For a
controller which has no fault, the value of this word is FFFFh.
%SW120 Expansion I/O One bit per module. S
module health Address 0 = Bit 0
1 = Unhealthy
0 = OK
582 35011386 06/2006


Words
%SW121 ASCII frame size When bit %S103 (Comm 1) or %S104 (Comm 2) is set to 1, the ASCII U
%SW122 protocol is used. You can change the ASCII frame size of port 1 or port
2. The ASCII frame size of port 1 is %SW121, and that of port 2 is
%SW122.
The value is used only on EXCH instruction start. Then, if some bytes
are already received, you can’t stop the reception until the last byte.
Table Abbreviation table:

Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description
Described
S Controlled by the system
U Controlled by the user
35011386 06/2006 583

584 35011386 06/2006

Glossary
% Prefix that identifies internal memory addresses in the controller that are used to
store the value of program variables, constants, I/O, and so on.
Addresses Internal registers in the controller used to store values for program variables,
constants, I/O, and so on. Addresses are identified with a percentage symbol (%)
prefix. For example, %I0.1 specifies an address within the controller RAM memory
containing the value for input channel 1.
Analog An applied voltage that can be adjusted and converted into a discrete value for use
potentiometer by an application.
Analyze program A command that compiles a program and checks for program errors: syntax and
structure errors, symbols without corresponding addresses, resources used by the
program that are not available, and if the program does not fit in available controller
memory. Errors are displayed in the Program Errors Viewer.
Animation table Table created within a language editor or an operating screen. When a PC is connected
to the controller, provides a view of controller variables and allows values to be forced
when debugging. Can be saved as a separate file with an extension of .tat.
Animation A specialized window in the TwidoSuite application for viewing and creating
Tables Editor Animation Tables.
35011386 06/2006 585

Glossary
Application A TwidoSuite application consists of a program, configuration data, symbols, and

documentation.
Application A specialized window in the TwidoSuite that displays a graphical tree-like view of an
browser application. Provides for convenient configuration and viewing of an application.
Application file Twido applications are stored as file type .twd.
ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) Communication protocol for
representing alphanumeric characters, notably letters, figures and certain graphic
and control characters.
Auto line validate When inserting or modifying List instructions, this optional setting allows for program
lines to be validated as each is entered for errors and unresolved symbols. Each
element must be corrected before you can exit the line. Selected using the
Preferences dialog box.
Auto load A feature that is always enabled and provides for the automatic transfer of an
application from a backup cartridge to the controller RAM in case of a lost or
corrupted application. At power up, the controller compares the application that is
presently in the controller RAM to the application in the optional backup memory
cartridge (if installed). If there is a difference, then the copy in the backup cartridge
is copied to the controller and the internal EEPROM. If the backup cartridge is not
installed, then the application in the internal EEPROM is copied to the controller.
Backup A command that copies the application in controller RAM into both the controller
internal EEPROM and the optional backup memory cartridge (if installed).
BootP A UDP/IP-based protocol (Bootstrap Protocol) which allows a booting host to

configure itself dynamically and without user supervision. BootP provides a means
to notify a host of its assigned IP address.
CAN Controller Area Network: field bus originally developed for automobile applications
which is now used in many sectors, from industrial to tertiary.
586 35011386 06/2006

Glossary
CiA CAN in Automation: international organization of users and manufacturers of CAN products.
Client A computer process requesting service from other computer processes.
COB Communication OBject: transport unit on CAN bus. A COB is identified by a

unique identifier, which is coded on 11 bits, [0, 2047]. A COB contains a maximum
of 8 data bytes. The priority of a COB transmission is shown by its identifier - the
weaker the identifier, the more priority the associated COB has.
Coil A ladder diagram element representing an output from the controller.
Cold start or A start up by the controller with all data initialized to default values, and the program
restart started from the beginning with all variables cleared. All software and hardware settings
are initialized. A cold restart can be caused by loading a new application into controller
RAM. Any controller without battery backup always powers up in Cold Start.
Comment lines In List programs, comments can be entered on separate lines from instructions.
Comments lines do not have line numbers, and must be inserted within parenthesis
and asterisks such as: (*COMMENTS GO HERE*).
Comments Comments are texts you enter to document the purpose of a program. For Ladder
programs, enter up to three lines of text in the Rung Header to describe the purpose
of the rung. Each line can consist of 1 to 64 characters. For List programs, enter text
on n unnumbered program line. Comments must be inserted within parenthesis and
asterisks such as: (*COMMENTS GO HERE*).
Compact Type of Twido controller that provides a simple, all-in-one configuration with limited
controller expansion. Modular is the other type of Twido controller.
Configuration Specialized TwidoSuite window used to manage hardware and software configuration.
editor
Constants A configured value that cannot be modified by the program being executed.
Contact A ladder diagram element representing an input to the controller.
Counter A function block used to count events (up or down counting).
Cross references Generation of a list of operands, symbols, line/rung numbers, and operators used in
an application to simplify creating and managing applications.
Cross A specialized window in the TwidoSuite application for viewing cross references.
References
Viewer
35011386 06/2006 587

Glossary
Data variable See Variable.
Date/Clock Allow control of events by month, day of month, and time of day. See Schedule
functions Blocks.
Default gateway The IP address of the network or host to which all packets addressed to an unknown
network or host are sent. The default gateway is typically a router or other device.
Drum controller A function block that operates similar to an electromechanical drum controller with
step changes associated with external events.
EDS Electronic Data Sheet: description file for each CAN device (provided by the
manufacturers).
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. Twido has an internal

EEPROM and an optional external EEPROM memory cartridge.
Erase This command deletes the application in the controller, and has two options:
z To delete the contents of the controller RAM, the controller internal EEPROM,
and the installed optional backup cartridge.
z To delete the contents of the installed optional backup cartridge only.
Executive loader A 32-Bit Windows application used for downloading a new Firmware Executive
program to a Twido controller.
Expansion bus Expansion I/O Modules connect to the base controller using this bus.
Expansion I/O Optional Expansion I/O Modules are available to add I/O points to a Twido controller.
modules (Not all controller models allow expansion).
588 35011386 06/2006

Glossary
Fast counters A function block that provides for faster up/down counting than available with the
Counters function block. A Fast Counter can count up to a rate of 5 KHz.
FIFO First In, First Out. A function block used for queue operations.
Firmware The Firmware Executive is the operating system that executes your applications and
executive manages controller operation.
Forcing Intentionally setting controller inputs and outputs to 0 or 1 values even if the actual
values are different. Used for debugging while animating a program.
Frame A group of bits which form a discrete block of information. Frames contain network
control information or data. The size and composition of a frame is determined by
the network technology being used.
Framing types Two common framing types are Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3.
Function block A program unit of inputs and variables organized to calculate values for outputs
based on a defined function such as a timer or a counter.
Gateway A device which connects networks with dissimilar network architectures and which
operates at the Application Layer. This term may refer to a router.
Grafcet Grafcet is used to represent the functioning of a sequential operation in a structured

and graphic form.
This is an analytical method that divides any sequential control system into a series
of steps, with which actions, transitions, and conditions are associated.
Host A node on a network.
Hub A device which connects a series of flexible and centralized modules to create a network.
35011386 06/2006 589

Glossary
Init state The operating state of TwidoSuite that is displayed on the Status Bar when
TwidoSuite is started or does not have an open application.
Initialize A command that sets all data values to initial states. The controller must be in Stop
or Error mode.
Instance A unique object in a program that belongs to a specific type of function block. For
example, in the timer format %TMi, i is a number representing the instance.
Instruction List A program written in instruction list language (IL) is composed of a series of
language instructions executed sequentially by the controller. Each instruction is composed of
a line number, an instruction code, and an operand.
Internet The global interconnection of TCP/IP based computer communication networks.
IP Internet Protocol. A common network layer protocol. IP is most often used with TCP.
IP Address Internet Protocol Address. A 32-bit address assigned to hosts using TCP/IP.
Ladder editor Specialized TwidoSuite window used to edit a Ladder program.
Ladder language A program written in Ladder language is composed of graphical representation of

instructions of a controller program with symbols for contacts, coils, and blocks in a
series of rungs executed sequentially by a controller.
Ladder list rung Displays parts of a List program that are not reversible to Ladder language.
Latching input Incoming pulses are captured and recorded for later examination by the application.
LIFO Last In, First Out. A function block used for stack operations.
List editor Simple program editor used to create and edit a List program.
590 35011386 06/2006

Glossary
MAC Address Media Access Control address. The hardware address of a device. A MAC address
is assigned to an Ethernet TCP/IP module in the factory.
Master controller A Twido controller configured to be the Master on a Remote Link network.
MBAP Modbus Application Protocol
Memory Optional Backup Memory Cartridges that can be used to backup and restore an application
cartridge (program and configuration data). There are two sizes available: 32 and 64 Kb.
Memory usage A portion of the Status Bar in the TwidoSuite main window that displays a
indicator percentage of total controller memory used by an application. Provides a warning
when memory is low.
Modbus A master-slave communications protocol that allows one single master to request
responses from slaves.
Modular Type of Twido controller that offers flexible configuration with expansion capabilities.
controller Compact is the other type of Twido controller.
Monitor state The operating state of TwidoSuite that is displayed on the Status Bar when a PC is
connected to a controller in a non-write mode.
Network Interconnected devices sharing a common data path and protocol for
communication.
Node An addressable device on a communications network.
35011386 06/2006 591

Glossary
Offline operation An operation mode of TwidoSuite when a PC is not connected to the controller and
the application in PC memory is not the same as the application in controller
memory. You create and develop an application in Offline operation.
Offline state The operating state of TwidoSuite that is displayed on the Status Bar when a PC is
not connected to a controller.
Online operation An operation mode of TwidoSuite when a PC is connected to the controller and the
application in PC memory is the same as the application in controller memory.
Online operation can be used to debug an application.
Online state The operating state of TwidoSuite that is displayed on the Status Bar when a PC is
connected to the controller.
Operand A number, address, or symbol representing a value that a program can manipulate
in an instruction.
Operating states Indicates the TwidoSuite state. Displayed in the status bar. There are four operating
states: Initial, Offline, Online, and Monitor.
Operator A symbol or code specifying the operation to be performed by an instruction.
Packet The unit of data sent across a network.
PC Personal Computer.
Peer controller A Twido controller configured as a slave on a Remote Link network. An application
can be executed in the Peer Controller memory and the program can access both
local and expansion I/O data, but I/O data can not be passed to the Master
Controller. The program running in the Peer Controller passes information to the
Master Controller by using network words (%INW and %QNW).
PLC Twido programmable controller. There are two types of controllers: Compact and
Modular.
592 35011386 06/2006

Glossary
PLS Pulse Generation. A function block that generates a square wave with a 50% on and
50% off duty cycle.
Preferences A dialog box with selectable options for setting up the List and Ladder program editors.
Program errors Specialized TwidoSuite window used to view program errors and warnings.
viewer
Programmable A Twido controller. There are two types of controllers: Compact and Modular.
controller
Protection Refers to two different types of application protection: password protection which
provides access control, and controller application protection which prevents all
reads and writes of the application program.
Protocol Describes message formats and a set of rules used by two or more devices to
communicate using those formats.
PWM Pulse Width Modulation. A function block that generates a rectangular wave with a
variable duty cycle that can be set by a program.
RAM Random Access Memory. Twido applications are downloaded into internal volatile
RAM to be executed.
Real-time clock An option that will keep the time even when the controller is not powered for a limited
amount of time.
Reflex output In a counting mode, the very fast counter's current value (%VFC.V) is measured
against its configured thresholds to determine the state of these dedicated outputs.
Registers Special registers internal to the controller dedicated to LIFO/FIFO function blocks.
Remote A Twido controller configured to communicate with a Master Controller on a Remote

controller Link network.
35011386 06/2006 593

Glossary
Remote link High-speed master/slave bus designed to communicate a small amount of data
between a Master Controller and up to seven Remote Controllers (slaves). There
are two types of Remote Controllers that can be configured to transfer data to a
Master Controller: a Peer Controller that can transfer application data, or a Remote
I/O Controller that can transfer I/O data. A Remote link network can consist of a
mixture of both types.
Resource A component of TwidoSuite that monitors the memory requirements of an

manager application during programming and configuring by tracking references to software
objects made by an application. An object is considered to be referenced by the
application if it is used as an operand in a list instruction or ladder rung. Displays
status information about the percentage of total memory used, and provides a
warning if memory is getting low. See Memory Usage Indicator.
Reversible A method of programming that allows instructions to be viewed alternately as List

instructions instructions or Ladder rungs.
Router A device that connects two or more sections of a network and allows information to
flow between them. A router examines every packet it receives and decides whether
to block the packet from the rest of the network or transmit it. The router will attempt
to send the packet through the network by the most efficient path.
RTC See Real-Time Clock.
RTU Remote Terminal Unit. A protocol using eight bits that is used for communicating
between a controller and a PC.
Run A command that causes the controller to run an application program.
Rung A rung is located between two potential bars in a grid and is composed of a group
of graphical elements joined to each other by horizontal and vertical links. The
maximum dimensions of a rung are seven rows and eleven columns.
Rung header A panel that appears directly over a Ladder rung and can be used to document the
purpose of the rung.
Scan A controller scans a program and essentially performs three basic functions. First, it
reads inputs and places these values in memory. Next, it executes the application
program one instruction at a time and stores results in memory. Finally, it uses the
results to update outputs.
594 35011386 06/2006

Glossary
Scan mode Specifies how the controller scans a program. There are two types of scan modes:
Normal (Cyclic), the controller scans continuously, or Periodic, the controller scans
for a selected duration (range of 2 - 150 msec) before starting another scan.
Schedule blocks A function block used to program Date and Time functions to control events.
Requires Real-Time Clock option.
Server A computer process that provides services to clients. This term may also refer to the
computer process on which the service is based.
Step A Grafcet step designates a state of sequential operation of automation.
Stop A command that causes the controller to stop running an application program.
Subnet A physical or logical network within an IP network, which shares a network address
with other portions of the network.
Subnet mask A bit mask used to identify or determine which bits in an IP address correspond to
the network address and which bits correspond to the subnet portions of the
address. The subnet mask is the network address plus the bits reserved for
identifying the subnetwork.
Switch A network device which connects two or more separate network segments and
allows traffic to be passed between them. A switch determines whether a frame
should be blocked or transmitted based on its destination address.
Symbol A symbol is a string of a maximum of 32 alphanumeric characters, of which the first

character is alphabetic. It allows you to personalize a controller object to facilitate
the maintainability of the application.
Symbol table A table of the symbols used in an application. Displayed in the Symbol Editor.
TCP Transmission Control Protocol.
TCP/IP A protocol suite consisting of the Transmission Control Protocol and the Internet
Protocol; the suite of communications protocols on which the Internet is based.
Threshold Coils that are controlled directly by the very fast counter (%VFC) according to the
outputs settings established during configuration.
35011386 06/2006 595

Glossary
Timer A function block used to select a time duration for controlling an event.
Twido A line of Schneider Electric controllers consisting of two types of controllers (Compact
and Modular), Expansion Modules to add I/O points, and options such as Real-Time
Clock, communications, operator display, and backup memory cartridges.
TwidoSuite A 32-Bit Windows, graphical development software for configuring and

programming Twido controllers.
UDP A communications protocol (User Datagram Protocol) that is the part of the TCP/IP
suite used by applications to transfer datagrams. UDP is also the part of TCP/IP
responsible for port addresses.
Unresolved A symbol without a variable address.

symbol
Variable Memory unit that can be addressed and modified by a program.
Very fast A function block that provides for faster counting than available with Counters and
counter: Fast Counters function blocks. A Very Fast Counter can count up to a rate of 20 KHz.
Warm restart A power-up by the controller after a power loss without changing the application.
Controller returns to the state which existed before the power loss and completes
the scan which was in progress. All of the application data is preserved. This feature
is only available on modular controllers.
596 35011386 06/2006

Index
B
AC
Symbols %S22, 566
%S23, 566
-, 534 %S24, 566
%Ci, 368 %S25, 566
%DR, 422 %S26, 567
%FC, 428 %S31, 567
%INW, 43 %S38, 567
%MSG, 444
%S39, 567
%PLS, 419 %S4, 564
%PWM, 416 %S5, 564
%QNW, 43
%S50, 567
%S, 564 %S51, 567
%S0, 564 %S52, 568
%S1, 564
%S59, 568
%S10, 564 %S6, 564
%S100, 568 %S66, 568
%S101, 569
%S69, 568
%S103, 569 %S7, 564
%S104, 569 %S75, 568
%S11, 565
%S8, 564
%S110, 569 %S9, 564
%S111, 569 %S95, 568
%S112, 569
%S96, 568
%S113, 569 %S97, 568
%S118, 569 %SBR, 374
%S119, 569
%SCi, 376
%S12, 565 %SW, 571
%S13, 565 %SW0, 571
%S17, 565
%SW1, 571
%S18, 565 %SW101, 581
%S19, 565 %SW102, 581
%S20, 565
%SW103, 581
%S21, 566
35011386 06/2006 597

Index
%SW104, 581 %SW77, 578

%SW105, 581 %SW78, 578
%SW106, 581 %SW79, 578
%SW11, 572 %SW80, 578
%SW111, 582 %SW81..%SW87, 234, 579
%SW112, 582 %SW94, 579
%SW113, 582 %SW96, 580
%SW114, 582 %SW97, 580
%SW118, 582 %TM, 365
%SW120, 582 %VFC, 431
%SW121, 583 *, 534
%SW122, 583 +, 534
%SW14, 572 /, 534
%SW15, 573
%SW16, 573
%SW17, 573 A
%SW18, 573 ABS, 534
%SW19, 573 Absolute value, 386
%SW20..%SW27, 235, 573 Accessing debugging
%SW30, 573 PID, 506
%SW31, 574 Accessing the configuration
%SW32, 574 PID, 486
%SW48, 574 Accumulator, 316
%SW49, 575 ACOS, 537
%SW50, 575 Action Zone, 292
%SW51, 575 Add, 386
%SW52, 575 Addressing analog I/O modules, 151
%SW53, 575 Addressing I/O, 41
%SW54, 575 Advanced function blocks
%SW55, 575 Bit and word objects, 406
%SW56, 575 Programming principles, 408
%SW57, 575 Analog Channel, 148
%SW58, 575 Analog Module
%SW59, 576 operating, 150
%SW6, 571 Analog module
%SW60, 576 Example, 160
%SW63, 576 Analog Modules
%SW64, 576 Configuring I/O, 152
%SW65, 577 Analog modules
%SW67, 577 addressing, 151
%SW68, 577 AND instructions, 348
%SW69, 577 Animation tab
%SW7, 572 PID, 507
%SW73, 578 Arithmetic Instructions, 386
%SW74, 578
%SW76, 578
598 35011386 06/2006

Index
ASCII Bit objects, 406

Communication, 74 Addressing, 37
Communications, 106 Function blocks, 44
Configuring the port, 109 Overview, 27
Hardware configuration, 107 Bit strings, 46
Software configuration, 108 BLK, 309
ASCII Link Blocks
Example, 115 in Ladder diagrams, 294
ASIN, 537 Boolean accumulator, 316
AS-Interface Bus V2 Boolean instructions, 340
configuration screen, 170 OR, 350
AS-Interface V2 bus Understanding the format used in this
accepting the new configuration, 187 manual, 342
Changing a slave address, 182 Boot-up, 205
Explicit exchanges, 192 Bus AS-Interface V2
Faulty slave, 190 automatic slave addressing, 188
general functional description, 165 Bus AS-Interface V2 bus
I/O addressing, 191 debugging the bus, 184
Implicit exchanges, 191
in online mode, 178
Operating mode, 197 C
Presentation, 164 Calculation, 386
Programming and diagnostics for the AS- CAN bus line, 203
Interface bus, 192 CAN_CMD, 237
Slave diagnostics, 181 CAN-high, 203
Slave insertion, 189 CAN-low, 203
software configuration, 172 CANopen
software set up principle, 168 Description, 203
transfer of a slave image, 184 The protocol, 203
Assignment instructions, 346 CANopen bus
Numerical, 380 configuration methodology, 218
AT tab CANopen fieldbus
PID, 498 Explicit exchanges, 234
ATAN, 537 Implicit exchanges, 233
Programming and diagnostics for the
CANopen fieldbus, 234
B CANopen master
Backup and restore PDO addressing, 233
32K backup cartridge, 59 Clock functions
64K extended memory cartridge, 62 Overview, 448
memory structure, 54 Schedule blocks, 449
without cartridges, 57 Setting date and time, 454
Basic function blocks, 356 time and date stamping, 452
Closed loop adjustment, 523
Coils, 294
graphic elements, 299
35011386 06/2006 599

Index
Communication by modem, 76 Drum controllers

Communication overview, 74 programming and configuring, 426
Communications
ASCII, 106
Modbus, 118 E
Remote Link, 94 Edge detection
Communications cable connection, 76 falling, 341
Comparison block Rising, 340
graphic element, 300 END Instructions, 397
Comparison blocks, 296 END_BLK, 309
Comparison Instructions, 384 EQUAL_ARR, 547
Configuration error, 388
PID, 486 Event tasks
Configuring Different event sources, 67
A port for ASCII, 109 Event management, 69
Port for Modbus, 122 Overview, 66
Transmission/Reception table for ASCII, Example
110 Up/Down Counter, 373
Contacts, 294 EXCH, 443
graphic element, 298 EXCH instruction, 443
Control parameters Exchange function block, 444
ASCII, 110 Exclusive OR, instructions, 352
Control table EXP, 534
Modbus, 124 EXPT, 534
Conversion instructions, 393
COS, 537
Counters, 368 F
Programming and configuring, 372 Fast counter function block, 428
FIFO
introduction, 410
D operation, 412
Debugging FIND_, 549
PID, 506 Floating objects
Decrement, 386 Addressing, 39
DEG_TO_RAD, 539 Floating point objects
Derivative action, 527 Overview, 32
DINT_TO_REAL, 541 Function Blocks
Direct labeling, 49 PWM, 416
Divide, 386 Function blocks
Documenting your program, 311 Counters, 368
Double word objects Drum controller, 426
Addressing, 40 drum controller, 422
Function blocks, 45 graphic element, 300
Overview, 32 in programming grid, 295
Drum controller function block, 422 Overview of basic function blocks, 356
programming standard function blocks,
600 35011386 06/2006

Index
358 J
registers, 410
JMP, 400
Schedule blocks, 449
Jump Instructions, 400
Shift Bit Register (%SBR), 374
Step counter (%SCi), 376
timers, 360, 365 L
Labeling
G Indexed, 49
Ladder diagrams
General tab
blocks, 294
PID, 487, 491
Grafcet
introduction, 290
associated actions, 334
OPEN and SHORT, 301
Examples, 328
programming principles, 292
Instructions, 326
Ladder List Rung, 310
preprocessing, 331
Ladder program
sequential processing, 332
reversing to List, 308
Graphic elements
Ladder rungs, 291
Ladder diagrams, 298
LD, 344
LDF, 341, 344
I LDN, 344
LDR, 340, 344
I/O
Life guarding, 212
Addressing, 41
Life time, 212
Increment, 386
LIFO
Index overflow, 50
introduction, 410
Input tab
operation, 411
PID, 494
Link elements
Instructions
AND, 348
List instructions, 317
Arithmetic, 386
List Language
Assignment, 346
overview, 314
Comparison, 384
List Line Comments, 311
Conversion, 393
LKUP, 557
JMP, 400
LN, 534
Load, 344
LOG, 534
logic, 389
logic instructions, 389
NOT, 354
RET, 401
SR, 401 M
XOR, 352
MAX_ARR, 551
instructions
MEAN, 561
END, 397
NOP, 399
INT_TO_REAL, 541
Integral action, 526
35011386 06/2006 601

Index
Memory Object validation, 26

32K cartridge, 59 Objects
64K cartridge, 62 Bit objects, 27
Structure, 54 Double word, 32
without cartridge, 57 Floating point, 32
Memory bits, 27 Function blocks, 44
Memory words, 29 Structured, 46
MIN_ARR, 551 words, 29
Modbus OCCUR_ARR, 552
Communication, 74 OPEN, 301
Communications, 118 Open loop adjustment, 524
Configuring the port, 122 Operands, 316
Hardware configuration, 119 Operation blocks, 297
master, 74 operation blocks
Slave, 74 graphic element, 300
Software configuration, 122 Operator Display
Standard requests, 137 Controller ID and states, 275
Modbus Link Overview, 272
Example 1, 130 Real-Time correction, 286
Example 2, 134 Serial port settings, 284
Mode System objects and variables, 277
Operational, 208 Time of day clock, 285
pre-operational, 208 OR Instruction, 350
MPP, 323 OUT_BLK, 309
MPS, 323 Output tab
MRD, 323 PID, 503
Multiply, 386 Overflow
Index, 50
overflow, 388
N Overview
Network PID, 479
Addressing, 43
Node guarding, 212
Non-reversible programming, 408 P
NOP, 399 Parameters, 361
NOP Instruction, 399 Parentheses
NOT instruction, 354 modifiers, 322
Numerical instructions nesting, 322
Assignment, 380 using in programs, 321
shift, 391 Physical layer, 203
Numerical processing CAN bus line, 203
Overview, 379
O
Object tables, 46
602 35011386 06/2006

Index
PID Receiving messages, 443

Animation tab, 507 Registers
AT tab, 498 FIFO, 412
Configuration, 486 LIFO, 411
Debugging, 506 programming and configuring, 413
General tab, 487, 491 Remainder, 386
Input tab, 494 Remote Link
Output tab, 503 Communications, 94
Overview, 479 Example, 103
PID tab, 496 Hardware configuration, 95
Trace tab, 509 Master controller configuration, 97
PID characteristics, 483 Remote controller configuration, 97
PID tab Remote controller scan synchronization,
PID, 496 98
Pin outs Remote I/O data access, 99
Communications cable female Software configuration, 97
connector, 78 Remote link
Communications cable male connector, Communication, 74
78 RET, 401
Polarization (external, 121 Reversibility
Potentiometer, 146 guidelines, 309
Programming introduction, 308
documenting your program, 311 Reversible programming, 408
Programming advice, 303 ROL_ARR, 553
Programming grid, 292 ROR_ARR, 553
Programming languages RS-485 EIA line), 121
overview, 21 RTC correction, 448
Programming Principles, 408 Rung Header, 293
Proportional action, 525 comments, 312
Protocol Rungs
Modbus TCP/IP, 75 unconditional, 310
Protocols, 74
Pulse generation, 419
Pulse width modulation, 416 S
S, 346
Shift bit register, 374
Q Shift instructions, 391
Queue, 410 SHORT, 301
SIN, 537
Single/double word conversion instructions,
R 395
R, 346 SORT_ARR, 555
RAD_TO_DEG, 539 SQRT, 534
REAL_TO_DINT, 541 Square root, 386
REAL_TO_INT, 541 SR, 401
Real-Time correction factor, 286 ST, 346
35011386 06/2006 603

Index
Stack, 410 W
Stack instructions, 323
Word Objects, 406
Step counter, 376
Word objects
STN, 346
Addressing, 38
Subroutine instructions, 401
Function blocks, 44
Subtract, 386
Overview, 29
SUM_ARR, 545
Symbolizing, 51
System bits, 564
System words, 571
X
XOR, 352
T
TAN, 537
TCP/IP
Protocol, 75
Test Zone, 292
Timers, 361
introduction, 360
programming and configuring, 365
time base of 1 ms, 366
TOF type, 362
TON type, 363
TP type, 364
TOF timer, 362
TON timer, 363
TP type timer, 364
Trace tab
PID, 509
Transmitting messages, 443
TRUNC, 534
TwidoSuite
Introduction, 20
U
Unconditional rungs, 310
V
Very fast counters function block (%VFC),
431
604 35011386 06/2006

Twido Programming Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Twido Programming Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Twido Programming Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Twido programmable

Part I Description of Twido Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Chapter 1 Introduction to TwidoSuite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Chapter 2 Twido Language Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Chapter 3 User Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Part II Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Chapter 10 Configuring the TwidoPort Ethernet Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Chapter 11 Operator Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Part III Description of Twido Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Chapter 12 Ladder Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Chapter 13 Instruction List Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Chapter 14 Grafcet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Chapter 15 Basic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Chapter 17 System Bits and System Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates

Reverse Polarity Reverse-Polarity at Transistor Output is Not Allowed

What's in this This part contains the following chapters:

What's in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Introduction TwidoSuite is a full-featured, graphical development environment for creating,

TwidoSuite TwidoSuite is a 32-bit Windows-based program for a personal computer (PC)

Minimum The minimum configuration for using TwidoSuite is:

z Operating system : Windows 2000 or Windows XP:

Introduction to Twido Languages

What's in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Language Object Validation

Type Description Address or Maximum number Write access

Descriptions of The following table describes the word objects.

Words Description Address or Maximum Write access

Floating point and double word objects

-3.402824e+38 -1.175494e-38 0 +1.175494e-38 +3.402824e+38

Addressing Bit Objects

Symbol Object type Number

Examples of bit object addressing:

Word address Position k = 0 - 15 bit

Addressing Word Objects

Symbol Object type Format Number

Examples of word object addressing:

Addressing floating objects

Symbol Type of object Syntax Number

Examples of floating object addresses:

Addressing double word objects

Symbol Type of object Syntax Number

Examples of double word object addressing:

Format Use the following format to address inputs/outputs.

Use the following format to address inputs/output exchange words.

Description The table below describes the I/O addressing format.

Examples The table below shows some examples of I/O addressing.

Format Use the following format for network addressing.

Description of The table below describes the network addressing format.

Examples The table below shows some examples of networking addressing.

Function Block Objects

Example of a The following illustration shows a counter function block.

Up/down counter block

Note: %M8:6 is acceptable (8 is a multiple of 8), while %M10:16 is unacceptable

Available Types Available types of bits for bit strings:

Available Types Available types of words for word tables:

%KD10 %KD12 %KD14 %KD16 %KD18 %KD20 %KD22

Available Types Available types of words for double word tables:

%KF10 %KF12 %KF14 %KF16 %KF18 %KF20 %KF22